Full text of "[Course catalog]"

See other formats

For Reference

Not to be taken from this room

Northeastern University

Catalogs of

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

SCHOOL OF LAW

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

EVENING COURSES OF THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

LINCOLN TECHNICAL INSTITUTE
LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

HUNTINGTON SCHOOL FOR BOYS

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSIT

OLLEGES OF

Liberal Arts
usiness Administration

Engineering

1944,1940

{CO'EDVCA*

STON 15, MASSACHUSETTS
July, 1944

Qifts and Bequests

Northeastern University will welcome gifts and
bequests for the following purposes:

(a) For its building program.

(b) For general endowment.

It is suggested that, when possible, those con-
templating gifts or bequests confer with the
President of the University regarding the Uni-
versity's needs before legal papers are drawn.

Gifts and bequests should be made only in the
University's legal name, which is "Northeastern
University."

<
X

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Day Colleges

General Information

19444946

(CO-EDUCATIONAL)

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS

July, 1944

A STATEMENT
OF WARTIME POLICY

THIS CATALOG is issued while the United
States is engaged in world-wide war. Pro-
grams of the Day Colleges have been adjusted to
the needs of the emergency, but the faculty is
making every effort to see that the courses offered
are serviceable both for immediate and long-range
educational objectives.

Northeastern University in common with other
institutions of higher learning throughout the
land has co-operated fully with the government
during wartime in meeting special training needs.
Changes in the regular curricula of the University
are being made from time to time as developments
of the war require. Northeastern University
plans, however, to carry on its basic curricula with
as few changes as possible in order that those men
and women who can do so may pursue courses of
study that will prepare them for greater service in
the postwar period when there will inevitably be
a great shortage of college trained people.

For the present, the Day Colleges are operating
on a fully accelerated schedule of four academic
terms a year. Students may elect the full-time or
the Co-operative Plan during the war emeirgency.
A Veterans' Co-ordinator has been appointed to
counsel returning servicemen and women and
assist them in arranging satisfactory programs of
study according to their individual needs.

Special bulletins will be issued to supplement
the present catalog as occasion demands and as
new policies are adopted by the University.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

"Day Colleges

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

CONDUCTED ON THE CO-OPERATIVE PLAN

^able of Qontents

Pages

I. Northeastern University

1. Calendar for the College Year 1944-1946 4

2. The University Corporation 6

3. Faculty and Staff 7

4. Northeastern University — General Statement 19

5. Buildings and Facilities 22

6. Student Activities 32

7. Co-operative Plan of Education 40

8. General Information About the Day Colleges 45

II. College of Liberal Arts 61

III. College of Business Administration 139

IV. College of Engineering 1 73

V. Courses of Instruction 233

VI. Index 247

J^ORTHEASTER'N UNIVERSITY

Calendar for the College year, ig44-ig45

1944
September 11 Monday: Opening of new term for upperclass
students.

September 25 Monday: Registration and opening of college year
for new Division C Freshman class. Students fail-
ing to register promptly on September 25 will be
charged a late registration fee of five dollars

($5.00).

October 12 Thursday: Columbus Day. (College exercises
omitted.)

November 6 Monday: Second semester begins for the Division
B Freshman class which entered in July, 1944.

November 11 Saturday: Armistice Day. (College exercises
omitted.)

November 131 Vacation period for the Division A Freshman
December 11/ class which entered in March, 1944.

November 22 Wednesday: College exercises omitted after 1:00
p.m.

November 23 Thursday: Thanksgiving Day. (College exercises
omitted.)

December 2 Saturday: Baccalaureate and Commencement.
December 9 1 ^^^^*^io^ period for all Day College Students.

December 11 Mor\day: Opening of new term for upperclass
students.

December 25 Monday: Christmas. (College exercises omitted.)

1945
January 1 Monday': New Year's Day. (College exercises

omitted.)

January 221 Vacation period for the Division C Freshman
January 27] class which entered in September, 1944.

January 29 Monday: Second semester begins for the Division
C Freshman class which entered in September
1944.

DAY COLLEGES

February

March
March

10.

March

April

July

May
June

28^
9^

May

June
June

4
9

June

Thursday: Washington's Birthday. (College exer-
cises omitted.)

Vacation period for all Day College Students.

Monday: Opening of new term for upperclass
students.

Monday: Registration and opening of college year
for new Division A Freshman class. Students
failing to register promptly on March 12 will be
charged a late registration fee of five dollars
($5.00).

Thursday: Patriots' Day. (College exercises
omitted.)

Vacation period for Division C Freshman class
which entered in September, 1944.

July
July

July

September
September

September

Wednesday: Memorial Day.
omitted.)

(College exercises

Vacation period for all Day College Students.

Monday: Opening of new term for upperclass
students.

Monday: Registration and opening of college
year for new Division B Freshman class. Students
failing to register promptly on June 11 will be
charged a late registration fee of five dollars
($5.00.)

Wednesday: Independence Day. (College exer-
cises omitted.)

Vacation period for the Division A Freshman
class which entered in March, 1945.

Monday: Second semester begins for the Division
A Freshman class which entered in March, 1945.

Vacation period for all Day College Students.

Monday: Registration and opening of college year
for new Division C Freshman class. Students
failing to register promptly on September 10 will
be charged a late registration fee of five dollars
($5.00.)

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

^he V^rtheasternUniversity Corporation

Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman
Frank Lincoln Richardson, V ice-Chairman

Henry Nathaniel Andrews, Treasurer

Carl Stephens Ell, President of the University

Everett Avery Churchill, Secretary

Joseph Florence Abbott
Charles Francis Adams
WiLMAN Edward Adams
Roger Amory
Robert Baldwin
Arthur Atwood Ballantine
George Louis Barnes
Thomas Prince Beal
Farwell Gregg Bemis
Samuel Bruce Black
Henry Goddard Bradlee
George Augustus Burnham
Godfrey Lowell Cabot
Paul Codman Cabot
Walter Channing
William Converse Chick
Paul Foster Clark
Sears B. Condit
Albert Morton Creighton
Edward Dana
Edward Dane
James William Daniels
William James Davidson
Paul Augustus Draper
David Frank Edwards
William Partridge Ellison
Joseph Buell Ely
John Wells Farley
Allan Forbes
Ernest Bigelow Freeman
Franklin Wile Ganse
Harvey Dow Gibson
Merrill Griswold
Henry Ingraham Harriman
Carroll Sherlock Harvey
Chandler Hovey
Weston Howland
Howard Munson Hubbard
Maynard Hutchinson
Arthur Stoddard Johnson
Charles Berkley Johnson
Jacob Joseph Kaplan
Harry Hamilton Kerr
Frank Howard Lahey
Halfdan Lee

Galen David Light
Edward Abbott MacMaster
John Russell Macomber
Albert Edward Marshall
Harold Francis Mason
James Franklin McElwain
Hugh Dean McLellan
Irwin Likely Moore
Fred Lester Morgan
Irving Edwin Moultrop
Clarence Lucian Newton
Samuel Norwich
Olaf Olsen

Augustin Hamilton Parker, Jr.
George Edwin Pierce
Roger Pierce
Matthew Porosky
Frederick Sanford Pratt
Roger Preston
Harry Wendell Prout
Sidney Rabinovitz
Stuart Craig Rand
William McNear Rand
James Lorin Richards
Harold Bours Richmond
John James Robinson
Charles Milton Rogerson
Robert Billings Rugg
Leverett Saltonstall
Russell Maryland Sanders
Andrew Sebastian Seiler
Frank Palmer Speare
Russell Henry Stafford
Francis Robert Carnegie Steele
Charles Stetson
Earl Place Stevenson
Robert Treat Paine Storer
Frank Horace Stuart
Edward Watson Supple
Ralph Emerson Thompson
James Vincent Toner
Eliot Wadsworth
EusTis Walcott
Edwin Sibley Webster
Sinclair Weeks

DAY COLLEGES

Qeneral University Committees

Executive Council

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman

Everett Avery Churchill Sydney Kenneth Skolfield

James Wallace Lees William Crombie White

Milton John Schlagenhauf Russell Whitney

University Cabinet

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman

Robert Bruce Rudolf Oscar Oberg

Everett Avery Churchill Edward Snow Parsons

Charles William Havice John Butler Pugsley

Wilfred Stanley Lake Milton John Schlagenhauf

James Wallace Lees Sydney Kenneth Skolfield

Harold Wesley Melvin J. Kenneth Stevenson

WiNTHROP Eliot Nightingale William Crombie White

Russell Whitney

Library Committee

Everett Avery Churchill, Chairman

Robert Bruce Myra Edna White

Wilfred Stanley Lake William Crombie White

Russell Whitney

Qeneral Ojficers of the University

President

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., Sc.D.

Office 186 Richards Hall Res. 21 Beaumont Ave., Newtonville

President Emeritus

Frank Palmer Speare, M.H., LL.D. Res. 280 Beacon St., Boston

Vice-President

Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D.

Oj^ce 138 Richards Hall Res. 50 Follen St., Cambridge

Comptroller

Russell Whitney, S.B., LL.B.

Office 115 Richards Hall Res. 665 Great Plain Ave., Needham

NORTHEASTERhl VNIVERSITY

Officers of the HDay Colleges

Director of Day Colleges and
Dean of the College of Engineering

William Crombie White, S.B., Ed.M.

Office 152 Richards Hall Res. 30 Summit Rd., Wellesley

Dean of the College of Liberal Arts

Wilfred Stanley Lake, A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Office 253 Richards Hall Res. 59 Hinckley Rd., Waban

Acting Dean of the College of Business Administration

Robert Bruce, B.C.S., M.C.S.

Office 352 East Building Res. 12 Elliott St., Winthrop

Director of Admissions

Milton John Schlagenhauf, A.B., B.D., M.A.

Office 150 Richards Hall Res. 96 Blakely Rd., Medford

Telephone: Mystic 6148-M

Institutional Representative and Director of E.S.M. W. T. Program

Albert Ellsworth Everett, S.B., M.B.A.

Office 154 Richards Hall Res. 4 Crown St., Auburndale

Secretary of the Faculty

George Raymond Fennell, S.B., M.B.A.

Office 153 Richards Hall Res. 42 Fremont Ave., Everett

Dean of Chapel

Charles William Havice, A.B., M.A., S.T.B., Ph.D.

Office 357 Richards Hall Res. 178 Goden St., Belmont

Dean of Students

Harold Wesley Melvin, A.B., M.A.

Office 256 Richards Hall Res. 44 Houston Ave., Milton

Registrar and Director of Co-operative Work

Winthrop Eliot Nightingale, A.B., S.B., Ed.M.

Office 254 Richards Hall Res. 136 Dickerman Rd., Newton Highlands

Director of Student Activities

Edward Snow Parsons, S.B., Ed.M.

Oj^ce 355 Richards Hall Res. 19 Hardy Ave., Watertown

DAY COLLEGES

Veterans' Co-ordinator

John Butler Pugsley, A.B,

Office 252 Richards Hall

Res. 23 Hardy Ave., Watertown

(Administrative Staff

A. RiAMA Crawford

Library, East Building

Daisy Milne Everett

Office 115 Richards Hall Res.

Albert Wayland Fletcher, A.B.
Office 154 Richards Hall

Mary B. Poor

Office 41 Richards Hall

Marion H. Hanford
Library, East Building

Vera Louise Jenkinson, S.B.
Oj^ce 150 Richards Hall

*Dr. Henry Arthur Kontoff

Dr. George M. Lane

O^ce 279 Marlborough St., Boston

Nathan Levenson

O^ce 352 Richards Hall

Donald Hershey MacKenzie, S.B., Ed.M.
O^ce 154 Richards Hall

Rudolf Oscar Oberg, S.B., Ed.M.
Oj^ce 139 Richards Hall

Dorothy Sherwood

Library, East Building

J. Kenneth Stevenson, B.C.S.
Office 136 Richards Hall

George Wesley Towle, S.B.
Office 254 Richards Hall

Myra White

Library, East Building

Louise Gardner Marsh, S.B.
O^ce 256 Richards Hall

Assistant Librarian
Res. 112 Bancroft Ave., Reading

Assistant Comptroller
1111 Highland Ave., Needham Heights

Co-ordinator of E.S.M.V^.T.
Res. 22 Pilgrim Rd., Arlington

Manager of Bookstore
Res. 32 Milton Rd., Brookline

Assistant Librarian
Res. 17 Symphony Rd., Boston

Assistant Director of Admissions
Res. 16 Lockeland Ave., Arlington

College Physician
Res. Overlook Park, Newton Centre

College Physician
Res. 21 Alton Court, Brookline

Acring Director of Press Bureau
Res. 5 Nazing Court, Roxbury

Co-ordinator of E.S.M.W.T.
Res. 34 Exeter St., Wollaston

Director of Alumni Relations
Res. 37 Walker St., Atlantic

Assistant Librarian
Res. 20 Union Park, Boston

Assistant to the Vice-President
Res. 101 Goden St., Belmont

Co-ordinator of Co-operative Work
Res. 12 Forest St., Lexington

Librarian
Res. 118 Hemenway St., Boston

Adviser to Women Students
Res. 3 Pinckney St., Boston

*On Leave of Absence for War Service.

10 r^ORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

"Day College faculty

Professors

Chester Packard Baker, S.B., M.A.

Professor of Chemical Engineering and Chairman of the Department
Office 1 New Building Res. 31 Bow Rd., Newton Centre

Charles Frederick Barnason, A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Professor of Modern Languages and Chairman of the Department

Office 452 East Building Res. Ill Downer Ave., Hingham

Robert Bruce, B.C.S., M.C.S. Professor of Accounting

Office 352 East Building Res. 12 Elliott St., Winthrop

Joseph Arthur Coolidge, S.B., M.A. Professor of Physics

Office 246 Richards Hall Res. 20 Martin St., Cambridge

*Alfred D'Alessandro, B.C.S., LL.B., C.P.A., M.B.A. Professor of Accounting

*Stanley Goddard Estes, A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Professor of Psychology and Chairman of the Department

Office 256 Richards Hall Res. 60 Pinckney St., Boston

Alfred John Ferretti, S.B., M.S. Professor of Mechanical Engineering

Office 75 Richards Hall Res. 29 Coolidge Rd., Lynn

Emil Anton Gramstorff, S.B., M.S.

Professor of Civil Engineering and Chairman of the Department
Office 101 South Building Res. 19 Hilltop Ave., Lexington

Roger Stanton Hamilton, A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Professor of Economics and Chairman of the Department
Office 363 East Building Res. 1367 Walnut St., Newton Highlands

Charles William Havice, A.B., M.A., S.T.B., Ph.D.

Professor of Sociology and Chairman of the Department
Office 357 Richards Hall Res. 178 Goden St., Belmont

Frederick William Holmes, A.B., M.A.

Professor of English and Chairm.an of the Department

Office 453 East Building Res. 43 Lincoln St., Dedham

Wilfred Stanley Lake, A.B., M.A., Ph.D. Professor of Economics

Office 452 East Building Res. 59 Hinckley Rd., Waban

Harold Wesley Melvin, A.B., M.A. Professor of English

Office 256 Richards Hall Res. 44 Houston Ave., Milton

Stanley Demetrius Miroyiannis, S.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Professor of Biology and Chairman of the Department
Office 424 New Building Res. 8 Cumberland St., Boston

Carl Frederick Muckenhoupt, A.B., S.B., Ph.D.

Professor of Physics and Chairman of the Department
Office 245 Richards Hall Res. 332 Winchester St., Newton Highlands

Winthrop Eliot Nightingale, A.B., S.B., Ed.M.

Professor of Co-ordination and Chairman of the Department
Office 254 Richards Hall Res. 136 Dickerman Rd., Newton Highlands

Edward Snow Parsons, S.B., Ed.M.

Professor of Physical Education and Chairman of the Department
Office 355 Richards Hall Res. 19 Hardy Ave., Watertown

Roland Guyer Porter, B.E.E., M.S.

Professor of Electrical Engineering and Chairman of the Department

Office 12 South Building Res. 19 Woodbury St., Beverly

John Butler Pugsley, A.B. Professor of Geology

Office 252 Richards Hall Res. 23 Hardy Ave., Watertown

Milton John Schlagenhauf, A.B., B.D., M.A. Professor of Economics

Office 150 Richards Hall Res. 96 Blakely Rd., Medford

*On Leave of Absence for War Service.

DAY COLLEGES 11

William Lincoln Smith, S.B., Eng.D. Professor of Electrical Engineering

Office 1 1 South Building Res. 4 Academy Lane, Concord

Joseph Spear, A.B., M.A.

Professor of Mathematics and Chairman of the Department
Office 325 Richards Hall Res. 31 Matchett St., Brighton

Eliot Franklin Tozer, S.B.

Professor of Drawing and Chairman of the Department
Office 451 Richards Hall Res. 22 Devon Ave., Beverly

Arthur Andrew Vernon, S.B., M.S., Ph.D.

Professor of Chemistry and Chairman of the Department
Office 425 Richards Hall Res. 14 Standish St., Newton Highlands

Joseph William Zeller, S.B., M.E.

Professor of Mechanical Engineering and Chairman of the Department
Office 75 Richards Hall Res. 282 Concord St., Framingham

Associate Professors

*WlLLIAM ThURLOW ALEXANDER, S.B., M.A.

Associate Professor of Industrial Engineering and Chairman of the Department
Charles Oscar Baird, Jr., S.B., M.S. Associate Professor of Civil Engineering
Office 101 South Building Res. 17 Manning Rd., Lynn

Laurence Fuller Cleveland, S.B., M.S.

Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering
Office 13 South Building Res. 24 Fairfield St., Newtonville

Elmer Ellsworth Haskins, S.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Associate Professor of Mathematics

Office 325 Richards Hall Res. 53 Damien Rd., Wellesley Hills

Reginald Gage Lacount, S.B., M.A., Ph.D. Associate Professor of Physics

Office 246 Richards Hall Res. 11 Cleveland Rd., Wellesley

Waldemar Stanwood McGuire, S.B., M.A. Associate Professor of Chemistry

Office 425 Richards Hall Res. 33 Samoset Ave., Quincy

*George Harris Meserve, Jr., S.B., Ed.M. Associate Professor of Drawing

*RuDOLPH Magnus Morris, S.B., Ed.M. Associate Professor of Education

*NoRRis Whitfield Potter, Jr., A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Associate Professor of History and Government and Acting Chairman of the De-
partment
*Henry Edward Richards, S.B., M.S.

Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering
Frederick Arlington Stearns, S.B., M.S.

Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering

Office 75 Richards Hall Res. 66 Rorence Ave., Melrose

George Wesley Towle, S.B. Associate Professor of Co-ordination

Office 254 Richards Hall Res. 12 Forest St., Lexington

*Albert Edward Whittaker, S.B., Ed.M.

Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering

Assistant Professors

*Wayland Solon Bailey, S.B., M.S., Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering
*WiLLiAM Thomas Cloney, Jr., A.B. Assistant Professor of English

*Otis F. Cushman, S.B., M.S. Assistant Professor of Drawing

♦Elmer Henry Cutts, A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Assistant Professor of History and Government
John James Devine, S.B., Sc.M. Assistant Prof essor of Drawing

Office 451 Richards Hall Res. 29 Jeanette Ave., Belmont

Norman Armin Dubois, S.B., M.A., Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Chemistry

Office 425 Richards Hall Res. 1200 Great Plain Ave., Needham

*On Leave of Absence for War Service.

12 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Albert Ellsworth Everett, S.B., M.B.A. Assistant Professor of Co-ordination

Office 154 Richards Hall Res. 4 Crown St., Auburndale

George Raymond Fennell, S.B., M.B.A. Assistaru Professor of Marketing

Office 153 Richards Hall Res. 42 Fremont Ave., Everett

*Frederick Robert Henderson, S.B., M.S.

Assistant Professor of Industrial Engineering
Carl David Johnson, A.B., M.A. Assistant Professor of Physics

Office 246 Richards Hall Res. 24 Lunt St., Norfolk Downs

William Fay Luder, A.B., Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Chemistry

Office 425 Richards Hall Res. 27 Kirkland Circle, Wellesley

Donald Hershey MacKenzie, S.B., Ed.M. Assistant Professor of Chemistry

Office 154 Richards Hall Res. 34 Exeter St., WoUaston

Everett Carter Marston, A.B., M.A. Assistant Professor of English

Office 355 Richards Hall Res. 40 Hereward Rd., Newton Centre

Antonio Liberto Mezzacappa, A.B., M.A., Ph.D.

Assistant Professor of Modern Languages

Office 452 East Building Res. 121 Mt. Vernon St., Arlington

John Christie Morgan, S.B., M.B.A.

Assistant Professor of Chemical Engineering

Office 1 New Building Res. 24 Walker St., Newtonville

George Everett Pihl, S.B., M.S. Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering

Office 14 South Building Res. 40 Bournedale Rd., Jamaica Plain

William John Pinard, A.B., M.A., Ed.M., Ph.D. , Assistant Prof essor of Sociology

Office 246 Richards Hall Res. 97 Francis St., Brookline

*Charles McKinley Ramsay, A.B., M.A. Assistant Professor of Economics

Gerald Russell Tatton, S.B., M.B.A.

Assistant Professor of Physical Education and Head Coach of Track

Office 355 Richards Hall Res. 52 Oakland St., Medford

*Thomas Homkowycz Wallace, S.B., M.A., Ph.D., Assistant Professor of Physics
,*George Baker Welch, S.B., Ph.D. Assistant Professor of Physics

*Chester Henry Wolowicz, S.B., M.S.

Assistant Professor of Mechanicai Engineering
Saverio Zuffanti, S.B., M.A. Assistant Professor of Chemistry

Office 425 Richards Hall Res. 29 Newbury Ave., Quincy

instructors

Fletcher S. Boig, S.B., M.S., Ed.M. Instructor in Chemistry

Office 425 Richards Hall Res. 112 Quincy Shore Drive, Quincy

*Earl Kenneth Bowen, S.B., M.A. Instruaor in Mathematics

Wilfred James Combellack, A.B., M.A. Instructor in Mathematics

Office 325 Richards Hall Res. 108 Jersey St., Boston

*EDVk7ARD Marks Cook, A.B. Instructor in Mathematics

*Louis CooPERSTEiN, A.B., M.A. Instruaor in Modern Languages

Warren Clifton Dean, A.B., M.A. Instructor in Mathematics

Office 325 Richards Hall Res. 213 Jackson St., Newton Centre

*James William Dunn, A.B.

Instructor in Physical Edtication and Head Coach of Football and Basketball

Charles P. Engelhardt, Jr., S.B., M.Arch. Instructor in Drawing

Office 451 Richards Hall Res. Otis St., Bedford

*Martin White Essigmann, S.B. Instruaor in Electrical Engineering

*Harry Ferguson, S.B. Instructor in Mathematics

Alfred Wayland Fletcher, A.B. Instructor in Co-ordination

Office 154 Richards Hall Res. 22 Pilgrim Rd., Arlington

*On Leave of Absence for War Service.

DAY COLLEGES

Emanuel Arthur Flumere, A.B.

Office 355 Richards Hall
Warren Lincoln Ganong, S.B.

Office 100 South Building

*JosEPH Manuel Golemme, S.B., M.A.
George William Hankinson, A.B., S.B

Office 101 South Building
William Carl Hultgren

Office, Gymnasium, East Building
*Lyman Albert Keith, S.B., M.A.
Louise Gardner Marsh, S.B.

Office 256 Richards Hall
*Franklin Norvish, S.B., M.A.
*EuGENE George Pare, S.B., Ed.M.
*Ellis Merton Purinton, B.B.A.
*GusTAV Rook, S.B.
*Albert Edward Sanderson, Jr., S.B.
*Duncan Wight Seavey, S.B., M.S.

Instructor in Physical Education

Res. 17 Hemenway St., Boston

Instructor in Industrial Engineering

Res. 24 Lexington Ave., Needham Heights

Instruaor in Accounting

Instructor in Physics

Res. 574 Huntington Ave., Boston

Instructor in Physical Education

Res. 80 Woodside Rd., Winchester

Instructor in Industrial Administration

Instructor in Physics

Res. 3 Pinckney St., Boston

Instructor in English

Instructor in Drawing

Instructor in Co-ordination

Instructor in Drawing

Instructor in Civil Engineering

Instructor in Mechanical Engineering

"Eben O. Smith, S.B.

Instructor in Economics and Co-ordinator of Co-operative Work

Ernest Lincoln Spencer, S.B., M.S. Instructor in Civil Engineering

Office 101 South Building Res. 58 South St.. Medfield

Samuel Arthur Stone, S.B., M.S. Instructor in lAathematics

Office 325 Richards Hall Res. 6 Autumn St., Roxbury

William Wallace, S.B. Instructor in Mathematics

Office 325 Richards Hall Res. 33 Richardson Rd., Melrose

Dorothy Hartigan

Office 246 Richards Hall
Esther L. Kelley

Oj?tce 425 Richards Hall
Joan Motley

Office 14 South Building
Sumiko Yatsuhashi

Oj^ce 425 Richards Hall

Laboratory Assistants

Res. 15 Albright St., West Roxbury

Res. 126 Union St., Bridge water

Res. 65 Main St., Concord

Res. 66 Beals St., Brookline

*On Leave of Absence for War Service.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

faculty Committees

General

William C. White, Chairman

Robert Bruce
George R. Fennell
Wilfred S. Lake
Harold W. Melvin

WiNTHROP E. Nightingale
Edward S. Parsons
John B. Pugsley
Milton J. Schlagenhauf

Robert Bruce
Wilfred S. Lake

Executive

Harold W. Melvin, Chairman

John B. Pugsley

Winthrop E. Nightingale
Edward S. Parsons

Day College Council

William C. White, Chairman
George R. Fennell, Secretary

Chester P. Baker
Charles F. Barnason
Robert Bruce
Alfred D'Alessandro
Emil a. Gramstorff
Roger S. Hamilton
Charles W. Havice
Frederick W. Holmes
Wilfred S. Lake
Harold W. Melvin

Joseph W. Zeller

Stanley D. Miroyiannis
Carl F. Muckenhoupt
Winthrop E. Nightingale
Edward S. Parsons
Roland G. Porter
John B. Pugsley
Milton J. Schlagenhauf
Joseph Spear
Eliot F. Tozer
Arthur A. Vernon

Student Activities

Edward S. Parsons, Chairman

Roger S. Hamilton
Donald H. MacKenzie

Joseph Spear
Eliot F. Tozer

Wilfred S. Lake

Graduate Study

Arthur A. Vernon, Chairman

Stanley D. Miroyiannis
Carl F. Muckenhoupt

DAY COLLEGES

Office and Secretarial Staff

52 St. Paul St., Brookline

1036 High St., Westwood

21 Second St., Medford

12 Cumberland St., Boston

15 Park Vale, Brookline

343 Pleasant St., Milton

128 Chestnut St., Boston

30 Freeman Place, Needham

124 Pleasant St., Winthrop

Mabel Ellen Bean 61 Quint Ave., AUston

Secretary to the Assistant to the Vice-President — I36R
Cora Louise Berry

Clerk, Admissions Office — 151R
Frances Glasgow Bishop

Cashier, Central Offices of the University
Phyllis Evelyn Brean

Secretary, Student Union Office — 357R
Muriel Marie Chaisson

Secretary, E.SM.W.T. Offic^l54R
Phyllis Ann Cotton

Clerk, Admissions Office — I5IR
Mary Frances Craig

Secretary to the Dean of Students — 256R
Virginia Gushing Darling

Secretary and Purchasing Clerk, Comptroller's Office
Thelma Gertrude Dunn

Bookkeeper, Comptroller's Office
Alice Marie Frazer

Secretary, E.SM.W.T. Officii 54R
Mildred Curtis Garfield 87 St. Stephen St., Boston

Financial Secretary to the Director of Day Colleges — I52R
Edna Jane Garrabrant 8 Maynard St., Arlington

Secretary to the Director of Co-operative Work — 254R
Caroline Hill 24 Washington St., Beverly

Recorder, Registrar's Office — 254R
Elizabeth Harriett Howard 50 Tyler St., North Quincy

Statistical Clerk, Central Offices of the University
Dorothy Dell Hugg 1980 Commonwealth Ave., Brighton

Information Clerk, Central Offices of the University
Elizabeth Anne MacDonald

Secretary to the Director of Admissions
Julia Harriet Maslen

Secretary to the President — I84R
Dorothy Milne Murray

Secretary, E.S.M.W.T. Office— 154R
Alyce Ann Nichols

Bookkeeper, Comptroller's Office
Claire M. Palmer

Secretary to the Director of Alumni Relations — I39R
Dorothy L. Peppard 7 Gray Circle, Arlington

Secretary to the Director of Student Activities — 355R
Elin Victoria Peterson 86 Callender St., Dorchester

Secretary to the Vice-President — 138R
Caroline Frances Pettingell 1654 Massachusetts Ave., Cambridge

Bookkeeper, Registrar's Office — 254R
Marjorie Graffte Prout

Secretary to the President — I84R
Madelyn Edythe Ralph

Secretary to the Director of Day Colleges — 1 SIR
Eleanor Ross

Secretary to the Registrar — 254R
Eva Lillian Ross

Bookkeeper, Comptroller's Office

183 Strathmore Rd., Brighton

176 Winthrop Rd., Brookline

204 Fair Oak Park, Needham

507 Chestnut St., Needham

98 Charles St., Boston

1179 Boylston St., Boston

42 Sylvan Circle, Lynnfield

5 Newcastle Rd., Brighton

145 Day St., Auburndale

16 TsIORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Convocation Lecturers

LEVERETT SALTONSTALL

Governor of the Commonujealth

"Massachusetts at War"

ROBERT P. TRISTRAM COFFIN

Author, Lecturer

"What Poems Are"

J. ANTON DE HAAS

Professor of International Relationships, Harvard University

"The Outlook for 1944"

CHANNING H. COX

President, Old Colony Trust Company

"Target for Tonight"

JOSEPH W. BARKER

Special Assistant to the Secretary of the Navy

"Today and Tomorrow"

ALEXANDER LOUDEN

Netherlands Ambassador

"The Kingdom of the Netherlands at War"

G. BROMLEY OXNAM

Bishop, Methodist Church

"A Date with the World"

LUIS QUINT ANILLA

Minister Counselor of the Mexican Embassy

"Pan Americanism"

GEORGE H. EDGELL

Director, Boston Museum of Fine Arts

"Recent Museum Accessions"

GEORGE A. BUTTRICK

Minister, Madison Avenue Presbyterian Church, N. Y. C.

"The Modern Rip Van Winkle"

MORDECAI W. JOHNSON

President, Howard University

"A Great Adventure in Healing"

CHANNING POLLOCK

Playwright, Author
"Is the Fault in Our Stars?"

WILLIAM E. WICKENDEN

President, Case School of Applied Science

"The Second Mile"

WILLIAM G. AVIRETT

Education Editor, New York Herald Tribune

"Education and the News"

ROBERT BELLAIRE

Former United Press Bureau Chief in Tokyo

"The Jap Victory Plan"

DAY COLLEGES H

Chapel Preachers

REVEREND LEE D. BERGSMAN
Associate Minister, Old South Church

REVEREND DR. EDWIN P. BOOTH
Head of Department of New Testament, Boston University

REVEREND GEORGE A. BUTTERS
Pastor, Immanuel Methodist Church, Waltham

DR. HOWARD J. CHIDLEY
Minister, First Congregational Church, Winchester

RABBI BERYL D. COHON
Rabbi, Temple Sinai, Boston

REVEREND WALTON E. COLE
Minister, Second Church, Boston

REVEREND DR. RALPH W. DECKER

Minister, Parkman Street Methodist Church, Dorchester

Professor of New Testament and Religious Education, Boston University

REVEREND DR. FRANK E. DUDDY
Minister, NortK Cambridge Congregational Church, Cambridge

DR. CARL S. ELL
President, Northeastern University, Boston

REVEREND DR. F. GERALD ENSLEY
Minister, The United Church, Norwood

REVEREND HAMILTON M. GIFFORD
Minister, Newtonville Methodist Church, Newtonville

REVEREND DR. HOBART F. GOEWEY
Minister, Harvard-Epworth Methodist Church, Cambridge

DR. CHARLES W. HAVICE
Dean of Chapel, Northeastern University, Boston

FATHER KENNETH deP. HUGHES
Minister, St. Bartholomew Church, Cambridge

DR. FRANK JENNINGS
Executive Secretary, Massachusetts Council of Churches, Boston

REVEREND J. FRANKLIN KNOTTS
Minister, Saint John's Methodist Church, East Dedham

REVEREND CARL H. KOPF
Minister, Mt. Vernon Church, Boston

REVEREND FREDERIC C. LAWRENCE
Rector, St. PauVs Episcopal Church, Brookline

REVEREND DR. ASHLEY D. LEAVITT
Minister, Harvard Congregational Church, Brooklme

18 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Chapel Treachers

DR. ELMER A. LESLIE
Professor of Hebrew and Old Testament Literature, Boston University

RABBI JOSHUA L. LIEBMAN
Rabbi, Temple Israel, Boston

DR. SAMUEL M. LINDSAY
Minister, First Baptist Church, Brookline

REVEREND DR. CHARLES M. McCONNELL
Professor of Town and Country Church, Boston University School of Theology

REVEREND DR. JOSEPH L. McCORISON

Former President of Yankton College

Regional Director of National Conference of Christians and Jews

REVEREND SAMUEL H. MILLER
Minister, Old Cambridge Baptist Church, Cambridge

DR. PHILLIPS E. OSGOOD
Minister, Emmanuel Church, Boston

BISHOP G. BROMLEY OXNAM
Resident Bishop of the Boston Area of the Methodist Church

REVEREND PRENTISS L. PEMBERTON
Minister to Baptist Students in Greater Boston

REVEREND JAMES H. PERKINS
Associate Minister, Old South Church, Copley Square, Boston

REVEREND DR. PALFREY PERKINS
Minister, King's Chapel, Boston

PROFESSOR WARREN T. POWELL
Director of Student Counseling and Religious Activities, Boston University

DR. RUSSELL H. STAFFORD
Minister, Old South Church, Boston

THE REVEREND EDMUND A. STEIMLE
Pastw, the University Lutheran Church, Cambridge

DR. WILLIAM L. STIDGER
Professor of Homiletics, Boston University

DAY COLLEGES 19

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY
Qeneral S^(^^^^^^t

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY is incorporated as a philan-
thropic institution under the General Laws of Massachu-
setts. The State Legislature, by special enactment, has given
the University general degree granting powers.

The Corporation of Northeastern University consists of men
who occupy responsible positions in business and the professions.
This Corporation elects from its membership a Board of Trustees
in whom the control of the institution is vested. The Board of
Trustees has four standing committees: (a) an Executive Commit-
tee which serves as an Ad Interim Committee between the regular
meetings of the Board of Trustees and has general supervision of
the financial and educational policies of the University; (b) a
Committee on Housing which has general supervision over the
buildings and equipment of the University; (c) a Committee on
Funds and Investments which has the responsibility of administer-
ing the funds of the University; (d) a Development Committee
which is concerned with furthering the development plans of the
University.

Founded in 1898, Northeastern University, from the outset, had
as its dominant purpose the discovery of human and social needs
and the meeting of these needs in distinctive and highly service-
able ways. While subscribing to the most progressive educational
thought and practice, the University has not duplicated the pro-
grams of other institutions but has sought "to bring education
more directly into the service of human needs."

With respect to program. Northeastern has limited itself:

— To offering, in its several schools, basic curricula from which

non-essentials have been eliminated,

— To effective teaching,

— To advising and guiding students,

— To giving students the chance to build well-rounded personalities

through a balanced program of extra-curricular activities.

The Northeastern Plan of Education is especially designed for
the student who must earn while he learns. In the main, it con-
sists of two definite types of education:

— Co-operative Education by Day,

— Adult Education by Night.

The plan has been developed in such a way that experience in
jobs with pay is utilized to help boys of limited financial resources
secure an education and at the same time gain the maximum

20 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

educational benefit from their practical experience. So far as the
New England States are concerned, Northeastern University is
the only institution whose day colleges, other than the School of
Law, are conducted under the Co-operative Plan.

The several schools and programs of the University are operated
either under the name "Northeastern University" or by its
affiliated schools — the Lincoln Schools and The Huntington
Day School for Boys. The following is a brief outline of the
principal types of educational opportunities offered.

1. In the field of Co-operative Education there are three day
colleges — the College of Liberal Arts, the College of Engineer-
ing, and the College of Business Administration. All of these
colleges are co-educational and offer five-year curricula. The
College of Liberal Arts offers majors in the usual fields of the
arts and the sciences leading to the degree of Bachelor of Arts
and Bachelor of Science. The College of Engineering, one of
the largest engineering colleges in the United States, has curric-
ula in Civil, Mechanical (with Aeronautical option), Electrical,
Chemical, and Industrial Engineering. The College of Business
Administration has curricula in Accounting, Marketing and
Advertising, and Industrial Administration. The College of
Engineering and the College of Business Administration confer
the degree of Bachelor of Science with specification indicating
the field of specialization. The Co-operative Plan under which
all of these day colleges operate enables the student to alternate
regular periods of classroom instruction with supervised em-
ployment in an industrial or commercial position, thus com-
bining theory and practice in an exceedingly effective manner.
Apart from the educational advantages of the Co-operative
Plan is the opportunity for self-support while the student is
pursuing his studies at Northeastern University. During the
co-operative periods, students not only gain experience but are
also paid for their services. Approximately three hundred busi-
ness and industrial concerns co-operate with Northeastern
University in making this program effective.

2. The School of Law conducts both a day and an evening
undergraduate program, each program preparing for admission
to the bar and for the practice of the law and leading to the
degree of Bachelor of Laws.

DAY COLLEGES 21

conducted in Springfield. The College of Liberal Arts offers
certain of its courses constituting a program, three years in
length, the equivalent in hours to one-half of the requirements
for the A.B. or S.B. degree, providing a general education and
preparation for admission to the School of Law. The title of
Associate in Arts is conferred upon those who complete this
program.

4. The Adult Education Program has also been developed through
the Lincoln Schools, which are affiliated with and conducted by
Northeastern University. The classes in these schools are held
at convenient evening hours. The Lincoln Technical Institute
offers curricula upon a college level in various phases of en-
gineering leading to the title of Associate in Engineering; where-
as the Lincoln Preparatory School, accredited by the New
England College Admissions Board, prepares students for ad-
mission to college and offers other standard high school
programs.

5. The Huntington Day School for Boys, also affiliated with and
conducted by Northeastern University, is the outgrowth of a
demand in the city of Boston for an urban preparatory school
with high educational standards which would furnish thorough
preparation for admission to the leading colleges and univer-
sities. While easily accessible to the various sections of Boston
and to the suburbs, it has the facilities of a country day school
and offers a country day school program. This School is one of
the leading preparatory schools of the country.

22 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

buildings and facilities

Boston — cA Qreat Sducational Qenter

The fact that Northeastern University is in Boston broadens
the educational and cultural opportunities of its students. Few
other cities in the country are so rich in the finest elements of
American life. Many of its historic buildings, such as the Old
State House, Faneuil Hall, and the Old North Church, have be-
come museums for the preservation of old documents, paintings,
and other collections representative of early Colonial life. The
Boston Public Library and the Museum of Fine Arts, both within
a few blocks of the University Buildings, are widely noted for their
treasures of literature and art. Even nearer to the University is
Symphony Hall, home of the world-famous Boston Symphony
Orchestra. And the many churches within Greater Boston not
only afford the opportunity of hearing distinguished preachers but
through their student clubs and young people's societies make
possible for students a fine type of social and intellectual life.

Urdversitj buildings
Location

Northeastern University, except for the Law School, is housed
in four buildings located on Huntington Avenue, Boston, at the
end of the Huntington Avenue Subway and opposite the historic
Boston Opera House. The main administrative offices of the
University are located in Richards Hall, a four-story brick structure
added to the physical plant of Northeastern in 1938.

The chief railroad centers of Boston are the North and South
Stations. To reach the University from the North Station, board
a car going to Park Street, at which junction transfer to any
Huntington Avenue car. To reach the University from the
South Station, board a Cambridge subway train for Park Street
Under. There go up one flight of stairs and board any Huntington
Avenue car.

East Building

The East Building serves as headquarters for the College of
Business Administration. In addition, it houses the University
Library, the Business Administration Laboratory, and several
department offices. Jacob P. Bates Hall is also in this building. The
latter is used for University band and orchestra rehearsals, glee
club rehearsals, and entertainments, as well as dramatic club work.

DAY COLLEGES 23

South Building

The South Building, located directly behind the East Building,
houses the following laboratories: Time and Motion Study,
Hydraulics and Sanitary Engineering, Concrete and Highway, and
Electrical Measurements and Dynamo Laboratories. In addition,
it provides space for department offices, classrooms, conference
rooms and one large drafting room.

Richards Hall

Richards Hall is the first unit of the new Northeastern plant.
Its 100,000 square feet of floor area provide ample space for
administrative offices, the Bookstore, Student Union reading and
game rooms. Chapel, and many other facilities.

The major portion of the building is given over to laboratories
and classroom areas. Laboratory space is provided for the follow-
ing: Mechanical Engineering, General and Advanced Physics,
Inorganic, Organic, Analytical, and Physical Chemistry, together
with several special research laboratories.

Outstanding among the classroom areas are a large chemistry
lecture hall and two large classrooms seating 300 and 200 students
respectively. On the fourth floor are located three large, light and
well-equipped drawing rooms, together with an art room for
carrying on designing and drafting which form so important a
part of technical work. The penthouse contains a radio laboratory,
astronomy laboratory, and a blueprint room.

Netf Building

The New Building is the second unit of the proposed North-
eastern plant. It has a basement and four stories housing labora-
tories, classrooms and a recreation area, the University Comvaons.
Chemical engineering laboratories and classrooms take up the
entire basement. The second floor contains a large lecture hall
and classrooms. The Advertising Laboratory and classrooms take
up the entire third floor. The fourth floor is given over almost
entirely to the biological laboratories and biology lecture room.

Beacon Hill Building

The building housing the Law School at 47 Mt. Vernon Streat
is a three-story structure completely equipped with administrative
offices, faculty offices, classrooms, library and student recreational
rooms. The interior of this building is both commodious and new,
the entire structure having been recently remodeled by the
University.

24 I^ORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

Laboratories

The laboratories of the University fall into three categories.
The first group includes those for experimental work in the pure
sciences of biology, chemistry, and physics. The second includes
those for the study of engineering in its major branches (civil,
mechanical, electrical, chemical, and industrial). The third com-
prises the business and statistical laboratory.

In addition to these laboratory facilities which are described in
the following pages, motion pictures and lantern slides are fre-
quently used to supplement classroom instruction. For this pur-
pose, there are available motion picture projectors for both sound
and silent film as well as several lantern slide projectors.

Biology

The Department of Biology occupies the fourth floor of the
New Building, which contains, in addition to the Zoological,
Anatomical and Botanical Laboratories, its offices, research
areas, and lecture hall. The laboratories are fully equipped for
general and special work, with extensive collections of museum
preparations, models, and specimen collections displaying thou-
sands of specimens illustrating the various fields of biological
study.

Chemistry

The Chemical Laboratories located on the fourth floor of
Richards Hall were given to the University by the Charles Hayden
Foundation, They are splendidly equipped for work in general
and inorganic chemistry, qualitative and quantitative analysis,
and organic and physical chemistry. In addition, several service
rooms and space for a limited amount of research are provided.

General Chemistry and Qualitative Analysis

This laboratory is fully equipped with water, gas, electricity,
steam, and fume hoods. A hydrogen-sulphide room, a balance
room, and a conference room are also a part of this unit.

Organic Chemistry

This laboratory provides about six feet of working space for
each student. The facilities are similar to those in the general
chemistry laboratory and, in addition, there is provided a large
evaporating unit and an organic combustion furnace.

Quantitative Analysis and Physical Chemistry

The tables and fume hoods and other equipment in this room
are similar to those in the Organic Laboratory. In addition, a
large drying oven, special balances, electrical instruments, tempera-

DAY COLLEGES 25

ture measuring devices, and other specialized apparatus are pro-
vided.

A small laboratory for technical analysis of such materials as
coal, vegetable oils, petroleum, textiles, and rubber adjoins the
main laboratory, and a special laboratory is also available for
electrolytic work.

Research

Three small laboratories are equipped for advanced research.
These are available for graduate thesis investigations.

Physics

The Physics Laboratories located on the second floor of Richards
Hall are fully equipped for elementary and advanced study as well
as research. In addition, an astronomy laboratory and a radio
laboratory are located in the penthouse on Richards Hall.

General

This laboratory, designed for elementary instruction, is pro-
vided with gas, water, and electricity. A spectrometer room, a
photographic room, and a photometer room are directly con-
nected with this laboratory. Sufficient apparatus is available so
that ordinarily students may work alone on most experiments.

A second smaller laboratory is equipped for more specialized
experiments, and has facilities for glass blowing and high vacuum
work. A flexible electrical system here permits use of all the
supplies available to the Advanced Laboratory.

Advanced

This laboratory is designed with a view to both precision and
flexibility. A special switchboard provides single phase and
polyphase alternating current and a variety of direct current
potentials. A workshop with lathe, drill press, grinder, and other
tools as well as two separate research rooms complement the
laboratory. A large number of special instruments plus consider-
able auxiliary apparatus give a well-rounded supply of equipment
for advanced study and research.

Astronomy and Radio

The astronomy laboratory is provided with equipment for
grinding mirrors and constructing telescopes, and a platform on
the roof provides a very good unobstructed view for making
observations.

The radio laboratory is a completely shielded room and houses
the amateur transmitting station which operates on both radio-
telephone and radiotelegraph. Facilities are also available for
research.

26 NORTHEASTER'N UNIVERSITY

Psychology

The Psychology Laboratory, located on the third floor of
Richards Hall, is equipped for the observation of reacting human
beings under controlled conditions. Equipment consists of
instruments for measuring and controlling factors involved in
perception, memory, and learning, and of psychometric devices
for the testing and evaluation of individual abilities.

Civil Engineering

Most of the laboratory work in civil engineering is, of course,
actual field work in surveying. A considerable amount of demon-
stration equipment including many models is available for use in
the study of structures, hydraulics, sanitary engineering, highways,
concrete and soil mechanics.

Surveying

The Department of Civil Engineering is provided with a variety
of excellent and up-to-date equipment for field work. The instru-
ments have been chosen to make possible the working out of
advanced as well as elementary field problems, and to acquaint
the students with the principal makes and types of instruments
in general use.

Hydraulics and Sanitary Engineering

This laboratory located on the first floor of the South Building
is equipped with demonstration measuring devices for use in
connection with the courses in hydraulics.

Complete equipment is also provided for water and sewage
analysis, and research students can be accommodated in this field.

Concrete and Highway Engineering

Located on the second floor of the South Building, this labora-
tory is equipped for conducting all the routine tests on cement
and aggregate. The 300,000 lb. Riehle testing machine in the
Mechanical Engineering Department is available for compression
tests on concrete cylinders.

Equipment is also available for conducting a major portion of
the accepted tests on bituminous materials as used in highway
work. Soil Mechanics equipment consists of a general soil
sampler, consolidometer, wet-mechanical gram-size analysis and
a quicksand demonstration tank.

Aerial Photogrammetry

The apparatus in this laboratory may be used to instruct the
students in the basic principles of photogrammetry, or may be used
to instruct the students in the more technical phases of photo-
grammetry such as horizontal control, vertical control, stereo-
scopic plotting, mechanical triangulation, and the tri-metrogon
method of plotting.

DAY COLLEGES 27

Mechanical Engineering

The Mechanical Engineering Department has a suite of well-
equipped laboratories containing a large variety of modern
machines and occupying over 10,000 square feet of floor space
in the basement of Richards Hall. Special areas have been set
aside and equipped for oil testing, concrete mixing, mechanics
research, and similar purposes. Auxiliary equipment is, of course,
available for making all the usual tests and measurements.

Steam Potuer

This equipment includes a wide variety of steam engines, tur-
bines, pumps, heat exchangers, and measuring instruments.

The auxiliary steam power plant operated by the University and
the Boston Y.M.C.A. is also used for testing purposes. This plant
consists of four horizontal return tubular boilers, two burning coal
and two burning fuel oil. These feed three reciprocating steam
engines and one turbine which in turn drive four direct current
generators.

Internal Combustion and Aeronautics

The internal combustion equipment includes a number of gas
and oil, automobile, airplane, and Diesel engines. Most of these
are set up for running experimental tests, but several are available
for dismantling and demonstration purposes.

In addition to the study of airplane engines, the laboratory is
equipped with a small wind tunnel for experimental work in
aerodynamics.

Refrigeration, Heating, and Air Conditioning

Included under this heading are an ammonia refrigerating
machine, a constant temperature room equipped for either heating
or cooling, and a large air conditioner unit.

Testing Materials and Heat Treatment

For tension, compression, bending, and shearing tests, the
laboratory is equipped with a 300,000 lb. capacity Riehle and a
50,000 lb. capacity Olsen, as well as several smaller testing ma-
chines. For other tests the laboratory has cement testers, torsional
testing machines, impact testers, fatigue testers, hardness testers,
extensometers, oil testing equipment calorimeters, as well as
instruments for measuring speed, vibration, temperatures, pressures
and flow of fluids.

For heat treatment studies an electric furnace and a gas fired
furnace are available. Equipment magnifying up to 2600 diameters
is available for photographing crystalline structures, and the
laboratory has polaroid equipment for photoelastic stress analysis.

28 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Mac/line Shop

Adjoining the laboratory is a machine shop fully equipped with
machine tools, welding equipment, and a small forge.

Electrical Engineering

The basement of the South Building is occupied by the electrical
laboratories. These cover an area of approximately 7,800 square
feet and include the dynamo, measurements, high tension,
electronics and communication laboratories.

Dynamo

This laboratory is provided with both 60 cycle 3 phase 230 volt
alternating current and 115-230 volt three-wire direct current.
The equipment includes more than sixty motors and generators
of different types together with the necessary auxiliary equipment
to operate and test them. The motors and generators have been
selected so as to reduce as much as possible the risk from high
voltage while making available to the students a representative
range of commercial apparatus.

Electrical Measurements

The equipment here is of two distinct types: first, that planned
primarily for teaching principles of measurement and, secondly,
that which is used in teaching advanced standardizing methods
as well as for calibrating instruments in other laboratories of the
University. Briefly, this laboratory is equipped for practically any
work in electrical measurements except for the absolute determi-
nations carried on in national standardizing laboratories.

High Tension

This laboratory is equipped with the necessary transformers and
auxiliary equipment to provide 4 Kva. at 50,000 volts potential.
A special room has been equipped for cable and insulation testing,
and impulse testing of insulation is made possible by a surge
generator capable of producing waves having crest values up to
300,000 volts. A 4,000 ampere low voltage transformer is also
available for the study of the effects of heavy currents in con-
ductors, switches, and contacts.

Electronics and Communications

This laboratory is equipped with apparatus for about forty
odd experiments in the field of Electronics, Networks, Radio
Engineering and Ultra-High-Frequency Technique. The labora-
tory facilities are designed to cover all the experiments outlined
in the second M. I. T. Conference on Ultra-High-Frequency
Technique.

DAY COLLEGES 29

Chemical Engineering

The Department is now located on the ground floor of the
New Building. A total of 8,218 square feet has been allotted for
its exclusive use.

Unit Operations Laboratory

This laboratory is primarily devoted to the study of flow of
fluids, filtration, heat transfer, distillation, evaporation, absorp-
tion, and drying; but houses in addition equipment for carrying
out such unit processes as nitration, reduction, fusion, and
sulphonation.

Approximately 1 ,000 square feet of this laboratory consists of
a double floor area serviced by a traveling crane for installing
and repairing semi-plant scale equipment.

Crushing, Grinding and Separation Laboratory

A separate laboratory equipped with a ventilating fan houses
equipment for crushing, pulverizing, and separating solids. All
equipment is operated by individual electric motors with speed
control frequently taken advantage of to get experimental data.

Machine Shop

A small, well equipped shop is available for the construction
and repair of equipment.

Research Space

In addition to the Research Laboratory, the mezzanine floor of
the Unit Operations Laboratory is available for investigating new
processes.

Industrial Chemical Laboratory

This laboratory is equipped with modern laboratory benches
and is located next to the stock room. The determination of the
optimum conditions for carrying out unit processes on a small
scale is accomplished in this laboratory.

Industrial Engineering

Students in the Department of Industrial Engineering share in
the use of the Mechanical Engineering Laboratories and the
Business Laboratory. The Industrial Engineering Laboratory itself
is located on the first floor of the South Building and is devoted
exclusively to methods engineering (motion and time study work).

Methods Engineering

This laboratory is completely equipped with the latest facilities
and tools used by methods engineers. Besides the general equip-
ment consisting of benches, tables, lathe, jigs, fixtures, and racks,

30 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

the laboratory has an ample supply of time study boards, stop
watches and timers for time study work. There is also available
complete motion picture equipment and microchronometers for
micromotion work.

^Design and ^Drafting ^^oms

The University possesses large, light, and well-equipped drawing
rooms for the carrying on of the designing and drafting which
form so important a part of engineering work. These rooms are
supplied with lockers containing the drawing supplies, files con-
taining blueprints, and photographs of machines and structures
that represent the best practice. Drafting room blackboards are
equipped with traveling straightedge devices which facilitate
speed and accuracy in blackboard demonstrations.

Libraries

The new library is located on the first floor of the East Building.
The reading room seats about 300 students at one time, and the
stack capacity approximates 25,000 volumes. Here are available
all of the general reference books, most of the professional and
scientific volumes, and most of the periodicals to which the
University subscribes.

Library hours are as follows:

8:45 A.M. to 7:30 P.M. Mondays through Fridays

8:45 A.M. to 1:00 P.M. Saturdays

Closed on Sundays and Holidays

The library is under the direction of a librarian and three assist-
ants all of whom have had special training for the work.

A general reading room and library is maintained by the
Northeastern Student Union in Room 356, Richards Hall. The
books located here are chiefly non-technical works dealing with
contemporary affairs, religious problems, international relations,
travel, etc., among which students may browse during periods of
relaxation. A few of the literary and religious periodicals are also
available in this room.

Boston Public Library

All members of the University, whether resident or non-resident
students, have the privilege of taking books from the Boston
Public Library and of using the library for general reference and
study. Inasmuch as this is one of the best in the country, it
presents unusual opportunities to the students. Within a few
minutes' walk from the University, it enables students to have
unlimited reference at any time to books and periodicals bearing
upon their studies.

DAY COLjLEGES 31

Lecture cAssemhly ^alls

Through special arrangement, Jordan Hall, Symphony Hall,
and the Boston Opera House are made available for assembly
purposes. These halls provide ample space for student activity
assemblies and for special lectures by noted men. All the students
in college at any period assemble for one hour each week through-
out the college year. More than half of the assembly sessions are
devoted to interests and activities developed by the students
themselves. The other assembly periods are devoted to special
lectures, sometimes under the direction of the student body and
sometimes under the direction of the faculty. The special lectures
are devoted to those elements of life which count most in the
development of a man's viewpoint and his character.

Squipment for Thysical Training

Northeastern has exceptional facilities for all-round physical
training. The gymnasium is one of the most complete in New
England. Adjoining Richards Hall is a large field equipped for
athletics. Here are two tennis courts, an outdoor gymnasium,
a rifle range, a baseball cage, jumping pits, and a track with a
100-yard straightaway.

Natatorium and Gymnasium

The Natatorium is located in the East Building between the
assembly hall and gymnasium. It is 75 feet long and 25 feet wide
and is generally regarded as one of the finest of its kind in this
area.

The Gymnasium is known as the Samuel Johnson Memorial
Gymnasium and provides the following facilities: three gymna-
siums, a twelve-lap running track, two large exercise rooms,
boxing and wrestling rooms, handball and squash courts, bowling
alleys, showers, steam baths, massage rooms, electric cabinet baths,
and locker rooms.

Huntington Field

Huntington Field, the University athletic field, is located on
Kent Street in Brookline and provides ample facilities for track,
baseball, football and other outdoor sports. The University main-
tains bus service between its Huntington Avenue plant and the
Huntington Field, making it possible for students to get back and
forth with a minimum loss of time. The field is equipped with a
commodious field house as well as ten sections of stadium seats
for spectators.

32 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Student cActivities

Northeastern University regards student activities as an in-
tegral part of its educational program. One of the main depart-
ments of the University is charged with the responsibility of co-
ordinating the various types of activities and of administering the
social, musical, literary, and athletic organizations in such a way
as to enable each to contribute in a wholesome, worthwhile
manner to student life at Northeastern. Every student is encour-
aged to participate in such activities as may appeal to him, al-
though a standard of scholarship which is incompatible with
excessive devotion to such pursuits is required of all students.

Members of the faculty also are interested in the informal
aspects of the college program. Teaching loads are kept sufficiently
low so that the instructional staff may have ample opportunity
to mingle with students outside of the classroom in social activities
and on the athletic field. In fact, some member of the faculty is
appointed to serve as adviser for each student activity. His
function is not to dictate how the organization shall be run, but
to encourage the students in their extra-curricular endeavors and
to give them the benefit of his mature point of view in solving
the problems that inevitably arise.

One of the outstanding contributions of the Co-operative Plan
in the field of higher education has been its capacity to develop
in students those powers of social understanding that are so
essential to success in professional life. At Northeastern the
program of student activities is made to contribute to this end
in a very real way. It is a conscious aim of the student activities
advisers to develop among their advisees those qualities of per-
sonality and character which will enhance their usefulness as
future professional men and citizens. Students have splendid
opportunities to develop administrative and executive ability as
leaders of undergraduate organizations. No academic credit is
awarded for any student activity. This has been no deterrent,
however, to student participation in extra-curricular activities, for
a recent survey of the undergraduate body showed that over ninety
per cent of the enrollment were engaged in one or more forms of
student activity.

Student Council

Student government of the Day Colleges at Northeastern
University is vested in the Student Council, composed of elected
representatives from the various classes. The Council is the
authority on all matters relating to student policies not definitely
connected with classroom procedure. It has jurisdiction, subject
to faculty approval, over all such matters as customs, privileges,

DAY COLLEGES 33

and campus regulations. The Dean of Students serves as faculty
adviser to the Student Council.

'Northeastern Student Union

The purpose of the Northeastern Student Union is to carry
out the work of a Christian association within the University.
It endeavors to deepen the spiritual lives of Northeastern men and
women through the building of Christian character, to create and
promote a strong and effective Northeastern University spirit in
and through a unified student body, to promote sociability, and to
emphasize certain ethical, social, civic, intellectual, economic,
physical, vocational, and avocational values.

All students are encouraged to participate in the activities of
the Union, no matter what their religious faith, as the work
of the Union is entirely non-sectarian. A good moral character
is the only requirement for eligibility to membership. It is hoped
that as many students as can will participate in this ideal extra-
curricular work.

The Union conducts a weekly Chapel Service in the little chapel
in Richards Hall, to which all faculty members and students
are invited. The service, which is non-sectarian and voluntary,
is held on Thursday mornings from 8:40 to 8:55 o'clock. Many
eminent preachers of Greater Boston are engaged to deliver brief
addresses.

Athletic Association

All students in the Day Colleges are members of the North-
eastern University Athletic Association. Policies of the associa-
tion are passed upon by a Faculty Committee on Student Activ-
ities. This committee decides what students are eligible to par-
ticipate in athletics, what the various sports schedules shall be,
and what students may be excused from classes to represent the
University on athletic trips.

The actual administration of the athletic program is in the
hands of a second committee, known as the General Athletic
Committee, which consists of the Director of Student Activities,
the captains and managers of all varsity teams, and the coaches
as ex officio members.

The University maintains both varsity and freshman teams in
baseball, basketball, cross-country, football, hockey, and track.
Intercollegiate games and meets are arranged with the leading
colleges in the East. In addition to intercollegiate athletics the
athletic association conducts an intra-mural program in various
sports.

34 NORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

Publications

''The News"
A college newspaper, the Northeastern News, is published each
week throughout the college year by a staff selected from the
student body. The copy is prepared, edited, and published by the
students themselves with the counsel of a faculty adviser. Op-
portunity is aff^orded for the students to express their opinions
on subjects relating to study, co-operative work, social events, or
topics of the day. Positions on the News staff and promotions
are attained by competitive work. The paper is in part supported
by advertising, both national and local, and in part by a portion
of the student activities fee. The Northeastern News is a member
of the Eastern Intercollegiate Newspaper Association, and sends
one of its editors to the annual convention of this association
each year. Copies of the News are mailed to upperclassmen when
they are at co-operative work and to freshmen after the close
of their college year.

"TKe Cauldron"
The combined senior class publishes annually a college year
book. The Cauldron. It is ready for distribution in the latter part
of the second semester and contains a complete review of the
college year with class histories, pictures of all seniors, of the
faculty, and of undergraduate groups, as well as a miscellany of
snapshots and drawings contributed by students.

Honor Societies

Three honorary societies are chartered by the University in its
Day Colleges:

Tau Beta Pi, in the College of Engineering (for men only).
The Sigma Society, in the College of Business Administration.
The Academy, in the College of Liberal Arts.

Election to the college honorary societies is founded primarily
upon scholarship, but before a man or woman is privileged to wear
the honorary society insignia there must be evidence of an in-
tegrity of character and an interest in the extra-curricular life of the
University as well as an acceptable personality. The Societies have
memberships consisting of the outstanding men and women in the
Day Colleges. Election to the honorary society is the highest honor
that can be conferred upon an undergraduate.

Professional Societies and Clubs

To assist in the promotion of social, cultural, and intellectual
advancement through informal channels, a number of professional
societies and clubs are sponsored.

DAY COLLEGES 35

National Engineering Societies

Students in the several professional curricula of the College ot
Engineering operate Northeastern University Sections of the
appropriate national professional societies. Chief among these
are the following:

American Society of Civil Engineers
Boston Society of Civil Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Institute of Electrical Engineers
American Institute of Chemical Engineers
Society for the Advancement of Management
American Chemical Society

Members of the engineering faculty who hold membership in
the parent organizations serve as advisers to these student groups.
Meetings are held regularly, usually at night so that students from
both divisions may attend, and practicing engineers are invited
to address the sections. Occasionally appropriate motion pictures
are shown, or the group visits some current engineering project in
the vicinity of Boston. The College of Engineering encourages
these student sections of the technical societies in the belief that
they provide a wholesome medium for social intercourse as well
as a worthwhile introduction to professional life.

Membership in the student sections of the American Society of
Civil Engineers and Boston Society of Civil Engineers, the Ameri-
can Society of Mechanical Engineers, or the American Institute of
Electrical Engineers also includes membership and privileges of the
Engineering Societies of New England. This organization is an
affiliation of all the major technical societies of Boston and vicinity
and provides valuable lectures, smokers, and informal meetings
with the outstanding men engaged in engineering work in Boston
and vicinity.

Astronomy Club

Membership in the Astronomy Club is open to all students in
the College of Engineering who maintain satisfactory scholastic
standing. The club has access to machine shops for the con-
struction of telescopes and other instruments. It also has quarters
in the penthouse on the fifth floor of Richards Hall. Meetings are
held twice a month for the purpose of making astronomical
observations and carrying on appropriate discussions.

Banking and Finance Club

The purpose of this organization is to increase among its mem-
bers the knowledge of the theory and practice of banking. Any
student of Northeastern University, while enrolled in any of the
banking courses of the College of Business Administration, is
eligible to active membership in this club. Meetings are held each

36 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

ten-week period at which banking executives from Greater Boston
are invited to discuss current issues in the field.

Camera Club

The Camera Club welcomes all men and women interested in
photography. Weekly discussions and special evening lectures by
guest artists are part of the yearly program. Field trips, monthly
photo contests and a general exhibition add to the interest and
progressive work of this organization.

Chess Club

The Chess Club gives both beginners and experts an oppor-
tunity to enjoy the game. Yearly tournaments are held among the
members and, in past years, the best among the members have
engaged in intercollegiate competition.

Combined Musical and Dramatic Clubs

The Department of Student Activities sponsors musical clubs,
such as the following: a concert orchestra, a band, a glee club, a
banjo club, and a dance orchestra, for which all students with
musical ability are eligible. Membership in the various musical
clubs is attained by competitive effort.

Each organization has a faculty adviser and each elects a
representative to the Musical Clubs Council. The purpose of
this council is to co-ordinate the various musical activities of the
Day Colleges. At the annual Musical Clubs Banquet, held early
in the spring, charms are awarded to the leaders and managers of
the several clubs and to members who have played over a period
of three full years.

The various musical clubs, in conjunction with the Dramatic
Club, combine in an annual mid-winter entertainment and partici-
pate in occasional outside public engagements throughout the
college year.

Students interested in dramatics have an opportunity to culti-
vate this art under faculty coaches who co-operate with the
Dramatic Club in the production of several pieces in the course of
each college year.

Debating Society

The purpose of the Debating Society, formed in 1936, is "to
foster and promote an interest and facility in formal argumenta-
tion; to develop an impartial, unbiased, and intellectual considera-
tion of questions and issues of current interest; and to sponsor
intercollegiate relationships and competition in the debating field."
Membership is open to all students of the Day Colleges.

DAY COLLEGES 37

Omega Sigma Society

^This club was organized in 1943 for all women students enrolled
in the Day Colleges, to derive social, moral and intellectual benefits
for both themselves and the University.

German Language Club

Students are given an opportunity in this club to use their
knowledge of German in ways that give them entertainment as
well as a greater appreciation of foreign customs and literature.

International Relations Club

The International Relations Club was founded in 1932 for the
purpose of studying and discussing those current national and
international events and issues which vitally concern our American
life and institutions.

It is the intention of the club to deal with all questions in an
impartial and broadminded manner, and to take an intelligent
and effective part in promoting international understanding and
harmony. The club maintains contacts with similar organizations
in other colleges.

Membership is not open to freshmen, and only to those upper-
classmen who maintain good scholarship.

Law and Accounting Club

All students interested in accounting and law are invited to
join this stimulating club. Problems and cases involving the
interrelations of accounting and law are presented and discussed
at club meetings. Although upperclassmen usually present prob-
lems arising out of thesis or co-operative work, speakers from the
professional world come to the meetings to present papers and
lead the student discussion.

Mathematics Society

The Mathematics Society encourages the study of topics of
mathematical interest which are either outside or beyond the
scope of the regular mathematics courses. Membership is re-
stricted to those men and women who have completed one and
one-half years of study in mathematics and have an average grade
of not less than "C" in mathematics courses up through differen-
tial calculus. The club meets once every five weeks in the evening.
Although membership is limited to upperclassmen, any student
is always welcome to any meeting, and freshmen especially inter-
ested in mathematics are always welcome.

The final program of the year is devoted to a dinner meeting
for which some prominent outside speaker is procured.

38 T^ORTHEASTERN UhllVERSITY

Radio Club (Suspended for the duration of the war.)

One of the most popular undergraduate activities is the Radio
Club. Members are provided opportunity for code practice and
are encouraged to obtain their amateur licenses. The club owns
and operates station WIKBN, a short wave transmitter, located
in the Radio Laboratory in the penthouse of Richards Hall.
Meetings are held about once a month for the discussion of
technical matters. Practicing radio engineers are frequently in-
vited to address the club at evening meetings, when students in
both divisions may attend.

Rifle Club

Organized a number of years ago, the Rifle Club was so success-
ful that in 1933 riflery was recognized as a minor sport. Members
of the club are given instruction in the art of rifle shooting. Those
students who excel in intra-mural competition are selected for
the team representing the University in intercollegiate contests.
Practice sessions are held twice a week in the University rifle
range. Membership is open to all students. Northeastern is a
member of the New England Intercollegiate Rifle League and the
National Rifle Association.

Yacht Club

Only recently formed, the Yacht Club is a member of the
Intercollegiate Yacht Racing Association. The club participates
in regattas held in the Charles River Basin and also in regattas
held at other colleges.

Class Organization and Activity

Each of the classes in the Day Colleges elects its officers and
carries on activities as a class. Dances are sponsored by the
classes at regular periods throughout the year. One of the high
lights of the social program is the Junior Promenade, held each
spring at one of the Boston hotels.

Seniors plan a number of activities just prior to Commencement.

Freshmen are required to wear the red and black cap distributed
through the Department of Student Activities in order that they
may be readily distinguishable to each other and to upperclass-
men. (This requirement suspended for the duration of the war.)

Convocations

The hour from 12:00 to 1:00 on Wednesdays throughout the
year is set aside for convocations. Attendance is compulsory.
Arrangements are made to bring before the student body some of
the ablest and foremost thinkers of the day. A list of speakers

DAY COLLEGES 39

for the year will be found on page 16 of this catalog. When
the convocation hour is not occupied by a University lecturer,
class meetings, concerts, or athletic rallies are held instead. Such
gatherings are under the direction of the Department of Student
Activities.

Fraternities

There are at present nine local Greek letter fraternities chartered
by Northeastern University. Each fraternity is provided with a
faculty adviser who is responsible for the proper administration
of the fraternity house under the rules and regulations established
by the faculty. The list of fraternities in the order of their estab-
lishment is as follows:

1. Beta Gamma Epsilon 5. Phi Beta Alpha

2. Alpha Kappa Sigma 6. Phi Gamma Pi

3. Nu Epsilon Zeta 7. Sigma Phi Alpha

4. Sigma Kappa Psi 8. Kappa Zeta Phi

9. Gamma Phi Kappa

Elected representatives from each fraternity make up an Inter-
Fraternity Council, a body which has preliminary jurisdiction over
fraternity regulations. Its rulings are subject to the approval of
the Faculty Committee on Student Activities.

Sorority

Sigma Phi Psi

A sorority organized by the first six women students at North-
eastern University and at present the only local Greek letter
sorority. New members are pledged annually after completion of
one semester. All activities of the sorority are supervised by a
faculty adviser.

40 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

^he Co-operative Tlan

How It Works

The Co-operative Plan works in the following manner. Upper-
classmen, including both men and women, are divided into two
nearly equal groups, one of which is called Division A and the
other Division B. Each student is assigned a job with some busi-
ness or industrial concern. So far as possible a student in one
Division is paired with a student in the other Division, so that the
two, by taking turns, may occupy one job throughout the entire
year. The Division A student starts the college year with a term
of classroom work, while the Division B student starts the year
with a term at co-operative work. At the end of that term, the
Division A students go out to work with a co-operating firm, while
their places in the classrooms are then taken by their alternates,
the corresponding Division B students. When the next term has
passed the Division A students return to college and the Division
B students return to the co-operative job. The alternation of work
and classroom study continues throughout the year so that an
upperclassman has annually two terms at college, two terms at
co-operative work, and a brief vacation.

Faculty Co-ordinators

Students are assigned to a co-ordinator, who interviews them
periodically during their freshman year for the purpose of deter-
mining their background, abilities, temperaments, and aptitudes.
During these interviews the co-ordinator discusses various fields of
activity and answers such questions as the students may have in
regard to the many phases of business and industry. Students are
studied in the light of their physical condition, scholastic ability,
and other factors affecting their probable success in vocational
life. These interviews culminate in an agreement between the
students and their co-ordinators regarding the field of co-operative
work in which the students are placed. During the upperclass years
students continue to have frequent conferences with their co-
ordinators regarding vocational adjustments and personal prob-
lems. In this way the progress of all students is observed and co-
ordinated with their college work to the end that maximum values
are obtained from their training at Northeastern.

Placement

The co-ordinator visits co-operating firms and arranges with
them for the employment of students under his charge. The range
of opportunities available to Northeastern students is wide, in-

DAY COLLEGES 41

eluding practically all phases of industrial life. As a general rule,
sophomores are placed upon routine and laborious jobs through
which they may prove their fitness for more responsible work.
The jobs upon which Northeastern students are employed are in
no sense protected opportunities. They are regular jobs under
actual business conditions and are held in competition with other
sources of supply. The only special privilege accorded North-
eastern students is that of attending college on the Co-operative
Plan. The University expects students to stand on their own feet
while on co-operative work, and advancement to the more
responsible jobs is based entirely upon meritorious performance.

Supervision and Guidance

While the University does not adopt a paternal attitude toward
co-operative work, it nevertheless assumes certain responsibilities
toward students and co-operating firms. Co-ordinators visit each
job in order that the employer may report upon the student's
achievement and that necessary adjustments may be made. Co-
ordinators supervise the assignment of students to various jobs
and in conjunction with employers arrange for promotions and
training schedules. Problems that arise on co-operative work are
adjusted by common agreement of co-ordinator, student, and em-
ployer. In the event of special difficulties or dissatisfaction, the
case may be adjusted by the Committee on Co-operative Work,
which comprises several members of the faculty.

Through a series of co-operative work reports prepared during
their working periods, students are led to analyze their jobs and to
develop a thoughtful and investigative attitude toward their
working environment. A most important phase of co-operative
work is the opportunity afforded for guidance by the frank dis-
cussion of actual problems encountered on the job. The intimate
contact between co-ordinator and student is of great worth in
helping the student to get the most value from each co-operative
work assignment. While the University endeavors to provide
every possible opportunity for its students, it expects them at the
same time to take the initiative and to assume the responsibility
involved in their individual development. To every student are
available the counsel and guidance of the faculty, and every
resource at its disposal. But the faculty does not coerce students
who are uninterested or unwilling to think for themselves.

The Co-operative Plan is thus designed specifically to provide
actual working conditions which afford the students practical
experience, give meaning to their program of study, and train
them in reliability, efficiency, and teamwork.

42 IsIORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Correlation of Theory and Practice

Co-operating companies employ the students, both men and
women, in the various departments of their establishments. The
training is thorough. To derive the greatest value from co-operative
work the student is advised to continue in the employ of the co-
operating firm for at least one year after graduation, since certain
types of work which would afford valuable experience cannot be
made available during the alternating period of work and study.
Statistics compiled over a period of many years show that an
average of from thirty-five to fifty per cent of each graduating class
remains with co-operating employers after graduation.

Co-Operative Work Reports

The values to be derived from practical experience are further
enhanced by required report writing. These co-operative work
reports are written during the working periods by all co-operative
students. A complete job analysis is required as the first report
written on any new co-operative work assignment. Subjects of
other reports are selected by the student after conference with the
Co-ordinator of Co-operative Work, by whom they must be
approved. The reports are designed to encourage observation and
investigation on the part of the students and to help them to
appreciate more fully the extent and value of their experience.
These reports are carefully read by the co-ordinator and are
discussed with the student during the following college period.
Exceptionally valuable results are obtained from these reports.
The value derived must necessarily be directly proportional to the
conscientious and intelligent concentration of effort by the student
upon this phase of the work.

Co-Operative Work Records

Complete and detailed records are kept of the co-operative
work of each student. They are based upon reports made by the
employer at the end of each working period; upon occasional
personal conferences between the employer and the co-ordinator;
and upon various evidences of the student's attitude toward all
the phases of his co-operative work. It is not possible for the
student to secure a degree unless this part of the curriculum is
completed satisfactorily. These records of practical experience
serve as a valuable future reference for the Alumni Placement
Division of the Department.

Positions Available

Because of uncertainties of business conditions, as well as other
reasons beyond its control, the University cannot and does not

DAY COLLEGES 43

guarantee to place students. However, past experience has demon-
strated that students who are willing and capable of adapting
themselves to existing conditions are almost never without em-
ployment except in periods of severe industrial depression.

Earnings

It should be understood that the primary purpose of the Co-
operative Plan is training. For this reason the rates of pay for
students tend to be low because students are given the privilege
of attending college on the Co-operative Plan and because effort
is made to provide the student with the opportunity of being
transferred, at reasonable intervals, from one department to
another of the co-operating company.

Location of Work

It is the policy of the University to assign students to co-opera-
tive work within commuting distance of their homes. This is not
always possible, however, and at times it may be necessary for
students to live away from home in order to obtain satisfactory
and desirable co-operative work assignments.

Types of Co-operative Work

In so far as possible students are placed at co-operative work
in that general field for which they express preference, provided
that aptitude, physical ability, temperament, and other personal
qualities appear to fit them for this field. Usually students are
placed first in those jobs of an organization where they may
learn the fundamental requirements of the business.

For example, a student interested in manufacturing might be
started as an operative on some machine in the plant. As progress
and other conditions warrant, transfer to other types of work,
such as shipping, inspecting, adjusting complaints, bookkeeping,
or cost finding, and so on, would take place so that in the course of
a period of four years of co-operative training the student would
have the opportunity to acquire a substantial background in at
least some of the functions of the factory administration. This
progressive type of training is more readily obtained in the employ
of one company. A change of company each year usually provides
more a change of environment than a progression of experiences.

Engineering firms, manufacturing companies, public utilities,
and many other types of enterprises are employing Northeastern
students. In some cases definite training schedules have been
established so as to permit the student one full year in each of
several important departments.

44 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Typical Co-operative Training Schedules

These schedules are arranged with the basic idea of giving the
student a comprehensive training through the several different de-
partments, but must of necessity be varied in accordance with the
needs of those departments.

BOSTON EDISON COMPANY

The schedule of the Boston Edison Company is divided into the following
general classifications. Very few co-operating students obtain experience in all
branches, but students progress from year to year in the respective branches
as conditions require.

Standardizing

(a) Testing and standardizing of electrical instruments

(b) Miscellaneous standardization

(d) Laboratory high voltage tests

Steam Practice

(a) Turbine, engine and boiler tests

(b) Instrument tests and repairs

Electrical Testing

(a) Testing and repairing of electrical instruments in power stations and

sub-stations

(b) Cable tests

(d) Checking up construction work

(e) Miscellaneous electrical tests

Chemical Engineering

(a) Fuel analysis

(b) Miscellaneous tests and analysis of oils, water paints, and other

materials

Photography
Office Work

HUNT-SPILLER MANUFACTURING CORPORATION

One Year General laboratory and plant work, including preparation of
samples
Pyrometry
Use and care of metallurgical apparatus

One Year Complete analysis of coal, coke, limestone, sand, iron, soil, etc.

One Year Keeping of general metallurgical records, filing, and making of
reports

One Year Analysis for combined, graphitic, and total carbon with a com-
plete knowledge of a carbon combustion apparatus

PEPPERELL MANUFACTURING COMPANY

One Year Stock Records
One Year Production Analysis
One Year Inventory Control

DAY COLLEGES 45

Qeneral information

College Expenses
Tuition

The tuition for all curricula in the Day Colleges is $250 per year,
or $125 per term. Certain fees and deposits are also required as
specified in the following paragraphs. A complete statement of
tuition and fee payments is given on page 46.

Students who carry academic loads of greater or less than
normal amount may pay their tuition on a semester hour basis.

University Fee

All students are charged a University Fee of twenty-four dollars
($24) a college year. This fee for upperclassmen is payable in
two installments: twelve dollars ($12) with the first payment of
tuition and twelve dollars ($12) with the second payment of
tuition. For freshmen it is payable fourteen dollars ($14) with the
first tuition payment and ten dollars ($10) with the second tuition
payment.

The University Fee covers library, laboratory, materials charges,
and similar items for which separate fees are frequently charged
by other colleges and universities. It is payable by all students
regardless of the curriculum in which they are enrolled.

Student Activities Fee

Each student in the Day Colleges is charged a student activities
fee of sixteen dollars ($16) each college year, for upperclassmen
payable one-half with each tuition payment and for freshmen
payable entirely with the first tuition payment. This fee supports
in part certain student activities, and includes membership in the
Northeastern Athletic Association and subscription to The North-
eastern News, the college paper.

The services of a physician are also available for all students
under this fee. Minor ailments are treated by the college health
officers without additional charge. Any student who shows signs
of more serious illness is immediately advised to consult a special-
ist or return home in order to receive further treatment.

Chemical Laboratory Deposit
(Applies only to students taking chemical and chemical engineering

laboratory work)
All upperclassmen taking chemical or chemical engineering
laboratory work are required to make a deposit of ten dollars

NORTHEASTER'N UhllVERSlTY

($10) at the beginning of each term from which deductions are
made for breakage, chemicals, and destruction of apparatus in
the laboratory. Freshmen taking chemistry make a chemical
laboratory deposit often dollars ($10) at the beginning of the year.
Any unused portion of this deposit will be returned to the
student at the end of the college year. If the charge for such
breakage, chemicals, or destruction of apparatus is more than the
sum deposited, the student will be charged the additional amount.

Schedule of Payments for Freshmen

First term Tuition $125.00

Fees 30.00

Chem. Lab. Deposit 10.00

Total $165.00

Second Term Tuition $125.00

Fees 10.00

Total $135.00

CIas5 Entering
September 1944
March 1945
June 1945

September 1945

Payment Due Dates

First Term
September 25, 1944
March 12, 1945

June 11, 1945

September 10, 1945

Second Term
January 29, 1945
July 16, 1945

October 15, 1945
January 14, 1946

Schedule of Payments for Upperclassmen

Payments due on opening day of each term as follows:

Tuition $125.00

Fees 20.00

Total $145.00

Deferred Payment Fee

There will be a $2.00 deferred payment fee added to all bills
which are not paid by the Saturday following the date on which
payments fall due. When further extensions of time are given
on payments which have been previously deferred, an additional
$2.00 fee may be charged for each extension.

Failure to make the required payments on time, or to arrange
for such payments, is considered sufficient cause to bar the student
from classes or suspend him from co-operative work until the
matter has been adjusted with the Registrar.

Late Registration Fee
A fee of $5.00 will be charged for failure to register in accordance
with prescribed regulations on the dates specified in the college
registration bulletins.

DAY COLLEGES 47

Graduation Fee

A fee often dollars ($10) covering graduation is required by the
University of all candidates for a degree. This fee must be paid
before the end of the seventh week of the second term in the
senior year.

Payments

All payments should be made at the comptroller's office which
is located on the first floor of Richards Hall. Checks should be
made payable to Northeastern University.

Refunds

The University provides all instruction and accommodations
on an academic term basis; therefore, no refunds are granted except in
cases where students are compelled to withdratu on account of personal
illness or to enter the armed forces of the nation.

Expenses

The following tables, compiled from expense returns submitted
by the student body, give an idea of freshman expenditures under
ordinary conditions.

Estimated College Expenses for a Freshman

Application Fee $ 5.00

Tuition and Fees 290.00

Chemical Laboratory Deposit 10.00

Books and Supplies 35.00

$340.00
(Engineering students should add approximately $25 for drawing
instruments and equipment.)

Estimated Living Expenses Per Week for a Freshman
Residing Away from Home

Room Rent $ 4.00-6.00

Board 7.00-9.00

Laundry 1.00

Incidentals 2.00

$14.00-18.00
The figures given above are approximate and may not exactly
apply to any one student; however, they will be found to repre-
sent fairly well the expense of a freshman who lives comfortably
but without extravagance.

48 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Textbooks and Supplies

The Northeastern University Bookstore, located in the base-
ment of Richards Hall, is a department of the University and is
operated for the convenience of the student body. All books and
supplies which are required by the students for their work in the
University may be purchased at the Bookstore.

All students may purchase Day College textbooks which are
for their own use at a ten per cent discount. The ten per cent
discount will not apply on equipment, supplies, or novelties. It is
the policy of the Bookstore, however, to stock these materials
and to sell them at the lowest possible prices.

Part-Time Work

Students who find it necessary to accept part-time jobs while
attending college may obtain such work through the Director of
Co-operative Work.

Students are not justified in assuming that the University will
take care of their expenses or guarantee to supply them with work
sufficient to meet all their needs.

A student should have available a reserve fund adequate to
provide for immediate needs and unexpected contingencies. This
should ordinarily amount to at least the first year's tuition plus
the student activity and other fees, room rent, and board for
several weeks, or a total of about $500.

Qrades and Examinations

Examinations

Examinations covering the work of the term are usually held
at the close of each term. Exceptions may be made in certain
courses where, in the opinion of the instructor, examinations are
not necessary.

Condition Examinations

Condition examinations are usually given on the Saturday
preceding the registration day of each term in which a course
starts. The charge is three dollars ($3.00) for each condition
examination. No student may take more than two condition
examinations on any one day.

A student must petition to take a condition examination at
least two weeks in advance of the date the examination is to be
given.

The responsibility for the removal of a condition rests with the
student, who is required to ascertain when and how the condition
can be removed.

DAY COLLEGES 49

Senior Condition Examinations

Condition examinations in first term senior courses will be
offered during the second term senior examination period. No
student will be allowed more than one such condition examination.

No condition examinations in second term senior courses are
offered at the end of the second term. This means that a failure in
a second term senior course cannot be made up before Com-
mencement.

Grades
A student's grade is officially recorded by letters, as follows:
A superior attainment
B above average attainment
C average attainment
D lowest passing grade, poor attainment (the faculty will

accept only a limited amount of grade D work toward

the Bachelor's degree)
F failure, removable by condition examination
FF complete failure, course must be repeated in class
I incomplete, used for intermediate grades only to signify

that the student has not had time to make up work lost

through excusable enforced absence from class
L used in all cases of the removal of a failure by condition

examination or by attendance at summer term.

A student who does not remove a condition before that course
is again scheduled, a year later, must repeat the course. A condi-
tion in more than one subject may involve the loss of assignment
to co-operative work.

The responsibility for the removal of a condition rests with the
student who is required to ascertain when and how the condition
can be removed.

Dean's List

A Dean's List, issued at the end of each term, contains the
names of upperclass students who have an honor grade average
in all subjects during the preceding period. Freshmen who achieve
high scholastic standing are included on a Freshman Honor List,
which is published at the end of each grading period. No student
under disciplinary restrictions is eligible for either of the honor
lists.

Reports on Scholastic Standing

Freshman reports are issued at the end of each grading period;
upperclass reports, at the end of each term. Questions relative
to grades are to be discussed with the student's faculty adviser.

50 l^ORTHEASTERN UTMIVERSITY

Students are constantly encouraged to maintain an acceptable
quality of college work. Parents and students are always welcomed
by the college officers and faculty advisers for conference upon
such matters.

Parents or guardians will be notified whenever students are
advised or required to withdraw from the University.

Qeneral Qonduct
Conduct

It is assumed that students come to the University for a serious
purpose and that they will cheerfully conform to such regulations
as may from time to time be made. In case of injury to any building
or to any of the furniture, apparatus, or other property of the
University, the damage will be charged to the student or students
known to be immediately concerned; but if the persons who
caused the damage are unknown, the cost for repairs may be
assessed equally upon all the students of the University.

Students are expected to observe the accepted rules of decorum,
to obey the regulations of the University, and to pay due respect
to its officers. Conduct inconsistent with the general good order
of the University or persistent neglect of work may be followed
by dismissal; if the offense be a less serious one, the student may
be placed upon probation. The student so placed upon pro-
bation may be dismissed if guilty of any further offense.

It is desired to administer the discipline of the University so as
to maintain a high standard of integrity and a scrupulous regard
for truth. The attempt of any student to present any work which
he or she has not performed, or to pass any examination by
improper means, is regarded as a most serious offense and renders
the offender liable to immediate expulsion. The aiding and abetting
of a student in any dishonesty is also held to be a grave breach
of discipline.

Scholastic Year for Seniors

Seniors of either division who are candidates for a degree in
the current year must have completed all academic work, class
assignments, theses, regular and special examinations, before
twelve o'clock noon of the Saturday next following the close of
recitations for seniors.

Attendance

Students are expected to attend all exercises in the subjects they
are studying unless excused in advance. Exercises are held and
students are expected to devote themselves to the work of the
University between 9:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., except for a lunch
period, on every week day.

DAY COLLEGES 51

No cuts are allowed. A careful record of each student's attend-
ance upon class exercises is kept. Absence from regularly sched-
uled exercises in any subject will seriously affect the standing of
the student. It may cause the removal of the subject or subjects
from a schedule. If, upon the presentation of a reasonable excuse
for the absence, however, the student may be allowed to make up
the time lost and be given credit for the work, which must be com-
pleted at such time and in such manner as the instructor in the
course may designate.

Laboratory work can be made up only when it is possible to
do so during hours of regularly scheduled instruction.

Absences from exercises immediately preceding or following a
recess are especially serious and entail severe penalties.

Attendance at all mass meetings of the student body is com-
pulsory. Exceptions to this rule are made only when the student
has received permission from the Director of Student Activities
previous to the meeting from which absence is desired.

Student housing

Housing Regulations

The University endeavors to exercise due consideration and
care for the student's welfare while he or she is in residence. This
necessitates the adoption of the rules and regulations presented
herewith.

1. Assignments will be made when the student registers.

2. Students may inspect rooms before accepting an assignment;
after reaching a decision students must notify the office of the
Registrar, 254R.

3. Students who accept room assignments must retain them
for the period of their residence, unless given permission by the
Registrar to change.

4. Students are not permitted to live in unsupervised quarters.
Under no conditions are groups of students permitted to lease
apartments.

5. Students are not permitted to engage rooms without the prior
approval of the University. Those violating this rule will be
required to give up such rooms immediately and will be assigned
by the University to approved quarters.

6. Violation of any of the above rules is considered a breach
of discipline and will be dealt with accordingly.

52 hlORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

Dormitories

At present the University does not maintain dormitories. Pro-
vision, however, is made for students to secure rooms in the
vicinity. Many freshmen prefer to take room and board at the
fraternity houses, which are all supervised by the University
through faculty advisers. For information relative to such housing
write the Director of Admissions.

Rooms in the dormitory of the Huntington Avenue Branch of
the Boston Y.M.C.A. may be secured only through the Housing
Department of the Y.M.C.A. The applicant must present himself
in person to a representative of the Department before assignment
will be made.

Applicants desiring to room in the Association dormitory are
advised to write the Housing Department of the Huntington
Avenue Branch, 316 Huntington Avenue, Boston, Massachusetts.

DAY COLLEGES 53

freshman Counseling

Freshman Orientation Period

In order that freshmen may be ready to pursue their academic
work with greater composure and be somewhat acclimated before
the beginning of scholastic work, three or four days prior to the
first term are devoted to a freshman orientation period. During
this time freshmen are advised as to choice of program, and assisted
in every way possible in order that they may be prepared to begin
serious study and work on the first day of the college term. All
freshmen are required to attend all exercises at the University
scheduled during the orientation period.

An optional feature of the orientation program is the freshman
camp conducted under the auspices of the Student Union. The
camp is planned particularly for out-of-town students, although
commuters are welcomed. It aims at providing a stimulating and
wholesome environment under vacation conditions in which the
new men may become acquainted with one another and with
members of the faculty. The camp site on Lake Massapoag, in
the northern part of Massachusetts, is admirably equipped for
this purpose, having ample facilities for baseball, basketball,
tennis, boating and swimming. The cost of the two days at camp
is nominal, and most freshmen avail themselves of this oppor-
tunity for recreation prior to the beginning of the college year.

Physical Examination

All freshmen receive a thorough physical examination at the
University during the orientation period. All students are expected
to report promptly at the appointed time for examination. Those
who fail to appear at the appointed time will be charged a special
examination fee of two dollars ($2.00).

Freshman Counselors

At the time of matriculation each freshman is assigned to a
personal adviser, a member of the faculty, who serves as an
interested and friendly counselor during the perplexing period of
transition from school to college. A personal record card is pre-
pared for each student, containing certain pertinent data from the
preparatory school record, the report of the physical examination
at Northeastern, scores on psychological tests, the results of place-
ment examinations, and any special notes which may be of signif-
icance in counseling work. The aim of the freshman advisory
system is primarily to assist students in making an effective start
upon their programs and secondarily to acquire for the later use

54 NORTHEASTERhl UNIVERSITY

of guidance officers a fund of significant information relative to
every freshman. Counseling is under the direction of the Dean of
Students, assisted by a clinical psychologist, who handles the
diagnosis and remedial treatment of difficult problem cases. Direct
counseling of women students is under the supervision of a woman
member of the staff with the title, Adviser for Women Students.

Individual Attention to Freshmen

Not only is attention given to the scholastic problems of the
student, but also to personal problems in which advice is needed
and desired. The aim is to guide the student to the fullest possible
personal development.

The college records of all students are carefully analyzed in the
light of what may reasonably be expected from them in view of
their previous school record, their scores on psychological tests,
and all other factors in their situations. If they are not doing their
best work, investigations are made to determine and eliminate the
causes. If they are doing as well as could be expected, or better,
they are encouraged to continue their efforts. In other words, each
student is held to the best work possible, through advice, encour-
agement, and assistance.

DAY COLLEGES 55

Scholarships^ Trizes and cAwards

Trustee Scholarships

Established in 1928 by the Board of Trustees of Northeastern
University. Each year the University grants in the three Day
Colleges twenty-five full tuition scholarships to entering freshmen
who have demonstrated throughout their preparatory or high
school course superior scholastic attainment. For additional
information relative to these scholarships communicate with the
Director of Admissions.

Charles Hayden Memorial Scholarships at
Northeastern University

Established in 1939 through the generosity of the Charles
Hayden Foundation and subject to annual renewal. The Founda-
tion, created by the will of the late Charles Hayden, an alumnus
of the Boston English High School, offers annually a sum of
money to be distributed as memorial scholarships at Northeastern
University. The scholarships are awarded to "deserving boys"
whose parents are unable to finance the entire cost of their educa-
tion. To be eligible for consideration a student must have gradu-
ated from the English High School or from one of the following
high schools in Boston and its metropolitan area: Arlington,
Belmont, Boston (Brighton, Charlestown, Commerce, Dorchester,
East Boston, English, Hyde Park, Jamaica Plain, Mechanic Arts,
Public Latin, Roslindale, Roxbury Memorial, South Boston),
Braintree, Brookline, Cambridge (High and Latin, Rindge Techni-
cal), Canton, Chelsea, Dedham, Everett, Lexington, Maiden, Med-
ford, Melrose, Milton, Needham, Newton, North Quincy, Quincy,
Revere, Somerville, Stoneham, Wakefield, Waltham, Watertown,
Wellesley, Weston, Weymouth, Winchester, Winthrop. While the
scholarships are designed primarily to assist students through their
freshman year in college, the Foundation has set up a supplemen-
tary loan fund to make available limited assistance to meet exigen-
cies which may arise in the upperclass years. Each recipient of a
Charles Hayden Memorial Scholarship is presented a properly
endorsed certificate and is eligible for membership in the Charles
Hayden Scholars Club of the University. Full particulars con-
cerning these awards may be obtained from the Director of Ad-
missions of Northeastern University.

Dean^s List Scholarships

Established in 1929. Annually at the Dean's List Dinner three
scholarships of one hundred dollars each, known as the Dean's

56 NORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

List Scholarships, are presented to the students with the outstand-
ing records in the sophomore, middler, and junior classes. These
scholarships are applicable to the recipients' tuition the first term
of the following year.

President's Letter

Established in 1929. At the time of the award of the Dean's List
Scholarships a President's Letter is presented to the senior student
who leads the seniors in the Day Colleges in scholastic achievement.
The letter is a congratulatory one from the President of the Uni-
versity and is a coveted prize.

Sears B. Condit Honor Awards

Established in 1940 through the generosity of Sears B. Condit.
In the fall of the year at a University convocation Sears B. Condit
Honor Awards, not less than ten in number, are awarded to
outstanding students in the upper three classes of the College
of Liberal Arts, the College of Business Administration, and the
College of Engineering. Students who have received the Dean's
List Scholarships are not eligible for one of these Honor Awards.
Each award carries a stipend of not less than fifty dollars as well
as a certificate of achievement.

Boston Society of Civil Engineers Scholarship in Memory of
Desmond FitzGerald

Established in 1931 by the Boston Society of Civil Engineers in
memory of Desmond FitzGerald, a former president of the Society
and an eminent hydraulic engineer with a distinguished record of
service. The scholarship is subject to annual renewal. It has been
awarded annually since 1931 to an outstanding Northeastern
University senior or junior student in the Department of Civil
Engineering of the College of Engineering. The presentation is
made by the President of the Boston Society of Civil Engineers
at a College of Engineering convocation in the spring of the year.

Tau Beta Pi Award

Massachusetts Epsilon Chapter of Tau Beta Pi Association,
national honorary society in engineering, offers annually a
scholarship of one hundred dollars to the freshman in the college
who has, during the previous year, made the highest scholastic
record.

The Sigma Society Award

Established in 1930. The Sigma Society, the honor society of the
College of Business Administration, offers annually a scholarship
of one hundred dollars to the freshman in the college who has,
during the previous year, made the highest scholastic record.

DAY COLLEGES 57

The Academy Award

Established in 1938. The Academy, the honor society of the
College of Liberal Arts, offers annually a scholarship of one
hundred dollars to the freshman in the college who has, during the
previous year, made the highest scholastic record.

Omega Sigma Award

Established in 1944. The Omega Sigma Society, composed of
women students at Northeastern University, offers annually a
scholarship of one hundred dollars to the woman student who,
by high scholastic attainment and by demonstration of the quality
of leadership, has proven herself the outstanding woman student
of the year.

Henry B. Alvord Memorial Scholarship in Civil Engineering

Established in 1940 in memory of the late Henry B. Alvord,
Professor of Civil Engineering and Chairman of the Department
for eighteen years. The award is made annually to a student
graduating from an accredited secondary school who has demon-
strated superior academic ability and gives promise of succeeding
in civil engineering. The grant of two hundred and fifty dollars
is made only to an entering freshman who is qualified for and
plans to study civil engineering.

William J. Alcott Memorial Award

Established in 1934 by members of the faculty and other friends
to perpetuate the memory of William Jefferson Alcott, Jr., a
brilliant member of the Department of Mathematics in North-
eastern University from 1924 until his death in 1933. The Award
is offered annually in the form of a prize purchased with the income
to the fund for outstanding scholastic achievement during the
preceding year, either in a particular field of interest or for a
superior academic record.

Public Speaking Contest

Established in 1922. Each spring the University conducts a
Public Speaking Contest for which all students in the Day Colleges
are eligible. Prizes of forty, thirty, twenty, and ten dollars respec-
tively are awarded to the four winning speakers in a contest before
the upperclass student body assembled in a general mass meeting.
Speeches are original in nature and about ten minutes in length.
The judges base their decision on appropriateness of subject,
content, and delivery. Preliminary contests are held during the
winter in each division.

NORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

U^lprtheastern University and (^Affiliated Schools

including IjlJar Courses

Statistical Summary

1942-1943

General Administration

Administrative and
Instructional Stajf

14*

Northeastern University

College of Liberal Arts
Day
Evening

College of Engineering

College of Business Administra-
tion

Summer Day College

School of Business

School of Law (Day and Evening)

Affiliated Schools

Lincoln Technical Institute
Lincoln Preparatory School
Huntington Day School for Boys
Huntington Summer School

Less Duplicates
War Courses

Civilian Pilot Training Program
Engineering Defense Program
Engineering Science Manage-
ment War Training

Less Duplicates

Less Duplicates between War
Courses and Schools and
Colleges

Different Number

56
12
81

71*
17*

11
398
147 251

11
166

177

_1 176

427

_65

362

Enrollment

522

131

1733

529

26
691*
174*

715
470
183
191

5365
226 5139

252
3114

3366
34 3332
8471

8431

*These figures include the administrative officers, faculties, and
students of the Divisions of the University in Worcester, Springfield,
and Providence.

DAY COLLEGES

^he (Alumni cAssociation

THE ALUMNI of the Day Colleges are organized to promote
the welfare of Northeastern University, to establish a
mutually beneficial relationship between the University and
its alumni, and to perpetuate the spirit of fellowship among mem-
bers of the Alumni Association.

The work of the General Alumni Association is supplemented
by the activities of regional alumni clubs located throughout the
East and Middle West. The local clubs meet periodically in their
respective centers to discuss matters pertaining to the University
and its alumni. Meetings are also held in conjunction with the
visits of Northeastern's athletic teams to the various club centers.

The Alumni Council

President

James W. Daniels '25
Secretary

Carl M. Weaver '34

Vice-President

Raymond W. James '32
Treasurer

John E. Vadala '31

Executive Committee

George C. Thompson '30
Wallace E. MacQuarrie '40
Edward V. Kirkland '35

Charles M. McCoombe *26
Horace C. Houghton '26
Douglas F. Tulloch '24

Director of Alumni Relations
Rudolf O. Oberg '26

Alumni Council Representatives

1913- Bernard H. Capen '20
1920 James A. Knowlton '19
Perry F. Zwisler '17
1921 — Roger E. Spear
1922 — Laurence S. Faunce
1923 — Edward J. Ferry
1924 — H. Raymond Benson
1925 — Rene G. Maurette
1926 — Henry F. Callahan
1927 — Leon Prior
1928 — Howard F. Knowles
1929 — ^James H. Kinghorn
1930— Harry C. Stedt

1931 — Thomas E. Rushforth
1932 — Albert E. Johnson
1934 — Horace S. Miles
1935 — Donald Powers
1936 — William E. Dingwell
1937 — Warren L. Ganong
1938 — Ivan G. Easton
1939— William E. Feidt
1940 — Albert S. Makas
1941 — David C. Gerry
1942 — William W. Robinson
1943 — Richard M. Hatch

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

COLLEGE OF

Liberal Arts

Admission Requirements and Courses of Study

1944,1946

(CO-EDUCATIONAL)

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS

July, 1944

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 63

THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

c5^Z

ims

IN PROVIDING the means to a liberal education the College of
Liberal Arts of Northeastern University has a threefold
objective: first, the development of intellectual capability;
second, the development of a well-rounded personality; and third,
preparation for a vocation.

While a liberal arts education is based upon a knowledge of the
development of the human race and of human experience down
through the ages as well as familiarity with the world in which
we live, the mere accumulation of a mass of factual information
is not adequate. A truly liberal education must develop intellec-
tual capability, the acquisition of definite intellectual interests, and
the attainment of rational attitudes and points of view. A liberal
education should produce an open mind, free from bias and
prejudice; an eagerness for truth; a critical skepticism which insists
upon the examination of the basis for every belief and the testing
of every proposal before giving it adherence; the ability to analyze
the several elements of a problem, to perceive its implications, and
to obtain a clear perspective of the entire situation; a deep respect
for human institutions and conventions based upon an under-
standing of the processes of social development but with a willing-
ness to consider judicially suggested improvements.

In providing for the development of a well-rounded person-
ality the College of Liberal Arts endeavors to aid each student in
the unfolding of those personality traits and the attaining of that
emotional balance which will make him not only individually
efficient but also a desirable citizen, qualified in every respect to
accept his social responsibilities.

The College of Liberal Arts holds that there is no inconsistency
between liberal education and preparation for a vocation, since
liberal arts colleges were originally established with the purpose
of training for certain professions. Today it is widely accepted
that a liberal education must prepare both for the art of living and
for the obtaining of a living. The College of Liberal Arts aims at
providing an academic program coupled with co-operative work
experience which will furnish students with a sound training
either for further graduate study or for immediate entrance upon
graduation into some vocation.

64 T^ORTHEASTERl^ UNIVERSITY

oMethods

So that each student may plan a college program to suit his
own interests and aptitudes, a wide range of electives is offered.
This does not mean that students are free to elect courses in-
discriminately, for if they are to obtain a liberal education they
must have training in several basic fields. Therefore, a definite
series of basic courses in each curriculum is required by the faculty.
These required courses are largely concentrated in the first two
years of the curriculum.

Through a comprehensive guidance program students are
directed in their selection of courses so that they obtain the proper
preparation for their intended vocations. Specialization in a
major field is emphasized during the latter part of the curriculum
and is facilitated by the opportunity for electing certain courses in
the College of Engineering and the College of Business Adminis-
tration.

Through the Northeastern plan of co-operative education for
upperclassmen, the student makes early contact with actual work-
ing conditions and profits by the wholesome experience of earning
at least part of the money to defray college expenses. Viewed as a
whole, then, the college years surround the student not with an
artificial atmosphere of cloistered scholarship but with an environ-
ment very close to that which he or she will enter after graduation,
and thus tend to make for more ready employment, an essential
element of vocational competence.

Evening Courses

In order to provide employed men and women with oppor-
tunities in liberal arts education, a number of the regular courses
are offered during the evening. These courses are designed for
three groups of young men and women who are secondary school
graduates and qualified for entrance to the college: (1) those who
wish to prepare for admission to the School of Law, (2) those who
wish to pursue a cultural program leading to the title of Associate
in Arts, (3) those who do not wish to follow a specific program
but desire to take courses to improve their cultural background.

The evening courses are arranged in three-year programs per-
mitting concentration in English, history and government, and the
social sciences, and a pre-legal program. Each of these evening
programs meets one-half the semester hour requirement for the
A.B. or S.B. degree and leads to the title of Associate in Arts.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 65

Preparation for a Career

The curricula in the College of Liberal Arts afford not only a
broad cultural training but also the necessary foundation for a
wide range of vocations for both young men and young women.
Some of the career opportunities open to the graduates of the
College of Liberal Arts together with the academic programs
needed are indicated below and in the pages which follow.

Business

The value of a liberal arts preparation for a business career is
clearly shown by the increasing demand for liberal arts graduates
by the largest and most progressive corporations in the country.
For their training programs in manufacturing, merchandising, or
selling many companies are seeking adaptable young men and
women with a liberal arts background.

Students planning either to go to a graduate school of business
administration or to enter business directly upon graduation should
major in economics and should elect courses in English, govern-
ment and psychology. A limited number of specialized courses in
the College of Business Administration such as advertising, con-
tracts, industrial management, insurance, investments, real estate
practice, and retail merchandising may be taken by students who
have had the necessary prerequisites.

Biological Sciences

Students who major in biology can arrange programs which will
lay the foundation for the following careers: teaching, dentistry,
medicine (see Pre-Medical curriculum), veterinary medicine, public
health, sanitation and laboratory methods; research in biology
with universities, private research institutions, and governmental
agencies under state and federal control; agriculture; and pro-
fessional work in zoology and its applied fields such as fisheries,
animal husbandry, and biological survey, etc. Graduate study is
essential for most of these careers.

Chemistry

Chemistry is rapidly approaching the status of a profession as
shown by the recent action of the American Chemical Society
in laying down specifications for approved undergraduate training
in chemistry. Students who choose a chemistry major at North-
eastern, a program based upon the above specifications, will be
prepared upon graduation to become junior chemists in industrial,
commercial, or governmental chemistry laboratories. The same pro-
gram provides a thorough foundation for graduate study in chemistry.

Dentistry

The minimum requirement for admission to dental schools is
two years of preliminary study in an approved college. Since the

66 hlORTHEASTERN WNIVERSITY

requirements of individual dental schools vary, students should
familiarize themselves with the specific requirements of the schools
in which they are interested. For most dental schools a candidate
for admission must offer at least six semester hours each in English,
physics, and biology, and twelve semester hours in chemistry
including organic chemistry.

Pre-dental students at Northeastern will be able to meet these
requirements by taking the first two years of the pre-medical
program.

Government Service

Government service is a very comprehensive term since the
numerous activities of modern government require all types of
trained workers. For more and more of these positions a college
education is essential as shown by the fact that only college
graduates are eligible to take many civil service examinations
today. Recently the United States Civil Service Commission
inaugurated examinations for graduating seniors for such posi-
tions as Junior Biologist, Junior Economist, Junior Statistician,
Junior Examination Assistant (for majors in pyschology), Junior
Administrative Technician, etc.

The distinctive governmental career field is that of public ad-
ministration since the need for college trained personnel in
administrative governmental posts of all types, political or non-
political, is being increasingly recognized. While graduate training
is desirable, an undergraduate program with a major in economics
and a minor in government will provide the necessary foundation
for a career in government service at home or abroad.

Journalism

Many of the nation's leading editors now advise students
preparing for a career in journalism to obtain a broad liberal
arts education rather than to concentrate on specific training
in the routines of journalism in their undergraduate programs.
It should be observed that opportunities in journalism today are
not restricted to the urban or rural newspaper fields. Publishing
houses, trade journals, house organs, advertising departments and
agencies, and the various types of public relations work need
college graduates with the same basic training.

Students who desire to enter journalism should choose the
English-journalism major with minors from the following fields:
economics, history, and government. They may elect courses in
advertising in the College of Business Administration.

Ldiv

Effective September 1, 1938, by a ruling of the Supreme Judicial
Court of Massachusetts, in order to be eligible for admission to the
bar an applicant must have completed certain general educational
requirements before beginning a legal education. Briefly, this

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 67

general education must comprise graduation from a four-year
high school and the completion of not less than half of the work
accepted for the Bachelor's degree in a college approved by the
Board of Bar Examiners.

The College of Liberal Arts offers two programs of pre-legal
study designed to meet the above requirements.

One of these programs is specifically adapted to the needs of
full-time day students. It comprises two years of full-time academic
work which can be completed in a period of eighteen months
under the accelerated program. This program follows the second
year requirements of the major in economics but permits the
student to elect the courses in history, government, and English
which are recommended for the prospective student of law.

The other pre-legal program is designed to meet the needs of
employed men and women. It is provided by offering a number
of the regular courses during the evening and requires three years
for completion.

(COMBINED PROGRAM)
Law — Liberal Arts

The combined curriculum in the College of Liberal Arts and the
School of Law enables students to reduce by one year the time
ordinarily required for obtaining the A.B. or S.B. and the LL.B.
degree. Students who have completed before entering the School
of Law a total of 105 semester hours of academic work of which at
least 70 must have been earned in the Northeastern University
College of Liberal Arts, and who have fulfilled all other graduation
requirements, will receive the A.B. or S.B. degree upon the satis-
factory completion of the full first year program in the Day Divi-
sion of the School of Law. Students who enter the Evening Divi-
sion of the School of Law will be eligible for the first degree upon
satisfactory completion of the full equivalent of the first year of
the day Law School program.

In both instances the first degree will be conferred at the next
commencement following determination of eligibility for the first
degree.

Library Work

Professional training for library work now demands at least one
year of graduate study in a library school following a broad
undergraduate foundation in liberal arts. While a major in
English is usually advised, many opportunities are available for
those who have concentrated in other fields.

Medicine

In order to be eligible for admission to a medical school accord-
ing to the Committee on Education of the American Medical
Association, a candidate must have attended an approved college
and have included certain specific work in his program. The
minimum course requirements are: six semester hours of English,

68 hlORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

eight semester hours of inorganic chemistry, four semester hours
of organic chemistry, eight semester hours of physics, eight semes-
ter hours of biology, eight semester hours of foreign languages,
and twelve semester hours of non-scientific subjects. Since some
medical schools impose additional requirements, pre-medical
students should obtain full information from the medical school
of their choice about the courses which must be offered for
admission.

As a result of a recent wartime reduction in the entrance re-
quirements of most medical schools, an accelerated pre-medical
program has been arranged which requires two full academic years
for completion.

Ministry

Preparation for the ministry today requires a theological school
training following graduation from an approved college of liberal
arts. The American Association of Theological Schools states
that the appropriate foundation for a minister's later professional
studies lies in a broad and comprehensive college education and
that the normal place for a minister's professional study is the
theological school. Recommended fields of study include: English,
economics, education, government, history, foreign languages,
one of the natural sciences, philosophy, psychology, and sociology.

While students who major in English, economics, psychology,
or sociology will be able to arrange programs meeting the above
recommendations, it is urged that pre-ministerial students obtain
counsel from the dean of the theological school of their choice
since some schools have further specific requirements.

Physics

As a result of the rapid developments in physics in recent years,
there are increasing opportunities in applied physics on the tech-
nical staffs and in the research laboratories of the electrical, radio,
optical, and other industries for the liberal arts graduate who has
majored in physics. Graduate study is necessary for those who
plan on research in pure physics.

Psychology

There is an increasing demand for persons trained in psychology
in a wide range of occupational fields. In the field of education
the demand is expanding for school psychologists at the grade-
school level and for guidance workers and vocational counselors
at the junior and senior high school level.

In the field of business and industry increasing numbers of
psychologists are being employed in marketing research, in ad-
vertising, and in personnel departments. In state and federal
governmental agencies clinical psychologists are employed in
hospitals for the mentally ill, in child guidance clinics, in employ-
ment offices, and as research workers on problems relating to cultural

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 69

relations with other countries, to propaganda, and to education.
A large number of these positions require that the applicant
have at least one year of graduate work and not a few require
that he or she have a Ph.D. degree. For many others, however,
college graduates with a major in psychology begin an internship
with the firm or agency which employs them and then continue
after this internship in a regular full-time position.

Social Service

Students who major in sociology lay the undergraduate founda-
tion for numerous phases of work with either private or public
agencies in the social service field, such as social case work, family
welfare, child welfare, probation and parole, juvenile court, and
settlement work, and relief administration. At least one year of
graduate study in a school of social work is essential for those who
desire full professional status.

Statistical Work

The growing emphasis upon statistics in business, education,
social service, and government has opened a new career field for
the student who majors in mathematics and obtains preparation
in statistics. Similar training is necessary for students who wish
to enter the actuarial field.

Teaching (Secondary School)

While a major in education is not offered in the College of
Liberal Arts, a minor in this field is available which meets the
recommended preparation of the Department of Education of the
Commonwealth of Massachusetts for teachers in secondary
schools. Students from other states should familiarize themselves
with the requirements of their own state as these requirements are
constantly being increased.

Most small secondary schools, in which the graduate must
begin, expect teachers to be able to teach at least two, and often
three, subjects. Consequently programs should provide for the
common combinations of related subjects. A major should be
selected from the following fields: biology, chemistry, English,
mathematics, or physics.

Students who desire to become teacher-coaches should obtain
a second minor in physical education.

Teaching (College)

Students who plan to enter the college teaching profession will
find that each of the major programs affords an excellent prepara-
tion for graduate study in the leading universities of the country.
Since graduate schools usually require a reading knowledge of
French or German, frequently both, students should elect adequate
work in these languages. Seminar courses and thesis work are
strongly recommended for their training in research techniques.

70 NORTHEASTERlsI UNIVERSITY

(Admission "^quirements

Applicants for admission to the freshman class must qualify
by one of the following methods:

1. Graduation from an approved course of study in an accred-
ited secondary school, including prescribed subjects listed below.

2. Completion of fifteen acceptable secondary school units with
a degree of proficiency satisfactory to the Department of Admis-
sions.

3. Examinations.

(Certificate of entrance examinations passed for admission
to recognized colleges and technical schools may be accepted.)

Prescribed Subjects for Admission

College of Liberal Arts

The College of Liberal Arts offers courses leading either to the
A.B. or to the S.B. degree. According to the degree which he
expects to receive, the student will present for admission one or
the other of the groups of prescribed subjects listed below.

A.B. Curriculum

S.B. Curriculum

Units

English (4 years)

Foreign Language

fMathematics

2 or 3

(Ancient or Modern)

Natural Science

Social Studies

*Electives

8 or 9

*Electives

Total 15 Total 15

A unit is a credit given to an acceptable secondary school
course which meets at least four times a week for periods of not
less than forty minutes each throughout the school year.

Entrance examinations are not required of students whose
transcripts of record are acceptable, but the Department of Ad-
missions reserves the right to require a candidate to be present
for an examination in any subjects that it may deem necessary
because of some weakness in the secondary school record.

*Not less than four of the "electives" must be in one or more of the following
academic branches: Languages, Natural Science, Mathematics, Social Sciences,
History.

tStudents expecting to major in chemistry, mathematics, or physics must
offer 3 units.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 71

Other Requirements

These formal requirements are necessary and desirable in that
they tend to provide all entering students with a common ground
upon which the first year of the college curriculum can be based.
But academic credits alone are not an adequate indication of a
student's ability to profit by a college education. Consequently,
the Department of Admissions takes into consideration, along
with the formal requirements, many other factors regarding candi-
dates for the freshman class. The Committee considers a student's
interests and aptitudes in so far as they can be determined, capacity
for hard work, attitude toward classmates and teachers in high
school, physical stamina, and most important of all — character.
In this way the University seeks to select for its student body those
who not only meet the academic admission requirements but who
also give promise of acquitting themselves creditably in the rigor-
ous program of training afforded by the Co-operative Plan and of
later becoming useful members of society.

Personal Interview

Candidates for admission should communicate with the Director
of Admissions, who will advise them frankly on the basis of past
experience. A personal interview is always preferred to corre-
spondence, and parents are urged to accompany the applicant
whenever this is possible. Effective guidance depends in large
measure upon a complete knowledge of a candidate's background
and problems. Parents invariably are able to contribute much in-
formation that aids the admissions officer in arriving at a decision.

Candidates are urged to visit the office of Admissions for
personal interview if it is possible for them to do so before sub-
mitting their applications. Office hours of the Department are
from 9:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. daily; Saturdays to 12:00 m. The
Director of Admissions will interview applicants on Wednesday
evenings but by appointment only.

Application for Admission

Each applicant for admission is required to fill out an applica-
tion blank stating previous education, as well as the names of
persons to whom reference may be made.

An application fee of five dollars ($5.00) is required when the
application is filed. This fee is non-returnable.

The last page of this catalog is in the form of an application
blank. It should be filled out in ink and forwarded with the
required five dollar fee to Director of Admissions, Northeastern
University, Boston, Mass. Checks should be made out to North-
eastern University.

72 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Upon receipt of the application, properly filled out, the college
at once looks up the applicant's references and secondary school
records. When replies have been received to the various inquiries,
the applicant is informed as to his eligibility for admission.

An application should be filed at least a month prior to the date
of registration.

The University reserves the right to place any entering student
upon an indefinite trial period. Reclassification would be deter-
mined upon the academic success of the student.

Registration

Eligibility for admission does not constitute registration. Fresh-
men will register at the University on Sept. 25, 1944, March 12,
1945, June 11, 1945, Sept. 10, 1945. Students are not considered
to have met the requirements for admission until they have suc-
cessfully passed the required physical examination.

Advanced Standing

Students transferring from approved colleges will be admitted
to advanced standing provided their records warrant it. Whenever
a student enters with advanced standing and later proves to have
had inadequate preparation in any of his prerequisite subjects,
the faculty reserves the right to require the student to make up
such deficiencies.

Applicants seeking advanced standing should arrange to have
transcripts of their previous college records forwarded with their
initial inquiry. Students admitted to advanced standing are not
eligible for placement at co-operative work until they have com-
pleted a full year of academic work at the University.

Entrance Examinations

Students who are deficient in required units for admission may
remove these deficiencies by examination. Such examinations
are held at the University unless special arrangements are made
with the Department of Admissions to administer them elsewhere.
Students are advised to take such examinations on the earliest
possible date in order that any deficiencies which they fail to clear
may be made up in time to permit registration with the desired class
and division.

The time of examinations is as follows:

10:00 A.M. to 12:00 M.
1:00 P.M. to 3:00 P.M.

During the current year examinations will be given approximately
three weeks before each registration date.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 73

Outline of Freshman Courses

The first year is a period of full-time study during which the
student must demonstrate fitness for the program which has been
elected. Students who are unsuccessful in the basic courses of the
freshman year will not be permitted to continue with their ad-
vanced program, but will be advised to change their goal and type
of training. In some instances this will mean change to another
curriculum at Northeastern; in others, transfer to another institu-
tion. The freshman courses are so arranged as to permit change of
objective at the end of the first year with a minimum loss of time.

hlORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

C.H.

freshman Programs

1. For students majoring in Economics, English, English-Journalism, Psychology,
Sociology, or taking the Pre-Legal program.

No. Course C.H.

E 2-A English 1 3

H 2 History of Civilization . . 4

Gv 2 American Government. 3
P 2-A Surv. of Phys. Science or

B 2 General Botany 4

F 4, G 2,

or Sp 2 French, German, or

Spanish 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

No.
El-A
H 1
Gv 1
P i-A
B 1

Course

English 1 3

History of Civilization . . 4
American Government. 3
Surv. of Phys. Science or

General Zoology 4

F3, G 1,

or Sp 1 French, German, or

Spanish 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training 2

2. For students majoring in Chemistry,
No. Course C.H.

E 1-A English 1 3

M 1, M 3 Algebra, Trigonometry 5

P 1 Physics I 3

Ch 1 General Chemistry 6

F3, G 1,

or Sp 1 French, German, or

Spanish 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training 2

Mathematics, and Physics.
No. Course C.H.

E2-A English 1 3

M 4 Analytic Geometry 5

P2 Physics 1 3

Ch 2 General Chemistry 6

F 4, G 2,

or Sp 2 French, German, or

Spanish 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

3. For students majoring in Biology, or
program.

No. Course C.H.

E 1-A English 1 3

M 1, M 3 Algebra, Trigonometry . 5

B 1 General Zoology 4

Ch 1 General Chemistry 6

F3,G 1,

or Sp 1 French, German, or

Spanish 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training 2

taking the Pre-Dental or Pre-Medical

No. Course C.H.

E 2-A English I 3

M 4 Analytic Geometry 5

B 2 General Botany 4

Ch 2 General Chemistry 6

F4, G2,

or Sp 2 French, German, or

Spanish 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 75

"^^quirements for Qraduation

In order to qualify as a candidate for the A.B. or S.B. degree a
student must complete with a degree of proficiency acceptable to
the faculty a total of not less than 135 semester hours of credit.*
College attendance for 128 weeks is needed to fulfill this require-
ment.

The above total must include:

1. The prescribed program for the freshman year.

2. The courses specified in the upperclass curriculum for the
student's major field. (See pages 76 to 78.)

3. From twelve to sixteen semester hours, representing six term
courses, in each of two minor fields.

4. Twelve semester hours in foreign language. The elementary
course in a language will not be accepted in fulfillment of this
requirement unless followed by a second year in the same
language.

Graduation with Honor

Candidates who have achieved distinctly superior attainment
in their academic work will be graduated with honor. Upon
special vote of the faculty a limited number of this group may be
graduated with high honor or with highest honor. Students must
have been in attendance at the University at least three years
before they may become eligible for honors at graduation.

*Students who undertake any co-operative work assignment must also meet
the requirements of the Department of Co-operative Work before they become
eUgible for their degrees.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Qurricular "^quirements

The following fields of study are approved as major fields in the
College of Liberal Arts: biology, chemistry, economics, English,
English-journalism, mathematics, physics, pre-medical (biology-
chemistry), psychology, and sociology. In addition two-year
programs are approved for pre-dental, pre-medical, and pre-legal
students.

Required upperclass courses for students in each field are listed
below. Upon petition to the faculty, substitutions may be per-
mitted in some instances.

Courses in

BIOLOGY

Courses in
other fields

Courses in
chemistry

Courses in
other fields

Biology

B 3 Invertebrate Zoology

B 5 Vertebrate Zoology

B 17 Mammalian Anatomy

B 61 Seminar

fourteen elective semester hours.

six semester hours in French or German, eight semester hours

in physics, six semester hours in English.

B 4 Invertebrate Zoology
B 6 Vertebrate Zoology
B 18 Mammalian Anatomy
B 62 Seminar

Chemistry

Ch 9 Qualitative Analysis Ch 12
Ch 11 Qualitative Analysis Ch 14

Laboratory
Ch 13 Quantitative Analysis
Ch 17 Quantitative Analysis

Laboratory
Ch 31 Organic Chemistry
Ch 33 Organic Chemistry

Laboratory
Ch 35 Organic Chemistry
Ch 39 Organic Chemistry

Laboratory
Ch 45 Physical Chemistry Ch 46

Ch 51 Sources of Information Ch 48
Ch 63 Advanced Chemistry Ch 64

Quantitative Analysis
Quantitative Analysis
Laboratory

Ch32
Ch34

Organic Chemistry
Organic Chemistry
Laboratory
Ch 40 Physical Chemistry

Physical Chemistry
Colloidal Chemistry
Advanced Chemistry

six semester hours in French or German, six semester hours in
mathematics, twelve semester hours in physics, and sixteen
semester hours in non-scientific fields.

Economics

Courses in Ec 3 Economic Principles

ECONOMICS Ec 5 Economic Problems

Ec 7 Money and Banking

Ec 11 Labor Problems

Ec 15 History of Economic

Thought
Ec 17 Statistics
six elective semester hours.
Courses in six semester hours in modern
OTHER FIELDS English, twelve semester hours

Ec 4 Economic Principles
Ec 6 Economic Problems
Ec 8 Business Cycles
Ec 14 International Economic

Relations
Ec 16 Advanced Economic

Theory
Ec 18 Statistics

languages, six semester hours in
in the allied social sciences.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

English

Courses in E 5 Advanced Composition E 6 Advanced Composirion

E 16 English Literature
E 18 Chaucer

E 20 Shakespeare

E 24 Nineteenth Century Prose

E 26 American Literature
E 30 Great European Writers

Courses in six semester hours in modern languages, sixteen semester hours

OTHER FIELDS in the social sciences.

E 5 Advanced Composition
E 15 English Literature
El? Drama before Shakes-
peare
E 19 Shakespeare
E 23 Seventeenth and Eight-
eenth Century Prose
E 25 American Literature
E 29 Great European Writers

English'] ournalism

Courses in E 5 Advanced Composition

ENGLISH E 9 Journalism I

Ell Journalism II
E 15 English Literature
E 23 Seventeenth and Eight-
eenth Century Prose
E 25 American Literature
E 29 Great European Writers

Courses in six semester hours in modern

other nELDS hours in the social sciences.

E 6 Advanced Composition

E 10 Journalism 1

E 12 Journalism II

E 16 English Literature

E 24 Nineteenth Century Prose

E 26 American Literature
E 30 Great European Writers
languages and sixteen semester

Mathematics

Courses in M 5 Differential Calculus
mathematics M 7 Differential Equations I

M 15 Advanced Calculus

M 17 Series

six elective semester hours.
Courses in six semester hours in French or German, twelve semester hours
OTHER fields in physics, and ten semester hours in non-scientific fields.

M 6 Integral Calculus

M 8 Differential Equations II

M 16 Advanced Calculus

M 18 Theory of Equations

Courses in

OTHER fields

Phy.

SICS

P 3 Physics II

P 5 Physics Laboratory

P 9 Optics

P 13 Acoustics

P 15 Modern Physics

six elective semester hours.

six semester hours in French or German, twelve semester hours

in mathematics, and ten semester hours in non-scientific fields.

P 4 Physics II

P 6 Physics Laboratory

P 10 Optics

P 14 Acoustics

P 16 Modern Physics

Pre-Dental

(See page 66)

Pre-Legal

(See page 67)

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Pre-Medical (Biology-Chemistry)

Courses in *B 3 Invertebrate Zoology
BIOLOGY B 5 Vertebrate Zoology

*B 17 Mammalian Anatomy
six elective semester hours.
Courses in Ch 25 Organic Chemistry
CHEMISTRY Ch 27 Organic Chemistry

Laboratory
Courses in six semester hours in French or German, eight semester hours
OTHER FIELDS in physics, twelve semester hours in non-scientific fields.

*B 4 Invertebrate Zoology

B 6 Vertebrate Zoology
*B 18 Mammalian Anatomy

Ch 26 Organic Chemistry
Ch 28 Organic Chemistry
Laboratory

Courses in
psychology

Courses in
other fields

Ps 1

Ps3
Ps5

Ps7

Ps9

Psychology

Ps 2 General Psychology

Ps 4 Differential Psychology
Ps 8 Social Psychology,

Theory and Methods
Ps 10 Abnormal Psychology

Ps 14 Advanced Experi-
mental Laboratory
Ps 13 Psychological Testing

six elective semester hours in psychology or sociology,
six semester hours in French or German, six semester hours in
English, twelve semester hours in allied social sciences.

Introduction to Differ-
ential Psychology
Experimental Psychology
Educational Psychology

Social Psychology of

Everyday Life
Psychology of Personality

Sociology

Courses in SI Introduction to Sociology
SOCIOLOGY S 3 Social Problems
S 5 Criminology
S 7 Principles of Social Ethics
S 9 The Family
S 11 Social Control
S 15 History of Sociological

Thought
four elective semester hours in
Courses in six semester hours in modern
OTHER FIELDS English, twelve semester hours

S 2 Principles of Sociology

S 4 Social Pathology

S 6 Penology

S 8 Problems of Social Ethics

S 10 The Family

S 12 Social Progress

sociology or psychology,
languages, six semester hours in
in allied social sciences.

Minor Fields

Students may elect their minor fields after consultation with
their faculty advisers. In addition to the major fields listed the
following subjects are available as minors: education, French,
German, government, history, philosophy, physical education,
and Spanish.

"Not required in two-year program. See page 68.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 79

Qraduate S^^dy

Graduate work in physics and in chemistry is offered to properly
qualified students desiring to undertake advanced study leading
to the degree of Master of Science. Candidates for admission to
this program must be high ranking students who have completed,
or will have completed prior to admission to the graduate program,
the requirements for the Bachelor of Science degree with major in
chemistry or physics at an institution of recognized standing. At
the present time the program is limited to teaching fellows at
Northeastern University.

Requirements for the Master of Science Degree

Candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Chemistry
or Master of Science in Physics must have completed satisfactorily
30 semester hours of study beyond that required for the Bachelor's
degree. Of these, 18 semester hours (including thesis) must be
graduate courses in the major field of chemistry or physics; the
remaining 12 credits may be earned in a minor field.

The graduate courses are listed under the departments giving
graduate work. The minor credits may be selected from graduate
courses or from certain advanced undergraduate courses called
"B" courses. (Graduate students must obtain a grade of B or
better to receive credit for "B" courses.)

Candidates are also required to complete a satisfactory thesis
as a partial requirement for the Master's degree. Theses must be
completed in the field of major study and will be credited as eight
semester hours toward the major requirement. Theses must be
completed at least four weeks in advance of the date on which
the degree is to be awarded.

Finally, candidates are required to pass satisfactorily a compre-
hensive examination which may be written or oral at the discre-
tion of the department concerned.

List of "B" Courses

The "B" courses are divided into two groups. The first group is
comprised of subjects which may be elected to complete the re-
quirements for minor credits. The second group includes subjects
approved for graduate study only in limited amount.

The individual programs of study must have the approval of
the Director of Graduate Study who also acts as registration officer
for graduate students.

80 NORTHEASTERN UhllVERSITY

B Courses Group 1

No. Course Credits

B 3 Invertebrate Zoology 2

B 4 Invertebrate Zoology 2

B 5 Vertebrate Zoology 2

B 6 Vertebrate Zoology 2

B 15 Parasitology 2

B 16 Parasitology 2

B 17 Mammalian Anatomy 2

B 18 Mammalian Anatomy 2

B 25 General Entomology 3

B 26 Economic Entomology 3

Ch 41 Physical Chemistry 33^

Ch 42 Physical Chemistry 3^

Ch 63 Advanced Chemistry 2

Ch 64 Advanced Chemistry 3

Ch E 5 Unit Operations Lab 13^

Ch E 6 Unit Operations Lab 13'2

Ch Ell Chem. Eng. Thermodynamics 2

M 7 Differential Equations 1 3

M 8 Differential Equations II 3

M 15 Advanced Calculus 3

M 16 Advanced Calculus 3

M 17 Series 3

M 18 Theory of Equations 3

P 9 Optics 3

P 10 Optics 3

P 15 Modern Physics 3

P 16 Modern Physics 3

P 17 Electronics 3

P 18 Electronics 3

B Courses Group U

Ec 1 1 Labor Problems 3

Ec 14 International Economic Relations 3

Ec 15 History of Economic Thought 23^

Ec 16 Advanced Economic Theory 23^

Ed 1 History of Education 23^

Ed 2 History of Education 23^

Ed 3 Educational Measurements 23^

Ed 4 Educ. Org. and Adm 23^

Gv 3 Comparative Government 2

Gv 4 Comparative Government 2

Gv 7 Origins of Political Theory 23^

Gv 8 Modern Political Theory 23^

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 81

No. Course Credits

H7 England to 1688 2}4

H 8 England Since 1688 2i^

H 1 1 Latin American History 2}/^

H 12 Latin American History 2}/^

H 15 Far Eastern Relations 2^/^

Ph 3 History of Philosophy 2

Ph 4 History of Philosophy 2

Ps 5 Educational Psychology 3

Ps 7 Social Psychology of Everyday Life 2}/^

Ps 8 Social Psychology, Theory and Methods ... 2}^

S 7 Principles of Social Ethics 2}/^

S 8 Problems of Social Ethics 2}^

82 NORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

Synopses of Courses of instruction

On the pages which follow are given the synopses of courses
offered in the several curricula of the college. Courses offered in
the first semester bear odd numbers, and those offered in the
second semester bear even numbers.

The term prerequisite indicates a course that must be completed
with a passing grade before a student will be permitted to register
for the advanced course to which it applies. The term preparation
indicates a course of such a preparatory nature that students
undertaking an advanced course, without having had the prepara-
tion course specified, will ordinarily find themselves greatly handi-
capped, and may not register in the advanced course without the
consent of the instructor.

Freshman courses extend over a full semester of 16 weeks.
Upperclass courses are uniformly 12 weeks in length each term.
Unless otherwise noted all undergraduate courses meet for three
class periods each week.

The University reserves the right to withdraw any course in
which there is insufficient enrollment.

biology

botany Xp^logy

B 1 General Zoology

An introductory course dealing with the basic principles ot
zoology. A survey of the main types of animals; their classification,
structure, life history, distribution, and economic value. The
laboratory work illustrates the lectures.

2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

B 2 General Botany

An introductory course dealing with the basic principles of botany.
A general survey of the more important plant types throughout
the vegetable kingdom; their classification, structure, life history,
distribution, and economic value. The fundamentals of plant
physiology are stressed. The laboratory work illustrates the

lectures.

2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

B 3 Invertebrate Zoology

This course deals with the comparative development and structure
of the organic systems of invertebrate animals as represented by

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 83

the following phyla: Protozoa, Porifera, Coelenterata, Ctenophora,
Platythelminthes, Nemathelminthes, Trochelminthes, and Mol-
luscoidea; and their biological and ecological relationships. The
laboratory work consists of detailed dissection of representative
types.

Prerequisite: B 1 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

B 4 Invertebrate Zoology

Continues and presupposes course B 3. In this part of the course,
the lectures deal with the comparative development and structure
of the various organ systems of invertebrate animals as represented
by the following invertebrate phyla: Coelhelminthes, Mollusca,
Arthropoda, and Echinodermata; and their biological and ecolog-
ical relationships. The laboratory work consists of detailed dis-
section of representative types.

Preparation: B 3 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

B 5 Vertebrate Zoology

This course deals with the comparative anatomy of the integu-
ment; the skeletal, muscular, digestive and respiratory systems of
the principal classes of vertebrates. The laboratory work con-
sists of detailed dissection of representative types.

Prerequisite: B 1 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

B 6 Vertebrate Zoology

Continues and presupposes course B 5. In this part of the course,
the lectures deal with the comparative anatomy of the vascular,
excretory, reproductive and nervous systems together with the
organs of special sense of the principal classes of vertebrates.
The laboratory work consists of detailed dissection of representa-
tive types.

Preparation: B 5 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

B 7 Animal Physiology

This course deals with the functions of vertebrates with particular
emphasis on mammalian and human physiology. Demonstrations
are given from time to time and are arranged to correspond as
closely as possible with the lecture work.

Preparation: B 6 3 class hours

B 8 Animal Physiology

Continues and presupposes B 7.

Preparation: B 7 3 class hours

84 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

B 9 Principles of Genetics

This course deals with the laws of variation and inheritance; their
application to man and to domestic animals and plants.

Prerequisite: B 1, B 2 3 class hours

B 10 Principles of Genetics
Continues and presupposes B 9.

Preparation: B 9 3 class hours

B 11 Animal Histology

The lectures deal with the normal microscopic anatomy of the
cell, histogenesis, and the fundamental tissues of various inverte-
brates and vertebrates. The laboratory work illustrates the lectures
by means of microscopic preparations.

Prerequisite: B 6 2 class hours, 2 lah. hours

B 12 Animal Histology

Continues and presupposes course B 11. In this part of the course
a detailed study is made of the normal microscopic anatomy of
the organs of the lower and higher vertebrates. The laboratory
work illustrates the lectures by means of microscopic preparations.
Preparation: B 11 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

B 13 Vertebrate Embryology

The lectures deal with the early and late stages of development of
the Amphioxus, the Teleost, and the frog. The laboratory work
illustrates the lectures.

Prerequisite: B 6 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

B 14 Vertebrate Embryology

Continues and presupposes B 13. In this part of the course the
lectures deal with the early and late stages of development of the
chick and pig. The laboratory work illustrates the lectures.
Preparation: B 13 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

B 15 General Parasitology

This course deals with the more important species of parasites and
their relation to disease in man and the domestic animals. In this
part of the course the parasitic protozoa and flat worms are
considered.

Prerequisite: B 3, B 4 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL A'RTS 85

B 16 General Parasitology

Continues and presupposes B 15. In this part of the course the
parasitic round worms and arthropods are considered.

Preparation: B 15 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

B 17 Mammalian Anatomy

An advanced laboratory course in the dissection of a mammal.
In this part of the course, the skeletal, muscular, digestive, and
respiratory systems are considered.

Prerequisite: B 6 1 class hour, 6 lab. hours

B 18 Mammalian Anatomy

Continues and presupposes B 17. In this part of the course, the
urogenital, circulatory, and nervous systems are considered to-
gether with the organs of special sense.

Preparation: B 17 1 class hour, 6 lab. hours

B 19 Histological Technique

This course is designed to present the fundamentals of histological
technique. Lectures deal with the various methods of fixation,
clearing, hardening, embedding, section cutting, and staining of
various vertebrate, invertebrate, and plant tissues. Emphasis is
laid upon the laboratory work, which consists of preparing
histological slides.

Preparation: B 12 1 class hour, 6 lab. hours

B 20 Histological Technique

Continuation of course B 19.

Preparation: B 19 1 class hour, 6 lab. hours

B 21 History of Biology

A course treating the development of biological sciences from
the earliest times to the present, and tracing the history of bio-
logical investigations.

3 class hours

B 22 History of Biology

A continuation of B 21.

3 class hours

86 NORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

B 25 General Entomology

This course deals with the structure, classification, habits, life
histories, and distribution of insects. Detailed laboratory work
of representative types.

Prerequisite: B 1 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

B 26 Economic Entomology

Lectures, conferences, and laboratory work. This course deals
with the life histories and habits of injurious insects and of means
for their control.

Preparation: B 1, B 25 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

B 61 Seminar

Assigned readings and reports on selected topics. May be elected
with the consent of the department by qualified seniors majoring
in biology.

B 62 Seminar

A continuation of B 61.
Preparation: B 61

B 65 Thesis
See statement on Theses, page 136.

B 66 Thesis
A continuation of B 65.

Chemistry

3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

Ch 2 General Chemistry
A continuation of Ch 1. Modern ideas covering the theory of
solutions of electrolytes are discussed together with experimental
facts. The chemistry of the metals is covered thoroughly, and

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 87

time is devoted to an introduction to organic chemistry. The
latter part of the course is given to qualitative analysis with par-
ticular emphasis on the laboratory work.

Preparation: Ch 1 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

Ch 9 Qualitative Analysis

The object of this course is to give the student knowledge of the
various fundamental qualitative laws and principles. A portion
of the time is devoted to the formulation of numerical terms which
are essential to the understanding of the mass action law, ionic
equilibria, solubility product, hydrolysis, and redox instants. The
use of the newer spot tests is stressed and, where possible, their
reactions explained. Whenever necessary, lectures demonstrating
the various semi-micro techniques are given, as well as those de-
signed to illustrate more fundamental properties of solutions.
Prerequisite: Ch I, Ch 2 4 class hours

Ch 11 Qualitative Analysis Laboratory

This course, which is carried out on a semi-micro scale, applies
the material covered in Ch 9 to actual problems. After some
preliminary experiments, certain procedures are combined and the
separations and identifications made on both known and unknown
solutions. Finally, these are combined into a complete, systematic
scheme which is applied to artificially prepared mixtures and
industrial materials. Careful manipulations, thoroughness in
observation, and accuracy in arriving at conclusions are expected
of each student.

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 9 10 lab. hours

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2

Ch 12 Quantitative Analysis

It is the purpose of this course to give to the student a realization
of the scientific development of quantitative methods. Each of the
major operations such as weighing, measurement of volumes,
tetration, filtration, ignition, and combustion, is considered from
the standpoint of the theoretical principles involved, and with
due consideration of the manipulative technique necessary.

This is followed by the combination of these operations and
their application to actual analysis, including a comprehensive
study of volumetric methods and of the more elementary parts of
gravimetric analysis.

As the correct calculation of analytical results is of no less im-
portance than the actual procedures of analysis, a number of
problems forms a very important part of the course.

Preparation: Ch 9 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 14

88 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Ch 13 Quantitative Analysis

This course, a continuation of Ch 12, is similarly conducted. After
consideration of the more advanced parts of gravimetric analysis
and of systematic mineral procedures, the remainder of the course
consists of a critical discussion of common technical methods,
including the standard ones for the analysis of steel, non-ferrous
alloys, fuels, oils, gas, water, fertilizers, foods, etc.

Preparation: Ch 12 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 15

Ch 14 Quantitative Analysis Laboratory

This is a laboratory course intended to illustrate by actual use the
various analytical methods considered in Ch 12. After certain
preliminary experiments designed to acquaint the student with the
apparatus used, volumetric analysis, including acidimetry and
alkalimetry, oxidation, reduction, and precipitation methods are
taken up. This is followed by simple gravimetric analysis.

Preparation: Ch 11 7 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 1 2

Ch 15 Quantitative Analysis Laboratory

This course includes not only the usual illustrative gravimetric
determinations, but also electrolytic, electrometric, combustion,
and optical methods.

In the latter half of the course actual industrial methods are
used so that at its completion the students should be able to per-
form satisfactorily any ordinary analysis.

Preparation: Ch 14 9 lab. hours

Must be taken cor\currently: Ch 13

Ch 25 Organic Chemistry

A study of the reactions and properties of aliphatic compounds.
Class relationships, structural formulas, and reaction mechanisms
are discussed in detail. Not open to students majoring in
Chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 1 , Ch 2 4 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 27

Ch 26 Organic Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 25 dealing with the preparation and proper-
ties of the aromatic compounds. Not open to students majoring
in Chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 1 , Ch 2 4 class hours

Preparation: Ch 25

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 28

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 89

C/i n Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions of the aliphatic compounds. Not
open to students majoring in Chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch2 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 25

Ch 28 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions of the aromatic compounds. Not open
to students majoring in Chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch2 5 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 27

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 26

Ch 31 Organic Chemistry

A study of the basic principles of the aliphatic organic com-
pounds. The resemblance of classes is stressed, and emphasis is
placed on genetic charts. The industrial significance of the sub-
ject is discussed to show the practical nature of organic chemistry.

Preparation: Ch 40 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 33

Ch 32 Organic Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 31, dealing with the preparation and
characteristic reactions of the aromatic organic compounds.
Special attention is given to polymerization, diazotization, dyes,
and the use of catalysts, nitration, and sulphonation.

A few of the more important heterocyclic compounds are
studied.

Preparation: Ch 31 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 34

Ch 33 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions designed to teach the laboratory
technique involved in organic chemistry. The method of keeping
notes in the work performed and reactions involved is stressed.

Preparation: Ch 40 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 31

Ch 34 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

This is a continuation of Ch 33. The preparations in this course
serve to acquaint the student with such types of chemical reactions
as sulphonation, the Grignard reaction, the Perkins' reaction,
Skraup's synthesis, the Friedel-Crafts' reaction, and the prepara-
tion of dyes

90 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

In addition to the manipulation techniques taught in Ch 33
this course introduces the use of vacuum distillations, fractional
crystallization, and separations by physical and chemical means.

Preparation: Ch 33 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 32

C/i 35 Organic Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 32, this course includes a study of the
preparation and reactions of heterocyclic and alicyclic com-
pounds.

Preparation: Ch 32 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 37

Ch 37 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

The purpose of this course is to familiarize the student with the
chemical and physical tests used in qualitative organic analysis.
A series of experiments, based on the classification of reactions
of organic compounds, serves as a basis for the examination of
simple liquid and simple solid compounds and the preparation
of suitable derivatives of them.

Preparation: Ch 34 8 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 35

Ch 40 Physical Chemistry

This course begins with a short resume of the field of physical
chemistry and its relationship to the other courses in chemistry
and chemical engineering. Atomic and molecular weights, and
the properties of gases, liquids, solids, ionized, non-ionized, and
colloidal solutions are then taken up.

Prerequisite: Ch 12, Ch 14 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 13, Ch 15

Ch 41 Physical Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 40, this course includes a consideration of
the following topics: rates of reaction, homogeneous and hetero-
geneous equilibrium, and thermochemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 13, Ch 15 4 class hours, 4 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 40

Ch 42 Physical Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 41 including electrical conductance,
electrolytic equilibrium, electrolysis, photochemistry, and atomic
structure.

Preparation: Ch 41 4 class hours, 4 lab. hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 91

Ch 48 Colloidal Chemistry

A study of the preparation and properties of suspensoids, emul-
soids, emulsions, and gels.

Prerequisite: Ch 41 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Ch 51 Sources of Information

This course is intended to acquaint the chemical student with the
constantly increasing volume of scientific literature pertaining to
the field of chemistry.

After a brief outline of the entire field of scientific literature
and a description of various methods of library procedure, the
various available sources of scientific information are investigated.
A series of individual library problems, in which the student is
required to apply the information obtained in the classroom,
forms a very important part of the course.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 1 class hour

Ch 52 History of Chemistry

A study of the development of scientific theories and contributions
of workers in the field of chemistry. Elective for students majoring
in Chemistry.

3 class hours

Ch 63 Advanced Chemistry

A survey of the most recent developments in physical chemistry
and inorganic chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 42 3 class hours

Ch 64 Advanced Chemistry

A survey of the most recent developments in organic chemistry
theory and practice.

Prerequisite: Ch 35 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

Ch 65 Thesis

Original experimental work carried out under the direction of
some member of the chemistry department staff. Elective for
qualified students majoring in Chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 42 9 lab. hours

Ch 66 Thesis

A continuation of Ch 65.

Prerequisite: Ch 42 12 lab. hours

92 KIORTHEASTERN VNIVERSITY

Ch 101 Advanced Physical Chemistry

A study of advanced topics in physical chemistry.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

Ch 102 Advanced Physical Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 101.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

Ch 103 Advanced Organic Chemistry

A study of special topics in advanced organic chemistry.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

Ch 104 Advanced Organic Chemistry
A continuation of Ch 103.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

Ch 105 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

Ch 106 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

Ch 107 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

Ch 108 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

Qo'Ordination

C 1 Vocational Conference

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 93

employers' viewpoints. Thus the graduating seniors are brought
face to face during the year with one of the most important and
perplexing problems of life, namely, how to "sell their services,"
thereby aiming to bring a co-ordinated training of theory and
practice to a logical conclusion.

2 class hours

C 2 Vocational Conference

This course is the sequel to C 1 and consists of the practical
application of the techniques of job-getting which have been
analyzed and discussed in that course. It is conducted on a
conference rather than on a class basis, the major portion of the
time being devoted to the collection of employment prospects, to
the planning and writing of letters to and securing interviews with
prospective employers. It is intended that this course shall
culminate in the attainment by each student of his after-graduation
job.

2 class hours

Sconomics

Ec 1 Economic Geography

In order to provide an adequate background for the study of
economics this first course emphasizes the economic resources of
our country and the part played by these resources in the develop-
ment of our modern industrial society. The course is more con-
cerned with promoting the comprehension of basic concepts
than with stressing encyclopedic knowledge of masses of details.
In the latter part of the semester frequent use is made of motion
pictures to illustrate the processes and peculiar economic charac-
teristics of specific industries.

4 class hours

Ec 2 Commercial and Industrial History of the U. S.

This course is designed to complete the factual background for the
study of theoretical economics. The economic development of the
United States is traced from the colonial period to the present with
special emphasis upon the period since the Civil War. Stress is
laid upon the importance of economic factors and changes in our
history in the description of the development of manufacturing,
agriculture, domestic and foreign commerce, finance and banking,
transportation and labor organizations. Consideration is given
to European developments which have been closely related to
those of the United States.

4 class hours

94 NORTHEASTER'N WNIVERSITY

Ec 3 Economic Principles

A thorough grounding in the fundamental principles and laws ot
economics is the aim of this basic course. The main topics in-
clude the nature and organization of production, the nature and
importance of wants, the relation of money and prices, the process
of exchange, and the nature of international trade.

3 class hours

Ec 4 Economic Principles

A continuation of Ec 3. A careful analysis is made of the deter-
mination of price under conditions of competition and monopoly,
and of the distribution of wealth and income in the form of wages,
economic rent, interest, and profits. The elements of insurance
are discussed in connection with profits.

Preparation: Ec 3 3 class hours

Ec 5 Economic Problems

In this course the application of economic principles to some
of the major economic problems of modern society is emphasized.
The problems studied include consumption, protective tariffs and
subsidies, labor problems such as unemployment and labor
unions, and the business cycle.

Preparation: Ec 3 3 class hours

Ec 6 Economic Problems

A continuation of Ec 5. Among the problems considered are the
following: price stabilization, the agricultural problem, the re-
lation of government to business, including control of monopolies
and public utilities, insurance, public finance, and proposals for
the remodeling and improving of the economic system.

Preparation: Ec 5 3 class hours

Ec 7 Money and Banking

This course, amplifying the more general treatment of money
and credit in Ec 3 and Ec 4, considers the problems of monetary
and banking control with particular emphasis upon the policies
of the Federal Reserve System. Current developments are care-
fully considered.

Prerequisite: Ec 3, Ec 4 3 class hours

Ec 8 Business Cycles

After a study of the conditions which underlie cyclical fluctuations
in prices, volume of trade, physical production, and employment,

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 95

a careful analysis is made of the more significant theories of
the business cycle. The possibilities of controlling such fluctuations
and of initiating recovery receive extended attention. Throughout
the course emphasis is placed upon the current phase of the
business cycle and its peculiar problems.

Preparation: Ec 5, Ec 6 3 class hours

Ec 11 Labor Problems

An intensive study of the labor problems of modern industry
constitutes the content of this course. Unemployment and other
grievances of the worker, including industrial accident and disease,
inadequate wages, long hours, undesirable working conditions,
child and woman labor, etc., are carefully analyzed. Labor unions,
representing the workers' effort to solve the above problems,
receive extended attention with an appraisal of their policies
and accomplishments. Employee representation, profit-sharing
plans and similar devices of the employer to meet the same
problems are also examined critically. The attitude of our govern-
ment toward these problems and its attempts to handle them
are analyzed carefully. The suggestions of other groups and
agencies in respect to these problems will be treated, e.g. co-
operative movement, socialism.

Prerequisite: Ec 3, Ec 4 4 class hours

Ec 12 Economic Systems

After developing various criteria for evaluating the different
economic systems, the course proceeds to a comparative analysis
of capitalism, co-operation, socialism, communism, and fascism.
The problems of economic planning receive particular attention.
Prerequisite: Ec 3, Ec 4 3 class hours

Ec 14 International Economic Relations

A careful examination of the important principles of international
trade and finarxe precedes a critical survey of the international
commercial policies of modern nations, with special reference to
the United States. Such broader problems as the international
control of raw materials, exchange restrictions, international
cartels and the economic activities of the League of Nations and
other international organizations are considered.

Preparation: Ec 5, Ec 6 4 class hours

Ec 15 History of Economic Thought

A critical review of the origin and development of economic
thought. After a brief account of the contributions of Plato and

96 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Aristotle, the early Christian fathers, and the writers of the
Middle Ages, each of the main schools of economic thought is
taken up in turn: the Mercantilists, the Physiocrats, the Classical
School, the Socialists, the Historical School, the Austrian School,
and the Neo-Classical School.

Preparation: Ec 5, Ec 6 3 class hours

Ec 16 Advanced Economic Theory

The course introduces the student to the more complex aspects
of economic theory. Particular consideration is given to the major
modern theoretical problems.

Preparation: Ec 15 3 class hours

Ec 17 Statistics

This course is intended to give the student an understanding of
statistical principles and methods and their practical application
in the social sciences. A study is made of the nature, sources,
collection, and organization of statistical facts; the presentation of
such facts in tabular or graphic form, the various averages,
measures of dispersion, and the construction and use of index
numbers.

3 class hours

Ec 18 Statistics

The major portion of this continuation of Ec 17 concerns the
analysis of time series, and includes the methods of obtaining
trends, seasonal indexes, and the measurement of cyclical vari-
ation. The application of correlation analysis in the field of social
science is given extended attention.

Preparation: Ec 17 3 class hours

Ec 61 Seminar

Assigned readings and written reports on selected topics. May be
elected with the consent of the department by qualified seniors
majoring in Economics.

Ec 62 Seminar

A continuation of Ec 61.
Preparation: Ec 61

Ec 65 Thesis
See statement on Theses, page 136.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 97

Ec 66 Thesis
A continuation of Ec 65.

The following courses offered in the College of Business Administration
may be counted as courses in Economics:

AC 1 Accounting I

This course presents the fundamental principles of accounting
theory and practice. Beginning with a consideration of the need for
and the purpose served by accounting, a study of the balance sheet
and operating statement is presented so that the ultimate purpose
of accounting is understood before the mechanical methods of
recording business transactions are presented. The course then
takes up specific balance sheet accounts, the law of debit and credit,
the theory of nominal accounts, construction and interpretation
of accounts, the recording process, the trial balance, construction
of financial statements, the need for adjustments at the end of
the period, depreciation, deferred and accrued items.

3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

AC 2 Accounting I

This course continues the work of the first semester with increased
emphasis placed on accounting and interpretation of accounts.
The main topics covered are closing of books, starting the new
period, comparative statements, control accounts, and the opera-
tion of petty cash systems.

Preparation: AC 1 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Fl 4 Business Finance

The fundamental principles of finance are approached in this
course from the point of view of the business man. A study is
made of the two basic ways of financing, namely, equity and bor-
rowed funds, and their use in original and expansion financing.
In addition, consideration is given to working capital requirements
and the distinctions between short-term and long-term financing.
The latter part of the course deals with the application of the
principles of finance to such problems as surplus, dividend and
reserve policies, the relation of the corporation to banks and the
investing public, and the problems of both trade and economic
risk.

4 class hours

98 "NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

FI 5 Corporation Finance

This course builds on the foundation of FI 3 and FI 4. The cor-
poration, rather than business in general, is here considered. An
analysis is made of the changing concepts in the corporation,
such as separation of ownership and management, and the roles
played by private initiative and private property. Through use
of actual examples, a study is made of financial policies affecting
sales, prices, markets, and control.

Preparation: FI 4 3 class hours

FI 12 Public Finance

This course is concerned with the basic principles of governmental
finance. After a study of the different kinds of taxes imposed by
municipal, state, and federal governing bodies, attention is given
to the "trend" in taxation, and the effects of go vernmental borrow-
ing and tax policies. A large part of the course is devoted to an
analysis of the sources of revenue such as commodity, highway,
general property, poll, income, and death taxes.

Preparation: Ec 6 3 class hours

lA 3 Personnel Administration

A consideration of what modern industry is doing in making an
application of science to the obtaining and retaining of an effective
and co-operative working force. The student studies thoroughly
personnel administration systems now in use, including the prep-
aration and use of many forms among which are the occupational
description, application, and interview blanks, promotion charts,
wage scale, personnel control charts, etc. In addition, such sub-
jects as wage payment plans, profit sharing, the training of work-
men, workers' security plans, employee representation, collective
bargaining, and management relationships are given attention.

Provisions of the National Labor Relations Act and the Wages
and Hours Act are discussed.

4 class hours

lA 4 Personnel Problems

This course brings to the attention of the student an understanding
of the related, yet varied, problems with which the modern
personnel department is confronted. These include problems of
guidance, placement, job evaluation, adjustment of rates, em-
ployee rating systems, development of complete, yet simple,
personnel records, etc.

4 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 99

MA 1 Marketing Principles

This course is designed to acquaint the student with the principles
underlying the distribution of merchandise. The first part of the
course is concerned with the basic structure of markets; the main
functions of marketing such as assembling, grading, storing,
buying, selling and financing of goods; and the general classi-
fication of commodities into major types for the purpose of
analytical study. Attention is then turned to a detailed considera-
tion of the activities of the several types of middlemen, the work
of the commodity exchanges and co-operative marketing asso-
ciations, and the development of chain stores, mail order houses,
and department stores. Other topics considered are market risk,
pricing, selling terms and discounts, hedging, advertising, and the
legal aspects of price maintenance.

4 class hours

MA 2 Marketing Problems

Using actual case material, this course analyzes and suggests
solutions to a wide variety of selling problems in typical industries
and trades. It is aimed throughout to develop the analytical powers
of the student so that he may decide a problem from the viewpoint
of a marketing executive. Consideration is given to consumers'
buying habits and buying motives, to the important types of retail
and wholesale enterprise, and to an analysis of the channels of
distribution, with the object of formulating a basis for selecting
suitable channels for various products. The marketing of in-
dustrial goods is studied, including certain special problems such
as hedging. Producer's co-operative marketing is also given
attention.

4 class hours

Education

Note: In addition to the courses listed, Ps 5 Educational Psychology may also
be counted as a course in Education.

Ed 1 History of Education

Education is considered as the means by which nations have
attempted to realize their social and spiritual ideals. This course
traces the history of education from ancient times through the
Greek and Roman periods, the Middle Ages, the Renaissance and
Reformation, down to John Locke and the Enlightenment. The
course is concerned with the development of points of view as
well as with the details of organization and practice.

3 class hours

100 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Ed 2 History of Education

Beginning with the emotional reaction against formalism in life
as exemplified by Rousseau, this course takes up the immediate
background of modern education and traces the development of
national systems. The influence of such men as Pestalozzi,
Herbart, Froebel, Spencer, Mann, Barnard, Dewey, and others is
studied in detail. The course closes with a consideration of
present tendencies in education.

3 class hours

Ed 3 Educational Measurements

The course concerns itself with current problems in the field of
educational tests and measurements. Most of the lectures are
given over to a discussion of the construction and use of new
type objective tests, with particular reference to the field of second-
ary education. The relative merits of the essay and the objective
examination are considered in connection with the problem of
grades and grading systems. Enough elementary statistics are
included to enable students to use intelligently the results of test-
ing. Emphasis is placed upon the importance of an accurate
interpretation of test data and upon the futility of indiscriminate
testing.

3 class hours

Ed 4 Educational Organization and Administration

A study of the principles underlying the organization, adminis-
tration, and supervision of secondary schools in the U. S. A. The
course is illustrated with suitable problems taken from actual
practice. It should be of special interest to students who con-
template teaching as a vocation.

3 class hours

Ed 7 Comparative Education

A discussion of the educational background and current theories
and practices of England, France, and Germany. Emphasis is
laid upon the bearing of European education on American prac-
tice. Much of the assigned reading is in current periodical litera-
ture, although a basic text is also used. Lectures, special reports,
and class discussions comprise the media by which the course
is conducted.

3 class hours

Ed 9 Educational Sociology

The course considers the relationship between education and
sociology. Educational objectives are set up from the findings of
sociological research and the traditional curriculum is examined

COLLEGE OF L/BERAL ARTS 101

in the light of these objectives with a view towards its recon-
struction. A critical attitude is maintained toward philosophical
implications which will inevitably arise in the course.

3 class hours

Ed 10 Educational Philosophy

A study of the relationship between the science of education and
the philosophy of education is followed by a consideration of
philosophies of education in the light of basic theses of the history
of philosophy. Such topics as evolutionism, behaviorism, prag-
matism, instrumentalism, and progressive education are viewed
in the perspective of the history of philosophy.

3 class hours

Ed 11 Principles of Secondary Education

A critical study of the aims, objectives and functions of secondary
schools. Relations of the junior high school, the senior high
school, and the junior college to American life are discussed.

4 class hours

Ed 12 Methods of Teaching in Secondary Schools

A fundamental course in methods of teaching. Such topics as
motivation, socialization, drill, specific techniques, attention and
fatigue, use of books and laboratories are discussed.

4 class hours

English

E I'A English I

The aim of this course is to help the student attain competence
in the understanding and evaluating of modern literature and in
written expression. It includes a review of the structural essentials
of the English language, various written assignments, and the
study of essays and informational articles.

3 class hours

E 2'A English 1

Continuing the general purposes of E 1-A, this course proceeds
to a study of the special problems of exposition and description,
and to a critical reading of poems, short stories, and plays.

3 class hours

102 NORTHEASTER'N UNIVERSITY

E 5 Advanced Composition

The technique of writing in the shorter literary form will be studied
in detail and applied systematically toward the building up of the
student's individual style. A part of the time each week will be
devoted to personal conference between the student and the
instructor.

Prerequisite: E 1-A, E 2- A 3 class hours

E 6 Advanced Composition

A continuation of E 5.

Preparation: E 5 3 class hours

E 7 Creative Writing

For students interested in imaginative writing. Original papers
by the students will be discussed in class and in weekly conference
with the instructor. The principles underlying creative writing
will be carefully studied.

Preparation: E 6 3 class hours

E 8 Creative Writing

Continued practice in creative writing supplemented by an
analysis of the work appearing in the better magazines. The
shorter forms will be emphasized.

Preparation: E 7 3 class hours

E 9 Journalism 1

The newspaper technique, with practice in re-writing. The
general tasks of an "inside" man and the functions of the editorial
department.

4 class hours

E 10 Journalism 1

The problems of reporting and newswriting, with written assign-
ments in all types of spot news reporting.

Preparation: E 9 4 class hours

E 11 Journalism U

Editing the news. The writing of editorials, feature articles, and
columns.

Preparation: E 10 4 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 103

E 12 Journalism U

A general practice course in newspaper writing, the covering of
special assignments, and editorial problems.

Preparation: E 11 4 class hours

E 13 Effective Speaking

This course offers practical training in the preparation and presen-
tation of the various types of speeches. The instruction is planned
to eliminate defects of voice, posture, and delivery, and to develop
in the student an ability to speak easily, naturally, and forcefully.

2 class hours

E 14 Effective Speaking

Continued practice in impromptu and extempore speaking,
organization of material, consideration of the audience, and
vocabulary building form the basis of the course.

Preparation: E 13 3 class hours

E 15 Survey of English Literature

A survey of English literature to 1800. After a brief study of the
social and political background of each literary period, the writing
of the period is considered, and the more important writers are
studied and read in detail. The purpose of the course is to give
the student an appreciation of English literature as a whole, and
an intimate knowledge of its major figures.

4 class hours

E 16 Survey of English Literature

A survey of English literature from 1800 to the present century.
The outstanding writers are read, studied, and related to the
general background of nineteenth century England. The purpose
of the course is to give the student an understanding of the writers
who contributed most to the formation and development of
modern literature in England.

4 class hours

E 17 English Drama Before Shakespeare

A study of the origins and growth of English drama from its
beginning to its culmination in the work of Shakespeare. A
discussion of the morality plays will be followed by a careful
consideration of the influence of Plautus, Terence, and Seneca on
the dramatists of the age. Plays by Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd, and
Marlowe will be read as a background for Shakespearean drama.

3 class hours

104 T^ORTHEASTERhl UNIVERSITY

E 18 Chaucer

An introduction to the language and literature of Chaucer and
his contemporaries, with special attention to The Canterbury Tales.
The course includes a consideration of Chaucer's influence on the
growth of the language, an examination of the "roman de tiroir"
form, and a survey of the chief types of European popular narra-
tive which The Canterbury Tales represents.

3 class hours

E 19 Shakespeare

The Elizabethan period, sixteenth century London, the Shakes-
pearean stage and audience, and the actors' companies will be
discussed. Shakespeare's life and his development as a dramatist
will be carefully considered. Five plays will be intensively studied.

4 class Iwurs

E 20 Shakespeare

Lectures will be given on Shakespeare's language, the text of the
plays, Shakespearean criticism, editors' problems, etc. Four plays
will be intensively studied. The sonnets will be read and discussed.

4 class hours

E 21 l^ineteenth Century Poetry 1

Background forces which shaped the Romantic period will be
carefully studied; the influence of German idealists, of the French
Revolution, and of the natural reaction from the classicism of
Pope and Johnson will be analyzed and evaluated. Poetry of
Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, and Shelley will be studied

critically.

3 class hours

E 22 Nineteenth Century Poetry U

A study of the poetry of the Victorian era with emphasis on the
writings of Browning and Tennyson. The influence of the age
on its poets will be carefully considered.

3 class hours

E 23 Seventeenth and Eighteenth Century Prose

A study of the important, non-fiction prose works of Bacon,
Browne, Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, and Boswell, among
others, with emphasis on the relationship of the literature to the
age. The various prose styles will be discussed. A written paper

will be required.

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 105

E 24 Nineteenth Century Prose

An examination of significant nineteenth century writers as to
their social, political, literary, and educational ideas. Lamb,
Hazlitt, Carlyle, Macaulay, Newman, Ruskin, Arnold, Huxley,
and Stevenson are among those to be considered. A written
paper will be required.

3 class hours

E 25 American Literature to 1860

A survey of American literature from colonial times to the triumph
of the transcendental movement in New England. The work of
Bryant, Irving, Cooper, Poe, Emerson, Thoreau, Lowell, Holmes,
Longfellow, and Melville will be emphasized.

3 class hours

E 26 American Literature After 1860

Continuing E 25, the course will consider the rise of realism after
the Civil War, the development of American humor, the appear-
ance of local color writers, and modern trends since 1900.

3 class hours

E 27 History of the English Novel

This survey will trace the development of the novel from the
18th century to the beginning of the Victorian era. It will deal
with the maturing of the novel form in the hands of Defoe,
Richardson, Fielding, and Smollett; the "Gothic Romances" of
Walpole and Lewis; and the novel of manners as seen in Jane
Austen.

3 class hours

E 28 History of the English Novel

This course will deal with the work of the Great Victorians,
particularly Thackeray, Dickens, Eliot, Conrad, and Hardy. A
few contemporary novels will be discussed. The student will be
expected to read widely in the field.

3 class hours

E 29 Great European Writers

An introduction to the classics of Ancient and Medieval literature.
The purpose of the course is to acquaint the student broadly with
our literary heritage and to furnish him background for later
studies in literature.

3 class hours

106 -NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

E 30 Great European Writers

A survey of the literature of Europe from the Renaissance to
the beginning of the twentieth century.

3 class Kours

E 31 Comparative Drama

Through the analysis of plays of various origins, this course shows
the development of essential techniques in drama from period to
period, and demonstrates how a general type of drama manifests
special characteristics in accordance with the social and political
backgrounds against which it is set. During this term the emphasis
is placed on the classic literature of the Greek and Roman theater.

3 class hours

E 32 Comparative Drama

This course, a continuation of the study begun in E 31, deals with
the representative plays of the Continent since 1600.

3 class hours

E 33 Modern Literature 1895-1915

Beginning with a study of late nineteenth century literature in
England and America, the course considers the principal literary
developments of the period 1895 to 1915. New forms and methods
in poetry, the novel, the short story, and the play are studied and
are illustrated by the work of literary groups and movements and
by such major writers as Walt Whitman and Henry James.

3 class hours

E 34 Modern Literature Since 1915

A survey of contemporary literature in England and America.
Outstanding writers are studied in detail. Some of the subjects
discussed are recent changes in form and technique; literary
experiments; the effect on literature of the World War, and of
recent social changes. During the course each student writes a
paper and presents a class report on a contemporary author.

3 class hours

E 35 The Essay in England and America

Between fifty and sixty essays are studied in detail, the time
ranging from the end of the 16th century to the present. The
developing form of the essay as a type is considered throughout
the course, and for each essay the author's judgments, style, and
literary habits are studied, with some attention to the principal
events of the author's life.

Lecture and class discussion are both employed.

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 107

E 36 Introduction to Criticism

This course is based on a careful reading and discussion of some
thirty-five pieces of critical writing, ranging from Plato to Conrad.
Various critical doctrines are discussed, traced in their development
from century to century, and experimentally applied to notable
literary works old and new.

3 class hours

E 61 Seminar

Independent investigation of a selected topic together with inter-
mediate research reports. May be elected with the consent of the
department by qualified seniors majoring in English.

E 62 Seminar

A continuation of E 61. A final report is required which summa-
rizes the research of the year.
Preparation: E 61

Qeology

Gy 1 General Geology

A study of earth movements and various terrestrial applications
of solar energy. Lectures on fundamental general facts as to
origin and movements of the earth, weathering, work of winds,
underground and surface waters, glaciers and the glacial period,
lakes and swamps, and vulcanism.

3 class hours

Gy 2 General Geology

Course Gy 1 is continued with such topics as mountain forma-
tion, oceans, oceanic life, atmosphere touching upon meteorology.
A considerable portion of time is given to the study of igneous,
sedimentary and metamorphic rocks, supplemented by laboratory
and field work.

3 class hours

Gy 5 Historical Geology

A review of the beginning of the earth, its development and
historical significance of rock characters. This is followed by a
study of the pre-Cambrian Paleozoic and the early Paleozoic
sub-era.

3 class hours

Gy 6 Historical Geology

Continuation of the first semester taking in the late Paleozoic
sub-era, and the Mesozoic and Cenozoic periods, and continuing
through the geologic history of man.

3 class hours

108 NORTHEASTERhl VNIVERSITY

government

Gv 1 American Government and Politics

The study of our National Government with respect to its organ-
ization and function; its powers and limitations under the Con-
stitution; its legislative, administrative, and judicial machinery
under the party system of government and bureaucracy.

3 class hours

Gv 2 American Government and Politics

A more detailed study of the relationships of our federal, state, and
municipal governments, including an analysis and comparison of
the various state governments and types of municipal government
with respect to state and local agencies for carrying out the exec-
utive, legislative, and judicial functions of government in a
democratic country.

3 class hours

Gv 3 Comparative Government

The older governments of Europe, those principally of Great
Britain and France, but also of Switzerland and the Scandinavian
countries, are described and analyzed in this course. Institutions
are compared in these various states with reference to America
and the newer governments of Europe.

3 class hours

Gv 4 Comparative Government

A study of the newer governments of Europe, as found in Ger-
many, Italy, and the Soviet Union. Democracy and dictatorship
are analyzed as different modes of life and rule. These states are
compared to each other, to the older governments of Europe, and
to the United States.

3 class hours

Gv 5 American Constitutional Law

After a careful study of the influences affecting the framing of the
Constitution, attention is turned to the leading constitutional
principles of the American government as developed through
judicial interpretation.

3 class hours

Gv 6 American Constitutional Law

A continuation of Gv 5. Primary emphasis is placed upon the
relation of constitutional law to present-day problems, with par-
ticular reference to such items as "due process of law" and "inter-
state commerce."

Preparation: Gv 5 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 109

Gv 7 Origins of Political Theory

A survey of political philosophy from Plato and Aristotle to
Bentham. The nature, origin, forms, and ends of the state and
government are covered.

3 class hours

Gv 8 Modern Political Theory

A critical study is made of the major developments in political
theory since Bentham, with special reference to the influence of
these developments upon American politics and political institu-
tions. Attention is paid to the modern conflict between the
democratic and the totalitarian conceptions of the state.

3 class hours

The following courses offered in the College of Business Adminis-
tration may be counted as courses in Government.

PA 2 Public Administration 1

A study of career service of the local, state, and national govern-
ment; the administrative positions in career service; the informa-
tion needed by the government administrator in order to function
effectively; and the means for acquiring public administration
knowledge.

4 class hours

PA 5 Business and Government

The object of this course is to develop a thorough understanding
of the relationships between government and business. The
attitude of our government towards business since 1885 as evi-
denced by legislative, judicial, and executive action will be analyzed
in detail. Careful attention will be given the experience under the
NRA and the attempts on the part of government and business
to preserve the good features of the codes. Special consideration
will be given to the part played by the administrative agency.

4 class hours

PA 7 Public Administration U

A study of the subject matter and principles of management
necessary for the efficient operation of the government.

4 class hours

PA 8 Public Administration III

This course presents a study of the public relations, fiscal control,
and policy-making aspects of public administration, stressing the
importance of co-operation among government bureaus, legis-

110 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

lative bodies, and the public; and presents to the student an ap-
preciation of the importance of versatility of ability for a successful

public career.

4 class }wurs

history

H 1 History of CivilizcLtion

This is primarily a background course. Introductory lectures
deal with primitive society, the development of language and
writing, and the early contributions of Egypt and Asia. More
detail is given to the structure of Greek and Roman society, the
rise of the Christian Church, the barbarian invasions of the
Empire, the growth of Islam, and the life of the early Middle Ages.

4 class hours

H 2 History of Civilizcition

This course deals with the growth of the monarchies in Europe,
the medieval Church, the art and literature of the Renaissance
and Reformation, the economic revolution, the Age of Reason
in France and England, the Old Regime and the Revolution in
France, and the growth of science and industrialism.

4 class hours

H 5 Europe, 1789-1870

This course aims at describing and interpreting the development
of European states from the French Revolution to 1870. Major
topics include the Metternich system, the emergence of French
Republicanism, and the unification of Italy and Germany. Non-
political factors receive much attention throughout the course.

3 class hours

H 6 Europe Since 1870

The international relationships which precipitated the tragedy of
1914 are considered. The rise of militarism and nationalism,
secret diplomacy, propaganda and the press, the "incidents"
which led to the World War, the conduct of the war, the peace
treaties, and the rise of socialism and fascism are discussed in

this course.

3 class hours

H 7 England to 1688

This course surveys the political, social, religious, and economic
development of England to the Revolution of 1688. Political
history receives the major emphasis, but stress is placed upon
the rise of the English institutions which represented England's
outstanding contribution to civilization.

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 111

H 8 England Since 1688

A continuation of H 7. A study is made of Queen Anne's Eng-
land, the policies of Walpole, England's part in European politics,
the age of the first Reform Bill, English imperialism, and Victorian
society.

3 class hours

H 9 The United States to 1865

This course is an interpretation of the events which shaped the
American nation to the Civil War. Social customs, economic
influences, racial contributions, and humanitarian movements
are not neglected, though the political history is stressed.

3 class hours

H 10 The United States Since 1865

Major attention is given to the social, economic, and political
foundations of recent history in this survey of the transition of
America from an agricultural to an urban industrialized society
since the Civil War. Consideration is given to the problems
arising with the emergence of America as a world power.

3 class hours

H 11 Latin American History

This course deals with the European background of Spanish and
Portuguese colonization in the New World, the exploits of the
conquistadores, the Indian civilizations, colonial institutions, and
the forces which gave rise to the revolutions in the early 19th
century.

3 class hours

H 12 Latin American History

This course continues H 11, and describes the Wars of Inde-
pendence and the rise of the republics. A study is made of the
international relations of the Latin American countries, the
Monroe Doctrine, and the Pan-American conferences.

3 class hours

H 13 English Constitutional History

This course is devoted to a consideration of the English consti-
tution and of the common law; local government vs. central
government; the origin and growth of Parliament; the development
of the British cabinet system; and a comprehensive study of
statutes and documents.

4 class hours

112 TMORTHEASTER-N Ul^lVERSITY

H 14 American Constitutional History

In this course a study is made of the historical development of the
United States Constitution with particular emphasis on its pro-
gressive adaptation to a changing social and economic order.

4 class hours

H 15 Far Eastern International Relations, 1840-1900

Between 1840 and 1900 the United States and the European powers
developed their several foreign policies towards China and Japan.
Japan succeeded in developing a policy toward China and the West.
The Chinese Empire failed to develop a consistent policy and was
nearly dismembered. This course concerns the above develop-
ments.

3 class hours

H 16 Far Eastern International Relations Since 1900

Since 1900 Japan emerged as a world power and embarked upon
a career of imperialism. China at last developed a foreign policy.
With the close of the first World War, European imperialism
waned. The United States tried to act as umpire. War resulted.
This course concerns these developments.

3 class hours

(Mathematics

M 1 College Algebra

The study of algebra is scheduled to begin with the solution of
the quadratic equation, simultaneous quadratics, and equations
in quadratic form. However, a rapid but thorough review of the
fundamentals of algebra precedes this. The solution of the quad-
ratic is followed by a detailed study of the theory of exponents.
Then follow radicals, series, variation, inequalities, and the
elementary principles of the theory of equations. Considerable
time is given to plotting and the use of graphs in the solution of
equations. The elementary theory of complex numbers is also

covered.

3 class hours

M 3 Trigonometry

This is a complete course in trigonometry and should enable the
student to use all branches of elementary trigonometry in the
solution of triangles as well as in the more advanced courses
where the knowledge of trigonometry is essential. Some of the
topics covered are the trigonometric ratios; inverse functions;
goniometry; logarithms; circular measure; laws of sines, cosines,

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 113

tangents, half angles; solution of oblique and right triangles;
transformation and solution of trigonometric and logarithmic
equations. Considerable practice in calculation of practical
problems enables the student to apply his trigonometry to prob-
lems arising in practice at an early stage. Additional work,
graphical and algebraic, is done with the complex number, in-
troducing De-Moivre's theorem and the exponential form of
the complex number.

2 class hours

M 4 Analytic Geometry and Introduction to Calculus

This being a basic course in preparation for any further study of
mathematics, it requires a thorough knowledge of the funda-
mentals of algebra. The course covers cartesian and polar co-
ordinates; graphs; the equations of simpler curves derived from
their geometric properties; thorough study of straight lines, circles,
and conic sections; intersections of curves; transformation of
axes; plotting and solution of algebraic equations of higher order
and of exponential, trigonometric, and logarithmic equations;
loci problems. The general equation of the second degree is
thoroughly analyzed in the study of conic sections. Some time is
devoted to curve fitting from empirical data.

Explicit and implicit functions, dependent and independent
variables, some theory of limits, continuity and discontinuity are
given special attention from both the algebraic and the geometric
points of view. Some theorems on the infinitesimal are intro-
duced, and a study is made of infinity and zero as limits. Relative
rates of change, both average and instantaneous, and the meaning
of the slope of a curve follow. The differential and the derivative
as applied to algebraic functions with the geometric interpretation
are then studied. Tangents to curves of the second degree follow
here. Simple applications with interesting practical problems
help to develop the interest here and lay a solid foundation for the
study of the calculus. The introduction of the differential at
the same time with the derivative helps considerably to bridge
the large gap which usually exists when the student passes from
the study of the elementary analytic geometry to the infinitesimal
of calculus.

Preparation: M I, M 3 5 class hours

M 5 Differential Calculus

The differential is introduced at the outset of the course, together
with the derivative; geometric and practical illustrations are given
of both; and both are carried along throughout the course. The
work consists of differentiation of algebraic, trigonometric expo-
nential, and logarithmic functions, both explicit and implicit;

114 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

slopes of curves; maxima and minima with applied problems;
partial differentiation; parametric equations; derivatives of higher
order; curvature; evolutes and involutes; points of inflection;
related rates; velocities, acceleration; indeterminate forms; expan-
sion of functions; series. Although the subject matter deals with
considerable theory, constant sight is kept of the practical appli-
cation of the theory. The geometric interpretation of every new
subject is carefully defined, and problems are continually solved
dealing in practical applications of the theory in geometry,
physics, and mechanics.

Prerequisite: Ml 4 class hours

Preparation: M 4

M 6 Integral Calculus

This course, a continuation of M 5, deals with integration as the
inverse of differentiation as well as the limit of summation. The
topics covered are methods of integration; use of integral tables;
definite integrals; double and triple integrals; areas in rectangular
and polar co-ordinates; center of gravity; moment of inertia;
length of curves; volumes of solids; areas of surfaces of revolution;
volumes by triple integration; practical problems in work, pres-
sure, etc., depending on the differential and integral calculus for
solution; solution of simpler differential equations.

Preparation: M 5 4 class hours

M 7 Differential Equations 1

The elementary theory of differential equations and the method
of solution of certain ordinary differential equations are offered
here as a general course in mathematics. Although this is prin-
cipally a problem course in solving differential equations, prop-
erties of the equations and of their solutions are deduced, and
applications in the various fields of scientific work are analyzed.
Preparation: M 6 4 class hours

M 8 Differential Equations U

Special cases of first order equations are considered, and a fuller
treatment of first order equations of higher degree leads to a con-
sideration of envelopes, special loci, and particular curves. The
general second order linear equation is studied, and the several
well-known methods of attack are presented. Solution in series
form of equations whose primitives are not made up of classified
functions is studied. Elementary partial differential equations of
the first and second orders, leading to a presentation of Fourier's
series, conclude the course.

Preparation: M 7 4 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 115

M 9 Higher Algebra

Complex numbers and the elementary theory of vectors start this
course. It continues with the solution of equations of the third
and fourth degree, Horner and Sturm theorems, the solution of
higher degree equations with the use of graphs. Some invariant
forms are studied. Then follow general systems of equations with
the complete study of determinants, and some of the elements of
matrices. A study is made of the theory of elimination, linear
dependence, and linear transformations. If time permits, a study
is made of probability and related subjects.

Prerequisite: M 1, M 3 4 class hours

M 10 Curve Analysis

This course deals with the methods of approximation of roots;
plotting; empirical equations; and alignment charts.

Prerequisite: M 5 4 class hours

M 11 Solid Analytic Geometry

The study of analytic geometry is extended here into three di-
mensions, mostly with rectangular co-ordinates, although cylin-
drical and spherical co-ordinates and the transformation between
the three systems are also introduced. The equations of the first
and second degree are analyzed. A study is made of line segments
and angles; planes, linear equations in three variables; normal
forms; systems of planes and angles; surfaces in general; quadric
surfaces. Some work is done on general curves, certain special
curves, surfaces of revolution, locus problems, and homogeneous
co-ordinates.

Prerequisite: M 4 4 class hours

M 12 Modern Geometry

This course offers a brief outline of the history of geometry through
the ages, especially the 19th century; analysis of geometry of the
triangle and circle; systems of co-ordinates, linear dependence,
transformations; principle of duality; poles and polars; harmonic
division, cross ratios, and conical projection. Certain special
theorems include those of Desargues, Pascal, and Brianchon.
Prerequisite: M 4 4 class hours

M 13 Spherical Trigonometry

This is a complete course in the study of spherical trigonometry,
solving right and isosceles spherical triangles; Napier's rules; laws
of sines, cosines, half-angles, and half-side formulas; Napier's
analogies. A detailed solution of oblique spherical triangles

116 NORTHEASTERhl UNIVERSITY

including areas follows. Considerable time is spent on the celestial
sphere and the astronomical triangle and on navigation, calcula-
tion of latitude and longitude, bearing, and time.

Prerequisite: M 3 4 class Iwurs

M 14 History of Mathematics

In this course a survey is made of the development of various
branches of mathematics, and attention is given to the lives of
men who have made outstanding contributions to mathematical
science.

3 class hours

M 15 Advanced Calculus

No student should elect this course unless he is thoroughly
familiar with the contents of courses M 5 and M 6. The subjects
covered are continuity, indeterminate forms, applications of partial
differentiation, vectors and differentiation of vectors, the complex
variable, differentiation and functions of the complex variable,
differentiation of integrals, envelopes.

Prerequisite: M 6 4 class hours

M 16 Advanced Calculus

This is a continuation of M 15. The course starts with work in
differential equations and problems in damped vibration and the
potential function. Other topics are the hyperbolic function;
expansion in infinite series including Fourier series; integration
of special forms with definite, multiple, and improper integrals;
probability integral; Gamma function; Beta function; Bessel's
function; line integrals and applications.

Preparation: M 15 4 class hours

M 17 Series

Various types of series and their uses. Study of limits, infinite
series, tests for various types of convergence; divergence; algebraic
operations with series; integration and differentiation; applications
and use of special series.

Prerequisite: M 5, M 6 4 class hours

M 18 Theory of Equations

This course is devoted more to the theory and analysis of equa-
tions and roots than to actual solutions. The properties of poly-
nomials and continuity are studied. The complex number,
algebraic and geometric form, is reviewed. The solutions of

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 117

quadratic, cubic, and quartic equations are discussed and analyzed
with various theorems on roots. Proof is given of the funda-
mental theorems; other theorems discussed are the remainder
theorem, Horner's and Newton's methods, limits of roots, RoUe's
theorem, Descarte's rule, Sturm's theorem, Budan's theorem, and
De-Moivre's theorem. Transformations are studied and an
analysis is made of rational, irrational, complex, and multiple
roots. Symmetric functions including the relation of roots and
coefficients are also taken up. Some work is done with discrimi-
nants. The course closes with the theory of least squares and
curve fitting.

Preparation: M 5, M 6 4 class hours

a^odern [Languages

French

F 1 Elementary French

A beginner's course stressing the essentials of grammar, practice
in pronunciation, and progressive acquisition of basic vocabulary
and current idiomatic expressions.

4 class hours (upperclass)

F 2 Elementary French

A continuation of F 1. Most of the time is devoted to the reading
of simple texts with oral practice based on the material read.
Preparation: F I 4 class hours (upperclass)

F 3 Intermediate French

In this course several texts of average difficulty are read and
studied. The work includes a thorough review of grammar, oral
practice based on the reading matter, memorizing of selected
passages, dictation, study of idioms, vocabulary building, and
outside reading.

Preparation: F 2 4 class hours (upperclass)

F 4 Intermediate French

A continuation of F 3, with an increasing amount of both class
and outside reading.

Preparation: F 3 4 class hours (upperclass)

F 5 Modern French Literature

A study of the chief trends in French literature since 1850. Sig-
nificant works of representatives of the various literary movements
are read and analyzed. The course is concerned mainly with
the short story and the novel. Collateral reading and reports.
Preparation: F 4 4 class hours

118 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

F 6 Modern French Literature

A continuation of F 5. The major part of the course is devoted
to the study of the drama, with the remainder given to French
verse of the period. Collateral reading and reports.

Preparation: F 4 4 class hours

F 7 French Classicism

This course is designed to furnish a comprehensive survey of the
background and development of French literature of the 17th
century and to aid the student in a critical interpretation of the
most significant works of the period. The reading is mainly from
the dramatic works of Corneille, Racine, and Moliere. Collateral
reading and reports.

Preparation: F 4 4 class hours

F 8 French Classicism

A continuation of F 7- The works of La Fontaine, Descartes,
and Pascal receive the major attention.

Preparation: F 4 4 class hours

F 9 French Romanticism

A study of the origins and development of the Romantic move-
ment in French literature. The readings include significant
selections from the novels of the principal writers of the Romantic
school, as well as some of the more important Romantic dramas.
Preparation: F 4 4 class hours

F 10 French Romanticism

Continuing F 9, the course pursues further the study of the
Romantic drama. The latter part of the term is devoted to the
reading of selections of poetry from the works of Lamartine, Hugo,
Musset, and others.

Preparation: F 4 4 class hours

Qerman

G 1 Elementary German

A beginner's course stressing the essentials of grammar, practice
in pronunciation, and progressive acquisition of basic vocabulary
and current idiomatic expressions.

4 class hours (upperclass)

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 119

G 2 Elementary German

A continuation of G 1 . Most of the time is devoted to the reading
of simple texts, with oral practice based on the material read.
Preparation: G 1 4 class hours (upperclass)

G 3 Intermediate German

Preparation: G 2 4 class hours

G 4 Intermediate German

A continuation of G 3, with an increasing amount of both class
and outside reading. Scientific German is stressed for Science
majors.

Preparation: G 3 4 class hours

G 5 Modern German Literature

A survey of the main currents of German literature since 1880.
Representative works of the leading authors of the period are
read and interpreted. The course deals chiefly with the short
story and the novel. Collateral reading and reports.

Preparation: G 4 4 class hours

G 6 Modern German Literature

A continuation of G 5. The drama and poetry receive the main
emphasis. Collateral reading and reports.

Preparation: G 4 4 class hours

G 7 The Classical Period of German Literature

This course aims to trace the development of German literature
during the second half of the 18th century, beginning with the
Storm and Stress period. The works of Lessing, Goethe, and
Schiller will receive the major emphasis.

Preparation: G 4 3 class hours

G 8 The Classical Period of German Literature

A continuation of G 7. The readings will consist mainly of the
later works of Goethe and Schiller.

Preparation: G 4 3 class hours

120 hlORTHEASTERhl VNIVERSITY

G 9 German Literature of the Nineteenth Century

This course will consider the chief tendencies in German literature
from the beginning of Romanticism to the coming of Naturalism.
Representative works of the principal writers of the period will
be read and analyzed.

Preparation: G 4 3 class hours

G 10 German Literature of the Nineteenth Century

A continuation of G 9. Among the works to be read will be
some of the outstanding dramas of the latter half of the century.
Preparation: G 4 3 class hours

Spcinish

Sp 1 Elementary Spanish

A beginner's course stressing the essentials of grammar, practice
in pronunciation, and progressive acquisition of basic vocabulary
and current idiomatic expressions.

4 class hours (upperclass)

Sp 2 Elementary Spanish

A continuation of Sp 1. Most of the time is devoted to the reading
of simple texts with oral practice based on the material read.
Preparation: Sp 1 4 class hours (upperclass)

Sp 3 Intermediate Spanish

Preparation: Sp 2 4 class hours

Sp 4 Intermediate Spanish

A continuation of Sp 3, with an increasing amount of both class
and outside reading.

Preparation: Sp 3 4 class hours

Sp 5 Spanish Literature of the Golden Age

This course deals with the Spanish prose of the sixteenth and

seventeenth centuries, particularly the Don Quixote and the

Novelas Ejemplares. Lectures, translation, and collateral reading.

Preparation: Sp 4 4 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 121

Sp 6 Spanish Literature of the Golden Age

A continuation of Sp 5, with emphasis on the drama of Lope de
Vega, Tirso de Molina, and Calderon. Lectures, translation, and
collateral reading.

Preparation: Sp 4 4 class hours

Sp 7 Modern Spanish Literature

This course aims to acquaint the student with the literature of
Spain during the last quarter of the eighteenth century and the
first half of the nineteenth. The chief emphasis is placed on the
romantic poetry and drama. Lectures, translation, and col-
lateral reading.

Preparation: Sp 4 4 class hours

Sp 8 Modern Spanish Literature

A continuation of Sp 7, this course is devoted to Spanish literature

of the second half of the nineteenth century, with emphasis on

the realistic novel. Lectures, translation, and collateral reading.

Preparation: Sp 4 4 class hours

Sp 9 Modern Spanish American Literature

The purpose of this course is to acquaint the student with the
general trends of Spanish American literature. Plays, essays,
and novels that reflect the economic and social problems of our
neighbors to the south will receive the chief attention. Lectures,
translation, and collateral reading.

Preparation: Sp 4 4 class hours

Sp 10 Modern Spanish American Literature

A continuation of Sp 9, this course is devoted to the literature of
Mexico and Central America, and particularly the works of Ruben
Dario.

Preparation: Sp 4 4 class hours

Orientation

This course, required of all first year students, is designed to make
entering students explicitly aware of those facts, principles, and
techniques which are significantly related to the maintenance of
their intellectual efficiency, to assist them in making desirable social
adjustments in the college community, to help them make a wise
choice in their upperclass fields of specialization. Special effort is
made to prepare the student to make an early and satisfactory
adjustment to the conditions of the co-operative work. Lectures
and individual conferences.

1 class hour

122 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Philosophy

Ph 1 Introduction to Philosophy

This introductory course combines the historical and systematic
approaches to the subject. The historical treatment includes a
survey of the chief philosophers and the development of basic
philosophical ideas. The systematic treatment presents the
several types of philosophy, such as realism, materialism, idealism,
and pluralism. The place of philosophy is considered in its
relation to ethics, religion, and natural sciences. The course
both acquaints the student with facts about philosophy and trains
him to think philosophically.

3 class hours

Ph 2 Problems of Philosophy

The chief systems of thought are applied to what may be termed
the persistent problems of philosophy. The problems are to be
found in the fields of epistemology, teleology, and metaphysics.
The following topics suggest representative problems which will
be studied: the relation between mind and body, the nature and
extent of freedom of the will, the validity of knowledge, and the
bearing which the more recent views in physics and psychology
have upon related philosophical problems.

Preparation: Ph 1 3 class hours

Ph 3 History of Philosophy

Beginning with the early Greek age period, the course traces the
development of philosophical thought through the patristic and
scholastic periods. A study is made of the transition from
medieval to modern philosophy.

3 class hours

Ph 4 History of Philosophy

The first half of the course is a study of the period from Bacon
to Kant; the second half begins with the time of Kant and ends
with a consideration of present-day philosophers and their
systems of thought.

3 class hours

Ph 5 Philosophy of Religion

Fundamental questions of religious belief are examined in the
light of philosophy. Modern religions are compared with respect
to their views on the nature of the Deity, the meaning of life, and
the relationship between man and God. Further topics for study

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 123

include the question of the validity of mysticism and intuitive
knowledge of religious truth, the immortality of the soul, the
meaning of the supernatural, the presence of natural evil, and the
relation of morality to religion.

Students may take Philosophy of Religion without having had
any other course in this department, although there is an advan-
tage in having had the Introduction to Philosophy.

3 class hours

Ph 6 Logic

Formal logic is subordinated in this course to the more practical
consideration of the methods of critical and reflective thought.
Common fallacies in logic are indicated, and the student is given
frequent exercises in correct reasoning. Attention is given to the
principles of induction, deduction, verification, syllogism, and
assumption. To assist the student to think clearly and correctly
is the essential purpose of this modified course in logic.

3 class hours

Physical Education

Physical Training

All first year students are required to take Physical Training.
Health, strength, and vitality do not come by chance but by
constant attention to those factors involved in their development.
It is very essential for the student to acquire good habits of living.

The work in the course includes a formal calisthenic program,
special exercise classes for the correction of postural defects,
participation in the regular athletic program, including baseball,
basketball, football, hockey, track, and many types of informal
games. All members of the class are also required to learn to
swim.

Students wishing to be excused from Physical Training because
of physical defects are required to present a petition to the faculty
supported by a physician's certificate.

2 class hours

PE 1 Hygiene

One class hour a week is devoted to the study of information
closely related to the physical training work and to personal and
mental hygiene. For this class lecture, each student is assigned at
least one hour of outside study based on the required textbook.
The course includes enough of the fundamentals of physiology
and anatomy to enable the student to understand such parts of
the course as require some knowledge of these subjects.

1 class hour

124 NORTHEASTER'N WNIVERSITY

PE 5 Principles of Physical Education

The course considers the place of physical education in the
educational program in the United States. The development of
physical education programs based on the changes in society from
primitive to modern times is discussed, careful attention being
given to the needs of the individual, as well as to the needs of the
group. Relationship between medical service and the physical
education department is considered, and methods of co-ordination
between these two important departments are investigated. The
history of physical education, in so far as it affects the modern
program, is included in the course. Factors such as economic,
social and political influences which have an important effect
on the conduct of the program are also considered. School
health programs are discussed, with particular emphasis upon the
medical and physical examinations and tests and the procedures
which follow. Diagnostic and remedial techniques, classroom
hygiene, and principles of preventive and corrective exercise are
discussed. The course also includes a consideration of the proper
place occupied by interschool and intercollegiate athletics in the
physical education program.

Required of all students electing Physical Education as a minor
field.

3 class hours

PE 6 Play and Recreation

The purpose of this course is to prepare students for leadership
of leisure-time activities. It considers the biological and socio-
logical aspects of play and its increasing importance in modern life.
From a practical point of view the course deals with the problems
faced by the director of leisure-time activities in the community,
in the school, or on the playground. The course should be of
special interest to students who contemplate entering social work
or teaching.

3 class hours

PE 7 History of Physical Education

To provide a valuable background for students in this field, this
course traces the whole history of physical education from the
days of the Greeks and the Romans up to the present. Attention
is given to a number of special systems of training which have
been developed in Europe.

The course is required of all students electing Physical Education
as a minor field.

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 125

PE 8 Administration of Physical Education

This course is designed to acquaint students in the field of
physical education with many of the administrative problems
which are likely to arise in connection with their work. The sub-
ject matter includes a consideration of the objectives of the
physical education program, personnel required, and various
allied subjects such as gymnasia, athletic fields, and the con-
struction and maintenance of these units. The conduct of the
athletic program including requirements for equipment, arrange-
ments of schedules, coaching, meets, etc., is also included.

Required of all students electing Physical Education as a minor
field.

3 class hours

PE 9 Football

This course is designed to furnish the student interested in foot-
ball coaching with a thorough knowledge of the sport. Careful
consideration is given to the fundamentals in discussing the plays
of each position in the line and backfield. Various well-known
offensive and defensive systems are discussed for the purpose of
considering their general merits, as well as adaptations to particular
situations. Training and conditioning, rules and interpretation,
and officiating are given proper attention.

3 class hours

PE 11 Track and Field Events

The course considers the care and training of track athletes.
Practice schedules, selection of material, conduct of meets, etc.,
are discussed. The viewpoint from which the topics are treated
is that of the student of coaching technique. In connection with
this course, action pictures taken from actual performances by
world champions, together with moving pictures, are of great
value in demonstrating the style and technique of track and
field events.

3 class hours

PE 12 Basketball and Baseball

Various systems in use throughout the country are compared
and contrasted. Team play, offense, defense, signal systems,
training and conditioning, rules, and officiating are among the
topics studied. The student in this course should acquire a
thorough knowledge of all phases of the sports.

3 class hours

126 -NORTHEASTERhl WNIVERSITY

Thysics

F I'A Survey of Physical Science

The purpose of the course is to give a definite conception of the
physical world to those students who ordinarily would not elect
a science course but who need to know something about the
contributions and the place of the physical sciences in contempo-
rary civilization. This course begins with a study of the universe
and solar system. Consideration is given to the principles of
distance, mass and weight, and the simple dynamics of bodies.
The earth is studied from the viewpoint of its geological, meteoro-
logical, and chemical aspects, these main fields introducing a
non-mathematical discussion of magnetism, heat, and electricity.

4 class hours

P 2' A Survey of Physical Science

In this course, which continues P 1-A, the phenomena of light
are taken up. Following this, consideration is given to spectros-
copy and matter structure, the periodic table, acids, bases, salts,
and organic compounds. The course concludes with a discussion
of certain aspects of physics which are of practical importance in
the household, such as heating, lighting, refrigeration, and electrical
appliances.

4 class hours

P 1 Physics J

A course in the study of the fundamental principles of the me-
chanics of physics. Some of the topics covered are simple har-
monic motion, uniformly accelerated motion, friction, work,
energy, power, fluid pressure, angular velocity, centripetal force,
equilibrium under the action of a series of parallel forces, and
equilibrium under the action of concurrent forces.

3 class hours

P 2 Physics 1

This is a thorough course in magnetism and electricity, covering
all the details within the scope of standard college texts on these
subjects. All lectures are illustrated by means of lantern slides,
motion pictures, and special apparatus.

3 class hours

P 3 Physics U

A course in the study of wave motion, sound, and light. Molecular
mechanics and other fundamental principles of physics are stressed
at the beginning.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 127

P 3'A General Physics

A study of the fundamental principles of mechanics, heat, wave
motion and sound. The course includes lectures with appropriate
demonstrations and selected experiments performed by the
student in the laboratory.

4 class hours, 4 lab. hours

P 4 Physics U

The topics studied are thermometry, expansion of solids, liquids
and gases, calorimetry, change of state including latent heat of
fusion and vaporization (sublimation), triple point diagram,
conduction and radiation, and the mechanical equivalent of heat.
Preparation: P 1, P 2 3 class hours

P 4'A General Physics

This course is a continuation of P 3-A, and deals with the funda-
mental principles of light, electricity and magnetism. Appropriate
demonstrations and laboratory experiments accompany all
lectures.

4 class hours, 4 lab. hours

P 5 Physics Laboratory

This course consists of experiments in mechanics, light, electricity,
and magnetism performed by each student, supplementing the
lecture and classroom work of courses P 1, P 2, and P 3. The
experiments on mechanics include the use of the vernier, mi-
crometers, and spherometer; the calculation of true weights; the
funicular polygon; gyroscopic motion; simple harmonic motion;
and the determination of areas by means of the planimeter. Other
experiments in this course include plotting the magnetic field
about a bar magnet and the determination of the pole strength
and field strength of the magnet, the position of images in a com-
bination of lenses, and one experiment on electrostatics.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 2 lab. hours

P 6 Physics Laboratory

A continuation of the experiments started in P 5, including ex-
periments on sound and heat. Some of the experiments of this
course concern the modulus of elasticity, the determination of the
velocity of sound, the coefficient of cubical expansion of mercury,
the air thermometer, the determination of the mechanical equiva-
lent of heat, the study of the maximum and minimum ther-
mometers, and the use of the spectroscope in the study of the
bright line and solar spectra. The experiments of this course
supplement the class work of courses P 1, P 2, P 3, and P 4.
Preparation: P 1, P 2 2 lab. hours

128 NORTHEASTERlsI UNIVERSITY

P 9 Optics

This is a course in the more advanced forms of geometrical optics
and the study of physical optics.

Preparation: P 3, M 6 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 10 optics

Continuing P 9, a detailed study is made of physical optics with
considerable time spent on modern spectroscopic theory.

Preparation: P 9 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 13 Acoustics

A complete mathematical study of the modes of vibration of

strings, pipes, membranes, and a consideration of vibrating
systems in general.

Preparation: P 3, M 6 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 14 Acoustics

A course in the application of the principles of P 13 to the prob-
lems of speech, audition, sound, filters, musical instruments, and
the acoustics of auditoriums.

Preparation: P 13 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 15 Modern Physics

Consideration is given to molecular relations, and then to atomic
structure, quantum mechanics, and allied subjects.

Preparation: P 4i M 7 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 16 Modern Physics

Radioactivity, artificial transmutation, nuclear structure, and the
devices for studying these phenomena are here presented. Some
time is also given to the Stark, Zeeman, and Raman effects, and
to X radiation and cosmic rays.

Preparation: P 15 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 17 Electronics

This course is designed to make the student familiar with the
principles, operation and application of electronic devices. Direct
current circuits, alternating current circuits, measuring devices,
thermionic tubes, and electronic principles are studied.

Prerequisite: P 1, P 2, P 3, P 4, P 5, P 6 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 129

P 18 Electronics

Continuing the work of the first term, audio amplifiers and oscilla-
tors, high frequency amplifiers and oscillators, frequency measure-
ments, photo cells, detectors, radio, and some special applications
are studied.

Preparation: P 17 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

P 65 Thesis
See statement on Theses, page 136.

P 66 Thesis
A continuation of P 65.

P 101 Theoretical Physics

Vector analysis, dynamics, hydrodynamics, thermodynamics,
statistical mechanics.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

P 102 Theoretical Physics

Kinetic theory of gases, electrical theory, magnetic theory, optics,
spectra.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

P 103 Quantum Mechanics

Quantum phenomena, Schrodinger equation, potential barriers,

classical atomic dynamics, linear harmonic oscillator, rigid rotator.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

P 104 Quantum Mechanics

The hydrogen atom, Van der Waal's forces, perturbation theory,

the helium atom, the hydrogen molecule, valence bonds, radiation.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

P 105 Applied Mathematics

Elliptical integrals, matrices, algebraic and trigonometric series,

line and surface integrals, some differential equations of physics.

(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

P 106 Applied Mathematics

Applications of vectors to physics, probability, empirical formulas,
curve fitting, conformal transformations of fields and charts.
(For graduate students only.) 3 class hours

130 NORTHEASTERN L/NZVERSITY

P 107 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

P 108 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

P 109 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

P 110 Graduate Thesis
Thesis work for graduate students.

The folloiving courses offered in the College of Engineering may be
counted as courses in Physics:

ME 20 Applied Mechanics (Statics)

The subjects treated are coUinear, parallel, concurrent, and non-
concurrent force systems in a plane and in space; the determina-
tion of the resultant of such systems by both algebraic and graph-
ical means, special emphasis being placed on the funicular polygon
method for coplanar force systems; the forces required to produce
equilibrium in such systems; first moments; and problems in-
volving static friction, such as the inclined plane and the wedge.
Prerequisite: PI 4 class hours

ME 21 Applied Mechanics (Kinetics)

The subjects treated are continuation of first moments as applied
to varying intensity of force and to the determination of centers
of gravity of areas and solids; second moments and the applica-
tion to the determination of moment of inertia of plane and solid
figures, radius of gyration, polar moment of inertia, product of
inertia, principal axes; uniform motion, uniformly accelerated
motion, variable accelerated motion, harmonic motion; simple
pendulum, rotation, work, energy, momentum, and impact.
Preparation: ME 20 4 class hours

ME 30 Thermodynamics

In this introductory course in the fundamentals of thermo-
dynamics the following subjects are discussed: general theory of
heat and matter; first and second laws of thermodynamics;
equations of state; fundamental equations of thermodynamics;
laws of perfect gases; properties of vapors including development

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 131

and use of tables and charts; thermodynamic processes of gases,
and saturated and superheated vapors; and the general equations
for the flow of fluids.

Preparation: P 4 4 class hours

Psychology

Ps 1 Introduction to Differential Psychology

An elementary survey of the psychology of individual differences
including personality differences together with a presentation of
some of the practical applications of the findings of differential
psychology.

3 class hours

Ps 2 General Psychology

An introduction to general experimental psychology. The topics
include learning, memory, thought, imagination, motivation,
emotion, sensation, and perception.

Preparatiorx: Ps 1 3 class hours

Ps 3 Experimental Psychology

Introductory laboratory. Experiments on sensory and motor
phenomena, perception, learning, memory, and thought. Provides
practice in the organization, statistical treatment, and interpre-
tation of experimental data. Lectures and demonstrations in
addition to laboratory work.

Prerequisite: Ps 2 2 class hours, 4 lab. hours

Ps 4 Differential Psychology

Introductory laboratory. Requires the solution of miniature
problems involving the procedures used in computing scale values
for rank orders, constructing rating scales, questionnaires, and
mental tests.

Preparation: Ps 3 2 class hours, 4 lab. hours

*Ps 5 Educational Psychology

Considers the applications of psychological facts and principles
to educational problems and practices.

Prerequisite: Ps 2 4 class hours

*May be counted for credit in either Psychology or Education.

132 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Ps 7 Social Psychology of Everyday Life

A course devoted to the psychological examination of some of the
phenomena observable in everyday social life. This includes an
analysis of the socialization process, the development and role of
language in everyday life, and those problems which are particu-
larly important in wartime — propaganda, rumor, and morale.

3 class hours

Ps 8 Social Psychology, Theory, and Methods

A survey of the field of social psychological theory and an examina-
tion of the experimental techniques utilized in this field of psy-
chology. Special topics are the study of leadership and co-opera-
tion, and the measurement of attitudes.

3 class hours

Ps 9 Psychology of Personality

Presents a survey of historical and contemporary theories of the
nature of personality. The problems of the generality of traits,
the consistency of expression, and the relation of cultural factors
to personality, growth, and integration will be discussed.

Prerequisite: Ps 2 4 class hours

Ps 10 Abnormal Psychology

An introduction to the field of psychopathology. The psychology
of the neuroses and the minor disturbances of everyday life are
emphasized. Interpretation of clinical findings in the light of
some contemporary schools of psychology is included.

Preparation: Ps9 4 class hours

Ps 13 Psychological Testing

The application of psychological test methods in educational and
clinical settings. May be elected with the consent of the depart-
ment by qualified seniors majoring in Psychology.

Prerequisite: Ps 4 3 class hours

Ps 14 Advanced Experimental Laboratory

Individual research. May be elected with the consent of the
department by qualified seniors majoring in Psychology.

Prerequisite: Ps 3 8 lab. hours

Ps 61 Seminar

Assigned readings and reports in theoretical and historical
problems. May be elected with the consent of the department by
qualified seniors majoring in Psychology.

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 133

Ps 62 Seminar

A continuation of Ps 61.
Preparation: Ps 61

Sociology

S 1 Introduction to Sociology

In presenting a survey of the origins and sources of human society,
this study provides orientation for the courses in principles and
problems which follow. The several theories of organic evolution
are discussed. The antiquity of man and basic anthropological
data are considered. The racial and ethnic groupings of man are
then studied in the light of biological, geographical, and cultural
factors.

3 class hours

S 2 Principles of Sociology

Facts and principles basic to a general knowledge of the field of
sociology are presented. The origins, forms, and forces of human
associations are discussed. Consideration is given the several
leading schools of sociological thought. The course is designed
to meet the needs of the student who desires only an elementary
survey of the subject as well as the student who plans to take
advanced courses in social science.

3 class hours

S 3 Social Problems

Attention is given the nature, complex causation, and inter-
relatedness of social problems in general. Cultural change, with
its attendant lags, as well as other social forces and conflicts are
studied. While sociological theory is occasionally introduced to
clarify the problem at hand, the course is essentially practical in
character. Such problems as poverty and unemployment, race
antagonisms, population pressures, and the broken home are
considered. Optional field trips to various institutions give
concreteness to the problems studied.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

S 4 Social Pathology

134 NORTHEASTER'N UNIVERSITY

ease, alcoholism and drug addiction, suicide, delinquency and
crime, and pathologies of domestic relations. The field trips
arranged for this course add to the practical knowledge of the
social ills which are studied.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

S 5 Criminology

Delinquency and crime are defined and classified, and their causal
factors indicated. The various theories as to what makes crimi-
nals are dealt with, and a brief history of crime is sketched. Legal
and economic aspects of crime are summarized, but the study
is mainly sociological. Prevention and correction of criminal
behavior are stressed. Local institutions are visited.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hxmrs

S 6 Penology

Closely related to S 5, this subject begins with an historical treat-
ment of the punishment of criminals. Time is devoted chiefly to
an understanding of modern methods and problems of dealing
with offenders. Field trips are taken to criminal courts and penal
institutions.

Preparation: S 5 3 class hours

S 7 Principles of Social Ethics

To clarify the meaning of morality in social relations is the aim
of this study. Right and wrong conduct is analyzed in the light
of the highest values for human society. Moral laws are discussed,
and the various systems of ethics are evaluated. Scientific attitudes
are encouraged in order that one's moral judgments may be
compatible with one's best reflective thought.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

S 8 Problems in Social Ethics

Problems arising from differences in moral standards found in the
various social groups will be examined. The question of ethical
relativism and determinism will be considered. A selected number
of specific problems in social ethics will be discussed.

Preparation: S7 3 class hours

S 9 The Family

The historical development of the family is first traced, after which
the course focuses upon the modern family. The monogamic
family is contrasted with other types, and such unconventional
forms as companionate and trial marriages are evaluated. Then
follows an intensive study of family problems.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 135

S 10 The Family

A continuation of S 9. A constructive program is presented for
strengthening the family as a basic unit in society.

Preparation: S9 3 class liours

S 11 Social Control

The methods by which social forces are controlled provide the
fundamental material of the course. External and internal
types of control of the social organism are discussed. The use of
violence, the power of public opinion, and the application of
certain principles of social psychology are examined.

Preparation: S 3, S 4, Ph 2 3 class hours

S 12 Social Progress

The historical development of the theory of progress, contem-
porary concepts of social progress, the agents of progress, and the
phenomenon of regression are several of the subjects for study.
Preparation: S 11 3 class hours

S 13 Population Problems

Population pressure, contrasts between urban and rural popula-
tion, migration, and pertinent types of social mobility are studied
in this course. After a brief survey of population problems in
several areas of Europe and the Orient, attention is then given
to a careful analysis of population conditions in the United States.
The many factors are shown which intensify the problem in our
country in spite of its wide area. What principles have superseded
those of Malthus? What immigration policies are most sound
for our country in the long run? What methods can be adopted
which will relieve the population pressure in our great cities?
Such questions as these will be discussed.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

S 14 Urban Sociology

Upon studying the complex human society found in the various
cities of the world, this course then turns to an analysis of the
modern American city. Its types, social values, and pathological
elements are discussed. Methods of city planning are considered.
The belief on the part of some sociologists that democracy is
doomed by its cities is examined in the light of typical problems
of urban society.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

136 NORTHEASTERhl UNIVERSITY

S 15 History of Sociological Thought

With emphasis upon modern authorities, this course surveys the
chief systems o( sociological thought and the personalities who
have made outstanding contributions to the field. Such leading
thinkers as Sumner, Ward, Gumplowicz, Durkheim, and Pareto
are studied. The relation of sociological theory to contemporary
world movements is stressed.

Preparation: S 3, S 4, Ph2 3 class hours

S 16 Sociology of Religion

Religious beliefs, practices, and institutions are examined and
evaluated in relation to their effects upon society at large. The
great religions of the world are compared in the light of their
contributions to the well-being and progress of mankind. The
social creeds of the several leading denominations in America are
discussed with respect to their attitudes towards race, industry,
war, and other social problems. The influences of organized
religion upon politics and educational institutions are given
attention.

Preparation: S 3, S 4 3 class hours

S 61 Seminar

Assigned readings and reports on selected topics. May be elected
with the consent of the department by qualified seniors majoring
in Sociology.

S 62 Seminar
A continuation of S 61.
Preparation: S 61

S 65 Thesis
See statement on Theses below.

S 66 Thesis
A continuation of S 65.

theses

A thesis in the College of Liberal Arts is considered to be an
essay involving the statement, analysis, and solution of some
problem in a special field. Its purpose is to demonstrate a satis-
factory degree of initiative and power of original thought and
work on the part of the candidate. A mere resume of existing
knowledge in some subject is not acceptable. This, it is true,
must usually be made, but in addition thereto the student must
show an ability to deal constructively with the data which has

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS 137

been collected and the power to draw significant and reliable con-
clusions from the investigations. The completed thesis will be
examined for acceptance or rejection from the technical viewpoint
by the major departments interested and then forwarded to the
Secretary of the Faculty. Final approval of the thesis rests with
the Dean. When it is accepted, the thesis becomes the property
of the college and is not to be printed, published, nor in any other
way made public except in such manner as the major department
and the Dean shall jointly approve.

Frequently thesis subjects may be chosen on problems arising
where the student is employed at co-operative work. Employers
are usually glad to consult with the student in the selection of
the subject and the subsequent development of the thesis.

When theses are conducted in this manner, it is understood
that the employer is not expected by the University to assume
any expense of the thesis nor to furnish any supplies or equipment
to be used in the development of the thesis other than those which
he may consider it advisable and desirable to place at the disposal
of the students. The regulations governing the use of laboratories
and buildings of the co-operating firms will vary in practically all
cases and each student must naturally be governed definitely by
the regulations existing at the plant where the thesis is to be
conducted.

It is understood that the thesis work must not in any way
interfere with the regular required co-operative work and must
be done during hours distinctly outside of regular co-operative
work hours unless special request is made by the co-operating firm
for some other arrangement.

Theses conducted in conjunction with co-operating firms must
be submitted in duplicate, one copy to be presented by the Dean
to the co-operating employer.

Theses are not required of seniors in the College of Liberal Arts.
To certain students who wish to do so, however, the privilege of
writing a thesis may be granted by the Faculty Committee on
Theses in accordance with the following regulations:

1. To be eligible to write a thesis a student must have attained
a scholastic average of at least 2.0 or better through the middler
year and the first half of the junior year.

2. Students who have met this minimum requirement may
petition for the privilege of substituting a thesis for formal class-
room work.

3. In this petition the student must state the subject which is to
be investigated and give a brief statement of the purpose and scope
of the proposed thesis.

4. Petitions for the privilege of writing theses must be submitted
in writing to the head of the student's major department not
later than the middle of the second term of the junior year.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

COLLEGE OF

Business Administration

Admission Requirements and Courses of Study

1944.1946

(CO-EDUCATION AL)

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS

July, 1944

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 141

THE COLLEGE OF
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

cAims and (Methods

A LTHOUGH it is true that collegiate training for business is
uX relatively new in the field of higher education, it is also
JL Jl evident that collegiate business schools are beyond the stage
of early experimentation and have emerged on a level with other
college courses recognized as higher education. There is a certain
advantage in newness in that the mere youth of the college keeps
it up to date in its outlook and scope of activity. In addition, it is
not bound by the traditional but obsolete practices sometimes
found in older branches of education.

We hear a good deal today about the increasing need for
specialists in business. It is asserted that modern business institu-
tions have become so large that no one individual can administer
the many matters of routine involving executive judgment. The
need for specialists is self-evident, but the training best suited for
preparing the individual to take over specialized executive author-
ity is not so evident. There are many schools offering a short
course of training in preparation for these specialized positions.
Such training cannot give the individual the breadth of vision
needed to go beyond minor managerial jobs demanding attention
to the exhausting details of daily routine.

To pass beyond this on the way to responsibility of truly execu-
tive nature a background of general business and related knowl-
edge is essential. This background should precede the specialized
study into a particular branch of business, enabling one to see
the whole business and industrial picture and not merely one
branch of it. Executive administration cannot be taught with any
adequacy by attacking one subject, no matter how carefully
planned the approach and how thorough the course of study. For
instance, accounting is not the only means of arriving at a produc-
tion budget based on sales estimates; it is but one of the tools. A
knowledge of marketing, finance, statistics, and management
technique are also needed. Vision and sound judgment can then
make all of these branches of information serve to best advantage.

Aims of the College

In keeping with current trends in collegiate business education,
the educational policy of the college is directed toward the
achievement of the following purposes:

142 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

First: To offer that type of education for business which will
enable men and women to select most advisedly the field of busi-
ness best suited to their aptitudes. The Co-operative Plan is par-
ticularly effective in this respect.

Second: To build for breadth of perspective in preference to
over-specialization with its narrowing effects; therefore, to elim-
inate haphazard selection of courses, through concentration upon
balanced, carefully co-ordinated curricula, and thus to provide an
adequate background for specialization as need arises.

Third: To provide a thorough knowledge of fundamental eco-
nomic laws and an understanding of their applications in business.

Fourth: To develop the habits of accurate thinking that are
essential to sound judgment.

Fifth: To develop in all students attitudes and ideals that are
ethically sound and socially desirable.

Methods

In order that these aims may be realized as fully as possible, the
college makes use of the problem and the case methods of in-
struction in addition to the lecture and recitation system. Mere
textbook reading alone is almost valueless; students tend to accept
without question what the textbook presents. Instead, they
should learn to analyze every proposition, to challenge unsup-
ported assertions, to think independently, and to support their
thinking with logic and facts.

Hence, concrete problems and cases which executives have
faced in accounting, marketing, organizing, and the like con-
stitute the bulk of class work. Students analyze problems, break
them into their constituent parts, discover and list the factors for
and against possible solutions, and work out a logical conclusion.
In class they discuss their work with their instructors in the light
of the latter's broader knowledge.

Such a method tends to develop an executive attitude. No
lecture or mere reading of textbooks can do so. Students gain
skill and facility in solving problems by actually solving many
hundreds of them, thereby accumulating a ripe experience seldom
open to the petty employee buried in routine and mechanical
detail. What counts in business, as elsewhere, is not solely whether
one possesses much knowledge, but whether through his knowl-
edge one can logically and effectively solve the problems he con-
fronts, or possibly prevent problems from arising. Experience in
solving typical problems provides a background for anticipating
and forestalling similar ones as well as for solving others that
may arise.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMIMSTRATION 143

Equipment
Visual Education Equipment

Classroom instruction is made more effective by the use of
motion pictures and lantern slides. For this purpose there are
available projectors for 16 mm. and 35 mm. films. Complete
sound motion picture apparatus is also available. New and
powerful Delineascopes project the lantern slides. Stationary
as well as portable daylight screens enable students to take notes
while viewing the pictures.

Business Laboratory

Students have available for laboratory work in accounting and
statistical methods all of the commonly used office machines.
These are available in a special room together with necessary
library services, including Moody's Manuals, Poor's Manuals,
and various charts and maps.

The laboratory is in charge of a graduate assistant whose work
is to maintain the equipment in excellent condition and to give
instruction in the use of the various office machines.

Principal pieces of equipment in the laboratory include dupli-
cators, typewriters, hand and electric calculators, and both hand
and electric adding machines.

144 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

cAdmission '^^quirements

Applicants for admission to the freshman class without restric-
tions must qualify by one of the following methods:

1. Graduation from an approved course of study in an
accredited secondary school, including prescribed subjects listed
below.

2. Completion of fifteen acceptable secondary school units
with a degree of proficiency satisfactory to the Department of
Admissions.

3. Examinations.

(Certificate of entrance examinations passed for admission
to recognized colleges and technical schools may be accepted.)

Prescribed Subjects for Admission
College of Business Administration

Mathematics (Algebra recommended) 1 unit

Natural Science 1 unit

History, Social Studies and/or foreign language 3 units

English 3 units

*Electives 7 units

Total 15 units

A unit is a credit given to an acceptable secondary school
course which meets at least four times a week for periods of not
less than forty minutes each throughout the school year.

Entrance examinations are not required of students whose
transcripts of record are acceptable, but the Committee on Ad-
missions reserves the right to require a candidate to be present
for an examination in any subjects that it may deem necessary
because of some weakness in the secondary school record.

Other Requirements

*Not less than four of the "electives" must be in one or more of the following
academic branches: Languages, Natural Science, Mathematics, Social Sciences,
History.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 145

siders student's interests and aptitudes in so far as these can be
determined, capacity for hard work, attitude toward classmates and
teachers in high school, physical stamina, and most important
of all — character. In this way the University seeks to select for
its student body those who not only meet the academic admission
requirements but who also give promise of acquitting themselves
creditably in the rigorous program of training afforded by the Co-
operative Plan and of later becoming useful members of society.

Personal Interview

Candidates are urged to visit the Office of Admissions for
personal interview if it is possible for them to do so before sub-
mitting their applications. Office hours of the Department are
from 9:00 A.M. to 4:00 P.M. daily; Saturdays to 12:00 m. The
Director of Admissions will interview applicants on Wednesday
evenings but by appointment only.

Application for Admission

Each applicant for admission is required to fill out an application
blank stating previous education, as well as the names of persons
to whom reference may be made.

An application fee of five dollars ($5.00) is required when the
application is filed. This fee is non-returnable.

The last page of this catalog is in the form of an application
blank. It should be filled out in ink and forwarded with the
required five dollar fee to the Director of Admissions, North-
eastern University, Boston, Mass. Checks should be made out
to Northeastern University.

An application should be filed at least a m.onth prior to the date
of registration.

The University reserves the right to place any entering student
upon an indefinite trial period. Reclassification will be determined
upon the academic success of the student.

146 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Registration

Eligibility for admission does not constitute registration. Fresh-
men will register at the University on July 10, 1944, Sept. 25, 1944,
March 12, 1945, June 11, 1945, Sept. 10, 1945. Students are not
considered to have met the requirements for admission until they
have successfully passed the required physical examination.

Advanced Standing

Applicants seeking advanced standing should arrange to have
transcripts of their previous college records forwarded with their
initial inquiry. Students admitted to advanced standing are not
eligible for placement for co-operative work until they have com-
pleted a full year of academic work at the University.

Entrance Examinations

Students are advised to take such examinations on the earliest
possible date in order that any deficiencies which they fail to clear
may be made up in time to permit registration with the desired
class and division.

The time of examinations is as follows:

10:00 A.M. to 12:00 M.
1:00 P.M. to 3:00 P.M.

During the current year examinations will be given approximately
three weeks before each registration date.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMIMSTRATlOhl 147

"^quirements for Qraduation

Students may qualify for the degree of Bachelor of Science in
Business Administration in one of the following options:

Accounting, Marketing and Advertising, Public Administration,
Banking and Finance, Industrial Administration.

Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree must complete
all of the prescribed work of the curriculum in which they seek
to qualify with a degree of proficiency acceptable to the faculty.
Students who undertake co-operative work assignments must also
meet the requirements of the Department of Co-operative Work
before they become eligible for their degrees.

Students transferring from another college or university are not
eligible to receive the B.S. degree until they have completed at least
one academic year at Northeastern immediately preceding their
graduation.

Scholarship Requirements

Students who fail to show satisfactory standards of general
efficiency in their professional fields may be required to demon-
strate their qualifications for the degree by taking such additional
work as the faculty may prescribe. Those who are clearly unable
to meet the accepted standard of attainment may be required to
withdraw from the University. The degree conferred not only
represents the formal completion of the subjects in the selected
course of study but also indicates professional competence in the
designated field of business administration.

Graduation with Honor

Thesis Option

Theses are not required of candidates for the degree of Bachelor
of Science in Business Administration. Students who show special
aptitude for thesis work, however, may be permitted to substitute
an appropriate thesis for equivalent work in class. Such permis-
sion must be obtained by the candidate from the Dean of the
College.

148 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

^he Programs of Study

First Year

A full year of thirty-two weeks is devoted to a thorough under-
standing of the basic principles underlying the conduct of business.

The student is also acquainted with the existing business struc-
ture and given an appreciation of its conception and growth in
terms of the distribution of industrial resources, and the historical
development of business and industry.

Other basic courses are in keeping with the personal needs of
the student and preparatory to the work which follows in the
upper years of his course. Throughout the year each student has
the friendly counsel and guidance of a faculty adviser whose aim
is to help bridge the gap between high school and college.

Upperclass Work

Co-operative training is started in the second year. Two terms
of college work are required.

In the third year, the completion of the foundation program
gives way to the beginnings of specialized training.

At the end of the third year the students elect the professional
curricular offerings in accordance with their major fields of interest
and natural aptitudes.

The Professional Options

All students are required to take common courses in their
fourth and fifth years which are deemed necessary for a well-
rounded training. These are pursued jointly with the professional
work which has been selected, with a view to meeting the changing
and expanding needs of present-day business conduct, while at
the same time meeting the vocational needs of the students by
way of earning a living. A brief statement of the vocational op-
portunities in the fields of work represented by each of the pro-
fessional options follows:

I. Accounting

Many successful careers are open to the professional account-
ants. Their services are demanded by business, commerce and
industry. Public and private enterprises seek adequately trained
men and women. Better known among the wide variety of titles
descriptive of their work are public and private accountant, cost
accountant, resident and traveling auditor, credit manager,
statistician, investigator, adjuster, and financial accountant.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 149

II. Banking and Finance

Financial institutions serving present-day business and industry
are its life stream. Any list of these organizations which are
indispensable in the conduct of business must include banks,
insurance companies, investment houses, credit concerns, finan-
cial exchanges, business forecasting organizations, financial
service institutions, mortgage companies, national and local real
estate brokerage firms, and appraisers.

Specific courses offered in Northeastern University's College
of Business Administration open the door to a host of careers in
these institutions as well as the many governmental regulatory
agencies controlling their operations.

III. Marketing and Advertising

Business and industry must sell their services and products to
each other and to the general public. Successful selling means
more than being a salesman. It demands knowledge of distribution
channels, markets and buying habits, as well as sales resistance.
It means also knowing how to buy in order to sell and then how
to organize, promote, and carry out a sales campaign.

The following list is representative of the vast array of marketing
and advertising occupations: sales manager, supervisor, analyst
and correspondent, advertising manager, promotion manager,
copy supervisor, space buyer, and publicity director; market,
product and sales analyst, industrial salesman, sales personnel
supervisor, field representative, missionary salesman, manufac-
turer's agent, merchandise manager, and retail store operator.

IV. Industrial Administration

Increasingly the manufacturer is looking to the business school
for well-trained men and women to undertake cost work, produc-
tion control, planning, methods analysis, and the solution of sales
problems peculiar to the manufacturer. Moreover, industrial
administrators are increasingly turning attention to the effective
administration of better employer-employee relations. This points
the way toward a growing need for trained managers of per-
sonnel relations.

The vocational opportunities of industrial administration in-
clude personnel management, traffic management, office manage-
ment, industrial purchasing; manufacturing, supervisory and
executive work, inventory and production control, production
planning, setting shop standards, wage rate administration, and
supervision of shop personnel.

V. Public Administration

The tremendous increase in the number of agencies regulating
both public and private enterprise has opened up an increasing
number of desirable career posts in both the state and federal

150 NORTHEASTERN UMVERSITY

governments for both men and women. These afford real oppor-
tunities for those who have training in the fundamentals of busi-
ness, together with special training in the problems of administra-
tion as related to government work. The typical positions include
division chiefs, bureau heads, department heads, foreign and
domestic representatives of the many departments, bureaus and
agencies of our government.

Pre-legal Curriculum

Effective September 1, 1938, by a ruling of the Supreme Judicial
Court of Massachusetts, in order to be eligible for examination
for admission to the bar, an applicant must have completed certain
general educational requirements before beginning his legal edu-
cation. Briefly, this general education must comprise graduation
from a four-year high school and the completion of not less than
half of the work accepted for the Bachelor's degree in a college
approved by the Board of Bar Examiners.

Recognizing that business training furnishes an excellent back-
ground for pre-legal training, the College of Business Adminis-
tration offers a pre-legal curriculum. This consists of taking an
amount of work in the college equivalent to that required for
admission to specific law schools in the Commonwealth, and
usually requires residence in school during the entire freshman
year and for 36 weeks during the sophomore year.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

151

No.

First Year

FIRST TERM

SECOND TERM

Course

Class

Hours No.

Course

Class
Hours

Regular Program

El-B
Ec 1

Acl
H 1
Gv 1
PE 1
PE3

English 3

Economic Geography. . 3

Accounting 1 4

History of Civilization. 4

American Government 3

Hygiene 1

Physical Training 2

E2-B
Ec2

Ac 2

Gv2

PE4

English 3

Commercial and Ind.

Hist, of the U.S 4

Accounting II 4

History of Civilization. 4

American Government 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

The curricula in the second and third years are common in all
fields of specialization and are listed below.

Second Year

L 1 Legal Bases of Business 3

Ec 3 Economic Principles ... 3

Ac 5 Cost Accounting 4

I A 1 Indus. Management I . . 3

E 3-B Bus. Communication . . 3

L2
Ec4
Ac 6
lA 1
E4-B

Legal Bases of Business 3

Economic Principles ... 3

Cost Accounting 4

Indus. Management II. 3

Bus. Communication. . 3

Third Year

Ec5
FIl

Ac 7
MA 1
SI

Economic Problems. .
Business Finance ....
Accounting Problems
Marketing Principles.
Sociology

3
3
4
4
3

Ec6
FI2
Ac 8
MA 2
S2

Economic Problems. .
Finance Problems . . .
Accounting Problems
Marketing Principles.
Sociology

3
3
4
4
3

Fourth and Fifth Years

The courses in the fourth and fifth years can be elected from
among the courses detailed in the pages which follow. Elections
should be concentrated in the field of specialization chosen. Ap-
proval of the Dean of the College must be secured for the election
of all courses in these last two years.

A total of 142 semester hours credit is required for the degree.

152 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Synopses of Courses of instruction

On the pages which follow are given the synopses of courses
offered in the several curricula of the college. Courses offered in
the first semester bear odd numbers; those offered in the second
semester bear even numbers.

The term prerequisite indicates a course that must be completed
with a passing grade before a student will be permitted to register
for the advanced course to which it applies. The term preparation
indicates a course of such a preparatory nature that a student
undertaking an advanced course, without having had the prepara-
tion course specified, will ordinarily find himself greatly handi-
capped, and may not register in the advanced course without the
consent of the instructor.

Freshmen courses extend over a full semester of 16 weeks.
Upperclass courses are uniformly 12 weeks in length each term.
The University reserves the right to withdraw any course in which
there is insufficient enrollment.

(Accounting

AC 1 Accounting 1

This course presents the fundamental principles of accounting
theory and practice in a manner designed to meet the needs of
students who intend to specialize in accounting as well as those
who require a knowledge of accounting as a preparation for the
study of banking and finance, production management, and
marketing. Beginning with a consideration of the need for and
the purpose served by accounting, a study of the balance sheet
and operating statement is presented so that the ultimate goal
and purpose of accounting is understood before the mechanical
methods of recording business transactions are presented. The
course then takes up specific balance sheet accounts; the law of
debit and credit; the theory of nominal accounts; construction
and interpretation of accounts; the recording process; the trial
balance; construction of financial statements; the need for ad-
justments at the end of the period; depreciation; deferred and
accrued items. 4 class hours

AC 2 Accounting U

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMlMSTRATIOlSl 153

AC 5 Cost Accounting

The structure of factory costs from the executive's viewpoint is
studied in this course. The subject is approached chiefly from the
management point of view. Problems are presented in a sum-
marized form in order to stress the fundamental aspects of costs.
Managerial control through the use of accounts is emphasized
at the beginning of the course. Some of the specific topics covered
are accumulation and distribution of cost data, process cost, job
cost, historical cost, estimated cost, standard cost, and spoilage
cost.

Prerequisite: AC 2 4 class Iwurs, 2 lab. hours

AC 6 Cost Accounting

This course is designed to develop in the student the managerial
ability to control production, operating, and distribution costs
through the use of cost accounting and the budget. Methods of
costing and controlling materials, labor, and expenses are con-
sidered in detail. Cost variations are analyzed. Joint cost and
by-product cost are introduced.

Prerequisite: AC 2 4 class hours, 2 lab. hours

AC 7 Accounting Problems

The aim of this course is to develop the broad viewpoint, analytical
power, and constructive and critical ability necessary to apply
properly a knowledge of accounting principles to specific problems
and situations. Consistency in the application of principles is
stressed. The major portion of the course is devoted to the study
of specific problems dealing with capital and revenue expenditures;
depreciation, appraisals and reserves; branch accounting; and
analysis of statements.

Prerequisite: AC 2 4 class hours

AC 8 Accounting Problems

The method ot approach in this course is like that followed in
AC 7, with greater emphasis on the financial aspects of a business.
Specific topics deal with bonds, annuities, sinking fund, reserves,
investment accounting, application of funds, consignment sales,
correction of statements, venture accounts, receivers accounts and
insurance.

Prerequisite: AC 2 4 class hours

AC 9 C.P.A. Problems

The purpose of this course is to provide for the application of the
knowledge of accounting principles and practice gained in the

154 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

preceding courses to the analysis and solution of complex prob-
lems involving a recognition of the economic, legal, and social
aspects of various forms of business organization. The course
content consists chiefly of problems given in C.P.A. examinations.
All phases of partnership, corporation, bond, depletion, cost
accounting, consolidation, municipal accounting, bank account-
ing, adjustments of complex statements and reports, actuarial
problems, and institutional accounting will be covered.

Prerequisite: AC 8 5 class hours

AC 10 Income Tax and Public Accounting
The first part of this course covers the fundamental aspects of
Federal Income Tax Law and the accounting concepts which arise
from its interpretation. The latter part of the course contemplates
the application of accounting knowledge to the analysis and
interpretation of accounting records. Case material is used to
outline the type of procedure best adapted to an intelligent exami-
nation of accounting records, and the compilation of reports on
which the business manager can base plans for future operations.
Specifically, balance sheet audits, detailed audits, and special
investigations for credit and other purposes receive attention.
Prerequisite: AC 8 • 5 class hours

Ranking and finance

Fl 3 Business Finance

3 class hours

Fl 4 Finance Problems
A continuation of Fl 3 Business Finance. This course deals with
the application of the principles of finance to such problems as
surplus, dividend and reserve policies, the relation of the corpora-
tion to banks and the investing public, and the problems of both
trade and economic risk. The course includes an analysis of such
combinations as trusts, holding companies, consolidations, and
pools from both the public and financial points of view. Analysis
is also made of aspects of reorganization problems in the light of
present legislation. The course concludes with an analysis of
government and state agencies now supplementing private sources
of business funds. 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMIMSTRATION 155

FI 6 Banking and Business

Because students taking this course have already received through
their study of economics some instruction in the general principles
of money and credit, particular attention is given to the bank in
its relation to the business man, and the function of the Federal
Reserve System as a central banking agency. An analysis is made
of the more basic aspects of Federal Reserve policy as they affect
business and the banking community. Current problems are
carefully considered.

Prerequisite: Ec 3 3 class hours

Fl 8 Advanced Banking Problems

In this course students are taught to look at the problems con-
fronting the banker from the executive's point of view. Through
a series of problems, most of which are actual cases, the matter
of loan and investment policies will be studied at length with
other problems concerning methods of increasing the bank's
efficiency, volume of business, and profits receiving the proper
amount of attention.

4 class hours

Fl 9 Investments

This course consists of a review of the principles of investment, a
study of investment policies, and the mechanics and mathematics
of investments. It includes a basic study of the advantages and
disadvantages of stocks and bonds as media of investment from
a present and historical basis.

4 class hours

Fl 10 Investments

A practical study is made of the various fields of investment such
as industrials, rails, banks, real estate, government, and foreign
investments. Emphasis is placed on security analysis as it per-
tains to the individual issues. The course not only concerns
itself with an intensive study of particular companies and issues,
but also includes an analysis of the various current methods of

market analysis.

4 class hours

Fl 12 Public Finance

One of the biggest problems confronting the people of all nations
following the war will be the question of taxation. In recognition
of this fact and of the enormous difficulties facing business or-
ganizations and individuals because of the tax burden, the course
in Public Finance is offered. This course teaches the kinds of taxes
imposed by municipal, state, and federal governing bodies.

156 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Attention is given to the "trend" in taxation. Governmental bor-
rowings and revenues are studied as to their general effect on the
finances of individuals and business concerns. A large part of the
time allowed for this course is spent in a study of the sources of
revenue such as commodity taxes, highway taxes, general property
taxes, taxes on business, poll taxes, income taxes, and death taxes.

3 class hours

FI 13 Real Estate Practice and Appraising

Consideration of land as an economic institution, and the im-
portance of a sound land policy; the problems of owners and
builders, the service to be rendered the ordinary purchaser; or-
ganization of the real estate office, renting, leasing, and property
management; the importance of acquaintance with valuation
principles; building operations, the financing of transactions, sub-
dividing and planning; taxation, legal considerations, professional
relationships. 4 class hours

FI 14 Insurance Principles and Practices

The purpose of the course is to provide a comprehensive knowl-
edge of insurance principles and coverage such as will provide a
broad foundation for the student who plans to enter the business
of insurance or enable the man or woman in business to plan a
satisfactory program for personal needs or business responsibili-
ties. Content: the basic principles of insurance, solving the
economic problem of risk, types of insurance contracts, legal in-
terpretation of the insurance contract, types of insurance com-
panies, the needs of the buyer of insurance, co-operative or-
ganizations in the field of insurance. 4 class hours

d^arketing and (Advertising

MA I Marketing Principles

This course is designed to acquaint the student with the principles
underlying the distribution of merchandise. Textbook assign-
ments and lectures introduce a knowledge of the place of market-
ing in our modern economic order; the basic structure of markets;
the main functions of marketing such as assembling, grading,
storing, buying, selling and financing of goods; and the general
classification of commodities into major types for the purpose of
analytical study. The course gives further and more detailed
consideration to the activities of the several types of middlemen
such as brokers, wholesalers, and retailers, and their utilization

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 157

as channels of distribution; the work of the commodity exchanges
and co-operative marketing associations; and the development of
chain stores, mail order houses, and department stores.

Other topics considered are market risk, pricing, selling terms
and discounts, hedging, advertising, and the legal aspects of price
maintenance. Supplementary lectures and illustrative material
will be given to explain in some detail the methods used in market-
ing several specific commodities.

4 class hours

MA 2 Marketing Problems

Using actual case material, this course analyzes and suggests
solutions to a wide variety of selling problems in typical industries
and trades. It is aimed throughout to develop the analytical
powers of the student so that he may decide a problem from the
viewpoint of a marketing executive. Consideration is given to
consumers' buying habits and buying motives, to the important
types of retail and wholesale enterprise, and to an analysis of the
channels of distribution with the object of formulating a basis
for selecting suitable channels for various products. The marketing
of industrial goods is studied, including certain special problems
such as hedging. Producer's co-operative marketing is also given
attention.

4 class hours

MA 3 Sales Management
The study of actual case material forms the basis of this course.
In each case the facts are analyzed and a solution proposed. The
major problems of sales management may be stated as questions:
What to sell? To whom shall products be sold? At what price
and terms shall products be sold? The answering of these ques-
tions involves a consideration of merchandising policies and
organization, market channels, market research and analysis,

and pricing and credit policies.

4 class hours

MA 4 Sales Management
Continuing MA 3 Sales Management, this course deals primarily
with the following problems: sales methods, sales promotion, sales
campaigns, management of sales force, and the planning and
control of sales operations.

In the field of sales management the solution of problems in-
volves two types of mental effort. First, there is the suggestion
of plans or alternatives, a task requiring imagination; second,
there is the choice between the alternatives so suggested, a matter
of judgment. It is essential that the student of business manage-
ment acquire the habit of weighing alternatives before deciding,
but much more is to be gained if the student possesses and de-
velops imagination.

158 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

The purpose of the courses in sales management is principally to
develop an approach and technique for the solution of problems,
so the student will be able to analyze and think through the prob-
lems which must be faced later when he arrives at a post of
responsibility.

4 class hours

MA 5 Advertising Principles

The purpose of this course is to acquaint the student with the
fundamental principles and facts which must be known by the
men and women who are planning to select advertising as a career.
The economic background of the subject and its development is
presented, together with a survey of the methods for planning and
preparing advertisements actually followed in advertising offices.
Consideration is given to human instincts, buying habits, argu-
mentative and suggestive appeals, color, headlines, layout, illus-
trations, and trademarks.

4 class hours

MA 6 Advertising Problems

The analysis and solution of a wide variety of advertising problems
and cases based upon the actual business experience of a large
number of firms constitutes the content of this course.

4 class hours

MA 7 Retail Store Management

The purpose of this course is to study the principles of successful
retailing and to solve actual problems involving these principles.
Layout, location and equipment of retail stores are first con-
sidered. Store organization, market contacts, buying, receiving
and marking merchandise, and invoice procedure are taken up
next. Mark-up and mark-down are dealt with in detail through
practical examples requiring solution by the students, as are
inventory and stock control methods. Merchandise planning
is discussed and illustrated.

4 class hours

MA 8 Retail Merchandising

This course continues the work of Retail Store Management, deal-
ing with expense distribution, retail credits and collections, and
with special phases of retail accounting. Other topics considered
are fashion, salesmanship, customer service, and the training and
welfare of employees. The promotion of sales events and retail
advertising practices are analyzed from the viewpoint of the
store executive.

4 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMIN ISTRATlOhl 159

industrial (Administration

I A 1 Industrial Management 1

The course in industrial management places emphasis on the
administrative and profit-making phases of factory and plant
operation. A textbook is used to present elementary principles
and problem material which are supplemented by lectures.

The first part of the course presents a brief historical background
of U. S. industry; this is followed by a treatment of the location
of the plant; plant services and material handling; plant design,
structure, and layout; standardization, simplification, and special-
ization.

3 class hours

lA 2 Industrial Management U

This course is a continuation of Industrial Management lA 1 . It
deals with the control of plant operations. Each department of
a modern industrial concern is considered, emphasis being placed
on the organization and management problems confronted and
how they may be handled, with the intention that the student
shall become familiar with the activities and general working of
each department and the relationship which the departments
hold to one another and to the business as a whole. In detail
are considered budgeting, standards of performance (time and
motion study, wage systems), organization, routing, scheduling,
dispatching, inventory control, quality control, and visual controls
such as the organization chart, planning board, and departmental
report.

3 class hours

lA 3 Personnel Administration

4 class hours

I A 4 Personnel Problems

This course brings to the attention of the student an understand-
ing of the related, yet varied, problems with which the modern per-
sonnel department is confronted. These include problems of

160 T^ORTHEASTEKN UNIVERSITY

guidance, placement, job evaluation, adjustment of rates, employee
rating systems, development of complete, yet simple, personnel
records, etc.

4 class hours

lA 6 Motion and Time Study

This course comprises a detailed study of time and motion study
work, a complete study and actual practice in micromotion which
is the use of motion pictures in the motion study work, a prepara-
tion of simo-charts (the use of colored charts and symbols called
Therbligs which show all the elements in an operation cycle),
and the making of process charts which is the use of specifically
designed symbols, or industrial shorthand, to record motion
analysis.

4 class hours

lA 14 Production Processes

A course in the techniques, processes, and machines used in the
production of manufactured articles.

The subject matter is presented in lectures supplemented by
slides, exhibits, and demonstrations. The processes covered are
heat-treating, forging, welding, foundry practice, and die casting.
The metallurgical principles involved are correlated with good
shop practice in each case.

The construction nomenclature and operation of the following
machine tools are discussed: lathe, milling machine, planer,
shaper, broaching machine, and grinder.

4 class hours

Tuhlic (^Administration

PA 2 Public Administration I

4 class hours

PA 4 Political Concepts

A critical study is made of the major developments in political
theory since Bentham, with special reference to the influence of
these developments upon American politics and political insti-
tutions. Attention is paid to the modern conflict between the
democratic and the totalitarian conceptions of the state.

4 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 161

PA 5 Business and Government

The object of this course is to develop a thorough understanding
of the relationships between government and business. The
attitude of our government toward business since 1885 as evi-
denced by legislative, judicial, and executive action will be analyzed

in detail.

4 class hours

PA 7 Public Administration U

A study of the subject matter and principles of management
necessary for the efficient operation of the government.

4 class hxmrs

PA 8 Public Administration 111

This course presents a study of the public relations, fiscal control,
and policy-making aspects of public administration, stressing the
importance of co-operation among government bureaus, legis-
lative bodies, and the public; and presents to the student an ap-
preciation of the importance of versatility of ability for a successful
public career.

4 class hours

business Law

L 1 Legal Bases of Business

A course presenting the fundamental principles of business law
and their relationships to the operations of business enterprise.
Since practically every phase of business activity from the organi-
zation to the dissolution of a concern rests on a foundation of law,
it is essential that the student of business understand the rudi-
mentary legal principles involved. Major topics covered include
contracts, agency, negotiable instruments, sales, bailments, carriers,
insurance law, suretyship, and bankruptcy.

3 class hours

L 2 Legal Bases of Business

This course deals with the legal and economic phases of business
organizations. It discusses the individual proprietorship, partner-
ship, corporation, and business trust, showing how each is formed,
operated, and dissolved. The merits, as well as the shortcomings,
of each form are treated. Specific problems will deal with the
legal requirements, organization expense, operating problems,
taxes, and reports required of each of these types of organizations.

3 class hours

162 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Qo'Ordination

C 11 Business Conference

This course is designed to bring about analytical thinking and
systematic planning of the "after-graduation-employment" prob-
lem. It is conducted as an open discussion class by the Department
of Co-operative Work. Each co-ordinator has in class those
students who have been placed and supervised on co-operative
work by him. Each student analyzes and applies to himself or her-
self as the "product" the fundamental principles of merchandising.
Prominent men and women who are leaders in the fields of em-
ployment counseling, business, or engineering present the em-
ployers' viewpoint. Thus the graduating seniors are brought face
to face during the year with one of the most important and per-
plexing problems of life, namely, how to "sell their services,"
thereby aiming to bring a co-ordinated training of theory and
practice to a logical conclusion.

2 class hours

C 12 Business Conference

This course is the sequel to C 11 and consists of the practical
application of the techniques of job-getting which have been
analyzed and discussed in that course. It is conducted on a
conference rather than on a class basis, the major portion of the
time being devoted to the planning and writing of letters to and
securing interviews with prospective employers. It is intended
that this course will culminate in the attainment by each student
of his after-graduation job.

2 class hours

English

E I'B English

A course in composition with emphasis on the basic principles of
writing. A brief, comprehensive review of grammar and rhetoric
precedes the study of exposition. Works of contemporary essayists
and biographers are used as models for weekly themes and studied
as examples of modern literature.

3 class hours

E 2'B English

A continuation of E 1-B, with a study of contemporary short
stories, plays, and poems. Toward the end of the term a careful
study of letter writing is made.

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 163

E 3'B Business Communication

A survey of the basic techniques and forms of expression and
communication in business. The principles and methods of oral
communication are studied, with emphasis on the oral report,
the discussion, the conference, and types of the informal speech.
The purpose, form, and execution of graphic communication are
studied, through the most common and useful types of business
chart, graph, and tabulation. By the use of cases, problems, and
class exercises, the student is given practice in the forms of business
communication.

3 class hours

E 4'B Business Communication

A continuation of the survey of communication methods and
forms. Written communication is studied by way of the business
letter, memoranda, manuals, handbooks, instruction sheets, and
other forms of business writing. The student is taught the princi-
ples of expression and written composition, with emphasis on
organization, emphasis, and layout of the material to be com-
municated. Practice is provided through written problems and
classroom cases.

3 class hours

E 5'B Advanced Report Writing

An advanced study of current practices in industrial report writing
will be the purpose of this course. The emphasis will be placed
equally upon matter and form so that professional proficiencies
may be correlated with effective presentation.

3 class hours

E 13 Effective Speaking

This course offers practical training in the preparation and pres-
entation of the various types of speeches. The instruction is
planned to eliminate defects of voice, posture, and delivery, and
to develop in the student an ability to speak easily, naturally, and
forcefully.

2 class hours

E 14 Effective Speaking

Continued practice in impromptu and extempore speaking, organ-
ization of material, consideration of the audience, and vocabulary
building form the basis of the course.

2 class hours

164 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Economics

Ec 1 Economic Geography

In order to provide an adequate background for the study of
economics, this first course emphasizes the economic resources of
our country and the part played by these resources in the develop-
ment of our modern industrial society. The course is more con-
cerned with promoting the comprehension of basic concepts
than with stressing encyclopedic knowledge of masses of details.
In the latter part of the semester frequent use is made of motion
pictures to illustrate the processes and peculiar economic char-
acteristics of specific industries.

3 class hours

Ec 2 Commercial and Industrial History of the U. S.

This course is designed to complete the factual background which
is needed for the most successful study of theoretical economics.
The economic development of the United States is traced from
the colonial period to the present with special emphasis upon the
period since the Civil War. Stress is laid upon the importance of
economic factors and changes in our history in the description of
the development of manufacturing, agriculture, domestic and
foreign commerce, finance and banking, transportation and labor
organizations. Consideration is given to European developments
which have been closely related to those of the United States.

4 class hours

Ec 3 Economic Principles

A thorough grounding in the fundamental principles and laws of
economics is the aim of this basic course. The main topics include
the nature and organization of production, the nature and impor-
tance of wants, the relation of money and prices, the process of
exchange, and the nature of international trade.

3 class hours

Ec 4 Economic Principles

A continuation of Ec 3. A careful analysis is made of the determi-
nation of price under conditions of competition and monopoly,
and of the distribution of wealth and income in the form of wages,
economic rent, interest, and profits. The elements of insurance are
discussed in connection with profits.

Preparation: Ec 3 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 165

Ec 5 Economic Problems
In this course the application of economic principles to some of the
major economic problems of modern society is emphasized. The
problems studied include consumption, protective tariffs and sub-
sidies, labor problems such as unemployment and labor unions,
and the business cycle.

Preparation: Ec 3 3 class hours

Ec 6 Economic Problems
A continuation of Ec 5 Economic Problems. Among the problems
considered are the following: price stabilization, the agricultural
problem, the relation of government to business including the
control of monopolies and public utilities, insurance, public
finance, and proposals for the remodeling and improving of the
economic system.

Preparation: Ec 5 3 class hours

Ec 8 Business Cycles
After a study of the conditions which underlie cyclical fluctuations
in prices, volume of trade, physical production, and employment,
a careful analysis is made of the more significant theories of the
business cycle. The possibilities of controlling such fluctuations
and of initiating recovery receive extended attention. Throughout
the course emphasis is placed upon the current phase of the busi-
ness cycle and its peculiar problems.

Preparation: Ec 5, Ec 6 3 class hours

Ec 9 Statistics in Business
This course is intended to give the student an understanding of
statistical principles and methods and their practical application
in the administration of modern business. A study is made of
the nature, sources, collection and organization of business facts;
the presentation of such facts in tabular or graphic form, the
various averages, measures of dispersion, and the construction
and use of index numbers. Laboratory periods provide an oppor-
tunity for each student to demonstrate his ability to apply the
principles studied. 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Ec 10 Statistics in Business
The major portion of this continuation of Ec 9 Statistics in Busi-
ness concerns the analysis of time series and includes the methods
of obtaining trends, seasonal indexes, and the measurement of
cyclical variation. Correlation of time series is related to the
problems of business forecasting. In the laboratory work each
student is required to make a complete analysis of an individual
time series, preferably associated with his co-operative work.

2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

166 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Ec 11 Labor Problems

An intensive study of the labor problems of modern industry
constitutes the content of this course. Unemployment and other
grievances of the worker, including industrial accident and disease,
inadequate wages, long hours, undesirable working conditions,
child and woman labor, etc., are carefully analyzed. Labor unions,
representing the workers' effort to solve the above problems,
receive extended attention, with an appraisal of their policies and
accomplishments. Employee representation, profit-sharing plans
and similar devices of the employer to meet the same problems
are also examined critically. The attitude of our government
toward these problems and its attempts to handle them are
analyzed carefully. The suggestions of other groups and agencies in
respect to these problems will be treated, e.g., co-operative move-
ment, socialism.

Prerequisite: Ec 3, Ec 4 4 class hours

Ec 12 Economic Systems

This is an intensive analysis of alternative economic systems.

Various criteria for evaluating the different systems are developed.

Prerequisite: Ec 3, Ec 4 3 class hours

Ec 14 International Economic Relations

A careful examination of the important principles of international
trade and finance precedes a critical survey of the international
commercial policies of modern nations, with special reference to
the United States. Such broader problems as the international
control of raw materials, exchange restrictions, international
cartels and the economic activities of international organizations
are considered.

Preparation: Ec 5, Ec 6 4 class hours

Ec 15 History of Economic Thought

A critical review of the origin and development of economic
thought from the ancient world to modern times is the aim of this
course, since familiarity with the efforts of great economic thinkers
in the past is essential for the thorough understanding of modern
economic theory. After briefly noting the contributions of Plato
and Aristotle, the early Christian fathers, and the writers of the
Middle Ages, each of the main schools of economic thought is
taken up in turn: the Mercantilists, the Physiocrats, the Classical
School, the Socialists, the Historical School, the Austrian School,
and Alfred Marshall.

Preparation: Ec 5, Ec 6 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 167

Ec 16 Advanced Economic Theory

The course introduces the student to the more complex aspects
of economic theory. Particular consideration is given to the
major modern theoretical problems.

Preparation: Ec 15 3 class hours

Qovernment

Gv 1 American Government

The study of our National Government with respect to its organi-
zation and function; its powers and limitations under the Consti-
tution; its legislative, administrative and judicial machinery under
the party system of government and bureaucracy.

3 class hours

Gv 2 American Government

A more careful study of the relationships of our federal, state,
and municipal governments, including an analysis and comparison
of the various state governments and types of municipal govern-
ment with respect to state and local agencies for carrying out the
executive, legislative and judicial functions of government in a
democratic country.

3 class hours

Gv 3 Comparative Government

3 class hours

Gv 4 Comparative Government

A study of the newer governments of Europe, as found in Ger-
many, Italy, and the Soviet Union. Democracy and dictatorship
are analyzed as different modes of life and rule. The states are
compared to each other, to the older governments of Europe,
and to the United States.

3 class hours

Gv 5'B Constitutional Law

A careful study of the leading constitutional principles of the
American government as developed through judicial interpreta-
tion. Primary emphasis is placed upon the relation of constitu-
tional law to present-day problems, with particular reference to
such items as "due process of law" and "interstate commerce."

4 class hours

168 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Gv 7 Origins of Political Theory

A survey of political philosophy from Plato and Aristotle to
Bentham. The nature, origin, forms, and ends of the state and
government are covered.

3 class hours

Gv 8 Modern Political Theory

3 class hours

history

H 1 History of Civilization

This is primarily a background course. Introductory lectures deal
with primitive society, the development of language and writing,
and the early contributions of Egypt and Asia. More detail is
given to the structure of Greek and Roman Society, the rise of
the Christian Church, the barbarian invasions of the Empire, the
growth of Islam, and the life of the early Middle Ages.

4 class hours

H 2 History of Civilization

This course deals with the growth of the monarchies in Europe,
the medieval Church, the art and literature of the Renaissance
and Reformation, the economic revolution, the Age of Reason in
France and England, the Old Regime and the Revolution in France,
and the growth of science and industrialism.

4 class hours

H 9 The United States to 1865

This course is an interpretation of the events which shaped the
American nation to the Civil War. Social customs, economic
influences, racial contributions, and humanitarian movements are
not neglected even though the political history is stressed.

3 class hours

H 10 The United States Since 1865

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 169

Psychology

Ps I'B Psychology

An elementary survey of the psychology of individual differences
including personality differences, together with a presentation of
some of the practical applications of the findings of differential

psychology.

3 class hours

Ps 2'B Psychology

An introduction to general experimental psychology. The topics

considered include learning, thought, memory, perception, and

sensation.

3 class hours

Spanish

Sp 1 Elementary Spanish

A beginner's course stressing the essentials of grammar, practice
in pronunciation, and progressive acquisition of basic vocabulary
and current idiomatic expressions.

4 class hours

Sp 2 Elementary Spanish

A continuation of Sp 1. Most of the time is devoted to the reading
of simple texts, with oral practice based on the material read.
Preparation: Sp 1 4 class hours

Sp 3 Intermediate Spanish

In this course several texts of average difficulty are read and
studied. The work includes a thorough review of grammar, oral
practice, based on the reading matter, memorizing of selected pas-
sages, dictation, study of idioms, vocabulary building, and outside
reading.

Preparation: Sp 2 4 class hours

Sp 4 Intermediate Spanish

A continuation of Sp 3, with an increasing amount of both class
and outside reading.

Preparation: Sp 3 4 class hours

170 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Sociology

S 1 Introduction to Sociology

In presenting a survey of the origins and sources of human society,
this study provides orientation for the course in principles and
problems which follows. The several theories of organic evolution
are discussed. The antiquity of man and basic anthropological
data are considered. The racial and ethnic groupings of man are
then studied in the light of biological, geographical, and cultural
factors.

3 class hours

S 2 Principles of Sociology

Facts and principles basic to a general knowledge of the field of
sociology are presented. The origins, forms, and forces of human
associations are discussed. A study is made of the principal socio-
political groups such as socialism, communism, fascism, and
democracy. The course is practical in emphasis and is designed
to meet the needs of the student who desires a survey of the
subject.

3 class hours

S 3 Social Problems

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

S 4 Social Pathology

Typical subjects presented include mental defectiveness and dis-
ease, alcoholism and drug addiction, suicide, delinquency and
crime, and pathologies of domestic relations. The field trips
arranged for this course add to the practical knowledge of the
social ills which are studied.

Preparation: S 1, S 2 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 171

Other Qourses

PE 1 Hygiene

One class hour a week is devoted to the study of information
closely related to the physical training work and to personal and
mental hygiene. For each class lecture the student is assigned at
least one hour of outside study based on the required textbook.
The course includes enough of the fundamentals of physiology and
anatomy to enable the student to understand such parts of the
course as require some knowledge of these subjects.

1 class hour

U 4 Business Policy

This course is set up as a seminar in which the members of the
class will examine the problems that the business executives face
daily in their relations with government, labor, the market, and
the community. The ethical features of business policy formation
will be stressed along with the social implications. An attempt
will be made to determine the criteria by which fair business
practices can be distinguished from unfair.

4 class hours

Orientation

This course, required of all first year students, is designed to make
entering students explicitly aware of those facts, principles, and
techniques which are significantly related to the maintenance of
their intellectual efficiency, to assist them in making desirable social
adjustments in the college community, to help them make a wise
choice in their upperclass field of specialization. Special effort is
made to prepare the student to make an early and satisfactory
adjustment to the conditions of the co-operative work. Lectures
and individual conferences.

I class hour

Physical Training

All first year students are required to take physical training.
Health, strength, and vitality do not come by chance, but by
constant attention to those factors involved in their development.
It is very essential for the student to acquire good habits of life.

The work in the course includes a formal calisthenic program,
special exercise classes for the correction of postural defects,
participation in the regular athletic program, including baseball,
basketball, hockey, track, and many types of informal games.
All members of the class are also required to learn to swim.

Students wishing to be excused from physical training, because
of physical defects, are required to present a petition to the faculty
supported by a physician's certificate.

2 class hours

172 NORTHEASTERN UMVERSITY

Business Administration Theses

A thesis in the College of Business Administration is considered
to be an essay involving the statement, analysis, and solution of
some problem in a special field of business administration. Its
purpose is to demonstrate a satisfactory degree of initiative and
power of original thought and work on the part of the candidate.
A mere resume of existing knowledge in some subject is not
acceptable. This, it is true, must usually be made, but in addition
thereto the student must show his ability to deal constructively
with the data he has collected and his power to draw significant
and reliable conclusions from his investigations. The completed
thesis will be examined for acceptance or rejection from the
technical viewpoint by the departments interested and then
forwarded to the Secretary of the Faculty. Final approval of the
thesis rests with the Dean. When it is accepted, the thesis becomes
the property of the school and it is not to be printed, published,
nor in any other way made public except in such manner as the
department and the Dean shall jointly approve.

Theses are not required of seniors in the College of Business
Administration. To certain students who wish to do so, however,
the privilege of writing a thesis may be granted by the Dean in
accordance with the following regulations:

1. To be eligible to write a thesis a student must have attained
a scholastic average of at least 2.0 or better during the middler
year and the first half of the junior year.

2. Students who have met this minimum requirement may
petition the Dean for the privilege of substituting a thesis for any
one of the required courses of the fifth year.

3. In his petition the student must state the subject which is to
be investigated and give a brief statement of the purpose and scope
of the proposed thesis.

4. Petitions for the privilege of writing theses must be submitted
in writing to the Dean not later than the middle of the second
college period of the junior year.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

COLLEGE OF

Engineering

Admission Requirements and Courses of Study

1944-1946

(CO-EDUCATIONAL)

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS

July, 1944

COLLEGE OF ENGlhlEERING 175

THE COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING
c5Aims and (2^ethods

ENGINEERING has been defined as the art of applying the
resources of material and power in nature to the use and
convenience of man. The design and construction of bridges,
power plants, water works, skyscrapers, industrial plants, ma-
chinery, transportation systems, and communications systems thus
clearly fall within the scope of engineering. And as scientific
research has advanced into new areas, the task of putting these
discoveries to practical use has also fallen to the engineer.

Because an engineering education teaches the student to search
out the truth, to think clearly, and to formulate conclusions based
upon a solid foundation of facts, engineers are being called more
and more to occupy positions of responsibility in the management
of our great industrial enterprises. Even in such diverse fields as
banking, public health, and public administration, this so-called
engineering approach is in demand.

In consequence of this extremely wide field of endeavor open to
engineers, the problem of providing a technical training adequate
to cope with the design and construction of buildings, machinery,
and equipment, and at the same time a training broad enough to
develop a well-rounded personality and a sense of social responsi-
bility, is by no means simple of solution. Northeastern University
seeks, by means of its educational program, first of all to develop
students of well-rounded personality capable of meeting and dis-
charging their responsibilities as future citizens and leaders in their
own communities. At the same time, the courses of study pre-
scribed for students in the College of Engineering are designed to
develop engineers technically competent to undertake professional
responsibilities in their chosen fields of endeavor.

To this end, the College of Engineering offers separate curricula
in five major branches of engineering: namely, civil, mechanical,
electrical, chemical, and industrial. Since a basic training in
science and mathematics is essential to all fields of engineering,
the first year's curriculum is identical for all engineering students,
and it is possible for any of them to change their field of specializa-
tion at the end of the first year without loss of time. Students are
required to take a number of courses of a cultural nature designed
to broaden their point of view and to help develop a well-balanced
outlook. Individual laboratory instruction in addition to class-
room work is employed as far as possible, and the Co-operative
Plan of education, enabling the students to obtain a first-hand
acquaintance with actual industrial and engineering operations,
goes a long way toward bridging the gap between "theory" and
"practice."

176 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

(Admission ^V^quirements

Applicants for admission to the freshman class must qualify by
one of the following methods:

1. Graduation from an approved course of study in an ac-
credited secondary school, including prescribed subjects listed
below.

2. Completion of fifteen acceptable secondary school units
with a degree of proficiency satisfactory to the Department of
Admissions.

3. Examinations.

(Certificate of entrance examinations passed for admission
to recognized colleges and technical schools may be accepted.)

Prescribed Subjects for Admission
College of Engineering

Algebra (quadratics and beyond) 2 units

Plane Geometry 1 unit

*Physics or Chemistry 1 unit

History, Social Studies and/or Foreign Language 2 units

English (4 years) 3 units

**Electives 6 units

Total 15 units

A unit is a credit given to an acceptable secondary school
course which meets at least four times a week for periods of not
less than forty minutes each throughout the school year.

Entrance examinations are not required of students whose
transcripts of record are acceptable, but the Committee on Ad-
missions reserves the right to require a candidate to be present for
an examination in any subjects that it may deem necessary because
of some weakness in the secondary school record.

Other Requirements

*Physics is recommended.

**Not less than four of the "electives" must be in one or more of the following
academic branches: Languages, Natural Science, Mathematics, Social Sciences,
History.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 177

regarding candidates for the freshman class. The Committee con-
siders a student's interests and aptitudes in so far as these can be
determined, capacity for hard work, attitude toward classmates
and teachers in high school, physical stamina, and most important
of all — character. In this way the University seeks to select for its
student body those who not only meet the academic admission
requirements but who also give promise of acquitting themselves
creditably in the rigorous program of training afforded by the Co-
operative Plan and of later becoming useful members of society.

Personal Interview

Candidates are urged to visit the Office of Admissions for
personal interview if it is possible for them to do so before sub-
mitting their applications. Office hours of the Department are
from 9:00 a.m. to 4:00 p.m. daily; Saturdays to 12:00 m. The
Director of Admissions will interview applicants on Wednesday
evenings but by appointment only.

Application for Admission

Each applicant for admission is required to fill out an applica-
tion blank stating previous education as well as the names of
persons to whom reference may be made.

An application fee of five dollars ($5.00) is required when the
application is filed. This fee is non-returnable.

An application should be filed at least a month prior to the
date of registration.

The University reserves the right to place any entering student
upon an indefinite trial period. Reclassification will be determined
upon the academic success of the student.

178 l^ORTHEASTER^J UNIVERSITY

Registration

Eligibility for admission does not constitute registration. Fresh-
men will register at the University on Sept. 25, 1944, March 12,
1945, June 11, 1945, Sept. 10, 1945. Students are not considered to
have met the requirements for admission until they have success-
fully passed the required physical examination.

Advanced Standing

Entrance Examinations

Students are advised to take such exam.inations on the earliest
possible date in order that any deficiencies which they fail to
clear may be made up in time to permit registration with the
desired class and division.

The time of examinations is as follows:

10:00 A.M. to 12:00 M.
1:00 P.M. to 3:00 P.M.

During the current year examinations will be given approximately
three weeks before each registration date.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 179

Qraduation "^quirements

The College of Engineering offers five-year curricula, conducted
on the Co-operative Plan, leading to the following degrees:
I. Bachelor of Science in Civil Engineering
II. Bachelor of Science in Mechanical Engineering*

III. Bachelor of Science in Electrical Engineering

IV. Bachelor of Science in Chemical Engineering
V. Bachelor of Science in Industrial Engineering

These curricula are described in the following pages. Since the
first year is the same for all engineering students, final choice of
curriculum need not be made until the beginning of the second
year.

Candidates for the Bachelor of Science degree must complete
all of the prescribed work of the curriculum in which they seek
to qualify. A minimum of 147 semester hours is required for the
degree. Students who undertake co-operative work assignments
must meet the requirements of the Department of Co-operative
Work before they become eligible for their degrees.

No student transferring from another college or university is
eligible to receive the S.B. degree until he has completed at least
one academic year at Northeastern immediately preceding his
graduation.

Students who fail to show a satisfactory standard of general
efficiency in their professional fields may be required to demon-
strate their qualifications for the degree by taking such additional
work as the faculty may prescribe. If they are clearly unable to
meet the accepted standard of attainment, they may be required to
withdraw from the University.

Graduation With Honor

Thesis Option

Theses are not required of candidates for the degree of Bachelor
of Science. Students who show special aptitude for thesis work,
however, may be permitted to substitute an appropriate thesis for
equivalent work in class. The nature of thesis work is described
on page 230.

*Includes option in Aeronautical Engineering.

180 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Sngineering Curricula

I. Qivil Sngineering

The field of civil engineering has to do with the planning and
building of all kinds of structures and public works. None of the
structures of civil engineers lend themselves to quantity produc-
tion in a factory. Not only are civil engineering works designed to
fit a single location, but ordinarily their value is dependent upon
their ability to resist forces tending to move them.

Civil engineering is as old as civilization itself and, until recent
times, it embraced all phases of engineering except those of a
military character. Today its major branches include topographical,
municipal, railroad, highway, structural, hydraulic, and sanitary
engineering. It covers land surveying, the building of railroads,
soil mechanics, harbors, docks, and similar structures, the con-
struction of sewers, water works, streets, and highways, the
design and construction of flood control projects, bridges, build-
ings, walls, foundations, and all fixed structures.

Because civil engineering covers such a broad field, it is not
possible to become expert in all its branches. All of these, however,
rest upon a relatively compact body of principles and, broadly
speaking, it may be said that the civil engineer deals largely with
accurate descriptions of locations (surveys) and with applications
of the mechanics of resistance to motion (statics).

Since the first step in every civil engineering project involves
accurate measurement of the surface features of the land, of the
nature of the soil, and of the character of the underlying rock,
the study of surveying and related subjects occupies a large place
in the civil engineering curriculum. And since the primary con-
sideration in designing any structure is to make certain that it will
withstand safely any forces to which it may be subjected, the
mechanics of static bodies, strength of materials, and theory of
structures are studied in detail. The curriculum is thus intended
to prepare the young civil engineer to take up the work of design
and construction of structures, to solve the problems of water
supply and waste disposal in urban areas, and to undertake
intelligently the supervision of work in allied fields of engineering
and in general contracting.

Upon graduation, the young engineer may expect a period of
apprenticeship either in the field, surveying and plotting, or in the
office, over the drafting board. As experience is gained, the gradu-
ate is entrusted with greater responsibilities in actual design and
supervision of construction. Those who prefer a roving existence
should direct their ambitions toward private fields, while those
who prefer a stable home and community life will seek opportuni-
ties in the public service of the Federal Government and the
various states and municipalities.

COLLEGE OF EN G I'M EERIN G

181

I. Civil Engineering

FIRST TERM SECOND TERM

Course Class Course

No.

Course

Hours

No.

Course

Class
Hours

First Year

Ch 1 General Chemistry ... 3 (3) Ch 2

D 1 Eng. Drawing 6 D 2

E 1 English 1 3 E2

M 1 Algebra 3

M 3 Trigonometry 2 M 4

P 1 Physics 1 3 P2

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training .... 2

General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

Descriptive Geometry . 6

English 1 3

Analytic Geometry ... 5

Physics 1 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

Second Year

CI 3 Surveying I

CI 5 Surveying I, F &. P .

M 5 Differential Calculus

P 3 Physics II

P 5 Physics Laboratory .

EL 5 Electrical Machinery

0(5)
4
3

0(2)
_4(4)

CI 4
CI 6
M 6
P4
P6

Surveying II

Surveying II, F &. P. .
Integral Calculus . . . ,

Physics II

Physics Laboratory .

ME 20 Applied Mechanics .

0(5)

0(2)

Third Year

CI 7 Surveying III

CI 9 Surveying III, F&L P..

CI 1 1 Hydraulics

Ec 21 Economics

ME 21 Applied Mechanics. .

ME 35 Heat Engineering. . . .

0(5)

CI 8 Surveying IV

Clio Surveying IV, F&. P..

CI 12 Hydraulics

Ec 22 Economics

ME 22 Strength of Materials.
ME 36 Heat Engineering. . . .

0(5)
3
3
4
_2(3)

Fourth Year

CI 15 Theory of Structures. .

CI 21 Sanitary Engineering. .

Gy 1 Geology

ME 23 Strength of Materials. .

ME 69 Testing Materials Lab.

S 1 Sociology

1(3)

CI 16 Theory of Structures. .
CI 22 Sanitary Engineering. .

Gy 2 Geology

ME 24 Advanced Mechanics.
CI 18 Concrete Testing Lab..
S 2 Sociology

1(3)

Fifth Year

C 7 Engineering Conference

CI 23 Engineering Structures

CI 25 Concrete

CI 29 Design of Structures . . .

CI 3 1 Highway Engineering. .

IN 5 Indus. Management I .

2(9)

Engineering Conference 2

tur
Jrlignway engineering. .
IN 6 Indus. Management II

C 8 Engineering Conferenc(

CI 24 Engineering Structures

CI 26 Concrete

CI 30 Design of Structures.

CI 32 Highway Engine-

2(9)

182 hlORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

II. (fMeclnardcal Engineering

The field of mechanical engineering is concerned with the
harnessing of our power resources by means of machinery to per-
form useful work. With the increasing mechanization of all
industry which has taken place during the last century, the field
has so broadened as to include all lines of industry.

In contrast to the civil engineer who deals primarily with static
forces, the mechanical engineer is more concerned with the
mechanics of motion or kinetics. And because moving parts
require constant care and adjustment, the mechanical engineer
has the task not only of designing and installing complicated
machinery but also of operating it efficiently after it has been
installed.

Among the major branches of mechanical engineering are
included combustion or power production engineering, machine
and machine-tool design, railway mechanical engineering, auto-
motive engineering, aeronautical engineering, refrigerating engi-
neering, and air conditioning engineering. The construction and
operation of furnaces, boilers, and engines, the design of all kinds
of machinery from pocket watches to steel mills, the construction
and operation of railway and other transportation equipment
including automobiles and airplanes, and even control of atmos-
pheric conditions by means of heating, ventilating, and refriger-
ating equipment, all fall in this field.

Since machinery is so predominantly the concern of the
mechanical engineer, the program of study is designed to give
the student considerable training in the principles underlying the
design and operation of engines, power transmission devices,
machine tools, and other machinery. This, of course, implies a
thorough study of the physical laws concerning motion and
transfer of energy. Applied mechanics and thermodynamics
occupy a prominent place in the curriculum. The program of
instruction thus gives the student a broad foundation in those
fundamental subjects essential to all engineering practice and, in
the senior year, provides opportunity for limited specialization
by means of an option in aeronautics in addition to the general
course.

For those students desiring to specialize in the field of industrial
management, attention is called to the curriculum in industrial
engineering, the basic training of which is essentially the same
as that in mechanical engineering.

The graduate mechanical engineer generally finds employment
in an industrial plant, either in design and research or in plant
operation and maintenance. And if one's abilities lie in that direc-
tion, one frequently is entrusted after a time with greater and
greater responsibility for the successful management of the enter-
prise.

COLLEGE OF E'NGINEERING

183

11. Mechxtnical Engineering

FIRST TERM SECOND TERM

Course Class Course

No. Course Hours No. Course

Class
Hours

First Year

Ch 1 General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

D 1 Eng. Drawing 6

E 1 English 1 3

M 1 Algebra 3

M 3 Trigonometry 2

P 1 Physics I . .' 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training 2

Ch2

M4
P2

General Chemistry . . .
Descriptive Geometry .
English I

3(3)

Analytic Geometry ... 5

Physics 1 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

Second Year

ELS
IN 3
M 5
P3
P5

Electrical Machinery. . 4(4)

Production Processes I. 4

Differential Calculus. . 4

Physics II 3

Physics Laboratory ... 0 (2)

D4
IN 4
M6
P4
P6

Machine Drawing .... 6

Production Processes II 4

Integral Calculus 4

Physics II 3

Physics Laboratory ... 0 (2)

ME 20 Applied Mechanics.

Third Year

CIll Hydraulics 4

Eg 21 Economics 3

ME 1 Mechanism 6

ME 21 Applied Mechanics. . . 4

ME 29 Heat Engineering 3

CI 12 Hydraulics 3

Ec 22 Economics 3

EL 6 Elec. Measurements. . . 3 (3)

ME 22 Strength of Materials. . 4

ME 30 Heat Engineering 4

INS Industrial Management I..
ME 23 Strength of Materials. .

ME 31 Heat Engineering

ME 61 Mechanical Eng. Lab. .
ME 27 Metallography

Fourth Year

0(4)

S 1 Sociology 3

IN6 Industrial Management II 3

ME 24 Advanced Mechanics. 3

ME 32 Heat Engineering 4

ME 62 Mechanical Eng. Lab. . 0 (4)

/ ME 42 Heating and Air Cond.

\ or ME 40 Aerodynamics. . 3

S 2 Sociology 3

C 7 Engineering Conference 2

ME SI Machine Design 6

ME 63 Mech Eng. Lab 1 (3)

Professional Electives 7

Electives:

ME 33 Refrigeration 3

ME 73 Aircraft Structures. ... 3
ME 39 Engine Dynamics 4

Fifth Year

C 8 Engineering Conference 2

IN 22 Contracts 3

ME 52 Machine Design 6

ME 44 Power Plant Eng 4

Professional Electives 6

Electives:

ME 16 Industrial Plants 6

ME 34 Steam Turbines 3

ME 74 Aircraft Structures. ... 3
ME 76 Aircraft Engine Design 6

184 hJORTHEASTERlsI VNIVERSITY

III. Electrical Engineering

Electrical engineering is still comparatively new; it was barely
two generations ago that Thomas Edison built the first central
electric power station in New York City, and it was only a genera-
tion ago that the radio made its first appearance. In consequence,
we find this branch of engineering more closely related to research
in pure science than are the older branches of civil and mechanical
engineering. Moreover, the tremendous developments of the past
decade in theoretical physics have been largely in areas closely
related to electrical engineering so that today greater opportunities
for intellectual pioneering appear to exist in this field of engineer-
ing than in other branches of the profession.

The electrical industry and the field of electrical engineering are
usually divided into two main branches, one having to do with
electrical power and the other, communications. The power group
deals principally with large equipment and apparatus employing
heavy currents; the communications group handles smaller more
delicate equipment employing small or even minute currents.
Electrical engineering thus embraces the generation, transmission,
and distribution of electricity for light and power purposes, the
operation of electric railways, the design, construction, and
operation of all types of electrical equipment including telephone,
telegraph, and radio apparatus as well as lamps, motors, and
household appliances. In addition, the field of illuminating engi-
neering, having to do with the problems of proper light intensities,
has in recent years assumed increasing importance.

Since electricity is without material embodiment and can be
treated only by mathematical reasoning, the electrical engineer
is frequently required to go into higher mathematics seldom used
in other fields. It is also absolutely essential that the electrical
engineer who hopes to make a success of his work be able to grasp
readily and absorb effectively the meaning and content of the
many scientific papers having to do with research in this field.
For these reasons, the program of study in electrical engineering
includes more work in the pure sciences of mathematics and
physics than do the other courses, as well as a solid grounding in
engineering fundamentals. This is followed by a thorough study
of electrical theory and its applications in the power, high voltage,
and electronics fields.

The profession of electrical engineering affords a wide diversi-
fication of employment opportunities. If one is research-minded,
opportunity to develop one's talents may be found in the great
laboratories; if one is more interested in plant problems, oppor-
tunity can be found in the manufacturing or operating organiza-
tions; and if one is sales-minded there are many splendid oppor-
tunities to be found in the field of sales engineering.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERI-NG

185

Course
No.

111. Electrical Engineering

FIRST TERM SECOND TERM

Class Course
Course Hours No. Course

Class
Hours

First Year

Ch 1 General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

D 1 Eng. Drawing 6

E 1 English 1 3

M 1 Algebra 3

M 3 Trigonometry 2

P 1 Physics 1 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training .... 2

Ch2

M4
P2

General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

Descriptive Geometry . 6

English 1 3

Analytic Geometry ... 5

Physics 1 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

Second Year

EL 1 Electrical Eng. I

IN 3 Production Processes I

M 5 Differential Calculus . .

P 3 Physics II

P 7 Physics Laboratory . . .

D 3 Machine Drawing . . . .

0(2)

EL 2
IN 4
M6
P4
P8

Electrical Eng. I 3

Production Processes II 4

Integral Calculus 4

Physics II 3

Physics Laboratory ... 0 (2)

ME 20 Applied Mechanics.

Ec 21 Economics 3

EL 9 Electrical Eng. II 3

EL 11 Electrical Eng. Lab.. . . 0 (3)

EL 13 Elec. Measurements I. . 4

ME 21 Applied Mechanics. . . 4

CI 11 Hydraulics 4

Third Year
Ec22
EL 10
EL 12

Economics 3

Electrical Eng. II 3

Electrical Eng. Lab.
EL 14 Elec. Measurements II .
ME 22 Strength of Materials. .
M 7 Differential Equations.

0(3)
3
4
4

Fourth Year

EL 17 Electrical Eng. Ill 3

EL 19 Electrical Testing Lab.. 2(3)

EL 21 Electronics 2

EL 23 Electrical Meas. Lab . . 0 (3)

ME 25 Strength of Materials.. 2

ME 35 Heat Engineering 3

S 1 Sociology 3

EL 18
EL 20
EL 22
EL 24

Electrical Eng. Ill 3

Electronics Lab. 1 1 (3)

Electronics 4

Adv. Elec. Meas. Lab. . 0 (3)

ME 36 Heat Engineering 2 (3)

S 2 Sociology 3

C 7 Engineering Conference 2

EL 25 Electrical Eng. IV 4

EL 27 Adv. Elec. Eng. Lab. . . 2 (3)

EL 29 Electrical Eng. V-A ... 3

EL 31 Elec. Eng. V-B 3

EL 35 Ultra H. F. Technique 4

EL 37 Electronics Lab. II. . . . 1 (3)

Fifth Year

C8
EL 26
EL 28
EL 30
EL 32
EL 36
EL 38

Engineering Conference 2

Electrical Eng. IV. . . . 4

Adv. Electronics Lab. . 1 (3)

Electrical Eng. V-A. . . 3

Electrical Eng. V-B ... 3

Ultra H. F. Technique 4

Ultra H.F. Tech. Lab. 1(3)

186 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

IV. Qhemical Sngineering

The field of chemical engineering is relatively new. It has
grown out of the discoveries of the chemical laboratories which
have served as a foundation for a great many new industries whose
production processes involve chemical as well as physical changes.
Petroleum refining, coal carbonization, manufacture of rayon and
cellophane, and hundreds of other industries require men and
women trained in chemistry as well as in engineering. Many older
industries such as foods, textiles, and leather are also employing
chemical engineers.

The chemical engineer has been defined as a "professional man
experienced in the design, construction, and operation of plants
in which materials undergo chemical and physical change." It is
the duty of the chemical engineer to cut the costs, increase pro-
duction, and improve the quality of the products in the industry.

The chemical engineer must possess a working knowledge of the
fundamental sciences and must understand and know how to
work with people. In addition it is necessary that the chemical
engineer recognize clearly the "correct appraisement of values and
costs" and possess a knowledge of the ability to apply the knowl-
edge possessed to the development and operation of chemical
processes and plants.

In addition to the fundamental courses in chemistry, mathe-
matics, and physics required of all engineering students, a con-
siderable amount of time is devoted to more advanced work in
chemistry as a foundation for the study of chemical technology.
Instruction in the elements of mechanical and electrical engineer-
ing also gives the student a fairly broad engineering background
upon which to base his study of chemical engineering unit opera-
tions. Courses of a more liberal nature are included in the cur-
riculum in order that the student may broaden his educational
background. Since the field of chemical engineering is so varied,
the curriculum has been designed to give the students a broad
training rather than a specialized training in one specific industry.
It is believed that this training will enable the students readily to
acclimate themselves to whatever industry they may choose to enter.

Because of the complex nature of many chemical processes and
because of the difficulty of translating laboratory results into full-
scale plant operations, there has developed in many chemical
plants the so-called semi-works or pilot plant. Here new processes
developed by the chemists in the research laboratory are put to
the test of actual plant conditions on a small scale. And it is here
that the young chemical engineers often find themselves upon
graduation. If they are able to understand the chemist on the one
side and the plant operator on the other, and if they are technically
competent as well, they will soon find opportunity for advance-
ment either in one of the technical branches of the industry, such
as design, development, research, and production, or in the sales
and management fields in which chemical engineering is essential.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

187

Course
No.

IV.

FIRST TERM
Course

Chemical Engineering

SECOND TERM

Class
Hours

Course
No.

Coi

Class
Hours

First Year

Ch 1 General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

D 1 Eng. Drawing 6

E 1 English 1 3

M 1 Algebra 3

M 3 Trigonometry 2

P 1 Physics 1 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training .... 2

Ch2

M4
P2

General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

Descriptive Geometry . 6

English 1 3

Analytic Geometry ... 5

Physics 1 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

Second Year

Ch 9 Qualitative Analysis . .

Ch 11 Qual. Analysis Lab... .

Ch 51 Sources of Information

M 5 Differential Calculus . .

P 3 Physics II

P 5 Physics Laboratory . . .

0(10)

0(2)

Ch 12 Quant. Analysis 3

Ch 14 Quant. Analysis Lab. . 0 (7)

ME 20 Applied Mechanics ... 4

M 6 Integral Calculus 4

P 4 Physics II 3

P 6 Physics Laboratory ... 0 (2)

Third Year

Ch 13 Quantitative Analysis. 3

Ch 17 Quant. Analysis Lab. 0 (5)

ChE 1 Flow of Fluids 3

Ec 21 Economics 3

ME 21 Applied Mechanics. . . 4

M 7 Differential Equations. 4

Ch 40 Physical Chemistry ... 3 (2)

ChE 2 Ind. Stoichiometry. ... 3

Ec 22 Economics 3

ME22 Strength of Materials . . 4

ME 30 Heat Engineering 4

Fourth Year

Ch31
Ch33
Ch45
ChE 3
ChE 5
SI

Organic Chemistry .
Organic Chem. Lab
Physical Chemistry
Unit Operations . . .
Unit Operations Lab
Sociology

0(5)

4(2)

0(4)

Ch 32 Organic Chemistry .

Ch 34 Organic Chem. Lab.

Ch 46 Physical Chemistry .

ChE 4 Unit Operations . . .

ChE 6 Unit Operations Lab

S 2 Sociology

0(5)

4(2)

0(4)

Fifth Year

C 7 Engineering Conference 2

Ch 35 Org. Chemistry 3

Ch 39 Org. Chem. Lab 0 (5)

ChE 7 Inorganic Chem. Tech. 3
ChE 9 Chemical Proc. Lab. . . 1 (6)
ChE 1 1 Chem. Eng. Thermody-
namics 3

IN 27 Indus. Management. . . 3

C 8 Engineering Conference 2

ChE 8 Organic Chem. Tech. . 3

ChE 10 Chemical Eng. Projects 1 (6)

ChE 12 Engineering Materials. 3

EL 5 Elec. Machinery 4 (4)

188 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

V. industrial Engineering

With the growth of large corporations the problems of direction,
supervision, and co-ordination of the various parts of a given
enterprise have demanded more competent and better trained
managers. About fifty years ago, Frederick W. Taylor undertook
to apply to the problems of industrial management what we now
call "the scientific method" or "the engineering approach." He
reasoned that it was management's business to know what con-
stituted a proper day's work and that the way to get the facts was
through research and experiment on a scientific basis. He defined
"scientific management" not as any device or scheme or gadget,
but as a new outlook — a new viewpoint based upon a solid foun-
dation of fact. The methods employed by Taylor and by those who
came after him have undergone considerable modification, but the
concept of scientific management which he formulated has gained
wider and wider recognition during the intervening years from
both employers and employees.

This growing recognition of the value of a scientific approach
to the problems of industrial management early created a demand
for men and women trained in engineering and science, who
possessed a knowledge of business as well, to assume positions of
administrative responsibility in industry. To meet this demand,
courses were established in many engineering colleges to provide a
thorough training in engineering fundamentals together with a
specialized training in business administration, which would pre-
pare the students for managerial responsibilities in technical
industries. These curricula are variously entitled industrial en-
gineering, administrative engineering or engineering administra-
tion, but all are designed to lead ultimately to positions of ad-
ministrative or executive responsibility, rather than to positions
which involve highly specialized engineering responsibility.

The curriculum in industrial engineering, then, provides a course
of study which is essentially the same as that for mechanical
engineering in the first three years. In the last two years, however,
many of the advanced engineering courses are replaced by courses
in business management.

Upon graduation, many of the young industrial engineers may
find their way into plant work perhaps in the methods depart-
ment, some may prefer office work and enter the accounting
department, while others may incline toward sales engineering
work and after a period in the factory find themselves in the sales
department.

There is also opportunity for the experienced industrial engineer
in the consulting field. Upon becoming especially skilled in the
technique of management, the consulting industrial engineer is
called in by industry for advice upon the installation and main-
tenance of sound management principles and policies, and to
assist in the reorganization of enterprises which have failed.

COLLEGE OF EhlGINEERlNG

189

Course
No.

V.
FIRST TERM

Course

Industrial Engineering

SECOND TERM

Class
Hours

Course
No.

Course

Class
Hours

First Year

Ch 1 General Chemistry ... 3 (3)

D 1 Eng. Drawing 6

E 1 English 1 3

M 1 Algebra 3

M 3 Trigonometry 2

P 1 Physics 1 3

PE 1 Hygiene 1

Physical Training 2

Ch2
D2

M4
P2

Inorganic Chemistry. . 3 (3)

Descriptive Geometry . 6

English 1 3

Analytic Geometry ... 5

Physics 1 3

Orientation 1

Physical Training 2

Second Year

EL 5 Electrical Machinery. .

IN 3 Production Processes I

M 5 Differential Calculus. .

P 3 Physics II

P 5 Physics Laboratory . . .

4(4)

0(2)

D4
IN 4
M 6
P4
P6

Machine Drawing .... 6
Production Processes II 4
Integral Calculus 4

Physics II .

Physics Laboratory .

ME 20 Applied Mechanics.

0(2)

Third Year

cm Hydraulics 4

Ec 21 Economics 3

ME 1 Mechanism 6

ME 21 Applied Mechanics. . . 4

ME 27 Metallography 3

CI 12 Hydraulics 3

Ec 22 Economics 3

EL 6 Electrical Measurements 3 (3)
ME 22 Strength of Materials 4
IN 28 Motion and Time Study 2 (3)

Fourth Year

IN 5 Indust. Management I 3

IN 7 Industrial Accounting 1 (4)

IN 23 Statistics 2 (2)

ME 23 Strength of Materials.. 3

ME 35 Heat Engineering 3

S 1 Sociology 3

IN 6 Indust. Management II 3

IN 8 Industrial Accounting 1 (4)

IN 24 Statistics 2 (2)

ME 36 Heat Engineering 2 (3)

S 2 Sociology 3

Fifth Year

C 7 Engineering Conference 2
IN 14 Industrial Finance. ... 3

IN 15 Sales Engineering 3

IN 17 Personnel Admin 4

ME 69 Testing Mat. Lab 1 (3)

Elective 3

C 8 Engineering Conference 2

IN 22 Contracts 3

IN 30 Tech. of Exec. Control 4

ME 16 Industrial Plants 6

ME 42 Heating and Air Cond. 3
Elective 3

190 TsIORTHEASTERhl UNIVERSITY

Synopses of Courses of instruction

The term prerequisite indicates a course that must be completed
with a passing grade before a student will be permitted to register
for the advanced course to which it applies. The term preparation
indicates a course of such a preparatory nature that a student
undertaking an advanced course, without having had the prepara-
tion course specified, will ordinarily find himself greatly handi-
capped, and may not register in the advanced course without the
consent of the instructor.

Qo'Ordination

C 7 Engineering Conference
This course is designed to bring about analytical thinking and
systematic planning of the "after-graduation-employment" prob-
lem. It is conducted as an open discussion class by the Department
of Co-operative Work. Each co-ordinator has in his class those
students who have been placed and supervised on co-operative
work by him. Each student analyzes and applies to himself as the
"product" the fundamental principles of merchandising. When-
ever practicable, prominent men who are leaders in the fields of
employment counseling, business, or engineering present the
employers' viewpoint. Thus the graduating seniors are brought
face to face during the year with one of the most important and
perplexing problems of life, namely, how to "sell their services,"
thereby aiming to bring a co-ordinated training of theory and
practice to a logical conclusion. 2 class hours

C 8 Engineering Conference
This course is the sequel to C 7 and consists of the practical
application of the techniques of job-getting which have been
analyzed and discussed in that course. It is conducted on a con-
ference rather than on a class basis, the major portion of the time
being devoted to collection of employment prospects and to the
planning and writing of letters to and securing interviews with
prospective employers. It is intended that this course will cul-
minate in the attainment by each student of his after-graduation
job. 2 class hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 191

Qhemistry

Ch 1 General Chemistry
The fundamental ideas of matter and energy; the properties of
gases, liquids, and solids; molecular weights; equations, atomic
structure, classification of the elements; ionic reactions; the
chemistry of the non-metals, and radio activity are among the
topics which are covered in the course. Two lectures, one recita-
tion, and a three-hour laboratory period comprise the weekly
schedule of instruction. 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

Ch 2 General Chemistry
A continuation of Ch 1 General Chemistry. Modern ideas
covering the theory of solutions of electrolytes are discussed
together with experimental facts. The chemistry of the metals is
covered thoroughly, and time is devoted to an introduction to
organic chemistry. The latter part of the course is given to quali-
tative analysis with particular emphasis on the laboratory work.
The plan of instruction is identical with that of Ch 1.

Preparation: Ch 1 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

Ch 9 Qualitative Analysis
The object of this course is to give the student knowledge of the
various fundamental qualitative laws and principles. A portion
of the time is devoted to the formulation of numerical terms
which are essential to the understanding of the mass action law,
ionic equilibria, solubility product, hydrolysis, and redox con-
stants. The use of the newer spot tests is stressed and where
possible their reactions explained. Whenever necessary, lectures
demonstrating the various semi-micro techniques are given, as
well as those designed to illustrate more fundamental properties
of solutions.

Prerequisite: Ch 1 , Ch 2 4 class hours

Ch 1 1 Qualitative Analysis Laboratory
This course, which is carried out on a semi-micro scale, applies
the material covered in Ch 9 to actual problems. After some
preliminary experiments certain procedures are combined and the
separations and identifications made on both known and unknown
solutions. Finally these are combined into a complete, systematic
scheme which is applied to artificially prepared mixtures and
industrial materials. Careful manipulations, thoroughness in
observation, and accuracy in arriving at conclusions are expected
of each student.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch2 10 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 9

192 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Ch 12 Quantitative Analysis

It is the purpose of this course to give to the student a realization
of the scientific development of quantitative methods. Each
of the major operations such as weighing, measurement of volumes,
titration, filtration, ignition, and combustion is considered from
the standpoint of the theoretical principles involved, and with
due consideration of the manipulative technique necessary.

As the correct calculation of analytical results is of no less
importance than the actual procedures of analysis, a number of
problems form a very important part of the course.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 3 class hours

Preparation: Ch 9

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 1 4

Ch 13 Quantitative Analysis

This course, a continuation of Ch 12, is similarly conducted.
After consideration of the more advanced parts of gravimetric
analysis and of systematic mineral procedures, the remainder
of the course consists of a critical discussion of common technical
methods, including the standard ones for the analysis of steel,
non-ferrous alloys, fuels, oils, gas, water, fertilizers, and foods.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 3 class hours

Preparation: Ch 12

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 17

Ch 14 Quantitative Analysis Laboratory

This is a laboratory course intended to illustrate by actual use
the various analytical methods considered in Ch 12. After certain
preliminary experiments designed to acquaint the student with the
apparatus used, volumetric analysis (including acidimetry and
alkalimetry), oxidation, reduction, and precipitation methods are
taken up. This is followed by simple gravimetric analysis.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 7 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 11

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 1 2

Ch 17 Quantitative Analysis Laboratory
This course includes not only the usual illustrative gravimetric
determinations but also electrolytic, electrometric, combustion,
and optical methods. In the latter half of the course actual in-
dustrial methods are used so that, at its completion, the student
should be able to perform satisfactorily any ordinary analysis.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 5 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 14

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 13

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 193

Ch. 31 Organic Chemistry

A study of the basic principles of the aliphatic organic com-
pounds. The resemblance of classes is stressed and emphasis is
placed on genetic charts. The industrial significance of the subject
is discussed to show the practical nature of organic chemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 3 class hours

Preparation: Ch 40

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 33

Ch 32 Organic Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 31 dealing with the preparation and char-
acteristic reactions of the aromatic organic compounds. Special
attention is given to polymerization, diazotization, dyes, and the
use of catalyst, nitration, and sulphonation.

A few of the more important heterocyclic compounds are studied.

Preparation: Ch 31 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 34

Ch 33 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions designed to teach the laboratory
technique involved in organic chemistry. The method of keeping
notes on the work performed and reactions involved is stressed.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Ch 2 5 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 40

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 31

Ch 34 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

This is a continuation of Ch 33. The preparations in this course
serve to acquaint the student with such types of chemical reactions
as sulphonation, the Grignard reaction, the Perkins reaction,
Skraup's synthesis, the Friedal-Crafts reaction, and the prepara-
tion of dyes.

In addition to the manipulation techniques taught in Ch 33,
this course introduces the use of vacuum distillations, fractional
crystallization, and separations by physical and chemical means.

Preparation: Ch 33 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 32

Ch 35 Organic Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 32 and includes a study of the preparation
and reactions of heterocyclic and alicyclic compounds.

Preparation: Ch 32 3 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 39

194 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Ch 39 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

The purpose of this course is to familiarize the student with the
chemical and physical tests used in qualitative organic analysis.
A series of experiments, based on the classification of reactions of
organic compounds, serves as a basis for the examination of simple
liquid and simple solid compounds and the preparation of suitable
derivatives of them.

Preparation: Ch 34 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 35

Ch 40 Physical Chemistry

This course begins with a short resume of the field of physical
chemistry, and its relationship to the other courses in chemistry
and chemical engineering. Following this, atomic and molecular
weights, and the properties of gases, liquids, solids, ionized, non-
ionized, and colloidal solutions are taken up.

Prerequisite: Ch 12, Ch 14 3 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 13, Ch 17

Ch 45 Physical Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 40 including a consideration of the following
topics: rates of reaction, homogeneous and heterogeneous equi-
librium, and thermochemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 13, Ch 17 4 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Preparation: Ch 40

Ch 46 Physical Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 45 including electrical conductance, electro-
lytic equilibrium, electrolysis, photochemistry and atomic structure.
Preparation: Ch 45 4 class hours, 2 lab. hours

Ch 51 Sources of Information

This course is intended to acquaint the chemical student with the
constantly increasing volume of scientific literature pertaining to
the field of chemistry.

After a brief outline of the entire field of scientific literature,
and a description of various methods of library procedure, the
various available sources of scientific information are investigated.
A series of individual library problems, in which the student is
required to apply the information obtained in the classroom,
forms a very important part of the course.

Prerequisite: Ch 1, Cfi 2 I class hour

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 195

Qhemical Sngineering

ChE 1 Flow of Fluids

A study of methods of determining rates of flow and power con-
sumption of fluids flowing through pipe lines. This course differs
from the usual course in hydraulics chiefly in the amount of
emphasis placed on the flow of gases and oils.

Preparation: PI 3 class hours

ChE 2 Industrial Stoichiometry

This is essentially a problem course developed around the study
of fuels and combustion. Special attention is given to principles
underlying the methods of calculation which are of value to the
chemical engineer.

Prerequisite: Ch 12 3 class hours

Preparation: Ch 13

ChE 3 Unit Operations

This course consists of a study of the mechanical operations
peculiar to the chemical industry. Such unit operations as flow
of heat, evaporation, and humidity control are considered. Many
problems of a practical nature are solved during the course.

Prerequisite: ChE 1 4 class hours

Must be taken concurrently: ChE 5

ChE 4 Unit Operations

This is a continuation of ChE 3. The unit operations studied
are drying, crushing, separation, filtration, distillation, and gas
absorption.

Prerequisite: ChE 2 4 class hours

Preparation: ChE 3

Must be taken concurrently: ChE 6

ChE 5 Unit Operations Laboratory

This laboratory course is based on the unit operations studied in
ChE 3. The squad system is used. Experiments are performed
on small-scale plant equipment that has been specially designed
or selected for the purpose. Detailed reports are required.

Must be taken concurrently: ChE 3 4 lab. hours

ChE 6 Unit Operations Laboratory

This is a continuation of ChE 5. Experiments are performed in
the unit operations which are being studied simultaneously in
ChE 6.

Must be taken concurrently: ChE 4 4 lab. hours

196 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

ChE 7 Inorganic Chemical Technology

A study of the processes and manufacturing methods used in the
more important industries based on inorganic chemical tech-
nology. Existing material and economic relationships are em-
phasized. Plant inspection trips and problems pertaining to the
industries studied are included.

Prerequisite: Ch 9 3 class hours

Preparation: ChE 2

ChE 8 Organic Chemical Technology

The course consists of a study of industrial organic chemical
processes. An attempt is made to co-ordinate the fundamental
principles of organic synthesis with the requirements of industrial
plants. Attention is given to the special features which must be
considered in the design and construction of equipment used for
the production of industrial organic chemicals.

Prerequisite: ChE 4, Ch 32 3 class hours

ChE 9 Chemical Process Laboratory

This course attempts to teach the fundamentals of research by
determining the optimum conditions for carrying out some unit
process. After a survey of the literature has been made, a research
plan is formulated. Variables are noted and their efFect on the
chemical process determined through laboratory experiments.
The writing of reports is an essential feature of the course.

Preparation: ChE 4 1 class hour, 6 lab. hours

ChE 10 Chemical Engineering Projects

The design of equipment of commercial size forms the basis of
the course. Design data is taken from the literature when it is
available. Other data is obtained by experiment on small-scale
industrial equipment in the laboratory. From this data and
information acquired in previous courses, the commercial scale
equipment is designed. Students qualified by industrial experience
are sometimes assigned problems suggested by their co-operating
firms which are worked out under the joint supervision of the
plant engineers and the members of the staff.

Preparation: ChE 4 1 class hour, 6 lab. hours

ChE 1 1 Chemical Engineering Thermodynamics

A study of the fundamental principles of thermodynamics as they
apply to chemical engineering. Special attention will be given to
high pressure operations because of their vital importance. The

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 197

usefulness of thermodynamics to the chemical engineer for the
purpose of determining properties of materials, energy bal-
ances, equilibrium conditions, and in determining the availa-
bility of energy, the driving force for all unit operations, is em-
phasized.

Prerequisite: Ch 46 3 class hours

ChE 12 Engineering Materials

A study of the most important properties of those engineering
materials which the chemical engineers utilize in their work, and
how these properties are affected by composition, heat treatment,
mechanical work, and corrosion.

Stress is placed upon the selection of the correct material for a
given use through the knowledge of its properties and the intelli-
gent use of engineering principles.

A study of the causes of corrosion in both ferrous and non-
ferrous metals and alloys is made as well as methods of combating
corrosion.

3 class hours

Qivil Sngineering

CI 3 Surveying I

The course is divided into two portions, the first of which treats
of basic principles such as taping, theory of the transit and use of
the transit, theory of the level, care of the level and use of the level.
The second portion deals with closed and random traverses,
both the D.M.D. and the co-ordinate methods being used. Par-
ticular stress is laid upon having the student use the methods and
procedures as outlined by the Massachusetts Land Court.

Prerequisite: M 3 3 class hours

CI 4 Surveying 11

This course is a continuation of course CI 3. The applications
of leveling are first studied; stressing, differential leveling, double
rodded leveling, profile leveling, and the setting of batter boards.
The principles of reconnaissance, preliminary and location
surveys, as applied to highway and railroad surveying, are used as
an introduction to "route surveying." These are followed by the
principles and application of simple, compound, reversed, and
vertical curves including sight distances, and areas bounded by
circular arcs. Many of the more difficult or complex problems are
solved by the use of rectangular co-ordinates (or by the use of
right triangles), thus giving a continuation of the co-ordinate
method as given in course CI 3. The railroad curve and the
highway curve (i.e., the circular arc) are simultaneously studied
throughout the course.

Preparation: CI 3 4 class hours

198 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

CI 5 Surveying I, R & P.

The course is divided into two equal parts; the first part is devoted
entirely to field work, while the second part is devoted entirely to
office or plotting work.

In the field an accurate tape and transit closed traverse is run.
The angles are read by repetition. The distances are taped and
each traverse point is carefully tied in. The aim is to obtain data
for a closed traverse equal to or better than a Class A survey as set
forth by the Massachusetts Land Court. Physical features are
located from this traverse. The best methods and procedures of
taking field notes are emphasized at all times.

In the drafting room the student is required to compute his
closed traverse by both the D.M.D. and rectangular co-ordinate
methods, to submit an original drawing showing the traverse and
physical features, and to trace this drawing with careful attention
to such details as lettering, appearance, and title.

Prerequisite: D 1 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: CI 3

CI 6 Surveying U, F. & P.

A reconnaissance line is studied and from this a preliminary
center line in the form of a random traverse is run. From this
preliminary line all the physical features several hundred feet each
side of the center line are located. A map is then prepared showing
these data. From this map suitable curves are computed and the
location of the center line thus determined is staked out in the field.

Preparation: CI 5 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: CI 4

CI 7 Surveying lU

This course is a continuation of CI 4. The various field procedures
and methods of computation for taking cross sections are studied.
Both the average end area method of computing volumes and the
prismoidal formulae are taught. The principles and methods used
in balancing volumes and constructing and solving mass diagrams
are presented.

The spiral or transition curve as applied to railroad and high-
way location is taken up. In the latter part of this course the
fundamentals of railroad track problems are presented.

Prerequisite: CI 3, CI 4 3 class hours

CI 8 Surveying IV

This course consists of lectures and problem work in plane
triangulation; Coast and Geodetic leveling; the plane table with
its applications to topographic surveying, and the theory of the

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 199

sextant is also presented with its applications to hydrographic
surveying. The use of the transit in studying astronomical sur-
veying problems in azimuth and time, and the computations of
geodetic triangulations and the conversion to rectangular co-
ordinates from geodetic are also studied in this course.

Preparation: CI 7 3 class hours

CI 9 Surveying 111, R & P.

This is a continuation of course CI 6. A profile of the center line
is run and from this a suitable sub-grade profile of this line is ob-
tained. Further field work is undertaken to obtain a complete set
of cross-section notes for the whole line, and special emphasis on
field notes is made throughout the course.

In the drafting room the volumes and balanced volumes are
computed. From these a mass diagram is prepared and a complete
earthwork solution is solved by use of the mass diagram and the
profile.

Prereciuisite: CI 5, CI 6 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: CI 7

CI 10 Surveying IV, F. & P.

This course is divided nearly equally into two portions — one
consisting of field work, and the other drafting room work.

The field work is triangulation, including measurements of base
line, measurement of angles by repetition with precise transits or
theodolite. A complete plane table map is drawn locating physical
features and contours; and some of the more elementary plane
table problems such as the intersection, the resection, and the
three-point problems are taken up. Precise and Coast and Geodetic
leveling are also considered, along with an observation on the sun
for time and azimuth and an observation on Polaris for true north.

The drafting room work consists of the preparation of a topo-
graphic map, tracing of the topographic map, triangulation com-
putations, and the solution (analytic solution) of such problems
as the eccentric and the three-point problem.

Preparation: CI 9 5 lab. hours

Must be taken concurrently: CI 8

CI 11 Hydraulics I

This course is divided into two parts — the first part which treats
with the laws of hydrostatics, and the second part which deals
with the laws of hydrokinetics.

Under the topic of hydrostatics the following material is
studied: open end U gauges, differential manometers, pressure
intensity, total pressures, location of center of pressure (hori-
zontally and vertically), pressures on curved and inclined surfaces,
hoop tension and end tension, simple dams, and flotation problems.

200 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

The laws of hydrokinetics, including those of the flow of liquids
through Venturi meter, orifices, short tubes, pipe lines, and open
channels are studied with particular reference to Bernoulli's
theorem.

In the hydraulic demonstration laboratory the following
demonstrations are made: Venturi meter, orifice meter (submerged
orifice), discharge of orifice into the atmosphere, discharge through
orifice or short tube under falling head, and trajectory of discharge
for either a short tube or an orifice.

Prerequisite: ME 20 4 class Ixours

Preparation: ME 21

CI 12 Hydraulics U

This course is a continuation of course CI 11. Hazen and Williams'
formula is developed and from a flow chart of Hazen and Williams'
formula flow through pipe lines, equivalent pipes, and the appli-
cation to simple grid systems are studied. Rectangular weirs, with
and without end contractions and with and without the velocity
of approach being considered, are studied. The only other weir
emphasized is the V notched or triangular weir. The Cipolletti
weir and the proportional weir are discussed.

Dimensional analysis as applied to fluid mechanics is studied
so that the student is able dimensionally to evaluate various
hydraulic formulae. The flow of fluids and gases through closed
conduits is considered by the application of Reynolds' number
determining whether the flow be laminar or turbulent.

This is followed by the theory and application of the pitot tube
as applied to hydraulic problems.

The course concludes with a study of the dynamic action of
jets and stricims.

In the hydraulic laboratory the following demonstrations are
made: rectangular weirs, triangular weir, pitot tube, and laminar
and turbulent flow by Reynolds' number apparatus.

Preparation: CI 11 3 class hours

CI 15 Theory of Structures

The course comprises lectures and recitation work in the study of
the loads, reactions, shears, and moments acting upon statically
determinate structures of various kinds such as roofs and bridges.
A complete and thorough presentation of the usual methods of
determining bar stresses in simple trusses is also undertaken.

All of the foregoing studies are covered in detail by both alge-
braic and graphic methods.

Following a discussion of roof truss types and loading, the
above methods are applied to the complete analysis of a roof truss.
Prerequisite: ME 22 4 class hours

Preparation: M 23

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 201

CI i 6 Theory of Structures
A complete study of the function of influence lines in determining
the shears, moments, and stresses produced in various types of
simple structures by moving load systems both distributed and
concentrated. Methods of providing for impact stresses in struc-
tures are discussed and analyzed. The material given in CI 15 and
also in this course is then summarized by the solution of problems
determining the design stresses for several types of bridge structures.
Preparation: CI 15 4 class hours

CI 18 Concrete Testing Laboratory

This course covers the testing of Portland cement and aggregates
used in the forming of concrete. Discussions of the various
theories of proportioning concrete mixes are conducted and
studies made of the factors affecting the strength of concrete as
produced in the laboratory and on the job. Laboratory operations
are planned in such manner as to test these theories and factors.
The course concludes with tests on brick as used in masonry
construction.

Preparation: ME 69 1 class hour, 3 lab. hours

CI 21 Sanitary Engineering 1

The course is designed primarily to be a lecture course supple-
mented by problems involving the following items of water
supply engineering: the collection and assimilation of rainfall
data; the methods of collection and storage for ground water or
surface waters; the preparation of a dam site and the elements of
design as applied to masonry and earth filled dams; methods of
distributing water for domestic use, manufacturing, and for fire
fighting; treatment of water for hardness; treatments of water to
provide a palatable and safe water supply free from contamina-
tion. Consideration is given also to present-day activities in re-
gard to the improvement of water supply apparatus with special
emphasis upon costs of installation, cost of apparatus, and total
cost as applied to water supply engineering.

Prerequisite: CI 11, CI 12 3 class hours

CI 22 Sanitary Engineering 11
This is a companion course to CI 21. It deals with the collection
and disposal of sewage and storm water, including the following
items: the quantity of sewage to be collected; the sewerage systems
for either a separate or a combined system; the surveying and the
collection of data in order to prepare plans for the design and the
construction of the collection system; and a thorough discussion
of the modern methods of treating the sewage and the operation
of the sewage disposal plants.

Preparation: CI 21 3 class hours

202 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

CI 23 Engineering Structures

The work begins with the analysis of bridge trusses having
secondary web systems (including Baltimore and Petit trusses) and
trusses with multiple web systems, lateral and portal bracing,
transverse bents, viaduct towers and cantilever bridges.

A study is made of slope and deflection with emphasis on the
methods of "Moment Area" and "Elastic Weights." The graphical
solution of deflections as illustrated by the Williot-Mohr diagram is
studied.

Prerequisite: CI 15, CI 16, ME 23 4 class hours

CI 24 Engineering Structures

The course consists of the study of simple, indeterminate struc-
tures of various kinds, continuous beams, rigid frames and trusses
with redundant members. All the customary methods are
developed and applied — the Three Moment Equation, Least
Work, Slope-Deflection, and Moment Distribution.

Preparation: CI 23 4 class hours

CI 25 Concrete

The fundamental principles involved in the theory of reinforced
concrete design, as expressed in the transformed area method, are
thoroughly reviewed and investigated. This is followed by the
application of this theory to the analysis and design of elementary
members such as the rectangular beam, the Tee beam, beams
reinforced in compression and members subjected to combined
direct stress and bending. Shear, diagonal tension, vertical and
inclined stirrups, bond and anchorage are also treated. Some
discussion of current standard practice and specifications is
included.

Prerequisite: ME 23, CI 18 4 class hours

CI 26 Concrete

The material covered in CI 25 is co-ordinated and applied to the
analysis and design of retaining walls, rectangular slabs supported
on four sides and flat slab construction for one-half the time.

The balance of time is devoted to Foundation Engineering.
A discussion of soil types and bearing capacities, sampling
procedures and elementary soil mechanics principles is under-
taken. The more common types of the various foundations, such
as piles and pile driving, cofferdams, caissons (both open and
pneumatic), pier foundations, bridge piers and their relation to
the rest of the structure are included.

Preparation: CI 25 4 class hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 203

CI 29 Design of Structures

The course consists of instruction in the design and detailing of
simple structural members in steel, timber and concrete. Welding
is also introduced. End connections for various types of structural
material are covered thoroughly, including rivets, bolts, welds and
timber connectors. Concrete footings are designed and detailed.
Preparation: CI 23, CI 25 2 class hours, 9 lab. hours

CI 30 Design of Structures

In this course comprehensive problems in steel, concrete and
timber are worked out by the class, each student using different
design data. Such work as the design of highway bridges and
continuous concrete beams have been assigned. A general
drawing is made of one design problem.

Preparation: CI 24, CI 26, CI 29 2 class hours, 9 lab. hours

CI 31 Highway Engineering

The course includes development of modern highways, highway
administration and finance; the preparation of the road founda-
tion, drainage and drainage facilities. A discussion of soil classi-
fications and tests as they pertain to modern highway design is
undertaken. The economics of highway grades and a discussion
of general layout features such as vertical curves, horizontal
curves and superelevation, traffic surveys and control are also
included.

Prerequisite: CI 7, CI 9 3 class hours

CI 32 Highway Engineering

This course is a continuation of CI 31, and covers more specific
details of design, cost and construction of the various types of
highways, the testing of bituminous materials and the application
of laboratory tests and research to road construction and soil
stabilization. The course concludes with a brief discussion of
airport design and layouts.

Preparation: CI 31 3 class hours

IDrawing

D 1 Engineering Drawing

This course comprises a complete study of shape description in
both orthographic and pictorial form. It provides a thorough
foundation for the study of working drawings. The work is laid
out according to the following divisions: care and use of instru-

204 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

ments, lettering, geometric constructions including the conic,
involute and cycloidal curves, orthographic projection including
multiplanar and axonometric drawing, oblique and perspective
projection, technical freehand sketching, development, screw-
threads, sectioning, dimensioning, and tracing.

6 Ci.ass hours

D 2 Descriptive Geometry

This course comprises a complete study of the theory of projection.
It is designed to develop the power to visualize and solve practical
problems in spatial relations. In addition to point line and
plane problems, the course includes a study of mining problems,
graphic solution of stresses in framed structures, shadows, solid
intersections, developable and warped surfaces.

Preparation: D 1 6 class hours

D 3 Machine Drawing

A course similar to D 4 except that it is designed to be of particular
value to students of electrical engineering. '

Prerequisite: D 1 6 class hours

D 4 Machine Drawing

Detail working drawings of machine parts and assembly drawings
of simple machines are made in accordance with best commercial
practice. Such simple phases of mechanism as are necessary to a
complete understanding of machine drawing are included in the
course.

Prerequisite: D 1 6 class hours

English

E 1 English I

A course in composition with especial emphasis on exposition.
Principles of grammar and rhetoric are reviewed rapidly but
thoroughly. Contemporary essays are studied for their value
both as models and as enrichment of the student's background.
Themes on subjects largely drawn from or related to the student's
life and study are a weekly requirement.

3 class hours

E 2 English 1

A continuation of E 1. Toward the end of the term a careful
study is made of letter writing.

Preparation: El 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 205

Sconomics

Ec 21 Economics

After an analysis of the main characteristics of our modern
economic order, attention is turned to the fundamental economic
laws and principles governing the production of economic goods,
the organization of business enterprise, money, banking, the
business cycle, control of the price level, and international trade.
Case material is used freely.

3 class hours

Ec 22 Economics

A continuation of Ec 21. The first part of the course deals with
the principles of price determination under competitive and
monopolistic conditions, and the principles underlying the dis-
tribution of wealth and income into wages, interest, and profits.
Consideration is then given to the major aspects of the economic
problems of agriculture, public utility regulation, labor, consump-
tion, public finance, and economic reform.

Preparation: Ec 21 3 class hours

Slectrical Sngineering

EL 1 Electrical Engineering I

This course deals with the fundamental principles of D.C. gener-
ators, generation of E.M.F., structural parts of dynamos, armature
windings, armature reaction, commutation, ratings, methods of
field excitation, and characteristics of shunt, series and compound
generators.

Prerequisite: P 2 3 class hours

EL 2 Electrical Engineering 1

This course is a continuation of EL 1 . It deals with the operating
principles of the shunt, series, and compound D.C. motors,
including applications and control apparatus. The course also
includes a study of elementary D.C. distribution systems.

Preparation: EL 1 3 class hours

EL 5 Electrical Machinery

This course is concerned with the theory and application of the
electrical equipment most often met by practicing engineers. De-
scriptions of the parts of the machines, their operating character-
istics and of their special fields of usefulness are extended chiefly
over shunt, series and compound direct current motors and

206 hlORTHEASTERlsI UNIVERSITY

generators, alternators, transformers, synchronous and induction
motors. Consideration is given to auxiliary apparatus in so far
as necessary to a good understanding of the functioning of the
machinery as a whole.

Tests are made on various direct and alternating current ma-
chines. The object is to give the students facility in connecting
and operating the machines as well as to observe in actual practice
the characteristics taken up in the lectures. Outside reports are
required to be written up for each experiment.

Prerequisite: P 2 4 class hours, 4 lab. hours

EL 5 A Electrical Machinery

This course is designed to meet the needs of the Chemical Engi'
neering students in so far as their knowledge of elementary electrical
engineering is concerned. Consideration is given chiefly to the
study of motors, both D.C. and A.C., including their operating
characteristics, control, and applications. Selection of motors
and their duty cycles are also studied. The latter part of the
course is devoted to the study of elementary vacuum tube theory,
with emphasis on electronic control devices, involving the
phototube, Thyratron, and other tubes applied to circuits used
in the chemical engineering industry.

A laboratory course accompanies this lecture course, and study
is made of both D.C. and A.C. motor operation and electronic
control devices.

Prerequisite: P 2 and M 6 4 class hours, 4 lab. hours

EL 6 Electrical Measurements

The course comprises a brief study of measurements in general, and
precision measure as applied to electrical measurements in particu-
lar. Resistance devices, galvanometers, ammeters, and voltmeters
are next discussed, the treatment of other instruments being taken
up later in connection with their use. This is followed by a de-
tailed discussion of the methods of measuring various electrical
quantities: resistance, resistivity, conductance; D.C. electromotive
force, current, power, and energy; inductance, and magnetic
induction. This part of the work involves the students' use of
both visual and sound indicating devices. Some consideration
is given to the principles and operation of vacuum tubes. Appro-
priate laboratory experiments are included.

Prerequisite: EL 5 3 class hours, 3 lab. hours

EL 9 Electrical Engineering U

A course designed to be an introduction to Alternating Current
theory. Study is made of vector algebra and complex quantities

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 207

as applied to A.C. work, elementary concepts, power, power
factor, and energy relations, non-sinusoidal wave forms and
analysis.

Prerequisite: P 2 3 class hours

EL 10 Electrical Engineering 11

A continuation of EL 9. This course deals with single phase,
linear Alternating Current circuits, including series, parallel,
series-parallel combinations, and KirchhofF's laws, and introduces
the concepts of inductance, impedance, susceptance, capacitance,
conductance and admittance. Resonant circuits, tuned circuits,
transients in linear circuits, effective impedance, and filter circuits
are also studied.

Preparation or taken concurrently: M 7 3 class hours

EL 11 Electrical Engineering Laboratory

This is a laboratory course intended to develop a thorough
understanding of the operating characteristics of the individual
machines studied in courses EL 1 and EL 2, including work and
experiments on armature and field resistance measurement, series
and compound motors, and speed variations in a shunt motor.
As it is also the purpose of this course to inculcate correct methods
of work and preparation of preliminary and final reports, no
definite number of experiments is required, but the utmost empha-
sis is placed upon the quality of the data, style, and content of the
completed reports.

Prerequisite: EL 2 3 lab. hours

EL 12 Electrical Engineering Laboratory

This course continues the approach outlined in EL 1 1 and consists
of experiments on heat runs, connection of D.C. generators,
stray power testing and compound generator characteristics.
Preparation or taken concurrently: EL 10 3 lab. hours

EL 13 Electrical Measurements 1

This course is designed to acquaint the student with the theory of
precision measure as applied to electrical measurement in particu-
lar. Some of the subjects covered are theory of measurements,
directly and indirectly measured quantities, recording of observa-
tions, rules of significant figures, classification of error, law of
error, characteristics of error, and laws of average deviation.

Most of the problems studied fall in the following two general
classifications: (1) Given the precision measures of the directly
measured quantities, to determine the precision measure of the in-

208 IslORTHEASTER'N UNIVERSITY

directly measured quantity as calculated by the use of engineering
equations which apply to measurements work. (2) Given the pre-
scribed precision to be obtained in the indirectly measured quan-
tity, to determine the precision measure of the directly measured
components which enter into its calculation.

In this course parts and theory of operation of resistance de-
vices, galvanometers, ammeters, and voltmeters are discussed, the
treatment of other instruments being taken up later in connection
with their use. This is followed by a detailed discussion of the
methods of measuring various electrical quantities; resistance,
resistivity, conductance; D.C. electromotive force, current, power,
and energy. This part of the work involves the students' use of
visual indicating devices.

The principles taught in this course are immediately applied in
all experiments run in the measurements laboratory and so far as
necessary in the machine testing laboratory.

Preparation or taken concurrently: EL 9 4 class hours

EL 14 Electrical Measurements U
Resistance, capacitance, inductance, magnetic induction, A.C.
power and energy are treated in this course, with a detailed dis-
cussion of the methods of measuring them. This phase of the
subject involves the use of both visual and sound indicating
devices, and includes some work on the uses of circuits and
bridges designed for high frequency measurements and tube con-
stant determination. The student is given a thorough discussion
of the construction, theory of operation, method of use, sources
of error, etc., of the types of measuring instruments used in com-
mercial work and in standardizing laboratories.

Preparation: EL 13, taken concurrently: EL 10 3 class hours

EL 1 7 Electrical Engineering U
This course is a continuation of Electrical Engineering II. It
deals principally with polyphase circuits. Both balanced and un-
balanced circuits are considered. The unbalanced condition is
studied both by use of KirchhofF's laws and by the method of
symmetrical phase components.

Prerequisite: M 6, EL 10 3 class hours

EL 1 8 Electrical Engineering 111
A careful, thorough, and detailed study of the construction,
theory, operating characteristics, and testing of transformers is
the aim of this course. Particular attention is given to single
phase and polyphase transformers used for power purposes.
Special types of transformers studied include the constant current
transformer, the auto-transformer, and instrument transformers.
Preparation: EL 17 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 209

EL 1 9 Electrical Testing Laboratory

This course consists of a series of experiments involving the testing
of machines. Preliminary reports are written by all students before
the tests are performed in the laboratory. Experiments of the
following type are used: measurement of stray load loss of D.C.
motor, efficiency of machine by method of electrical supply of
losses, electrical separation of losses, measurement of losses by
retardation method, speed control of direct current motors by
Thyratrons.

Preparation or taken concurrently: EL 17 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

EL 20 Electronics Laboratory I

This course gives practical application of the material discussed
in EL 21 and EL 22. The experiments are performed on power
supplies, audio amplifiers, cathode-ray tube circuits, and
intermediate-frequency transformers. Both sine wave and square
wave testing of circuits is performed.

J class hour, 3 lab. hours

EL 21 Electronics

The first part of this course is concerned with the motion of

charged particles in electric and magnetic fields, with application

to such devices as cathode-ray tubes, mass spectrograph, cyclotron,

secondary emission multiplier, and the magnetron. Study is then

made of non-self maintaining discharges, glow and arc discharges,

thermionic emission, photoelectric emission, and characteristics

of thermionic cathodes.

Prerequisite: M 7 2 class hours

Preparation: P 2

EL 22 Electronics

Continuing from EL 21, this course takes up the principles of
operation and applications of diode, triode, and multi-electrode
vacuum tubes. Among the topics considered are paths of opera-
tion, dynamic characteristics, equivalent circuits, class A, B, and
C amplifiers, analysis and design of audio amplifiers, oscillators,
and measuring equipment.

Preparation: EL 21 4 class hours

EL 23 Electrical Measurements Laboratory

This course consists of a series of experiments emphasizing the
principles developed in EL 13 and EL 14. The student becomes
familiar with standard test apparatus and procedure. The experi-
ments include the bridge measurement of D.C. and low frequency

210 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

A.C. resistance, inductance, capacitance, measurement of E.M.F.
by various methods, and experiments on networks involving both
resonant and non-resonant conditions.

Preparation: EL 13 and 14 3 lab. hours

EL 24 Advanced Measurements Laboratory

The experiments performed in this laboratory course are designed
to give practice in more advanced methods of measurement and
to give the student experience in using audio oscillators, vacuum
tube voltmeters, cathode-ray oscilloscopes and similar equipment.
The experiments include work on filters, artificial telephone line,
audio transformer, harmonic analysis, wavemeter calibration, and
radio frequency bridge measurements.

Preparation: EL 13 and 14 3 lab. hours

EL 25 Electrical Engineering IV

In this course a detailed study is made of alternating current
synchronous machines. In addition to the study of the synchro-
nous generator and the synchronous motor, considerable time is
spent in discussing the problems involved in operating synchro-
nous generators in parallel.

Prerequisite: EL 18 4 class hours

EL 26 Electrical Engineering IV

This course is a continuation of EL 25. It deals with other types
of alternating current machines. The machines studied in detail
include the synchronous converter, the mercury arc rectifier, single
phase and polyphase induction motors, induction generators,
series and repulsion motors. The method of symmetrical phase
components is used in the study of unbalanced conditions in
certain types of motors.

Preparation: EL 25 4 class hours

EL 27 Advanced Electrical Engineering Laboratory

This is a laboratory course in alternating current machinery. The
work includes tests on the heating, efficiency, and determination
of the characteristics of various types of alternating current ma-
chinery, such as transformers, generators, and motors. A detailed
preliminary study is made of each assigned experiment, involving
the method to be used in obtaining the necessary data and the
manner of obtaining the required results from this data. This is
embodied in a preliminary report. The student then does the
necessary laboratory work to obtain the required data, and finally
works up the whole into a detailed final report. A minimum of

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 111

assistance is given by the instructor in the actual laboratory work,
the initiative and resourcefulness of the student being depended on
to the greatest extent.

Preparation or taken concurrently: EL 25 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

EL 28 Advanced Electronics Laboratory

This course deals exclusively with measurements at radio fre-
quencies including broadcast-band, short-wave, and ultra-high
frequency. The apparatus used in experimentation includes a
typical superheterodyne receiver, reactance modulator, frequency
discriminator, detectors, class C amplifier, coaxial line matching
networks, and klystron tubes.

Preparation: EL 37 1 class hour, 3 lab. hours

Prerequisite: EL 20, 22
Concurrent: EL 30, 32, 36

EL 29 Electrical Engineering V-A

This course is based on the material covered in Electronics (EL
21 and 22) continuing into the field of radio engineering, taking
up the following topics: power rectifiers, voltage and current
regulators; amplification, audio frequency voltage amplifiers,
class A and B audio frequency amplifiers, radio frequency class A,
wide band amplifiers, class B and C radio frequency power ampli-
fiers; oscillators (sine wave), negative-resistance oscillators,
principles of operation, feed-back oscillators, frequency stabilized
and beat frequency oscillators.

Prerequisite: EL 21 and 22 3 class hours

EL 30 Electrical Engineering V-A

The field covered by this course includes two main parts: radia-
tion and transmission lines as utilized at radio frequencies; the
main topics being fundamental theory, fields set up by a straight
wire, finite-length antennae, arrays and reflecting systems, receiv-
ing antennae, transmission lines, modified conventional trans-
mission line theory to fit the radio frequency applications, trans-
mission of energy on R-F lines, transmission lines as circuit
elements, transmission lines as impedance matching device,
transmission lines as a measuring device, transmission line
practice.

Preparation or concurrently: EL 29 and 32 3 class hours

EL 31 Electrical Engineering V-B

This course, which is given during the first semester of the senior
year (after a very brief consideration of the principles of hyper-
bolic trigonometry), opens with a discussion of the fundamental

212 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

theory of the long-distance transmission line, and continues with
the methods of determining voltage and current distribution
along the line with boundary conditions known at either the
sending or the receiving end, in both the case of a uniform line
and that of the composite line. Attention is given to the special
cases of the distortionless and dissipationless lines; equivalent
T and Pi representations; reflected waves. Half and quarter
wave lines with consideration of the latter as a transformer
conclude the course.

Preparation: M 7 3 class hours

EL 32 Electrical Engineering V-B

This course, a continuation of EL 31, given in the second semester
of the senior year, begins with a discussion of important network
theorems, resonance and resonant arms of various types,
Foster's reactance theorem, insertion loss, impedance matching
and the ideal transformer; followed by a thorough discussion of
filters both "constant K" and "m-derived," of low- and high-
pass, band-pass and band-elimination types. The course closes
with a brief review of the use of Fourier's series so far as seems
desirable; and the analysis of transients by the use of Fourier's
integral.

Preparation: EL 31 3 class hours

EL 35 Ultra-Hi gh'Frequency Technique

The material covered by this course embraces the four main
headings: cathode-ray tube and circuits, modulation, demodulation
and receivers. The subdivisions are as follows: cathode-ray tubes
and circuits, electron guns and beam formation, trigger circuits,
relaxation oscillator, time base and sweep circuits, special circuits,
combination of circuits; modulation, amplitude and frequency
modulation, amplitude modulation circuits, frequency modulation
circuits; receivers, receiver characteristics, sources of noise, tuned
R-F receivers, superheterodyne receiver, regenerative and super-
regenerative receiver, frequency modulated receiver.

Preparation or concurrently: EL 29, 31 4 class hours

EL 36 Ultra-Hi gh'Frequency Technique

The basic material covered may be subdivided into four general
classifications: transmitters, U.H.F. generators, propagation, and
wave guides. The subdivision of these are transmitters, classi-
fication, conventional transmitter circuits, frequency modulation
systems, transceivers, microphones; ultra-high-frequency genera-
tors, frequency limits, ultra-high-frequency negative-grid oscillator,
positive grid oscillator, velocity-modulation tubes and circuits.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 213

magnetrons; propagation, general nature of propagation and de-
pendance on frequency; wave guides, propagation through rec-
tangular and round guides, resonance phenomena in wave guides,
applications of resonant elements, practical utilization of wave
guides.

Preparation or concurrently: EL 32, 35 4 class hours

EL 37 Electronics Laboratory U

The experiments in this course are of a more advanced nature
than those of EL 20 and are concerned with circuit applications
of vacuum and gas-filled tubes. The circuits covered are feed-back
amplifier, regulated power supply, resistance-capacitance oscillator,
self-excited oscillator, multivibrator, trigger circuits, and amplitude
modulation circuits.

Preparation: EL 20 1 class hour, 3 lab. hours

Prerequisite: EL 21, 22

Concurrent: EL 29, 31, 35

EL 38 Ultra-Hi gh'Frequency Technique Laboratory

The experiments in this group are designed to acquaint the student
with equipment and techniques used in high-frequency and ultra-
high-frequency work. The equipment used consists of resonant
line oscillators, antenna field pattern equipment, ultra-high-
frequency generators (10 cm.), wave guides and associated equip-
ment, horns and parabolas.

Preparation: EL 29, 37 1 class hour, 3 lab. hours

Prerequisite: EL 20. 22

Concurrent: EL 30, 32 36

Qeology

Gy 1 General Geology

3 class hours

Gy 2 General Geology

Course Gy 1 is continued with such topics as mountain formation,
oceanic life, atmosphere, and meteorology. A considerable
portion of time is given to the study of igneous, sedimentary and
metamorphic rocks, supplemented by laboratory and field work.
Preparation: Gy 1 3 class hours

214 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

industrial Sngineering

IN 3 Production Processes I

A course in the techniques, processes, and machines used in the
production of manufactured articles.

The construction nomenclature, and operation of the following
machine tools are discussed: lathe, milling machine, planer,
shaper, broaching machine, and grinder.

4 class hours

IN 4 Production Processes U

This course is designed to apply economic principles to actual
manufacturing situations and to acquaint the student with the
proper angles, speeds, and feeds for metal cutting tools.

Typical problems considered are the selection of the most
economical material for a certain product, calculation of the
minimum cost quantity in purchasing, determination of whether
to use machine or hand labor for a given operation, and con-
sideration of the cost factors involved in jig and fixture design.

The proper shapes, speeds, and feeds of the following cutting
tools are discussed: milling cutter, broach, drill, lathe tool, and
threading tools.

2 class hours

IN 5 Industrial Management 1

The course in Industrial Management places emphasis on the
administrative phases of factory and plant operation. It deals with
the location of the plant; plant design, structure, and services;
plant layout; standardization, simplification, and specialization;
and the public relations of industry.

3 class hours

IN 6 Industrial Management U

This course is a continuation of IN 5. It deals with the control
of plant operations. Each department of a modern industrial
concern is considered, emphasis being placed on the organization
and management problems confronted and how they may be
handled, with the intention that the student shall become familiar
with the activities and general working of each department and
the relationship which the departments hold to one another and

COLLEGE OF E-NGINEERI-NG 215

to the business as a whole. In detail are considered budgeting,
standards of performance, wage systems, organization, routing,
scheduling, dispatching, inventory control, quality control, and
visual controls such as the organization chart, planning board, and
departmental report. Considerable attention is given to the dis-
tribution of overhead expenses and standard costs.

Preparation: IN 5 3 class hours

IN 7 Industrial Accounting

This is a course designed to introduce the engineering student to
the methods of analyzing and recording business transactions on
the books of original entry and their classification in the ledger
accounts. The purpose and use of the trial balance, the work sheet,
and the construction and analysis of the balance sheet and profit
and loss statement are demonstrated by specific problems.

1 class hour, 4 lab. hours

IN 8 Industrial Accounting

A continuation of IN 7 demonstrating the application of funda-
mental accounting principles to the particular problems involved
in the several forms of business organization. The specific prob-
lems considered cover the partnership, corporation, and manu-
facturing organization.

Preparation: IN 7 1 class hour, 4 lab. hours

IN 9 Cost Accounting

The primary purpose of this course is to establish an understanding
of the basic purpose of cost accounting as a measure of operating
efficiency.

The fundamental principles of cost accounting procedure are
developed through the demonstration of accounting control of
material, labor, and factory expenses, together with the methods
by which the factory operations are tied in with the financial
records of the business organization. Specific problems in job
order and process costs are studied in detail.

Prerequisite: IN 8 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

IN 10 Cost Accounting

This is a continuation of IN 9 and deals with the application of
the basic principles to specific cost accounting systems and budget-
ary control.

Predetermined standard, estimated and associative cost systems
are discussed and illustrated.

Preparation: IN 9 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

216 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

IN 11 Methods Engineering

This course comprises (1) a detailed study of time and motion
study work; (2) a complete study and actual practice in micro-
motion which is the use of motion pictures in the motion study
work; (3) the preparation of simo-charts (the use of colored charts
and symbols called Therbligs) which show all the elements in an
operation cycle; (4) the making of process charts which is the use
of specifically designed symbols, or industrial shorthand, to record
motion analysis.

Prerequisite: IN 6 2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

IN 14 Industrial Finance

The course in Industrial Finance is divided into two parts; the
first half of the course presents the differences in the organization
of partnerships, corporations, individual proprietorships, joint
stock companies, and holding companies.

The second half of the course deals with problems of financial
analysis. Industries are examined to determine their financial
condition; their position in relation to similar concerns; the
proportion of their fixed and variable expenditures; and the
effect of price cutting and price changes on their sales volume,
costs, and capital structure. Care is taken to give the student a
basis for determining what constitutes sound financial policy for
any industrial enterprise.

3 class hours

IN 15 Sales Engineering

This course in the principles of marketing is designed to acquaint
the engineering student with the field of distribution. It includes a
complete study of the functions of marketing, the institutions
and middlemen of the market, a study of the trade channels used
to market specific commodities, placing particular emphasis on
industrial goods.

3 class hours

IN 17 Personnel Administration

This course presents the basic principles underlying the organiza-
tion and operation of a modern department of personnel ad-
ministration. The topics covered deal with selection, placement,
guidance, training, wage and salary administration (job evaluation
principles and merit rating as used to determine wages and
salaries), safety, and health. In order to give the student a clear
appreciation of the fundamentals of jobs and what they require,
the course begins w'th the presentation of the basic principles of
job evaluation. This is followed by treatment of merit rating. At

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 111

this point the student has an appreciation of the requirements of
the job and is better able to understand basic principles of selec-
tion. The balance of the course deals with training, safety, and

health.

4 class hours

IN 22 Contracts

Preparation for a career as an industrial engineer demands an
understanding of the fundamental legal principles upon which
modern business transactions are based. The course in Contracts
treats of the common law rules which underlie all branches of
business law. The study of cases and decisions is supplemented by
lectures and assigned readings in textbooks in order to develop a
thorough understanding of the essentials of a valid contract such
as offer and acceptance, consideration and form. The interpreta-
tion, operation and discharge of contracts are also considered.
Such topics as agreement, competent parties, reality of consent,
legality of object, sealed instruments, and the Statute of Frauds are
treated in detail.

3 class hours

IN 23 Industrial Statistics

The increasing use of statistics in business and in the field of indus-
trial engineering makes essential an understanding of the funda-
mental methods and applications of statistical analysis. In this
course the important topics considered include the following:
the collection of statistical data; the presentation of statistical
data in tabular and graphic forms; and the uses and construction
of frequency distributions, averages, measures of dispersion and
skewness, and the normal curve. Specific attention is given to the
practical uses and limitations of statistics in the work of the
industrial engineer.

2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

IN 24 Industrial Statistics

Time series analysis receives major consideration in this course.
The standard procedures for measuring, separating, and eliminat-
ing trend, periodic, seasonal, cyclical, and irregular movements of
time series are carefully studied. Students are required to analyze
a time series related to their co-operative employment or to a field
of industry in which they have especial interest. The construc-
tion of index numbers, the use of currently published index num-
bers, correlation, and business forecasting complete the course
content. Particular regard is paid to the internal use of statistics
in industrial concerns.

2 class hours, 2 lab. hours

218 hlORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

IN 28 Motion and Time Study

This is an introductory course in work simplification and time
study. It includes a study of process charts, operation analysis,
motion economy, proper work place layout, use of labor-saving
tools and equipment, use of the stop watch, rate setting, fatigue
studies and allowances, and effects upon employee morale. Motion
pictures are used and actual laboratory studies made of simple
assembly operations.

2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

IN 30 Technique of Executive Control

The problems of human relations in industry are considered from
the point of view of building and maintaining employee morale.
Topics to be discussed include the nature of executive responsi-
bilities, methods of control in dealing with the working group,
devices for stimulating the employee toward improvement in the
quantity and quality of his work, a study of the common executive
difficulties in dealing with subordinates, associates, and superiors.

4 class hours

(^Mathematics

M 1 College Algebra

The study of algebra is scheduled to begin with the solution of
the quadratic equation, simultaneous quadratics, and equations
in quadratic form. However, a rapid although thorough review
of the fundamentals of algebra precedes this. This solution of
the quadratic is followed by a detailed study of the theory of
exponents. Then follow radicals, series, variation, inequalities,
and the elementary principles of the theory of equations. Con-
siderable time is given to plotting and the use of graphs in the
solution of equations. The elementary theory of complex numbers
is also covered.

3 class hours

M 3 Trigonometry

This is a complete course in trigonometry and should enable the
student to use all branches of elementary trigonometry both in
the solution of triangles as well as in the more advanced courses
where the knowledge of trigonometry is essential. Some of the
topics covered are the trigonometric ratios; inverse functions;
goniometry; logarithms; circular measure; laws of sines; cosines,
tangents, half angles; solution of oblique and right triangles;
transformation and solution of trigonometric and logarithmic
equations. Considerable practice in calculation of practical

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 219

problems enables the student to apply his trigonometry to prob-
lems arising in engineering practice at an early stage. Additional
work, graphical and algebraic, is done with the complex number,
introducing DeMoivre's theorem, and the exponential form of
the complex number.

2 class hours

M 4 Analytic Geometry and Introduction to Calculus

This being a basic course in preparation for any further study of
mathematics, it requires a thorough knowledge of the funda-
mentals of algebra. The course covers cartesian and polar co-
ordinates; graphs; the equations of simpler curves derived from
their geometric properties; thorough study of straight lines,
circles, and conic sections; intersections of curves; transformation
of axes; plotting and solution of algebraic equations of higher
order and of exponential, trigonometric, and logarithmic equa-
tions; loci problems. The general equation of the second degree
is thoroughly analyzed in the study of conic sections. Some time
is devoted to curve fitting from empirical data.

Explicit and implicit functions, dependent and independent
variables, some theory of limits, continuity and discontinuity
are given special attention both from the algebraic as well as
geometric points of view. Some theorems on the infinitesimal
are introduced and a study is made of infinity and zero as limits.
Relative rates of change, both average and instantaneous, and
the meaning of the slope of a curve follow. The differential and
the derivative as applied to algebraic functions with the geometric
interpretation are then studied. Simple applications with interesting
practical problems help to develop interest here and lay a solid
foundation for the study of the calculus. The introduction of the
differential at the same time with the derivative helps considerably
to bridge the large gap which usually exists when the student
passes from the study of the elementary analytic geometry to the
infinitesimal of calculus*

Preparation: M I, M 3 5 class hours

M 5 Differential Calculus

The differential is introduced and defined at the outset of the
course together with the derivative; geometric and practical illus-
trations are given of both; and both are carried along throughout
the course. The work in the course consists of differentiation of
algebraic, trigonometric, exponential, and logarithmic functions,
both explicit and implicit; slopes of curves, maxima and minima
with applied problems; partial differentiation; derivatives of higher
order; curvature; points of inflection; related rates; velocities,
acceleration; expansion of functions; series. Although the subject

220 NORTHEASTER'N UNIVERSITY

matter deals with considerable theory, constant sight is kept of
the practical application of the theory. The geometric interpreta-
tion of every new subject is carefully defined and problems are
continually solved dealing in practical applications of the theory
in geometry, physics, and mechanics.

Prerequisite: Ml 4 class hours

Preparation: M 4

M 6 Integral Calculus

This is a continuation of Calculus M 5 and deals with integration
as the inverse of differentiation as well as the limit of summation.
The topics covered are methods of integration; use of integral
tables; definite integrals; double and triple integrals; areas in
rectangular and polar co-ordinates; center of gravity; moment of
inertia; length of curves; volumes of solids; areas of surfaces of
revolution; volumes by triple integration; practical problems in
work, pressure, etc., depending on the differential and integral
calculus for solution, solution of simpler differential equations.
Preparation: M 5 4 class hours

M 7 Differential Equations

The elementary theory of differential equations and the solution
of certain ordinary and partial differential equations are offered
here as a general course in mathematics. Although principally a
problem course in solving differential equations, properties of the
equations and of their solutions are deduced, and applications to
the various fields of engineering, particularly electrical engineering,
are analyzed.

Preparation: M 6 4 class hours

Q^yCechanical Sngineering

ME 1 Mechanism

This course deals mainly with a mathematical solution of prob-
lems involving angular and linear velocities and gear trains. It
embraces a careful study of paths of mechanical movements and
their application to velocity diagrams, quick-return mechanisms,
and cams. The theory of gear tooth outlines is also investigated
by graphical methods.

6 class hours

ME 15 Industrial Plants

The principles involved in the erection, installation, and manage-
ment of an industrial plant are studied in this course. Various
types of structures are described, with attention to such details as
foundations, walls, columns, floors, and windows. The calculation

COLLEGE OF ENGlhlEERlIlsIG 111

and layout for a typical mill are also discussed. This material is
followed by a problem on the calculation and layout of a machine
shop, including power requirements and placement of machines,
with special consideration to the best conditions for maximum
production and the most effective routing of a given product.
Preparation: ME 23, ME 32 6 class hours

ME 16 Industrial Plants

This course, a continuation of ME 15, includes a problem on the
heating and air conditioning of a building, and a design problem
on the calculation and layout of a power plant. Sizes of equipment,
costs of power generation, and various operating practices are dis-
cussed and worked out. The later problems of the course have to
do with the layout of the power plant previously figured.

Preparation: ME 15 6 class hours

ME 20 Applied Mechanics (Statics)
The subjects treated are coUinear, parallel, concurrent, and non-
concurrent force systems in a plane and in space; the determination
of the resultant of such systems by both algebraic and graphical
means, special emphasis being placed on the string polygon
method for coplanar force systems; the forces required to produce
equilibrium in such systems; first moments; and problems involv-
ing static friction, such as the inclined plane and the wedge.
Prerequisite: PI 4 class hours

ME 21 Applied Mechanics (Kinetics)
The subjects treated are continuation of first moments as applied
to varying intensity of force and to the determination of center of
gravities of areas and solids; second moments and the application
to the determination of moment of inertia of plane and solid
figures, radius of gyration, polar moment of inertia; product of
inertia, principal axes, uniform motion, uniformly accelerated
motion, variable accelerated motion, harmonic motion, simple
pendulum, rotation, plane motion, work, energy, momentum and
impact.

Preparation: ME 20 4 class hours

ME 22 Strength of Materials
The topics covered in this course are physical properties of
materials, stresses in thin hollow cylinders and spheres, riveted
connections of the structural and continuous plate type, welded
connections, and beams, covering shearing force and bending
moment with stress analysis due to these effects and the design of
beams for both conditions.

Prerequisite: ME 20 4 class hours

Preparation: ME 21, P 4

222 NORTHEASTERN UhllVERSlTY

ME 23 Strength of Materials

This is a continuation of ME 22 covering deflection of beams by
the double integration method; stresses and strains in shafting
due to torsion, angle of twist; horsepower; combined axial and
bending loads, eccentric loads; compression members or columns
by Euler's column formula, and by those of the Gordon-Rankine
parabolic and straight line type.

. Prerequisite: ME 22 3 class hours

ME 24 Advanced Mechanics

Advanced problems in the strength of materials and dynamics are
treated. Among the subjects under discussion are non-symmetrical
bending, curved bars, flat plates, thick hollow cylinders, dynamical
stresses in machine parts, and allied subjects leading to the more
advanced applications of mechanics in machine design, the elastic
theory, and photoelasticity.

Preparation: ME 23 3 class hours

ME 25 Strength of Materials

Continuation of ME 22 covering deflection of beams by the
double integration method, stresses and strains in shafting due to
torsion; horsepower; combined axial and bending loads, eccentric
loads, impulse, impact and momentum; the catenary and other
problems of interest to electrical students.

Preparation: ME 22 2 class hours

ME 27 Metallography

The course in metallography is intended to show the student the
relation between the crystalline structure of metals and their
physical properties.

The theory of crystallization and the equilibrium diagram are
studied. Specimens of metal of known composition are polished,
etched, and studied by use of the metallograph, and their physical
properties are compared. The effect of heat treatment on the
crystalline structure is noted.

Preparation: IN 3 3 class hours

ME 29 Heat Engineering (Power Plant Equipment)

The course is largely a description of the many appliances used in
modern power plants. There is also taken up a discussion of
boilers and boiler accessories, ash and coal handling systems, the
various types of engines with their valve gears and governing
devices, condensers, feed-water heaters, pumps, etc.

3 class hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 223

ME 30 Heat Engineering {Thermodynamics)

In this introductory course in the fundamentals of thermody-
namics the following subjects are discussed: general theory of heat
and matter; first and second laws of thermodynamics; equations of
state; fundamental equations of thermodynamics; laws of perfect
gases; properties of vapors including development and use of
tables and charts; thermodynamic processes of gases, and saturated
and superheated vapors; and the general equations for the flow of
fluids.

Preparation: P 4 4 class hours

ME 31 Heat Engineering

The principles of thermodynamics are here applied to various
problems of heat engineering. These include the fundamental laws
governing the flow of gases and vapors through nozzles and orifices
with and without friction; the theory of vapor engines, including
discussions of the Rankine, the reheating, the regenerative and the
binary vapor cycles; the efficiencies and power calculations for
actual steam engines; and the principles of heat transfer as applied
to steady flow conditions and their applications to practical
problems.

Prerequisite: ME 30 4 class hours

Preparation: ME 29

ME 32 Heat Engineering

In this course the single and multi-stage compressor cycles are
studied and analyzed. Various types of modern internal com-
bustion engines are taken up in detail, including the latest designs
of automobile, airplane, and Diesel engines. Considerable stress is
placed on the combustion process of power plants and internal
combustion engines.

The Otto and Diesel cycles are carefully analyzed to determine
how changes in pressures, compression ratios, clearances, and fuel
cutoff effect the economy and performance of the engine.

Solid and air injection, high, medium, and low speed engines
are also discussed.

Preparation: ME 31 4 class hours

ME 33 Refrigeration

A discussion is given of the history, theory, equipment, and appli-
cations of refrigeration. The properties and hazards of the various
refrigerants; the simple and compound compression cycle; the
absorption system; the jet or vapor system; devices for improving
theoretical and operating performance of machines are among the
topics considered.

Preparation: ME 32 3 class hours

224 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

ME 34 Steam Turbines

A study is first made of the flow of steam through nozzles, dynamic
action of jets on moving blades, and other elements in the design
of a steam turbine. This material is followed by a consideration
of the various types of turbines, their governing mechanisms,
condensing equipment, and other constructional details.

Preparation: ME 31 3 class hours

ME 35 Heat Engineering

This is a short course covering the elements of thermodynamics
and affording a general discussion of modern power plant equip-
ment. Many typical calculations are made in regard to apparatus.
Preparation: P 4 3 class hours

ME 36 Heat Engineering

A continuation of ME 35, together with experimental work in
the laboratory. Topics taken up in class include steam engine
economy, multi-valve and multi-expansion engines, steam turbines,
steam condensing equipment, pumps, and internal combustion
engines.

In the laboratory, experiments are performed on air blowers,
steam engines, water wheels, pumps, and internal combustion
engines.

Preparation: ME 35 2 class hours, 3 lab. hours

ME 39 Engine Dynamics

A consideration of the vibrations, balancing, critical speeds, and
inertia effects of high speed internal combustion engines.

Prerequisite: ME 21 4 class hours

ME 40 Aerodynamics

The course comprises a study of the fundamental theory of aero-
dynamics which underlies all calculations concerning the per-
formance and stability of airplanes including characteristics of
airfoils and elementary propeller theory.

Preparation: ME 21, CI 12 3 class hours

ME 42 Heating and Air Conditioning

The most important methods of heating and air conditioning
various types of buildings are studied in this course. The principles
of heat transfer and air flow are reviewed, and the application
of them in the various systems is brought out through lectures and
problems.

Preparation: ME 21, CI 12 3 class hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 225

ME 44 Power Plant Engineering

This course consists of topics and problems chosen largely from
engineering practice selected to convey to the engineering students
a firm grasp of fundamental principles and engineering methods
of attacking and analyzing problems in power plant, not only from
the point of view of scientific theory, but also with due considera-
tion of the limitations imposed by practice and by costs. Efficiency
and operating costs of different types of plants such as steam,
hydroelectric, and Diesel engines are also carefully studied to
determine the type of plant best suited for the conditions and
location involved.

Preparation: ME 32 4 class hours

ME 51 Machine Design

Further practice is given the student in the application of theo-
retical principles previously studied, and at the same time he be-
comes familiar with the many practical details which must be
considered in design work. The problems taken up in the early
part of the course are of a static nature, while the later problems
involve dynamical stresses. The problems vary from year to year,
but the following are typical of the designs taken up: hydraulic
press, arbor press, hydraulic flanging clamp, crane, air compressor,
punch and shear, stone crusher, and so forth.

In each design, the construction details are carefully considered,
with special attention to methods of manufacture, provision for
wear, lubrication, and so forth. The work is based on rational
rather than empirical methods, the student being required to
make all calculations for determining the sizes of the various parts
and all necessary working drawings.

Preparation: ME 24 6 class hours

ME 52 Machine Design

This course comprises a continuation of Machine Design ME 51
with special reference to designs involving dynamical stresses. A
thorough discussion of the principles and methods of lubrication
forms a part of the course.

Preparation: ME 51 6 class hours

ME 61 Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

This course comprises a preliminary series of experiments upon
various apparatus used in modern power plants, to illustrate under
actual conditions the principles developed in Heat Engineering
ME 30. These exercises are a preparation for more complete
tests to be run during the following semester.

226 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

The knowledge they have gained in the classroom the students
here apply in actual tests, and make a complete report of these
experiments, including methods of testing and calculations. The
following experiments are illustrative of the type of work taken
up: calibration of gauges, indicator practice, plain slide valve
setting, test on steam calorimeters, flow of steam through orifices,
steam injector test, weir calibration, and tests on friction of drives.

Prerequisite: ME 29 4 lab. hours

Preparation: ME 31

ME 62 Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

This course consists of a series of tests on various types of power
plant equipment, more complete than those made in ME 61.
Among the pieces of apparatus tested are the following: steam
engine, gasoline engine, air compressor, triplex power pump,
steam pulsometer, rotary power pump, Pelton water wheel,
centrifugal pumps, Ford gasoline engine, Warren steam pump
and steam turbine. Experiments are also made in flow of water
measurements and flow of air.

A complete report is made on each test, describing the machine
tested, explaining how the test is made, and giving the results, in
accordance with the A.S.M.E. Power Test Codes.

Preparation: ME 32, ME 61 4 lab. hours

ME 63 Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

This is a continuation of course ME 62, to which it is generally
similar. Some further experiments are made in the testing of
materials, such as compressive, tensile, torsion, impact, and
bending tests. A boiler test of from ten to twenty-four hours'
duration is made to determine the performance and efficiency of
the boilers in the power plant; and oils and coals are tested in the
laboratory to determine their characteristics and calorific values.
Preparation: ME 32, ME 62 J class hour, 3 lab. hours

ME 69 Testing Materials Laboratory

Methods of testing and strength of various materials used by the
engineer are taken up.

The work of this course is carried out by the students working
in small groups. It includes tests to determine the elongation,
reduction of areas, modulus of elasticity, yield point, and ultimate
compressive strength of metals such as steel, cast iron, copper,
and brass; compressive tests on timber and concrete, and tests to
determine the deflection, modulus of elasticity, elastic limit, and
ultimate transverse strength of steel and wooden beams subject to
transverse load. Torsion and impact tests are carried out and
their results correlated with those of the tensile tests.

COLLEGE OF EhlGINEERING 227

The effect of various mixes and curing conditions on the tensile
and transverse strength of cement and mortar are studied. Special
problems are assigned in the failure of metals by fatigue.

Preparation: ME 22 1 class hour, 3 lab. hours

ME 73 Aircraft Structures

The fundamental analysis of the forces, reactions, shears, and
moments as applied to aircraft structures is the object of this
course.

Preparation: ME 23 3 class hours

ME 74 Aircraft Structures

This course deals with the structural analysis of the metal airplane.
Among the topics discussed are the stability of the short column,
stability of thin plates under different loading conditions, shear
centers, and redundant structures. The rigid web, tension field,
and truss types of spar design are considered.

3 class hours

ME 76 Aircraft Engine Design

This course covers the design of an airplane engine involving the

thermodynamic principles as well as the stresses in the crankshaft,

connecting rods, cylinders, springs, and other parts of the engine.

Preparation: ME 39 6 class hours

Thysics

P 1 Physics 1

A course in the study of the fundamental principles of the mechan-
ics of physics. Some of the topics covered are simple harmonic
motion, uniformly accelerated motion, friction, work, energy,
power, fluid pressure, angular velocity, centripetal force, equi-
librium under the action of a series of parallel forces and equi-
librium under the action of concurrent forces.

3 class hours

P 2 Physics 1

This is a thorough course in magnetism and electricity covering
all the details within the scope of standard college texts on these
subjects. All lectures are illustrated by means of lantern slides,
motion pictures, and special apparatus.

3 class hours

228 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

P 3 Physics 11

A course in the study of wave motion, sound, and light. Molecular
mechanics and other fundamental principles of physics are stressed
at the beginning.

All lectures in physics are accompanied by appropriate demon-
strations.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 3 class hxmrs

P 4 Physics U

The topics studied are thermometry, expansion of solids, liquids,
and gases; calorimetry; change of state including latent heat of
fusion and vaporization (sublimation); triple point diagram; con-
duction and radiation; and the mechanical equivalent of heat.
Preparation: P 1, P 2 3 class hours

P 5 Physics Laboratory

This course consists of experiments in mechanics, light, electricity,
and magnetism performed by each student supplementing the
lecture and class room work of courses P 1, P 2, and P 3. The
experiments on mechanics include the use of the vernier, microm-
eters and spherometer, the calculation of true weights, the funicular
polygon, gyroscopic motion, simple harmonic motion and the
determination of areas by means of the planimeter. Other experi-
ments in this course include plotting the magnetic field about a
bar magnet and the determination of the pole strength and field
strength of the magnet, the position of images in a combination
of lenses and one experiment on electrostatics.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 2 lab. hours

P 6 Physics Laboratory

A continuation of the experiments started in P 5 including ex-
periments on sound and heat. Some of the experiments of this
course are the modulus of elasticity, the determination of the
velocity of sound, the coefficient of cubical expansion of mercury,
the air thermometer, the determination of the mechanical equiva-
lent of heat, the study of the maximum and minimum thermom-
eters, and the use of the spectroscope in the study of the bright
line and solar spectra. The experiments of this course supplement
the class work of courses PI, P 2, P 3, and P 4.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 2 lab. hours

P 7 Physics Laboratory

This course is very similar to P 5 but broader in scope and designed
particularly for electrical engineering students.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 4 lab. hours

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERI-NG 229

P 8 Physics Laboratory

A course similar in content but broader in scope than P 6 and
designed particularly for electrical engineering students.

Preparation: P 1, P 2 4 lab. hours

Thysical Sducadon

PE 1 Hygiene

One class hour a week is devoted to the study of information
closely related to the physical training work and to personal and
mental hygiene. For each class lecture, the student is assigned
at least one hour of outside study based on the required textbook.
The course includes enough of the fundamentals of physiology
and anatomy to enable the student to understand such parts of
the course as require some knowledge of these subjects.

I class hour

Physical Training

All first year students are required to take Physical Training.
Health, strength, and vitality do not come by chance, but by
constant attention to those factors involved in their development.
It is very essential for the student to acquire good habits of living.

Students wishing to be excused from Physical Training because
of physical defects are required to present a petition to the faculty
supported by a physician's certificate.

2 class hours

Orientation

This course is required of all first year students and is designed to
make entering students explicitly aware of those facts, principles,
and techniques which are significantly related to the maintenance
of their intellectual efficiency, to assist them in making desirable
social adjustments in the college community, to help them make a
wise choice in their upperclass fields of specialization. Special effort
is made to prepare the student to make an early and satisfactory
adjustment to the conditions of the co-operative work. Lectures
and individual conferences.

1 class hour

230 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Sociology

S 1 Introduction to Sociology

3 class hours

S 2 Principles of Sociology

3 class hours

theses

Theses are not required of candidates for the bachelor's degree.
Certain students, who have demonstrated marked ability in the
field of research, may be permitted to substitute a thesis for one
or more courses of the senior year.

By "thesis" is meant an essay involving the statement, analysis,
and solution of some problem in pure or applied science. Its
purpose is to demonstrate a satisfactory degree of initiative and
power of original thought and work on the part of each candi-
date for an engineering degree.

The subject of the thesis is to be decided in conference between
the candidate and that faculty member of the professional depart-
ment to whom the student is assigned for supervision in thesis
work; final approval, however, resting with the head of the de-
partment. The subject may be one of structural design, research,
testing, study of a commercial process, etc., but in no case will a
mere resume of prior knowledge or discussion, either or both, of
the present state of the matter be acceptable. This, it is true, must
normally be made, but in addition thereto there must be a certain
amount of work planned and executed, aimed toward the exten-
sion of the present field of information regarding the subject
chosen.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 231

In many cases the student presents an individual thesis. How-
ever, in nearly equal number, acceptable subjects will be found
necessitating the co-operation of at least two students, either of the
same or sometimes of different professional departments. In such
cases, each student is primarily responsible for a certain part of the
work, while also becoming wholly familiar with the entire problem;
and the completed thesis must show clear evidence of the evenly-
balanced co-operation and labor of the students concerned.

The completed thesis will be examined for acceptance or re-
jection from the technical viewpoint by the professional depart-
ments interested, and then forwarded to the Secretary of the
Faculty, final approval of the thesis resting with the Dean of the
College involved.

Upon acceptance, the thesis becomes the property of the Univer-
sity, together with all apparatus and material used in connection
therewith, except that hired or borrowed, or originally the personal
property of the candidate. It is not to be printed, published, nor
in any other way made public except in such manner as the
professional department and the Dean shall jointly approve.

Frequently thesis subjects may be chosen on problems arising
in the plant where the student is employed at co-operative work.
Employers are usually glad to consult with the student in the
selection of the subject and the subsequent development of the
thesis.

When theses are conducted in this manner, it is understood
that the employer is not expected by the University to assume
any expense of the thesis nor to furnish any supplies or equipment
to be used in the development of the thesis other than those
which he may consider it advisable and desirable to place at the
disposal of the students. The regulations governing the use of
laboratories and buildings of the co-operating firms will vary in
practically all cases and each student must naturally be governed
definitely by the regulations existing at the plant where the thesis
is to be conducted.

Theses conducted in conjunction with co-operating firms must
be submitted in duplicate, one copy to be presented by the Director
of Co-operative Work to the co-operating employer.

For all further information, candidates for the degree are re-
ferred to the "Directions for Theses," which they may obtain from
their professional departments at the end of their junior year.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

DAY COLLEGES

Courses of Instruction in

Liberal Arts

Business Administration

Engineering

1944,1946

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS

July, 1944

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION

235

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Courses of Instruction Offered in the
"Day Colleges

CERTAIN of the courses here listed are offered only in alter-
nate years, and the University reserves the right to with-
draw any course in which there is insufficient enrollment.

Courses not included in the prescribed curricula may be taken
only after approval by the student's faculty adviser. Except where
otherwise indicated, electives are not open to freshmen.

Prerequisite courses are divided into two groups. Those courses
printed in type (AC2) must have been completed with passing
grades before a student will be permitted to register for the ad-
vanced courses to which they apply. Those courses printed in
(B3) are of such a preparatory nature that a student undertaking
an advanced course without having had the preparatory courses
specified will ordinarily find himself greatly handicapped, and he
may not register in the advanced course without the consent of
the instructor.

Pre-

Class Lab.

No.

Course

requisite

Hrs.

College*

Accounting

ACl

Accounting I

AC2

Accounting II

ACS

Cost Accounting

AC2

AC6

Cost Accounting

AC2

AC7

Accounting Problems

AC4

ACS

Accounting Problems

AC4

AC9

C. P. A. Problems

AC4

ACIO

Income Tax and Publ

Accounting

AC4

Biology

General Zoology

General Botany

Invertebrate Zoology

Vertebrate Zoology

Animal Physiology

Principles of Genetics

Bl,2

*Note: BA = College of Business Administration.
LA = College of Liberal Arts.
Eng = College of Engineering.

236

TsIORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Pre-

Class Lab.

No.

Course requisite

Hrs.

College

Biology -

— Continued

BIO

Principles of Genetics

Bll

Animal Histology

B12

Animal Histology

Bll

B13

Vertebrate Embryology

B14

Vertebrate Embryology

B13

B15

General Parasitology

B3,4

B16

General Parasitology

B15

B17

Mammalian Anatomy

B18

Mammalian Anatomy

B17

B19

Histological Technique

B12

B20

Histological Technique

B19

B21

History of Biology

B22

History of Biology

B25

General Entomology

B26

Economic Entomology

B1,B25

B61

Seminar

B62

Seminar

B61

B65

Thesis

B66

Thesis

Co-ordination

Vocational Conference

Engineering Conference

Eng

Engineering Conference

Eng

Cll

Business Conference

C12

Business Conference

Chemistry

Chi

General Chemistry

Eng.LA

Ch2

General Chemistry

Chi

Eng.LA

Ch9

Qualitative Analysis

Chl,2

Eng.LA

Chll

Qualitative Anal. Lab.

Chl,2

Eng.LA

Chl2

Quantitative Analysis

Chl,2,9

Eng.LA

Chl3

Quantitative Analysis

Chl,2,12

Eng.LA

Chl4

Quantitative Anal. Lab.

Chl,2,ll,12

Eng.LA

Chl5

Quantitative Anal. Lab.

Chl4,13

Chi 7

Quantitative Anal. Lab.

Chl,2,13,14

Eng

Ch25

Organic Chemistry

Chl,2

Ch26

Organic Chemistry

Chl,2,25

Ch27

Organic Chemistry Lab.

Chl,2,25

Ch28

Organic Chemistry Lab.

Chl,2,26,27

Ch31

Organic Chemistry

Chl,2

Eng.LA

Ch32

Organic Chemistry

Ch31

Eng.LA

Ch33

Organic Chemistry Lab.

Chl,2,31,40

Eng.LA

Ch34

Organic Chemistry Lab.

Ch32,33

Eng.LA

Ch35

Organic Chemistry

Ch32

Eng.LA

Ch37

Organic Chemistry Lab.

Ch34,35

Ch39

Organic Chemistry Lab.

Ch34,35

Eng

Ch40

Physical Chemistry

/Chl2,14,13,

\ 15 or 17

Eng.LA

Ch41

Physical Chemistry

Chi 3, 15,40

Ch42

Physical Chemistry

Ch41

Ch45

Physical Chemistry

Chl3,17,40

Eng

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION

237

Pre-

Class Lab.

No.

Course

requisite

Hrs.

College

Chemistry

— Continued

Ch46

Physical Chemistry

Ch45

Eng

Ch48

Colloidal Chemistry

Ch41

Ch51

Sources of Information

Chl,2

Eng,LA

Ch52

History of Chemistry

Chl,2

Ch63

Advanced Chemistry

Ch42

Ch64

Advanced Chemistry

Ch35

Ch65

Thesis

Ch42

Ch66

Thesis

Ch42

ChlOl

Adv. Physical Chemistry

ChlOZ

Adv. Physical Chemistry

Chl03

Adv. Organic Chemistry

Chl04

Adv. Organic Chemistry

Chios

Graduate Thesis

Chl06

Graduate Thesis

Chl07

Graduate Thesis

Chios

Graduate Thesis

Chemical Engineering

ChEl

Flow of Fluids

Eng

ChEZ

Industrial Stoichiometry

ChlZ,13

Eng

ChE3

Unit Operations

ChEl,5

Eng

ChE4

Unit Operations

ChE2,3,6

Eng

ChE5

Unit Operations Lab.

ChE3

Eng

ChE6

Unit Operations Lab.

ChE4

Eng

ChE?

Inorganic Chem. Tech.

Ch9,ChEZ

Eng

ChE8

Organic Chem. Tech.

Ch32,ChE4

Eng

ChE9

Chem. Process Lab.

ChE4

Eng

ChElO

Chem. Eng. Projects

ChE4

Eng

ChEll

Chem. Eng. Thermo-

dynamics

Ch46

Eng

ChElZ

Engineering Materials

Eng

Civil Engineering

CI3

Surveying I

Eng

CI4

Surveying II

CI3

Eng

CIS

Surveying I, F &. P

D1,CI3

Eng

CI6

Surveying II, F &. P

CI4,5

Eng

CI7

Surveying III

CI3,4

Eng

CIS

Surveying IV

CI7

Eng

CI9

Surveying III, F &. P

CI5,6,7

Eng

CIIO

Surveying IV, F &l P

CI8,9

Eng

Hydraulics

ME20,21

Eng

CI12

Hydraulics

Eng

CI15

Theory of Structures

ME22,23

Eng

CI16

Theory of Structures

CIIS

Eng

CI18

Concrete Testing Lab.

ME69

Eng

CI21

Sanitary Engineering

cm, 12

Eng

CI22

Sanitary Engineering

CIZl

Eng

CI23

Engineering Structures

CI15,16,ME23

Eng

CI24

Engineering Structures

CI23

Eng

CI2S

Concrete

ME23,CI1S

Eng

CI26

Concrete

CIZS

Eng

CIZ9

Design of Structures

CIZ3,ZS

Eng

CI30

Design of Structures

CIZ4,26,Z9

Eng

238

hlORTHEASTERhl UNIVERSITY

Pre-

Class Lab

No.

Course

requisite

Hrs.

College

Civil Engineering — Continued

CI31

Highway Engineering

CI7,9

Eng

CI32

Highway Engineering

CI31

Eng

Drawing an

d Graphic

Arts

Engineering Drawing

Eng,LA

Descriptive Geometry

Eng.LA

Machine Drawing

Eng

Machine Drawing

Eng

English

English I

Eng.LA

English I

Eng.LA

El-A

English I

E2-A

English I

El-B

Fundamentals Bus. English

E2-B

Fundamentals Bus. English

E3-B

Business Communication

E4-B

Business Communication

E5-B

Advanced Report Writing

Advanced Composition

E2-A,1.A

Advanced Composition

Creative Writing

Journalism I

ElO

Journalism I

Ell

Journalism II

ElO

E12

Journalism II

Ell

E13

Effective Speaking

E14

Effective Speaking

E13

E15

Survey of English Lit.

E16

Survey of English Lit,

E17

English Drama Before

Shakespeare .

E18

Chaucer

E19

Shakespeare

E20

Shakespeare

E21

19th Cent. Poetry I

E22

19th Cent. Poetry II

E23

17th &. 18th Cent. Prose

E24

19th Cent. Prose

E25

American Lit. to 1860

E26

American Lit. After 1860

E27

History of English Novel

E28

History of English Novel

E29

Great European Writers

E30

Great European Writers

E31

Comparative Drama

E32

Comparative Drama

E33

Modern Lit. 1895-1915

E34

Modern Lit. Since 1915

E35

The Essay in England and America

E36

Introduction to Criticism

E61

Seminar

E62

Seminar

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION

239

Pre-

Class Lab

No.

Course

requisite

Hrs.

Hrs

. College

Economics

Eel

Economic Geography

Ec2

Com. &t Ind. Hist, of U.

Ec3

Economic Principles

/BA
\LA

Ec4

Economic Principles

Ec3

Same as Ec3

Ec5

Economic Problems

Ec3

/BA
\LA
Same as Ec5

Ec6

Economic Problems

Ec5

Ec7

Money and Banking

Ec3,4

Ec8

Business Cycles

Ec5,6

LA.BA

Ec9

Statistics in Business

EclO

Statistics in Business

Ecll

Labor Problems

Ec3,4

LA.BA

EclZ

Economic Systems

Ec3,4

LA.BA

Ecl4

Inter. Ec. Relations

Ec5,6

LA.BA

Ecl5

Hist, of Econ. Thought

Ec5,6

LA.BA

Ecl6

Adv. Econ. Theory

Ecl5

LA.BA

Ecl7

Statistics

Ecl8

Statistics

Ecl7

Ec21

Economics

Eng.LA

Ec22

Economics

Ec21

Eng.LA

Ec61

Seminar

Ec62

Seminar

Ec61

Ec65

Thesis

Ec66

Thesis

Education

Edl

History of Education

Ed2

History of Education

Ed3

Educ. Measurements

Ed4

Educ. Org. and Adm.

Ed7

Comparative Education

Ed9

Educ. Sociology

EdlO

Educ. Philosophy

Edll

Principles of Secondary

Education

Edl2

Methods of Teaching in

Secondary Schools

Electrical Engineering

ELI

Electrical Eng. I

Eng

EL2

Electrical Eng. I

ELI

Eng

ELS

Electrical Machinery

Eng

EL5A

Electrical Machinery

P2,M6

Eng

EL6

Electrical Measurements

ELS

Eng

EL9

Electrical Eng. II

Eng

ELIO

Electrical Eng. II

Eng

ELU

Electrical Eng. Lab.

EL2

Eng

EL12

Electrical Eng. Lab.

ELIO

Eng

EL13

Elec. Measurements I

EL9

Eng

EL14

Elec. Measurements II

EL10,13

Eng

EL17

Electrical Eng. Ill

EL10,M6

Eng

EL18

Electrical Eng. Ill

ELI 7

Eng

EL19

Electrical Testing Lab.

ELI 7

Eng

240

'NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Pre- Class

Lab.

No.

Course

requisite Hrs.

Hrs.

College

Electrical Engineering — Continued

EL20

Electronics Lab. I

Eng

EL21

Electronics

M7,P2 2

Eng

EL22

Electronics

EL21 4

Eng

EL23

Elec. Measurements Lab.

EL13,14 0

Eng

EL24

Adv. Measurements Lab

EL13,14 0

Eng

EL25

Electrical Eng. IV

EL18 4

Eng

EL26

Electrical Eng. IV

EL25 4

Eng

EL27

Adv. Elec. Eng. Lab.

EL25 2

Eng

EL28

Adv. Electronics Lab.

EL20,22,30,

32,36,37 1

Eng

EL29

Electrical Eng. V-A

EL21,22 3

Eng

EL30

Electrical Eng. V-A

EL29,32 3

Eng

EL31

Electrical Eng. V-B

M7 3

Eng

EL32

Electrical Eng. V-B

EL31 3

Eng

EL35

Ultra-High-Frequency

Technique

EL29,31 4

Eng

EL36

Ultra-High-Frequency

Technique

EL32,35 4

Eng

EL37

Electronics Lab. II

EL20,21,22,

29,31,35 1

Eng

EL38

Ultra-High-Frequency
Tech. Lab.

EL20,22,29,

30,32,36,37 1

Eng

French

Fl Elementary French

F2 Elementary French Fl

F3 Intermediate French F2

F3 Intermediate French Fl

F4 Intermediate French F3

F5 Modern French LiteratureF4

F6 Modern French LiteratureFS

F7 French Classicism F4

F8 French Classicism F4

F9 French Romanticism F4

FIO French Romanticism F9,F4

Banking and Finance

F13 Business Finance

F14 Finance Problems

F16 Banking and Business Ec3

FIB Adv. Banking Problems

F19 Investments

FIIO Investments

FI12 Public Finance

FIO Real Estate Practice and

Appraising
FI14 Insurance Principles and

Practice

COURSES OF INSTRUCTION

241

No.

Course

Pre-
requisite

Class Lab.

Hrs. Hrs. College

German

Elementary German

Intermediate German

Modern German Lit.

Class. Per. of Ger. Lit.

Class. Per. of Get. Lit.

Ger. Lit. of 19th Cent.

GIO

Ger. Lit. of 19th Cent.

Government

Gvl Am. Govt, and Politics

Gv2 Am, Govt, and Politics

Gv3 Comparative Govt.

Gv4 Comparative Govt.

Gv5 Am. Const. Law

Gv5-B Constitutional Law

Gv6 Am. Const. Law Gv5

Gv7 Origins of Political Theory

Gv8 Modern Political Theory

Geology

Gyl General Geology

Gy2 General Geology Gyl

Gy5 Historical Geology Gy2

Gy6 Historical Geology Gy5

/BA

Ila

/BA
ILA

/BA

Ila

/BA

Ila

/BA
JLA

Eng

History

HI History of Civilization

HZ History of Civilization

H5 Europe of 1789-1870

H6 Europe Since 1870

H7 England to 1688

H8 England Since 1688

H9 United States to 1865

HIO United States Since 1865

Hll Latin American History

H12 Latin American History

H13 English Const. History

H14 American Const. History

H15 Far East Int. Rel. 1840-1900

H16 Far East Int. Rel. Since 1900

/BA

\LA

Same as HI

LA.BA

242

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Pre-

Class

Lab

No.

Course

requisite

Hrs.

Hrs

. College

Industrial Administration

lAl

Industrial Management I

IA2

Industrial Management II

IA3

Personnel Administration

IA4

Personnel Problems

IA6

Motion and Time Study

IA14

Production Processes I

Industrial Engineering

IN3

Production Processes I

Eng

IN4

Production Processes II

Eng

INS

Industrial Mgt. I

/Eng
I Eng

IN6

Industrial Mgt. II

INS

Same as INS

IN7

Industrial Accounting

Eng

INS

Industrial Accounting

IN7

Eng

IN9

Cost Accounting

INS

Eng

INIO

Cost Accounting

IN9

Eng

INll

Methods Engineering

IN6

Eng

IN14

Ind. Finance

Eng

IN15

Sales Engineering

Eng

IN17

Personnel Administration

Eng

IN22

Contracts

Eng

IN23

Industrial Statistics

Eng

IN24

Industrial Statistics

Eng

IN27

Industrial Management

Eng

IN28

Motion and Time Study

Eng

IN30

Tech. Exec. Cont.

Eng

Business Law

Legal Bases of Business

Mathematics

College Algebra

/Eng
\LA

Trigonometry

/Eng
\LA

Analytic Geometry and

Intro, to Calculus

Ml,3

Same as Ml

Differential Calculus

Ml,4

/Eng
iLA
Same as MS

Integral Calculus

Differential Equations I

Eng

Differential Equations II

M6,7

Higher Algebra

Ml,3,4

MIO

Curve Analysis

Mil

Solid Anal. Geometry

M12

Modern Geometry

M13

Spherical Trigonometry

M14

Hist, of Mathematics

M15

Advanced Calculus

M16

Advanced Calculus

MIS

M17

Series

M5,6

M18

Theory of Equations

M5,6

COURSES OF IhlSTRUCTIOhl

243

Pre-

Class Lai

No.

Course

requisite

Hrs.

Hrs

;. College

Marketing and Advertising

MAI

Marketing Principles

MA2

Marketing Problems

MA3

Sales Management

MA4

Sales Management

MA5

Advertising Principles

MA6

Advertising Problems

MA7

Retail Store Mgt.

MAS

Retail Merchandising

Mechanical Engineering

MEl

Mechanism

Eng

ME15

Industrial Plants

ME23,32

Eng

ME16

Industrial Plants

ME15

Eng

ME20

Applied Mech. (Statics)

Eng

ME21

Applied Mech. (Kinetics

) ME20

Eng

ME22

Strength of Materials

ME20,21,P4

Eng

ME23

Strength of Materials

ME22

Eng

ME24

Advanced Mechanics

ME23

Eng

ME25

Strength of Materials

Eng

ME27

Metallography

IN3

Eng

ME29

Heat Eng. (Power Pl't Eq.)

Eng

ME30

Heat Eng. (Thermo.)

Eng

ME31

Heat Engineering

ME30,29

Eng

ME32

Heat Engineering

ME31

Eng

ME33

Refrigeration

ME32

Eng

ME34

Steam Turbines

ME31

Eng

ME35

Heat Engineering

Eng

ME36

Heat Engineering

ME35

Eng

ME39

Engine Dynamics

ME21

Eng

ME40

Aerodynamics

ME2I,CI12

Eng

ME42

Heating and Air Cond.

ME21,CI12

Eng

ME44

Power Plant Eng.

ME32

Eng

ME51

Machine Design

ME24

Eng

ME52

Machine Design

ME51

Eng

ME61

Mechanical Eng. Lab.

ME29,31

Eng

ME62

Mechanical Eng. Lab.

ME32,61

Eng

ME63

Mechanical Eng. Lab.

ME32,62

Eng

ME69

Testing Materials Lab.

ME22

Eng

ME73

Aircraft Structures

ME23

Eng

ME74

Aircraft Structures

Eng

ME76

Aircraft Eng. Design

ME39

Eng

Physics

Pl-A

Survey of Physical Science

Physics I

/Eng

Ila

P2-A

Survey of Physical Science

Physics I

Same as PI

Physics II

Pl,2

/Eng
1 LA

P3-A

General Physics

244 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Pre-

Class Lab.

No.

Course

Tequisite

Hrs.

College

Physics

— Continued

Physics II

Pl,2

'Eng
LA

P4-A

General Physics

^Eng
LA

. Physics Laboratory

Pl,2

Physics Laboratory

Pl,2

^Eng
,LA

Physics Laboratory

Pl,2

Eng

Physics Laboratory

Pl,2

Eng

Optics

P3,M6

PIO

Optics

P13

Acoustics

P3,M6

P14

Acoustics

P13

P15

Modern Physics

P4,M7

P16

Modern Physics

P15

P17

Electronics

Pl,2,3,4,5,6

P18

Electronics

P17

P65

Thesis

P66

Thesis

PlOl

Theoretical Physics

P102

Theoretical Physics

P103

Quantum Mechanics

P104

Quantum Mechanics

P105

Applied Mathematics

P106

Applied Mathematics

P107

Graduate Thesis

P108

Graduate Thesis

P109

Graduate Thesis

PllO

Graduate Thesis

Public Administration

PA2 Public Administration I

PA4 Political Concepts

PA5 Bus. and Govt.

PA7 Public Administration II

PA8 Public Administration III

Physical Education

PEl Hygiene

PE3 Physical Training

PE4 Physical Training

PE5 Princ. of Phys. Ed.

PE6 Play and Recreation

PE7 Hist, of Phys. Ed.

PE8 Admin, of Phys. Ed.

PE9 Football

PEll Track and Field Events

PEl 2 Basketball and Baseball

All

COURSES OF INSTRUCTIOhl 245

Pre- Class Lab.

No. Course requisite Hrs. Hrs. College

Philosophy

Phi Intro, to Philosophy

Ph2 Problems of Philosophy

Ph3 History of Philosophy

Ph4 History of Philosophy

Ph5 Philosophy of Religion

Ph6 Logic

Psychology

Psl

Intro, to Diff. Psych.

Ps2

General Psychology

Psl-B

Psychology

Ps2-B

Psychology

Ps3

Experimental Psychology

Ps2

Ps4

Differential Psychology

Ps3

Ps5

Educ. Psychology

Ps2

Ps7

Soc. Psych, of Everyday Life

Ps8

Soc. Psych. Theory and
Methods

Ps9

Psych, of Personality

Ps2

PslO

Abnormal Psychology

Ps9

Psl3

Psychological Testing

Ps4

Psl4

Adv. Experimental Lab.

Ps3

Ps61

Seminar

Ps62

Seminar

Ps61

Sociology

f Eng
SI Intro, to Sociology 3 0 -^ BA

vLA

52 Principles of Sociology 3 0 Same as SI

53 Social Problems Sl,2 3 0 LA.BA

54 Social Pathology Sl,2 3 0 LA,BA

55 Criminology SI, 2 3 0 LA

56 Penology S5 3 0 LA

57 Prin. of Social Ethics Sl,2 3 0 LA

58 Probs. in Social Ethics S7 3 0 LA

59 The Family SI, 2 3 0 LA

510 The Family S9 3 0 LA

511 Social Control S3,4,Ph2 3 0 LA

51 2 Social Progress Sll 3 0 LA

513 Population Problems SI, 2 3 0 LA

514 Urban Sociology SI, 2 3 0 LA

51 5 History of Sociological

Thought S3,4,Ph2 3 0 LA

516 Sociology of Religion S3,4 3 0 LA

561 Seminar 3 0 LA

562 Seminar S61 3 0 LA

565 Thesis LA

566 Thesis LA

246 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Pre- Class Lab.

No. Course requisite Hrs. Hrs. College

Spanish

Spl Elementary Spanish

Sp2 Elementary Spanish Spl

Sp3 Intermediate Spanish Sp2

Sp4 Intermediate Spanish Sp3

Sp5 Span. Lit. of the Golden

Age Sp4

Sp6 Span. Lit. of the Golden

Age Sp4

Sp7 Mod. Spanish Literature Sp4

Sp8 Mod. Spanish Literature Sp4

Sp9 Mod. Span. American Lit. Sp4

SplO Mod. Span. American Lit. Sp4

Unclassified

U4 Business Policy 4 0 BA

Ps2-A Orientation 1 0 All

Theses (see pages 136, 172, 230)

LA.BA

DAY COLLEGES 247

Qeneral ^ndex

Page

Absences 51

Accounting — Law Club 37

Activities 32

Activities Assembly Hall 31

Administrative Officers 7,8

Administrative Staff 9

Admission Requirements

College of Liberal Arts 70

College of Business Administration 144

College of Engineering 176

Advanced Standing

College of Liberal Arts 72

College of Business Administration 146

College of Engineering 178

Aims and Methods 63, 64, 141, 175

Alumni Association 59

Application for Admission

College of Liberal Arts 71

College of Business Administration 145

College of Engineering 177

Application Blank 251

Assistant Professors 11

Associate Professors 11

Astronomy Club 35

Athletic Association 33

Athletic Field 31

Attendance 50

Awards and Prizes 55

Banking and Finance Club 35

Beacon Hill Building 23

Biological Laboratory Equipment 24

Books and Supplies 48

Boston — A Great Educational Center 22

Buildings and Facilities 22

Business Administration, College of 139-172

Calendar for College Year, 1944-1945 4

Camera Club 36

Cauldron, College Annual 34

Chapel Preachers 17

Chemical Engineering Laboratory Equipment 29

Chemical Laboratory Deposit 45

Chemistry Laboratories and Equipment 24

Chess Club 36

Civil Engineering Laboratories and Equipment 26

Condition Examinations 48

Convocation Lecturers 16

Convocations 38

Co-operative Plan 40

Correlation of Theory and Practice 42

Earnings 43

Faculty Co-ordinators 40

How It Works 40

Location of Work 43

Placement at Work 40

Positions Available 42

248 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Co-operarive Plan — Continued Page

Records of Co-operative Work 42

Reports 42

Supervision and Guidance 41

Training Schedules 44

Types of Co-operative Work 43

Corporation 6

Counselors 53

Courses of Instruction, List of 233-246

Courses of Instruction, Synopses of

College of Liberal Arts 82-136

Business Administration 152-171

Engineering 190-230

Dean's List 49

Debating Society 36

Degrees

Liberal Arts 75

Business Administration 147

Engineering 179

Deposit, Laboratory 45

Design and Drafting Rooms 30

Discipline 50

Dormitories 52

Dramatic Club 36

East Building 22

Electrical Engineering Laboratory Equipment 28

Engineering, College of 173-231

Engineering Societies, National 35

Entrance Examinations in Boston 72, 146, 178

Entrance Requirements

College of Liberal Arts 70

College of Business Administration 144

College of Engineering 176

Evening Courses, College of Liberal Arts 64

Examinations 48

Executive Council 7

Expenses 47

Faculty 10

Faculty Committees 14

Fees 45-47

Fraternities 39

Freshman Counseling 53

Freshman Orientation Period 53

General Information 45

General Statement 19

Grades 49

Graduate Study 79

Graduation Fee 47

Graduation with Honors 75

Graduation Requirements 75, 147, 179

Gymnasium 31

Honor Societies 34

Housing Regulations 51

Industrial Chemical Laboratory 29

Industrial Engineering Equipment 29

Instructors 12

Inter-Fraternity Council 39

International Relations Club 37

Laboratory Deposits and Fees 45

Law and Accounting Club 37

DAY COLLEGES 249

Page

Lecture Assembly Halls 31

Liberal Arts, College of 61-137

Liberal Arts, Preparation for a Career 65-69

Libraries 30

List of Courses Offered 233-246

Location of University 22

Marks . . '. 49

Mathematics Society 37

Mechanical Engineering Laboratory Equipment 27

Musical Clubs 36

Natatorium 31

National Engineering Societies 35

New Building 23

hloTtheastern News 34

Omega Sigma Society (for women students) 37

Part-Time Work 48

Payments, Tuition 46

Personal Interview 71

Physical Examination 53

Physical Training Equipment 31

Physics Laboratories Equipment 25

Prizes 55

Professional Societies and Clubs 34

Professors 10

Programs of Study 74, 76-78, 148-150, 180-189

Psychology Laboratory 26

Public Speaking Contest 57

Radio Club 38

Refunds 47

Registration 72, 146, 178

Report Cards 49

Requirements for Graduation 75, 147, 179

Richards Hall 23

Rifle Club 38

Scholarships 55

Scholastic Year for Seniors 50

Secretarial Staff 15

Sorority (Sigma Phi Psi) 39

South Building 23

Statistical Summary 58

Student Activities 32

Student Activities Fees 45

Student Council 32

Student Union 33

Supplies 48

Theses 136, 172, 230

Transportation 22

Tuition 45

University Committees 7

University Fee 45

Wartime Policy, Statement of

Yacht Club 38

Yearbook 34

OFFICE HOURS

DEPARTMENT OF ADMISSIONS
9 A.M. to 4 P.M.

daily

Saturday 12.00

Noon

Wednesday Eve-
nings by Appointment

'Northeastern University

360 Huntington Avenue

Boston 15, Mass.

Paste a Small
Photo or
Snapshot

in This Space

APPLICATION FOR ADMISSION

(A non-returnable fee of five dollars must accompany this application.

Make checks, money orders, or drafts payable to

Northeastern University)

To Director of Admissions:

T / Please print \

\ name in full )

hereby respectfully apply for admission to the College of....,.,..,

for the school year beginning. .......j.,..^y^^.y.y,.^., ..,

I expect to major in ...„,.,^y..^....,.....,^„..\\, ......v-.^, ..,.,,.... ,

NOTE : The applicant should fill out the following form
(both sides) with care.

Address

..At'-.tt.'. •■>;.>>)■ y/-i \ ••>.-'■■ ■■■■<••• '■ ^^ ,..m.i;,;.,.i. ,

Date of Birth Age

Place of Birth •...:;,.>,

Race Religion Nationality

Graduate of High School, Year

Location of High School

Name of Principal .:...j..........ii..'.

Other high schools you have attended

Names of Principals

If not a graduate, state the years of attendance and why you left.
Father^s, Mother's, or Guardian^ s Name

Address

Father's work, business or profession

Names and addresses of two other persons to whom we may direct
inquiries concerning you.

(over)

Weight Height...

Have you any physical infirmities? Explain, if any.

Defects of speech

Defects of hearing

Defects of sight

Bodily infirmities

Is your general health good, fair, or poor?

Have you done collegiate work elsewhere?

If so, name and address of college or university ..l.?.\'.V

Name of person who will furnish transcript of your college record.
Do you expect advanced credit for past collegiate work?

List all athletics and other extracurricular high school activities you have
engaged in

Names and addresses of all past employers with brief description of
each job, length of employment, and wages received:

Declaration of Parent or Guardian

This application has been read by me and has my approval.

Signature of Parent or Guardian

Date

Milton ]. Schlagenhauf, Director of Admissions
Northeastern University
360 Huntington Avenue
Boston 15, Mass.

Dear Sir:

Please send me additional information on the following points:

Name

Street and Number

Tovun or City

State

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

(CO-EDUCATIONAL)

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

Offers a broad program of college subjects serving as a foundation for the understanding of
modern culture, social relations and technical achievement. Varied opportunities available
for vocational specialization. Degree: Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Arts.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

Offers curricula in Civil, Mechanical (with Industrial and Aeronautical options). Electrical,
and Chemical Engineering. Classroom study is supplemented by experiment and research
in well-equipped laboratories. Degree: Bachelor of Science in the professional field of
specialization.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

Offers curricula in Accounting, Marketing and Advertising, and Industrial Administration.
Each curriculum represents in itself a broad survey of business technique, differing from the
others chiefly in emphasis. Degree: Bachelor of Science in Business Administration.

SCHOOL OF LAW

Offers day and evening undergraduate programs admitting those who present a minimum
of one-half of the work accepted for a bachelor's degree in an approved college or its full
equivalent, each program leading to the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

Offers curricula through evening classes leading to the degree of Bachelor of Business
Administration with appropriate specification in Accounting, Management, and Engineer-
ing and Business. Preparation for C.P.A. examinations. Intensive programs arranged to
meet special needs.

EVENING COURSES OF THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

Certain courses of the College of Liberal Arts are offered during evening hours in the fields
of Economics, English, History, Government, Psychology and Sociology. A special pro-
gram preparing for admission to the School of Law is also available. The program is equiv-
alent in hours to one-half the requirement for the A.B. or S.B. degree. Special courses also
available. Degree of Associate in Arts conferred.

The Colleges of Liberal Arts, Engineering, and Business Administration offer day programs
and are conducted on the Co-operative Plan. After the freshman year students may alternate
their periods of study with periods of work in the employ of business or industrial concerns.
Under this plan they gain valuable experience and earn a large part of their college ex-
penses. Full-time curricula are available for students who do not desire the Co-operative
Plan.

In addition to the above schools the University has affiliated with it and conducts: the
Lincoln Technical Institute offering, through evening classes, courses of college grade in
various fields of engineering leading to the degree of Associate in Engineering; and the
Lincoln Preparatory School, an accredited evening school preparing for college entrance
and offering other standard high school programs.

For further information regarding any of the above schools, address

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS

School of Law Other Schools

47 Mr. Vernon Street Telephone: KENmore 5800 360 Huntington Avenue

romafMiEfiia oocae^cigw

wm^wm

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY
School of Law

47 MT. VERNON STREET • BOSTON 8, MASSACHUSETTS
Telephone KENmore 5800

STUART M. WRIGHT, Dean

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Forty-seventh Annual Catalogue

OF THE

ScAool a^ ^ac(A

19 4 5

19 4 6

Day and Evening Divisions

CALENDAR

1945

Fall Term

17 September

Monday

Classes begin.

17 September

Monday

First tuition installment due.

5 November

Monday

Second tuition installment due.

22 December

Saturday

Christmas recess begins.

1946

2 January

Wednesday

Classes resumed.

1 6 January

Wednesday

Fall Term ends.

Winter Term

21 January

Monday

Classes begin.

21 January

Monday

First tuition installment due.

11 March

Monday

Second tuition installment due

10 May

Friday

Winter Term ends.

Summer

Term

20 May

Monday

Classes begin.

20 May

Monday

First tuition installment due.

8 July

Monday

Second tuition installment due

6 September

Friday

Summer Term ends.

COURSES TO BE OFFERED
1945-1946

Fail Term

Conflict of Laws
Constitutional Law
Contracts
Equity
Mortgages

Personal Property
Pleading & Practice I
Property III
Sales

Winter Term

Agency

Business Associations

Creditors' Rights

Criminal Law

Damages

Evidence
Property II
Torts
Trusts

Summer Term 1946

Administrative Law
Contracts
Equity
Labor Law
Personal Property

Pleading & Practice I
Pleading & Practice II
Property I
Taxation
Wills

THE NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY CORPORATION

Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman

Frank Lincoln Richardson, Vice-Chairman

Carl Stephens Ell, President oj the University

Henry Nathaniel Andrews, Treasurer

Everett Avery Churchill, Secretary

Joseph Florence Abbott

Charles Francis Adams

Wilman Edward Adams

Roger Amory

Arthur Atwood Ballantine

George Louis Barnes

Thomas Prince Beal

Farwell Gregg Bemis

Samuel Bruce Black

Henry Goddard Bradlee

George Augustus Burnham

Godfrey Lowell Cabot

Paul Codman Cabot

Walter Channing

William Converse Chick

Paul Foster Clark

William H. Collins

Sears B. Condit

Albert Morton Creighton

Edward Dana

Edward Dane

Justin Whitlock Dart

William James Davidson

Bernard W. Doyle

Paul Augustus Draper

David Frank Edwards

William Partridge Ellison

Joseph Buell Ely

Robert Greenough Emerson

John Wells Farley

Allan Forbes

Ernest Bigelow Freeman

Franklin Wile Ganse

Harvey Dow Gibson

Merrill Griswold

George Hansen

Henry Ingraham Harriman

Carroll Sherlock Harvey

Harvey P. Hood

Chandler Hovey

Weston Howland

Howard Munson Hubbard

Maynard Hutchinson

Raymond Winfield James

Arthur Stoddard Johnson

Charles Berkley Johnson

Jacob Joseph Kaplan

Harry Hamilton Kerr

Frank Howard Lahey

Halfdan Lee

Galen David Light

Edward Abbott MacMaster

John Russell Magomber

Albert Edward Marshall

Harold Francis Mason

James Franklin McElwain

Hugh Dean McLellan

Irwin Likely Moore

Fred Lester Morgan

Irving Edwin Moultrop

Clarence Lugian Newton

Samuel Norwich

Olaf Olsen

AuGUSTiN Hamilton Parker, Jr.

George Edwin Pierce

Roger Pierce

Matthew Porosky

Frederick Sanford Pratt

Roger Preston

Sidney Rabinovitz

Stuart Craig Rand

William McNear Rand

James Lorin Richards

Harold Bours Richmond

Charles Forest Rittenhouse

John James Robinson

Robert Billings Rugg

Leverett Saltonstall

Russell Maryland Sanders

Andrew Sebastian Seiler

Frank Palmer Speare

Russell Henry Stafford

Francis Robert Carnegie Steele

Charles Stetson

Earl Place Stevenson

Robert Treat Paine Storer

Frank Horace Stuart

Edward Watson Supple

Ralph Emerson Thompson

James Vincent Toner

Eliot Wadsworth

EusTis Walcott

Edwin Sibley Webster

Sinclair Weeks

COMMITTEES

ADVISORY COMMITTEE OF THE CORPORATION
FOR THE SCHOOL OF LAW

Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman

George Louis Barnes Jacob Joseph Kaplan

John Wells Farley Stuart Craig Rand

THE EXECUTIVE COUNCIL

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman

Everett Avery Churchill Milton John Schlagenhauf

Albert Ellsworth Everett William Crombie White

THE UNIVERSITY CABINET

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman

Everett Avery Churchill Winthrop Eliot Nightingale

Albert Ellsworth Everett Rudolf Oscar Oberg

Roger Stanton Hamilton Edward Snow Parsons

Charles William Ha vice John Butler Pugsley

Wilfred Stanley Lake Milton John Schlagenhauf

James Wallace Lees J. Kenneth Stevenson

Harold Wesley Melvin William Crombie White

Stuart Mead Wright

ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS

Robert Gray Dodge, A.B., A.M., LL.B., LL.D.

Chairman of the Corporation

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., Sc.D.

President of the University

Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D.

Vice-President of the University

Stuart Mead Wright, A.B., LL.B.

Dean of the School of Law

FACULTY

Stuart Mead Wright, A.B., LL.B.

Dean and Professor of Law ^

Edwin Wilson Hadley, A.B., J.D., LL.M.

Professor of Law

Russell Davey Greene, LL.B., LL.M.

Professor of Law

Joseph Gerard Crane, A.B., LL.B.

Professor of Law

Francis Xavier Carmody, B.S., LL.B.

Assistant Professor of Law

Robert Fiske Bradford, A.B., LL.B.

Lecturer in Criminal Practice

Robert Gray Dodge, A.B., A.M., LL.B., LL.D.

Lecturer in Legal Ethics

Donald T. Field, A.B., LL.B.

Lecturer in Conflict of Laws

David Greer, LL.B.

Lecturer in Administrative Law

Reuben Levi Lurie, A.B., LL.B.

Lecturer in Criminal Law

Conrad W. Oberdorfer, J.U.D., LL.B., LL.M.

Lecturer in Constitutional Law

Stuart Craig Rand, A.B., LL.B.

Lecturer in Trial Practice

Harold Benjamin Roitman, A.B., LL.B.

Lecturer in Labor Law

Austin Wakeman Scott, A.B., LL.B., LL.D.

Lecturer in Trusts

Warren Abner Seavey, A.B., LL.B., LL.D.

Lecturer in Agency

Raymond Sanger Wilkins, A.B., LL.B.

Lecturer in Appellate Practice

James Herbert Tibbetts

Librarian

Doris Edna Koch

Registrar and Secretary to the Dean

GENERAL INFORMATION

ORGANIZATION AND PURPOSE

Northeastern University School of Law was estabhshed in 1898. Among
its original incorporators were Judge James R. Dunbar, James Barr Ames,
then Dean of the Harvard Law School, and Samuel Bennett, at that time
Dean of the Boston University School of Law. Later, such men as Ezra
Thayer, Dean of the Harvard Law School, Samuel Elder, and Robert G.
Dodge have been active upon the Corporation of the School and have been
instrumental in shaping its policies and aiding in its development.

The purpose of the School is the preparation of men and women for the
active practice of the law, particularly in Massachusetts and the other New
England states. The faculty is chosen with this purpose in mind. In addi-
tion to the full-time teachers, outstanding leaders in the profession and
noted specialists in particular fields of the law not only give special lec-
tures but also many of the courses. The School in this manner relates the
work of the classroom as closely as possible to the profession. Instruction is
based upon the case method, which combines the study of basic principles
with the analysis and interpretation of decided cases.

ACCREDITATION

Northeastern University School of Law fully meets all requirements as
to legal education of the American Bar Association and is upon the ap-
proved list of that body.

The School has also been approved by the Board of Regents of the State
of New York and is provisionally approved by the Association of American
Law Schools.

LOCATION

Located at 47 Mt. Vernon Street, Boston, the Law School is near the
State House and the Court House, where the Supreme Judicial Court, the
Superior Court of Suffolk County, the Land Court, the Probate Court for
Suffolk County, and the Municipal Court for the City of Boston are
housed. It is within a few minutes' walk of the business center of the city
and from the Park Street subway station. The Law School Building pro-
vides well-equipped classrooms, an extensive Law Library, reading areas,
conference rooms, and administrative and instruction offices.

LIBRARY

The Law School Library contains more than 16,000 volumes and is
steadily growing. It is so arranged as to give the student direct access to the

8 Northeastern University

books in the stacks as well as in the reading room. The library contains
many of the State Reports, the complete National Reporter System, the
Federal Reports, and the Reports of the Supreme Court of the United
States, the English Reports, Dominion Law Reports, English and Ameri-
can Digests, various State Digests and Statutes, and an extensive collection
of encyclopedias, annotations, treatises, legal periodicals, approved text-
books, and all current casebooks.

School of Law

EDUCATIONAL PROGRAMS

DAY AND EVENING DIVISIONS

The Law School is divided into two divisions — the Day Division and
the Evening Division. The same curriculum is offered in each Division, and
the standards of work and requirements for graduation are the same. A
minimum of eighty-four semester hours of classroom instruction is re-
quired for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

The completion of the course of study in the Day Division requires that
students devote substantially all of their working hours to their law studies.
The evening program is designed for those who are regularly employed
during the day and can attend only the evening sessions of the School.

ACCELERATED PROGRAM

For the continuance of the war and thereafter so long as may be deemed
necessary, the School will operate on a program accelerated by the addi-
tion of a summer term. In both the day and evening divisions, because of
the accelerated program, the school year is divided into three equal terms
of sixteen weeks each. Students may enter at the beginning of any term.
For the opening dates see calendar, page 2.

RETURNING VETERANS

Men and women who have served in the armed services of the United
States or of any of the Allied Nations may be admitted to the School of
Law under the plan hereafter outlined:

(a) The Faculty recognizes the difficulties of the returning veteran whose
law school program was interrupted by entrance into the armed
forces in reorienting himself to the study of law. Accordingly, those
veterans who have successfully completed any portion of their law
studies at this School or at any other accredited law school may enter
at any time, even in the middle of a term. Attendance until the be-
ginning of the following term will not count toward degree credit, but
will be solely for the purpose of aiding the student in regaining his
capacity to resume his law school program successfully. In subsequent
terms the student will pursue his studies for degree credit.

[b) Those veterans who have not previously studied law in an accredited
school, but who are qualified for admission, may enter at the begin-
ning of any term.

10 Northeastern University

COMBINED PROGRAMS

Students in the College of Liberal Arts and the College of Business
Administration of Northeastern University are allowed in their senior year
to elect courses in the Law School in lieu of the regular senior programs of
these colleges.

Upon the completion of the semester hour equivalent of the senior year
requirement through courses in the Law School, they become eligible for
the degree of Bachelor of Arts or of Bachelor of Science according to the
curriculum in which they have qualified. Upon the completion of their
law studies, they become eligible for the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

These combined programs shorten the time required to obtain both
degrees and also the time required to qualify for admission to the practice.

PRELEGAL PROGRAM

Students desiring to study law but who have not completed at least
one-half the work required for a Bachelor's degree in an accredited college
should write to or consult the Director of Admissions for Northeastern
University, whose office is located in Richards Hall, 360 Huntington
Avenue.

The College of Liberal Arts of Northeastern University conducts both
day and evening prelegal programs which prepare adequately for ad-
mission to the Law School.

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE

The degree of Bachelor of Laws will be conferred upon those candidates
who are of good moral character and who:

(1) Have pursued in residence the study of law for the required period of
time and have completed the program of study prescribed by the
Faculty.

(2) Have passed examinations in at least eighty-four semester hours of
required courses and have attained a minimum weighted average of
sixty-seven per cent.

In recognition of superior scholarship, the degree will be granted with
special honors, as follows:

Cum Laude. To students who have met all the requirements for the
degree and have attained a weighted grade average of eighty-five per cent
to ninety per cent.

Magna Cum Laude. To students who have met all the requirements
for the degree and have attained a weighted grade average of ninety per
cent or better.

School of Law 1 1

ADMISSION OF STUDENTS

Entering students will be admitted to the Fall Term, beginning on
September 17, 1945; to the Winter Term, beginning on January 21, 1946;
and to^the Summer Term, beginning on May 20, 1946.

I. Requirements for admission

A. Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Laws (LL.B.).

1 . Men and women eighteen years of age or over who have com-
pleted at least one-half of the work required for an acceptable
college degree at an accredited college and attained records
therein which meet the standards set by the Committee on
Administration will be admitted as candidates for this degree.

2. Students in the College of Liberal Arts and the College of
Business Administration of Northeastern University who have
elected the first year of the law course as their senior year may
in this way obtain both the degrees of Bachelor of Arts or
Science and Bachelor of Laws.

3. Students entering with advanced standing —

A student transferring from any law school approved by the
American Bar Association who has maintained a satisfactory
academic record may be admitted to advanced standing on
such terms and conditions as the Committee on Administration
may prescribe. Transcripts showing both college and law school
work must be submitted with the application. Successful com-
pletion in residence of at least one full academic year of study
is required for the degree. An applicant who has been denied
readmission in another law school will not be admitted to this
School.

B. Special Students

A limited number of applicants, who are at least twenty-three
years of age and who cannot qualify under the foregoing re-
quirements for admission as candidates for the degree of
Bachelor of Laws, may, in exceptional cases and at the dis-
cretion of the Faculty, be admitted as special students. Appli-
cants for admission as special students must give evidence of
such general education and experience as will enable them to
carry on and profit by the work of the School.

12 Northeastern University

II. Readmisslon

Former students are readmitted only at the discretion of the Faculty
and must upon their return to the School meet the degree requirements
in force at the time of their re-entry. The Faculty reserves the right to
refuse admission or readmission to any applicant.

III. Application for admission

All applications for admission should be made as early as possible before
the beginning of the term.

A. Each applicant for admission to the School should secure from the
Dean's office an application form, which should be filled out and
returned to that office, together with the application fee of $5.
Checks or money orders should be made payable to Northeastern
University.

B. The completed application form should be accompanied or fol-
lowed by an official transcript from each college attended by the
applicant, which transcript should give a complete record of the
college work done to date.

IV. Registration

Every student is required to register in person and arrange for the pay-
ment of tuition at that time. It is urgently requested that each entering
student register before the opening of the term. The filing of an applica-
tion does not constitute registration.

TUITION AND FEES

Application Fee $ 5.00

Each student is required to pay an application fee when he
first enters the University. It is payable but once and is not
refundable.

Tuition per Term {Day Division) $140.00

The tuition in the Day Division is based on a schedule of four-
teen hours of class work each week for a term of sixteen weeks,
payable in two equal installments.

Tuition per Term {Evening Division) $105.00

The tuition in the Evening Division is based on a schedule of
ten and one-half hours per week for a term of sixteen weeks,
payable in two equal installments.

School of Law 1 3

Tuition per Semester Hour $ 10.00

The tuition charge for students carrying less than, or more
than, a full program is at the rate of $10 each semester hour.
The minimum tuition fee for any student for less than a full
program of study is $25 each term.

Special Examination Fee $ 10.00

Library Fee {each term) $ 2.00

Deferred Payment Fee $ 2.00

The deferred payment fee will be added to all bills which are
not paid when due. Failure to make the required payments
on time, or to arrange for such payments, is considered suffi-
cient cause to bar the student from classes until the matter has
been adjusted with the Dean.

Graduation Fee $ 10.00

This fee is payable thirty days before the student is to be
recommended for the degree.

SCHOLARSHIPS AND PRIZES

A limited number of scholarships for part of the annual tuition have
been established for upper-class students. These scholarships are awarded
under the direction of the Dean to applicants who are deserving and
needy, and who have maintained a satisfactory record in their law studies
for at least one academic year.

Alumni have generously made available the following five tuition
scholarships of $100 each in honor of former distinguished members of the
Faculty of the School:

Arthur A. Ballantine Judge Hugh D. McLellan

Elias Field Oscar Storer Judge John V. Spalding

These scholarships are awarded to first-year students on the basis of
their academic record for the first term and promise of future success.

Daniel J. Dowd Scholarship. This scholarship, in the principal sum of
$1,000.00, is the gift of a friend of the Law School in memory of a worthy
citizen of the State of Vermont. The income from this fund is available to
provide a tuition scholarship for such worthy and needy student as the
Dean of the School of Law shall select, preference being given to (1) resi-
dents of Windsor County, Vermont, (2) residents of the State of Vermont,
and (3) other students.

Phi Epsilon Nu Sorority Prize. The Phi Epsilon Nu Sorority will present
a Law Dictionary to the Junior woman student, in the Day or Evening
Division, who attained the highest scholastic average in the second year
class while carrying a full program of study.

14 Northeastern University

REGULATIONS

GENERAL POLICY

The School reserves the right to cancel any course if registration for it
does not justify continuance.

The School also reserves the right, at any time, to make any changes
which are deemed advisable in the number and content of courses, their
order in the curriculum, and in the rules, regulations and fees of the School.

Attendance at the University is a privilege and not a right. The Com-
mittee on Administration reserves the right to require at any time the
withdrawal of any student whom it may deem unworthy either on account
of his neglect of study, his incapacity for the law or for any grave defect of
conduct or character, and no reason for requiring such withdrawal need
be given.

WITHDRAWALS

In the event a student is obliged to withdraw from the School for causes
deemed adequate by the Committee on Administration, a refund of the
unused tuition may be granted provided the application for withdrawal,
together with the request for refund, and supporting data, are filed within
forty-five days after the student has ceased attendance.

ATTENDANCE

Students are expected to attend with regularity the sessions of all
courses in which they are enrolled. Students who are irregular in class at-
tendance without justifiable cause may be dropped from the class rolls or
be refused permission to take the final examinations in the course. No stu-
dent during his attendance at the Law School may be registered in any
other school or college, whether of Northeastern University or of any other
institution, without the consent of the Dean.

MARKING SYSTEM

A — 90-100 Superior attainment

B — 80-89 Above average attainment

C — 70-79 Average achievement

D — 60-69 Lowest passing grade

F — Failure Failure to be removed as the Faculty shall determine

Inc. Postponed examination

School of Law 1 5

COURSES OF INSTRUCTBON

REQUIRED COURSES

First Year
Agency: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

Rights and liabilities arising out of the relation of principal and agent
and master and servant. Seavey, Cases on Agency.

Contracts: Cr. 6 Semester Hours

Rights and duties arising from promises; requisites for formation of
contracts; performance and discharge of contracts; contracts for benefit
of third persons; assignments. Shepherd's Revision, Costigan's Cases on
Contracts, 4th ed.

Criminal Law: Cr. 4 Semester Hours

A preliminary study of the administration of criminal justice with
special reference to characteristics of particular crimes and the general
principles of liability to punishment. Casebook to be announced.

Personal Property: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

A study of property in chattels, application of the concepts of possession
and title in the law of personal property; finding; bailment; lien; transfer
of chattels by gift; sale and miscellaneous inter vivos transactions; emble-
ments and fixtures. The cases on Personal Property are used to present
the substantive law of that subject and to illustrate various philosophies
of the law. Aigler, Bigelow and Powell, Cases on Property, Vol. 1.

Pleading and Practice I: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

A study of the judicial process. Consideration of the substantive and
adjective characteristics of each of the common-law remedies; the relation
between remedial and substantive law; proceedings in an action at law;
the different modes in which remedies developed at law and in equity;
proceedings in a suit in equity; distinctions between actions and suits.
Magill and Chadbourn, Cases on Civil Procedure, 3d ed.

Torts: Cr. 6 Semester Hours

Liability in damages for injuries to person and property inflicted in-
tentionally, negligently or innocently; justification and excuse; contribu-
tory negligence; proximate cause. Liability for false representations, def-
amation, inducing breach of contract, interference with business relations,
unfair competition, strikes, etc. The measure of damages in tort cases.
Thurston & Seavey, Cases on Torts.

16 Northeastern University

Upper Classes
Administrative Lav/: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

Issues involved in transferring pov^er to the administrative agency.
Right to notice and hearing before the administrative body acts. Ade-
quacy of notice. What constitutes a fair hearing; representation by coun-
sel; testimony under oath; rules of evidence; opportunity to cross-examine
and rebut; unbiased tribunal; necessity of findings. Methods of obtaining
judicial review of administrative action. Scope of judicial control over
administrative action. Gellhorn, Administrative Law Cases and Com-
ments.

Bills and Notes: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

The law of bills of exchange, promissory notes and checks with special
reference to the Negotiable Instruments Law. Campbell, Cases on Bills
and Notes.

Business Associations: Cr. 5 Semester Hours

Adaptability of conventional forms of organization to the purposes of
the business enterprise. Organization and structure of joint ventures,
partnerships, joint stock associations, business trusts, and corporations
with relation to allocation of control and risk, and limitation of liability.
Duties and rights in property of enterprisers, with remedies for protection
and enforcement. Dissolution of the solvent unit. Ballantine and Lattin,
Cases on Private Corporations.

Conflict of Laws: Cr. 4 Semester Hours

Nature of jurisdiction; executive, legislative, and judicial jurisdiction;
problems of domicil and situs for purposes of jurisdiction. Recognition and
enforcement of rights created in other jurisdictions. Cheatham, Dowling,
Goodrich and Griswold, Cases on Conflict of Laws.

Constitutional Law: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

A general study of the judicial process; scope of, and limitations upon,
governmental action — due process, equal protection, police power, taxa-
tion, eminent domain; the federal system — scope of federal and state
powers, jurisdiction to tax, intrastate and interstate commerce. Dowling,
Cases on Constitutional Law, 2d ed.

Creditors* Rights: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

Enforcement of judgments; fraudulent conveyances; assignments for
the benefit of creditors; receivership; bankruptcy. Hanna and McLaugh-
lin, Cases on Creditors' Rights, 3d ed.

School of Law 17

Damages: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

Rules and standards applicable to the law of damages; interest, expenses
of litigation, certainty, avoidable consequences. Exemplary damages.
Mitigation of damages. Liquidated damages. Damages in tort and con-
tract actions. Procedural aspects of the assessment of damages. Crane,
Cases on Damages, 2d ed.

Equity: Cr. 5 Semester Hours

Origin and history of the jurisdiction of the Court of Chancery; nature,
enforcement and effect of equitable decrees; a brief study of specific en-
forcement of contract, injunctions against tort and crime, and other forms
of equitable relief. McClintock, Cases on Equity.

Evidence: Cr. 5 Semester Hours

The rules of evidence developed in the courts of common law and under
the statutes, arranged under the topics — judicial notice, examination of
witnesses, privilege and competency, illegally obtained evidence, remote
and prejudicial evidence, opinion testimony, hearsay rule and its excep-
tions, best evidence rule, parol evidence rule, burden of proof and pre-
sumptions, judge and jury. Morgan and Maguire, Cases on Evidence,
2ded.

Insurance: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

Nature and form of the insurance contract and its interpretion and
application with respect to various kinds of insurance. Vance, Cases on
Insurance, 2d ed.

International Law: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

Sources and sanctions of international law; recognition; intervention,
jurisdiction, nationality, protection of citizens abroad, diplomatic and
consular practice, the interpretation of treaties; enemy property and en-
emy nationals in the territory of the other belligerent; the effect of war on
litigants, agencies, commercial relations and contracts involving parties
who have become enemies; enemy business domicile and enemy status of
corporations; the effect of action taken by the occupier of occupied terri-
tory and that of action taken by governments in exile in the same territory;
the requisition of commodities and ships by governments; private property
— the nationality of private property captured or destroyed at sea and the
insurance adjustments involved; neutrality, its obligations and rights,
prize courts, and the adjudication of the various interests in the subject
matter of the prize. Scott's Cases on International Law.

18 Northeastern University

Labor Law: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

A study of problems relating to labor organizations and collective bar-
gaining, including legality of labor tactics at common law and under the
antitrust laws; remedies of employers in labor disputes under Federal and
State anti-injunction statutes; enforcement of collective contracts; collec-
tive bargaining, mediation, and arbitration under the National Labor
Relations Act, Railway Labor Act, and State Statutes. Casebook to be
announced.

Landlord and Tenant: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

This course considers the rights and duties of landlord and tenant as an
incident of the relationship form, and also as regulated by the terms of an
expressed lease. The legal consequences of various covenants found in
leases of farm, business, and residential property will be included in the
study. Attention will be given to the creation of the tenancy, legal aspects
of its operation, and methods of termination and enforcement. Jacob's
Cases on Landlord and Tenant, 2d ed.

Legislation: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

History and place of various types of legislation in the development of
law; a study of the matters contained in legislative law making, such as
the nature and extent of legislative power, formulation of legislative policy,
legislative organization and procedure, sources and forms of written law,
mechanics of enactment; relation of the legislative process to the making
of law; means of making laws effective; various types of legislation and
the elements of statutory interpretation.

Mortgages: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

Form, substance, and elements of the mortgage; position of mortgagee
and mortgagor; transfer of the mortgaged interest; priority and marshal-
ling. Campbell, Cases on Mortgages, 2d ed.

Pleading and Practice II: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

Courts; jurisdiction; venue; process; service; return; entry of actions;
pleadings; motions; interrogatories; trial; verdict; judgment; appellate
practice.

Property I: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

Historical introduction to real property with a detailed consideration of
the modern law of possessory estates in land, including the fee simple, the
fee tail, the life estate, the estate for years, concurrent estates, the history
and significance of the Statute of Uses, and the incidents of possessory

School of Law 19

ownership relative to water, lateral and subjacent support, and air.
Aigier, Bigelow and Powell, Cases on Property, Vols. I and II.

Property II: Cr. 4 Semester Hours

The running of covenants, easements and profits, licenses; the Acquisi-
tion of Title, adverse possession and prescription; problems of conveyanc-
ing; modes of conveyance; execution of deeds, the subject matter, creation
of easements by implication, covenants for title, estoppel by deed, and
priorities. Aigier, Bigelow and Powell, Vol. II, Cases on Property.

Property III: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

Classification of future interests; construction of limitations; powers,
rule against perpetuities; illegal conditions and restraints. Simes, Cases on
Future Interests.

Sales: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

I Transfer of interests in personal property by agreement; rights and
remedies of the seller, buyer, and third persons; Statute of Frauds. Void
Cases on Sales.

Taxation: Cr. 2 Semester Hours

Financing government through property, estate, inheritance, and gift
taxes. Something of the procedure of state property tax collection, tax-
payers' remedies, and detailed statutory problems, as well as jurisdiction,
purpose, and subject of taxation. Treasury Department, Regulations 79
(Gift Tax); Regulations 80 (Estate Tax). Magill and Maguire, Cases on
Taxation (2d ed.), and supplementary material.

Trusts: Cr. 4 Semester Hours

The creation, administration and termination of express trusts; chari-
table trusts; resulting and constructive trusts. Scott, Cases on Trusts,
3ded.

Wills: Cr. 3 Semester Hours

The rationale of succession; descent and distribution; the making and
revoking of wills; some problems of construction, including the use of
extrinsic evidence in aid of construction; grant of probate and administra-
tion, and the administration and final settlement of estates. Costigan,
Cases on Wills and Administration, 3d ed.

Northeastern University

DEGREES AWARDED — JUNE, 1945

BACHELOR OF LAWS

Elton T. Barrett Charles Evans Taylor

Kathleen Therese Ryan Vahen Philip Torigian

STUDENT

AuDETTE, Achilles
Beeson, Eunice Wadhams
Belmont, Marie A.
Berkowitz, Hyman Samuel
Bloch, Arnold Harold
BowDOiN, Everett Seavey
Boyd, Robert Burns
Carey, Marie Priscilla
Case, Edward Earl
Charest, Peter Paul
Christensen, Orland M.
CoNGDON, Newton Winfield
CoRBETT, Grafton Joseph, Jr.
CuciNOTTA, John Victor
Dana, Lester Harold
Deery, James Francis
Donna, John Joseph
DowELL, Marion Richard
Farmer, E. Capen
Fay, Martin Francis
French, Palmer Donaldson
Frier, George Wilson
Gilbert, Alan Dean
Gleason, James A.
Graham, John Joseph
GuNN, Townsend MacNicol
Hanna, Ruth Jane
Harrigan, Edward Dimond
HiCKEY, John Christy
HoFF, Maud Sanderson
HuRLBUT, Ronald
Hurley, Warren Arthur
Ianneciello, Anthony Paul
Jacks', Stanley Martin
Kelley, Elliot G.

BODY, 1944-1945

Kelley, George E.
Kennedy, Jacqueline Agnes
koorkanian, elizabeth
Lane, Arnold Sterling
Leonard, Margery C.
Liddy, Carl

McLaughlin, Edward Francis, Jr.
McMackin, John Francis Xavier
McSharry, Thomas Francis
Manning, Lee

Marshall, Arthur Murray
Moody, Leroy Stephen
Morse, Charles William
Noble, Stanley D.
Nolan, John Simon
O'Connor, John Paul
O'Neil, Pauline Anne
O'RouRKE, Leslie E. Linus
Parsons, Ruth Isabel
Paterson, Stanley Charles
Pearlman, Shelley A.
Pierce, John Patrick
Price, George William
Reed, James Allan
Reid, Robert Fuller
Richmond, Milton
Schwartz, Maurice
Schweitzer, Howard
Smolker, Irving Melvin
Swanson, Arthur Wilson
TooHEY, John Joseph
Tritle, Edward Milton
VAN der Walde, Ludwig
Whitmore, William Davie, 3rd
Wilkinson, S. Frances

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY
School of Law

47 MT. VERNON STREET, BOSTON 8, MASSACHUSETTS

Application for Admission

Date. . .• 19.

Name {Print in full)

Address T Telephone

Date of Birth Place of Birth

Citizen of

Colleges or Universities attended

Length of attendance (specify years by date)

Where situated If a graduate, what degree

Have you ever made application to any other Law School?

Have you ever been in attendance, dropped, suspended or expelled from any college or

Law School?

If the answer is Yes, attach a full statement of facts.

If you have been a student in any other school of the Northeastern University system give

name of school and years in which you were in attendance.

Name and address of employer

Telephone

Have you ever been complained of, indicted for or convicted of any violation of the law?
If so, attach a full statement of facts.

All statements made by me in this application are true and complete to the best of my
knowledge and belief.

Signed

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
A fee of five dollars must accompany this application. Make checks, money orders or drafts payable
to Northeastern University. (This fee is not refundable.)

Attach a transcript of your college record. (If transcript will not be issued to you, arrange to
have it sent to this School direct.)

Attach to this application at least two letters addressed to the Dean by persons not members ol
applicant's family (preferably his employer and the Dean or some teacher of his school or college)
testifying to applicant's intelligence, industry and good character.

If you have studied law at another school, whether or not you claim credit, also attach hereto
an official certificate of work done there, showing subjects, hours and grades.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Coeducational

College of Liberal Arts

Offers a broad program of college subjects serving as a foundation for the under-
standing of modern culture, social relations, and technical achievement. Varied
opportunities available for vocational specialization. Degree: Bachelor of Science or
Bachelor of Arts.

College of Engineering

Offers curricula in Civil, Mechanical (with Industrial and Aeronautical options),
Electrical and Chemical Engineering. Classroom study is supplemented by experi-
ment and research in well-equipped laboratories. Degree: Bachelor of Science in the
professional field of specialization.

College of Business Administration

Offers curricula in Accounting, Marketing and Advertising and Industrial Adminis-
tration. Each curriculum represents in itself a broad survey of business technique,
differing from the others chiefly in emphasis. Degree: Bachelor of Science in Business
Administration.

School of Law

Offers day and evening undergraduate programs admitting those who present a
minimum of one-half of the work accepted for a bachelor's degree in an approved
college or its full equivalent, each program leading to the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

School of Business

Offers curricula through evening classes leading to the degree of Bachelor of Business
Administration with appropriate specification in Accounting, Management and
Engineering and Business. Preparation for C.P.A. examinations. Intensive programs
arranged to meet special needs.

Evening Courses of the College of Liberal Arts

Certain courses of the College of Liberal Arts are offered during evening hours in
the fields of Economics, English, History, Government, Psychology and Sociology.
A special program preparing for admission to the School of Law is also available. The
program is equivalent in hours to one-half the requirement for the A.B. or S.B. degree.
Special courses also available. Degree of Associate in Arts conferred.

The Colleges of Liberal Arts, Engineering, and Business Administration offer day
programs and are conducted on the cooperative plan. After the freshman year students
may alternate their periods of study with periods of work in the employ of business or
industrial concerns. Under this plan they gain valuable experience and earn a large
part of their college expenses. Full time curricula are available for students who do not
desire the cooperative plan.

In addition to the above schools the University has affiliated with it and conducts:
the Lincoln Technical Institute, offering, through evening classes, courses of college
grade in various fields of engineering leading to the degree of Associate in Engineer-
ing; and the Lincoln Preparatory School, an accredited evening school preparing
for college entrance and offering other standard high school programs.

For further information regarding any of the above schools, address

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY
BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS

School of Law Other Schools

47 Mt. Vernon Street Telephone KENmore 5800 360 Huntington Avenue

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

BOSTON - MASSACHUSETTS

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

1 945-1 946

EVENING SESSIONS

THIRTY-EIGHTH YEAR

Office Hours

June 11, 1945 — August 10, 1945

Monday and Tuesday 8:45 a.m.-9;00 p.m.

Wednesday — Friday 8:45 a.m.-5:00 p.m.

August 12, 1945— June 8, 1946

Monday — Friday 8:45 a.m.-9:00 p.m.

Saturdays, 8:45 a.m.- 12:00 Noon through August 25.

8:45 A.M.-4:00 P.M. Month of September.

8:45 A.M.-l :00 P.M. October 6, 1945 —June 8, 1946.

Gifts and Bequests

Northeastern University will welcome gifts and bequests for the
following purposes:

(a) For its building program.

(b) For general endowment.

It is suggested that, when possible, those contemplating gifts or
bequests confer with the President of the University regarding
the University's needs before legal papers are drawn.

Gifts and bequests should be made only in the University's
legal name, which is "Northeastern University."

Address Communications to

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY
SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

360 HUNTINGTON AVENUE. BOSTON 15, MASS.
telephone: kenmoee 5800

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

EVENING DIVISION

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

38th Year
1945-1946

The University is located at
the entrance to the Huntington
Avenue subway within nine
minutes of Park Street and
. easily accessible from all points.

A DISTINCTIVE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

promding opportunities for men and women to receive advanced training

in Business during convenient Evening Hours

School of Business

Qalendai

September

4-7

September

10-14

September

17-21

October

November

December

1945

Students may register for the school year 1945-1946 any time after July 1.

Registration must be completed before attending classes.
Examinations for Removal of Conditions and Advanced Standing in

Boston and Springfield.
Upper classes begin.* English 7, 8 Reports due.
Freshmen classes begin.*
Legal holiday (no classes).

Thanksgiving Day — Legal Holiday (no classes).
Last class session before Christmas recess.

January

7-25

February

March

April

May

6-24

1946

First class session after Christmas recess.

Second semester classes begin.

Legal holiday (no classes).

Last date for the submission of theses.

Legal holiday (no classes).

Last date for filing application for degrees and for the payment of the

graduation fee.
Final examination period.
Commencement Exercises (date to be announced).

*Srudents must register before attending classes. See page 36 for late registration.

Class sessions which fall on holidays are made up at the end of the course or as announced.

Table of Contents

Northeastern University, General Statement

Administrative Organization ....

Purpose and Program .....

Location .......

School of Business

Calendar of Evening Sessions .
The Background of an Institution .

PURPOSE, POLICY, METHODS OF INSTRUCTION
VOCATIONAL GUIDANCE

SUCCESS OF ALUMNI ....
PLACEMENT SERVICE ....

Administrative Organization
Staff of Instruction

Programs of Instruction ....

ACCOUNTING .....

MANAGEMENT .....

ENGINEERING AND BUSINESS

LABOR RELATIONS INSTITUTE

BUREAU OF BUSINESS AND INDUSTRIAL SERVICE

SPECIAL PROGRAMS AND SINGLE COURSES

Description of Courses .

ACCOUNTING .

BUSINESS READINGS .

DISTRIBUTION .

ENGLISH ....

ECONOMICS

LAW ....

MANAGEMENT .

THESIS ....

OCCUPATIONAL EXPERIENCE

Administrative Policies .

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS .
REGISTRATION .
ATTENDANCE .
EXAMINATIONS
MARKS AND CREDITS .
SCHOLARSHIPS AND AWARDS

General Information

CLASSROOMS, TEXTBOOKS, RECREATION
STUDENT COUNCIL .

Tuition and Other Fees .
Withdrawals and Refunds

Page
12
5-6
12
14

15
15
17
15
17

8-11

18
19-20
21-23
24
25
26-27
• 27

28-29

30-31

31-32

32-34

35
35
36
37
37
38
39-40

41
41
41

42-43

Northeastern University

cAdministrative Organization

The Northeastern University Corporation

Robert Gray Dodge

Chairman

Frank Lincoln Richardson

Vice-chairman

Carl Stephens Ell

President of the University

Henry Nathaniel Andrews

Treasurer

Everett Avery Churchill

Secretary

Joseph Florence Abbott

Charles Francis Adams

Wilman Edward Adams

Roger Amory

Arthur Atwood Ballantine

George Louis Barnes

Thomas Prince Beal

Farwell Gregg Bemis

Samuel Bruce Black

Henry Goddard Bradlee

George Augustus Burnham

Godfrey Lowell Cabot

Paul Codman Cabot

Walter Channing

William Converse Chick

Paul Foster Clark

William H. Collins

Sears B. Condit

Albert Morton Creighton

Edward Dana

Edward Dane

Justin Whitlock Dart

William James Davidson

Bernard W. Doyle

Paul Augustus Draper

David Frank Edwards

William Partridge Ellison

Joseph Buell Ely

Robert Greenough Emerson

John Wells Farley

Allan Forbes

Ernest Bigelow Freeman

Franklin Wile Ganse

Harvey Dow Gibson

Merrill Griswold

George Hansen

Henry Ingraham Harriman

Carroll Sherlock Harvey

Harvey P. Hood

Chandler Hovey

Weston Howland

Howard Munson Hubbard

Maynard Hutchinson

Raymond Winfield James

Arthur Stoddard Johnson

Charles Berkley Johnson

Jacob Joseph Kaplan

Harry Hamilton Kerr

Frank Howard Lahey

Halfdan Lee

Galen David Light

Edward Abbott MacMaster

John Russell Macomber

Albert Edward Marshall

Harold Francis Mason

James Franklin McElwain

Hugh Dean McLellan

Irwin Likely Moore

Fred Lester Morgan

Irving Edwin Moultrop

Clarence Lucian Newton

Samuel Norwich

Olaf Olsen

AuGusTiN Hamilton Parker, Jr.

George Edwin Pierce

Roger Pierce

Matthew Porosky

Frederick Sanford Pratt

Roger Preston

Sidney Rabinovitz

Stuart Craig Rand

William McNear Rand

James Lorin Richards

Harold Bours Richmond

Charles Forest Rittenhouse

John James Robinson

Robert Billings Rugg

Leverett Saltonstall

Russell Maryland Sanders

Andrew Sebastian Seiler

Frank Palmer Speare

Russell Henry Stafford

Francis Robert Carnegie Steele

Charles Stetson

Earl Place Stevenson

Robert Treat Paine Storer

Frank Horace Stuart

Edward Watson Supple

Ralph Emerson Thompson

James Vincent Toner

Eliot Wadsworth

EusTis Walcott

Edwin Sibley Webster

Sinclair Weeks

Northeastern University

Qeneral University Qommittees

Executive Council

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman

Everett Avery Churchill
Albert Ellsworth Everett

Milton John Schlagenhauf
William Crombie White

University Cabinet

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman

Everett Avery Churchill

Albert Ellsworth Everett

Roger Stanton Hamilton

Charles William Havice

Wilfred Stanley Lake

James Wallace Lees

Harold Wesley Melvin

Winthrop Eliot Nightingale

Rudolf Oscar Oberg

Edward Snow Parsons

John Butler Pugsley

Milton John Schlagenhauf

J. Kenneth Stevenson

William Crombie White

Stuart Mead Wright

Albert Ellsworth Everett
Roger Stanton Hamilton

Library Committee

Everett Avery Churchill, Chairman

William Crombie White

Wilfred Stanley Lake
Myra White

School of Business

cS\dministrativey Organization^

General Officers of Administration

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., Sc.D., President of the University

Frank Palmer Speare, M.H., LL.D., President Emeritus of the University

Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D., Vice-President of the University

Albert Ellsworth Everett, S.B., M.B.A., Dean of the School of Business

Local Officers of Adtainistration

BOSTON

Albert Ellsworth Everett, S.B., M.B.A., Dean

J. Kenneth Stevenson, B.C.S., Assistant to the Vice-President

Milton John Schlagenhauf, A.B., B.D., M.A., Director of Admissions

Rudolf Oscar Oberg, S.B., Ed.M., Director of Alumni Relations

Daisy Milne Everett, Bursar

Myra White, Librarian

Mary B. Poor, Manager of the Bookstore

SPRINGFIELD DIVISION

John Doane Churchill, A.B., A.M., Director

Earl Henry Paine, B.C.S., Treasurer

Guy Dolphus Miller, A.B., Ed.M., C.P.A., Associate Dean

Office Staff

Mabel Ellen Bean, Bookkeeper

Ruth C. Bodemer, B.S., Assistant Librarian

Alice Riama Crawford, A.B., Assistant Librarian

Alice Marie Frazer, Stenographer

Eleanor Florence Gale, Cashier, Central Offices

Elizabeth Harriett Howard, Statistical Clerk, Central Offices

Dorothy Milne Murray, Secretary to the Dean

Ruth Everett Newell, Purchasing Clerk, Central Offices

Elin Victoria Peterson, Secretary to the Vice-President

Caroline Frances Pettingell, Assistant Bursar

Marjorie Graffte Prout, A.B., Secretary to the President

Jean Simonds, Assistant Librarian

Priscilla Shepard, Secretary to the President

Helen Margaret Stoddard, Recorder

Beatrice Emma Tourtillott, Bookkeeper, Central Offices

Hazel M. Young, Bookkeeper, Central Offices

School of Business

*Stciff of ^nstructioT)-^

Boston

Frederick Morse Bassett, B.C.S., Northeastern University; C.P.A.
Constructive Accounting
Accountant, Stewart, Watts and Bollong

Elliot Sheffeld Boardman, Bowdoin College; M.B.A., Harvard University
Business Administration Seminar, Business Planning and Research
Manager, Industrial Statistics Division, Federal Reserve Bank of Boston

Charles Albert Cederberg, Boston University
Introductory Accounting, Intermediate Accounting
Instructor in Bookkeeping, Boston Clerical School

Alfred D'Alessandro, B.C.S., LL.B., Northeastern University; M.B.A., Boston University;
Harvard University; C.P.A.
C.P.A. Problems
Professor of Accounting, Northeastern University

Raymond Frank Dauer, A.B., Indiana University
Industrial Management Problems and Policies
Production Manager, General Electric Company

John Enneguess, B.C.S., B.B.A., Northeastern University; Harvard University
Accounting Problems
Chairman, Department of Accounting, Worcester Junior College; Income Tax Specialist,

Harry W. Wallis

Leo Thomas Foster, A.B., A.M., Holy Cross College; Harvard University; Boston University
Income Tax Procedure
Head of Tax Department, Charles F. Rittenhouse and Company

Howard Eaton Gorton, B.S., Hobart College; M.B.A., Harvard University
Marketing
Merchandise Manager, Dennison Manufacturing Company

Howard Francis Greene, Northwestern University; C.P.A.
Advanced Accounting Problems, Auditing
Accountant, John P. Darmody and Company

J. Keene Horner, B.A., University of Oklahoma; M.B.A., Harvard University

Public Speaking; Business Reports and Conferences; Financial Organization Counsellor, Business

Readings and Theses
Director, Division of Finance, Babson Institute

Kenneth Renner Johnson, B.S., Iowa State College; M.B.A., Harvard University
Principles of Production
Head, Production Control Department, Raytheon Production Corporation

Roger Johnson, B.S., Bowdoin College; M.B.A., Harvard University
Business Statistics and Forecasting, Government Controls in Business
Regional Business Consultant, U. S. Department of Commerce

Harry Olins, A.B., LL.B., Harvard University
Legal Aspects of Business, Trade Regulation
Attorney at Law

Andrew Petersen, B.B.A., M.B.A., Boston University; C.P.A.
Accounting Aids to Management
Charles F. Rittenhouse and Company

•The Faculty for the year 1945-46 is published during the summer.

STAFF OF INSTRUCTION

Wyman S. Randall, B.B.A., Boston University
Purchasing
Purchasing Agent, Rust Craft Publishers, Inc.

Frederick L. Robinson, B.S., University of New Hampshire
Principles of Selling, Sales Management
Staff Assistant, Merchandise Development Division, Dennison Manufacturing Company

Irwin Spear, Ph.B., University of Vermont
Principles of Advertising, Retail Store Advertising
Advertising Service

Benjamin F. Stacey, A.B., Dartmouth College; M.C.S., The Amos Tuck School
Business Economics
Recruiting Representative, U. S. Civil Service Commission

Harry Wilbur Thompson
Credits and Collections
Credit Manager, General Sea Foods Corporation

Lawton Wolf, B.B.A., Rider College
Principles of Production
Production Manager, Holtzer-Cabot Electric Company

Springfield Division

Ingham Chamberlain Baker, A.B., Dartmouth College; The Amos Tuck School
Marketing
Director and Assistant Treasurer, G. &. C. Merriam Company

Ernest Adolph Berg, B.C.S., LL.B., Northeastern University; C.P.A.
Advanced Accounting Problems
Partner, Hitchcock &. Co., Accountants; Attorney at Law

Reginald Nelson Blomfield, A.B., Williams College
Advanced Algebra, Trigonom.etry
Personnel Department, Massachusetts Mutual Life Insurance Company

David Holbrook Brown, A.B., Middlebury College; LL.B., Boston University; A.M.,
Trinity College
Business Economics; Financial Organization; Economic Development of the U. S.
Instructor, Classical High School

Clarence Irving Chatto, A.B., Bates College; A.M., Harvard University
Advanced English, Public Speaking
Curriculum Specialist, Springfield Public Schools

Carl Odlin Chauncey, LL.B., Northeastern University
Legal Aspects of Business
Member of Legal Staff, Farm Credit Administration of Springfield; Attorney at Law

Clifford Scholes Cody, B.S., Iowa State College
Heat Engineering
Member of Engineering Staff, Westinghouse Electric and Manufacturing Company

Timothy David Crimmins, B.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute
Mechanics
Engineer, Palmer Plant, Wickwire Spencer Corporation

Alexander Duncan Davis, B.T.E., Lowell Textile Institute
Engineering Drawing
Instructor, Technical High School

Leonard Colerick Flowers, B.S., M.S., Carnegie Institute of Technology
Physics
Member of Engineering Staff, Westinghouse Electric and Manufacturing Company

10 STAFF OF INSTRUCTION

Nelson Hayward Foley, Boston University
Industrial Management Problems and Policies
Member of Staff, Scovell, Wellington and Company

MoTT Abram Oarlock, B.S., Dartmouth College; M.B.A., Harvard University
Business and Industrial Management
Security Analyst, Massachusetts Mutual Life Insurance Company

Edward Phelps Grace, B.C.S., Northeastern University; C.P.A.
Accounting Aids to Management, Accounting Problems
Assistant General Manager, Springfield Merchants, Inc.

Clarence Mortimer Hall, B.S., M.S., Worcester Polytechnic Institute
Electricity
Instructor, Classical High School

William Otto Henschke, B.S., Cooper Union Institute of Technology
Advanced Engineering Drawing
Member of Engineering Staff, American Bosch Corporation

Frank Yaeger Hess, S.B., Harvard College
Cfiemistr^i
Instructor, Classical High School

George Wright Howe, A.B., M.B.A., Harvard University
Business Administration Seminar, Business Planning and Research
Treasurer, Century Manufacturing Co.

Fred Wooding Hutchinson, B.S., Wesleyan University; Boston University
Analytic Geometry, Calculus
Instructor, Technical High School

Cyrus Walter Jones, S.B., Harvard College
Business English
Instructor, Technical High School

Gustav Henry Koch, M.E., Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute
Strength of Materials
Engineering Staff, Westinghouse Electric and Manufacturing Company

Guy Dolphus Miller, A.B., Ohio University; University of Wisconsin School of Law;
Harvard Graduate School of Business Administration; Ed.M., Harvard University;
C.P.A.
Business Reports and Conferences; Counsellor to Students including Theses and Business Readings
Instructor, Technical High School

John Haynes Miller, A.B., Washington and Jefferson College
Business Statistics and Forecasting
Vice-President and Actuary, Monarch Life Insurance Company

Frederick Chapin Ober, A.B., Harvard University
Credits and Collections
Assistant Treasurer, Springfield Five Cent Savings Bank

Haldimand Sumner Putnam, Jr., B.S., Syracuse University
Intermediate Accounting
Accountant, Scovell, Wellington and Company

Horace Jacobs Rice, B.S., Wesleyan University; LL.B., Harvard University
Government Controls in Business
Attorney at Law

James Thoburn Smith, B.C.S., Northeastern University
Income Tax Procedure
Assistant Trust Officer, Union Trust Company of Springfield

STAFF OF INSTRUCTION 11

Leland William Smith, A.B., Harvard College; A.M., Columbia University
Advanced Algebra, Trigonometry
Instructor, Classical High School and Springfield Junior College

Lloyd Hagen Stanton, Northeastern University; Bentley School of Accounting and Finance
Cost Accounting
Assistant Treasurer, Van Norman Company

Elo Carl Tanner, B.M.E., University of Minnesota; University of Pittsburgh
Design

Refrigeration Development and Design Engineer, Westinghouse Electric and Manufacturing
Company

Gilbert Creighton Walker, A.B., Ed.M., Harvard University; Northeastern University
Introductory Accounting
Instructor, High School of Commerce

Ernest Wiesle, Fh.B., A.M., B.D., Ph.D., University of Chicago
Psychology for Business and Industry
Professor, Springfield College

Eliot Leland Wight, B.A., Yale College; University of Colorado, Graduate School
Advertising Principles; Advertising Campaigns; Principles of Selling; Sales Management
Advertising Manager, United States Envelope Company

Paul Almy Wilks, A.B., Harvard College
Business English

Chief Accountant, Strathmore Paper Company, on leave of absence for military service
as Major, United States Ordnance Department, assigned to Hartford Ordnance District

Northeastern University

Qeneral Statement^

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY is incorporated as a philanthropic
institution under the General Laws of Massachusetts. The State
Legislature, by special enactment, has given the University general
degree granting powers.

The Corporation of Northeastern University consists of men who occupy
responsible positions in business and the professions. This Corporation
elects from its membership a Board of Trustees in whom the control of the
institution is vested. The Board of Trustees has four standing committees:
(a) an Executive Committee which serves as an Ad Interim Committee be-
tween the regular meetings of the Board of Trustees and has general super-
vision of the financial and educational policies of the University; (b) a
Committee on Buildings which has general supervision over the building
needs of the University; (c) a Committee on Funds and Investments which
has the responsibility o{ administering the funds of the University; (d) a De-
velopment Committee which is concerned with furthering the development
plans of the University.

Founded in 1898, Northeastern University, from the outset, had as its
dominant purpose the discovery of human and social needs and the meeting
of these needs in distinctive and highly serviceable ways. While subscribing
to the most progressive educational thought and practice, the University has
not duplicated the programs of other institutions but has sought "to bring
education more directly into the service of human needs."

With respect to program. Northeastern has limited itself:

— To offering, in its several schools, basic curricula from which non-

essentials have been eliminated;

— To effective teaching;

— To advising and guiding students;

— To giving students the chance to build well-rounded personalities

through a balanced program of extracurricular activities.

The Northeastern Plan of Education is especially designed for the student
who must earn while he learns. In the main, it consists of two definite types
of education:

— Co-operative Education by Day,

— Adult Education by Night.

The plan has been developed in such a way that experience in jobs with pay
is utilized to help students of limited financial resources secure an education
and at the same time gain the maximum educational benefit from their
practical experience. So far as the New England States are concerned.
Northeastern University is the only institution whose day colleges, other
than the School of Law, are conducted under the Co-operative Plan.

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY 13

The several schools and programs of the University are conducted either
under the name "Northeastern University" or by its affiliated schools — the
Lincoln Schools, and The Huntington Day School for Boys. The following
is a brief outline of the principal types of educational opportunities offered.

In the field of Co-operative Education there are three day colleges — the
College of Liberal Arts, the College of Engineering, and the College of Busi-
ness Administration. The College of Liberal Arts offers majors in the usual
fields of the arts and the sciences leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts
and Bachelor of Science. The College of Engineering, one of the largest
engineering colleges in the United States, has curricula in Civil, Mechanical
(with Industrial and Aeronautical options). Electrical, and Chemical Engi-
neering. The College of Business Administration has curricula in Accounting,
Marketing and Advertising, and Industrial Administration. The College of
Engineering and the College of Business Administration confer the degree of
Bachelor of Science with specification indicating the field of specialization.
The Co-operative Plan, under which all of these day colleges operate, enables
the student to alternate regular periods of classroom instruction with super-
vised employment in an industrial or commercial position, thus combining
theory and practice in an exceedingly effective manner. Apart from the
educational advantages of the Co-operative Plan is the opportunity for self-
support while the student is pursuing his studies at Northeastern University.
During the co-operative periods, students not only gain experience but are also
paid for their services. Approximately three hundred business and industrial
concerns co-operate with Northeastern University in making this program
effective.

The School of Law conducts both a day and an evening undergraduate
program which prepares for admission to the bar and for the practice of the
law and leads to the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

The Adult Education Program has been developed in the evening work of
the School of Law as indicated above, in the School of Business, and in the
evening courses of the College of Liberal Arts. The School of Business has
curricula in Management, Accounting, and Engineering and Business. This
School awards the Bachelor of Business Administration degree with specifica-
tion. The University also operates a division of the School of Business in
Springfield. The College of Liberal Arts offers certain of its courses during
evening hours constituting a program, three years in length, equivalent in
hours to one-half the requirements for the A.B. or S.B. degree, and providing
a general education and preparation for admission to the School of Law. The
title of Associate in Arts is conferred upon those who complete this program.

The Adult Education Program has also been developed through the
Lincoln Schools, which are affiliated with and conducted by Northeastern
University. The classes in these schools are held at convenient evening
hours. The Lincoln Technical Institute offers curricula upon a college level
in various phases of engineering leading to the title of Associate in Engineer-
ing; whereas the Lincoln Preparatory School, accredited by the New England
College Admissions Board, prepares students for admission to college and
offers other standard high school programs.

The Huntington Day School for Boys, also affiliated with and conducted
by Northeastern University, is the outgrowth of a demand in the city of

14 NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Boston for an urban preparatory school with high educational standards
which would furnish thorough preparation for admission to the leading
colleges and universities. While easily accessible to the various sections of
Boston and to the suburbs, it has the facilities of a country day school and
offers a country day school program. This School is one of the leading pre-
paratory schools of the country.

Location of University Buildings

Northeastern University is located in Boston, a city which is rich in educa-
tional and cultural opportunities. The School of Business is in the University
center on Huntington Avenue just beyond Massachusetts Avenue at the
entrance to the Huntington Avenue Subway. The School is easily reached
from the various railroad stations and from all points of the Boston Elevated
System. Ample parking space is available in the rear of Richards Hall.

Richards Hall

Richards Hall, a four-story building at 360 Huntington Avenue, contains
over one hundred thousand square feet of floor space devoted to adminis-
trative and instructional purposes. On the first floor are the general ad-
ministrative offices of the University. The University Bookstore, the "Husky
Hut" and the student checkroom are located on the ground floor. On the
various floors are three large lecture halls and numerous classrooms and
laboratories. The offices of the Evening Division are located on the first floor.

New^ Building

This building contains forty-two thousand square feet of floor space. Here
are located the Chemical Engineering and Biological laboratories, a large com-
mons room open to day and evening students, and eighteen classrooms and
lecture halls.

East Building

This building contains the University library, classrooms, and certain
laboratories.

South Building

The South Building of the University contains certain laboratories, a large
lecture hall, and several classrooms.

Beacon Hill Building

The Beacon Hill Building, now occupied exclusively by the School of Law,
is located at 47 Mt. Vernon Street, within sight of the State House, and con-
tains administrative offices, a library, classrooms, student lounges, and other
facilities.

School of Business

^he background of an Institution^

THIRTY-SEVEN YEAP.S ago, in March of 1907, the first undergraduate
evening school of business in New England was organized. This was
the beginning of Northeastern University School of Business, a pioneer
endeavor to bridge an existing gap in business and professional education.
Four years later, the School was authorized by the Massachusetts Legislature
to grant university degrees to its graduates.

Administrative Policy

The School of Business was founded to serve those who have only evening
hours free for study — a special field, limited to the education of the person
who has permanently left day school and gone to work. The Northeastern
University evening student is an adult, usually more mature than the student
of a day school. He is in direct touch with business and is expected to take
an active part in his own supervised training. The constant effort of the
administrative and teaching staff is toward more effective means of suiting
their educational service to the individual evening student.

Purpose

Now, just as at the start, the School seeks first to determine what business
needs in its personnel, and then to supply properly trained men and women
who can fulfill those needs.

The training of a student at Northeastern has always been conducted so
that a graduate receives not only a B.B.A. degree, but an immediately applica-
ble vocational training equipping him to fill a better position in some one busi-
ness activity. For his future, he has the advantage of a thorough background of
business methods and an appreciation of the problems of management, which,
if properly used, may lead to advancement and executive responsibilities.

Staff of Instruction

The teaching staff of the School in Boston and Springfield is recruited from
business and professional leaders of New England business. The instructors
are college-trained men who have proved their ability in their various fields
of specialization. They are selected on the basis of their ability to convey
knowledge to others in an interesting, inspiring, and effective manner. They
are also chosen for the breadth of their training and experience.

Success of the Alumni

The best indication of the cumulative rewards to be won by pursuing a
systematic program of study in spare evening hours is to be found in the
records of Northeastern School of Business Alumni.

A study made just prior to the war covering all Boston graduates conclu-
sively shows that better positions and increased incomes are directly traceable
to the evening hours spent in preparation at Northeastern.

A portion of this study is the comparison of positions held by the alumni
when they entered the School as freshmen with the positions they held at
the time of the study.

16 THE BACKGROUND OF AN INSTITUTION

ALUMNI POSITIONS

Upon

Date of

Entrance

Study

Presidents and Other Corporation Officers

0.0

3.8

Owners of Business

1.0

13.1

Treasurers and Comptrollers

0.3

7.7

Accountants

7.0

16.9

Office Managers

1.6

7.4

Department Managers

2.9

11.5

Salesmen

3.8

Educators

8.6

7.0

Government Employees

2.6

7.7

Bookkeepers

18.8

1.3

Clerks

34.2

6.4

Factory Workers

5.8

2.2

Unemployed

2.9

1.9

Miscellaneous

10.5

9.3

This pronounced trend to better and more responsible positions is further
substantiated by a study of the income of the same alumni group over the
same period.

It was found that the alumni who had been out of the School of Business
not more than ten years had increased their income an aggregate of 73.2%.
For those who graduated more than ten years ago, this increase amounts to
223.6%. Another study of the income of students still in school shows that
the average School of Business student begins his advancement in business
and in income even while he is still at his training. On the average, the
increase in income during the period of attendance more than covers tuition
charges.

The Student Body

The character of a student body determines the standards which a school
can maintain. Nothing is more essential to the success of an educational
institution than a careful selection of incoming students. This principle
applies just as readily to an evening school as to a day school. Standards are
invariably adjusted to the average intelligence of the students. For this
reason, Northeastern University School of Business maintains standards of
admission which result in a student body capable of pursuing work of stand-
ard college grade during evening hours.

The student body consists of 383 men and women of widely varied ages
and occupations. The youngest student is 17 years of age and the oldest 53
years. The average age is 23 years.

About one-sixth of the students are married men who have realized that
if they are to increase their earning power they must fit themselves for ad-
vancement. That the training offered by the School has enabled the students
to improve their earning capacities and enlarge their responsibilities is
conclusively proved by a study which showed that students in the School
substantially increased their incomes in the six-year period between entering
the School and graduation.

THE BACKGROUND OF AN INSTITUTION 17

Placement Service
For Graduates

While the School cannot guarantee positions to its graduates, the number
of requests for men usually exceeds the number available in the graduating
class of any given year. The policy of the School is to find the best equipped
and qualified men and women among its graduates for the positions which the
School is called upon to fill.

The School in recommending a graduate for a position furnishes the
prospective employer with the facts as to the graduate's ability, character,
attitudes, habits, and other qualifications for the position as revealed by the
School records. In the last analysis, however, placement in a position de-
pends quite largely upon the graduate's ability to sell his services to the
prospective employer. Most employers prefer to consider two or more candi-
dates for a position and generally request the School to suggest more than
one person. Many manufacturing and commercial firms throughout New
England call upon this School to assist them in filling important executive
and managerial positions.

No charge is made for placement service.

For Students

Many requests from employers are received by the School, during normal
times, for young men and women of potential ability to fill important clerical
and junior executive positions. It is the policy of the School to serve the
students whenever possible by placing them in those positions which promise
attractive opportunities for development and advancement. The School,
however, cannot guarantee to place its students, but it does endeavor to keep
in close touch with those who desire placement service and to assist them in
obtaining satisfactory advancements in positions and income. No charge is
made for placement service. Those needing this assistance should file an ap-
plication at the School Office.

School of Business

Trogravfis of ^nstructioru

THE SCHOOL OF BUSINESS provides the following major programs
of instruction for undergraduate students:

Accounting

1. A specialized four-year program leading to the title of Associate in Account-
ing.

2. A six-year program leading to the degree of Bachelor of Business Adminis-
tration in Accounting. (See page 20.)

Management

Four-and six-year programs with opportunity for specialization in one of the
following fields:

Business and Industrial Management

Distribution
The four-year programs lead to the title of Associate in Business Administra-
tion and the six-year programs to the degree of Bachelor of Business Adminis-
tration in Management. (See page 22.)

Engineering and Business

A six-year program combining the study of engineering and business,
leading to the degree of Bachelor of Business Administration in Engineering
and Management. (See page 24.)

Special Programs

The School will arrange special one-year, two-year, or longer programs of
study to meet the needs of individual students. These special programs will be
arranged upon consultation with the Dean. (See page 27.)

Single or Unit Courses

Northeastern University sponsors through the Bureau of Business and
Industrial Service courses designed to meet specific needs of persons employed
in business and industry. Many of them are designed to supplement basic
courses of study in undergraduate programs. Students in degree programs de-
siring to take any of these courses for credit must receive prior approval of
the Dean. See page 26 for special courses to be offered in the fall term of 1945.

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION 19

Accounting

The Accounting Profession

Taxation, legal requirements governing qualifications for listing in the
stock market, corporation laws governing the preparation of financial reports,
the needs of government, and many other developments in the conduct of
business have broadened the scope of accounting to such a degree that in
normal times the supply of trained accountants is not adequate to meet the
demand. Moreover, a knowledge of accounting is universally regarded as
essential in all phases of business management. There is a large field of public
accounting which is being developed and, with the increased emphasis which
financial institutions are placing upon accounting, the need for college-trained
Certified Public Accountants is increasing every year.

Opportunities in the field of accounting are many. Financial returns
compare favorably with those of other professions such as law, medicine,
and engineering. The normal development for those employed by an account-
ing firm is fairly well standardized from the position of junior assistant through
that of the senior accountant into firm membership. As a firm member, the
usual earnings range from $4,000 to $25,000 a year, and frequently even higher.

While the remuneration in the field of public accounting for properly
trained men is attractive, the field of commercial and private accounting
offers even more attractive inducement. The latest census figures show that
there are 191,571 persons engaged as accountants and auditors in the United
States. From trained accountants are selected many of the business and in-
dustrial executives, including office managers, comptrollers, treasurers, and
other officers of business concerns. Salaries of treasurers and comptrollers vary
from $4,000 to $15,000; office managers from $3,000 to $6,000; chief account-
ants from $2,500 to $5,000. Many senior accountants have advanced into
responsible executive positions paying $10,000 and more.

The Accounting Programs

Students of accounting in the School of Business may follow programs of
training in this specialized subject which prepare them to take the examination
for Certified Public Accountant (C.P.A.) or to carry on work of major
responsibility in commercial accounting with private or public business firms.

Thoroughness of instruction is all-important. The trained accountant
must be able to adapt himself quickly to the rapidly changing conditions of
modern business. He should be ready to assume executive responsibility
outside the field of accounting. This involves, of course, a background of
understanding of various functions of business quite apart from the specialized
accounting field. The shorter accounting program includes prescribed sub-
jects for the title of Associate in Accounting and adequate preparation for
the C.P.A. examination.

Upon completion of the four years of prescribed subjects for the title of
Associate in Accounting, students may take two years of additional study
required for the degree of Bachelor of Business Administration. These two
additional years are greatly to the advantage of the student, since they give an
opportunity to study managerial and administrative subjects which fit him
to assume responsibility outside of the accounting field, and give him the
basic understanding of business at large, which is of vital importance to
accountants who hope to make real progress.

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION

Requirements for B.B.A. Degree in Accounting

Six-year Program

Course Numbers*

Subjects

A 1-2 Introductory Accounting

A 3-4 Intermediate Accounting

A 7-8 Accounting Problems

A 9-10 Cost Accounting

A 11 Auditing

A 13-14 Income Tax Procedure

A 15 Constructive Accounting

A 17-18 Advanced Accounting Problems

A 19-20 C.P.A. Problems

E 1-2 Business English

E 5 Public Speaking

E 6 Business Reports and Conferences

E 7, 8 Business Readings or T 3-4, Thesis

Ec 1-2 Business Economics

Ec 3-4 Financial Organization

Ec 7-8 Business Statistics and Forecasting

L 1-2 Legal Aspects of Business

M 7-8 Credits and Collections

M 11-12 Government Controls in Business

Occupational Experience

Electives (To be selected subject to approval)

Total Semester Hours Required for Degree

Semester Hours
5
5
5
5

I'A
5

2H
5
5
5

2K
2^
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

30
JO

125

Requirements for Title of Associate in Accounting

Four-year Program
Course Numbers* Subjects Semester Hours

1-2

Introductory Accounting

3-4

Intermediate Accounting

7-8

Accounting Problems

9-10

Cost Accounting

Auditing

13-14

Income Tax Procedure

Constructive Accounting

17-18

Advanced Accounting Problems

19-20

C.P.A. Problems

1-2

Business English

1-2

Business Economics

3-4

Financial Organization

1-2

Legal Aspects of Business (C.P.A.

Law)

Total Semester Hours Required for Title

*See notes at bottom of page 27.

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION 21

Business and Industrial Management Programs

The School of Business offers two optional curricula under the Management
Program.

1. Business and Industrial Management

This program of courses comprises an integrated series of courses covering
the fundamental manufacturing processes, industrial organization, relation
of product design to the market, production processes and methods of produc-
tion planning and control, motion and time study and related topics. This
program is designed to provide training for managerial responsibility in com-
mercial and industrial enterprises requiring a technical knowledge of manage-
ment problems combined with a business background.

2. Distribution

Due to the increasing complexity of our national and international economy
the distribution of our resources of both natural and manufactured com-
modities will occupy a position of increasing importance. The program is
developed around the study of markets and marketing problems including the
methods of selling and sales management, merchandising principles and
practices, advertising, with sufficient background courses in business and in-
dustrial management to tie in with the production phases of the problems.
It also includes the legal aspects, the growing government control of business,
and allied topics. This program provides basic instruction for those looking
forward to managerial responsibility in one of the several phases of this
important field.

A recent extensive study of occupational opportunities shows that most
college men who enter work in distribution, industry, transportation, and
banking become involved sooner or later in some function of operating
management where they become responsible for the direction of human effort
within their organization.

In each of these optional curricula there is offered a six-year program leading
to the degree of Bachelor of Business Administration in Management and also
a special four-year program leading to the title of Associate in Business Ad-
ministration.

22 PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION

Requirements for the B.B.A. Degree in Management

(Business and Industrial Management Option)
Six-year Program

Subjects Semester Hours

Accounting Aids to Management** 5

Marketing 5

Principles of Selling 2^

Sales Management 2J^

Business English 5

Public Speaking 2J^

Business Reports and Conferences 2J^

Business Economics 5

Financial Organization 5

Legal Aspects of Business 5

Business and Industrial Management 5

Principles of Production 2 J^

Scientific Management 2}/^

Psychology for Business and Industry 2 J^

Purchasing 2}^

Industrial Management Problems and Policies 5

Business Readings or T 3-4, Thesis 5

Business Statistics and Forecasting 5

Credits and Collections 5

Government Controls in Business 5

Business Planning and Research 5

Business Administration Seminar 5

Occupational Experience 30

Electives (To be selected subject to approval) 5

Total Semester Hours Required for Degree 125
Requirements for the Title of Associate in Business Management

(Business and Industrial Management Option)
Four-year Program

Course ISJumbers* Subjects Semester Hours

A 5-6 Accounting Aids to Management** 5

D 1-2 Marketing 5

D 3 Principles of Selling 2^

D 4 Sales Management • 2}^

E 1-2 Business English 5

E 5 Public Speaking 2}/^

E 6 Business Reports and Conferences 2}^

Ec 1-2 Business Economics 5

Ec 3-4 Financial Organization 5

L 1-2 Legal Aspects of Business 5

M 1-2 Business and Industrial Management 5

M 3 Principles of Production 23^

M 4 Scientific Management 2}/^

M 5 Psychology for Business and Industry 2^

M 6 Purchasing 23^

M 9-10 Industrial Management Problems and Policies 5

Total Semester Hours 60

*, **See notes at bottom of page 27.

Course Numbers*

5-6

1-2

3-4

1-2

9-10

7,8

7-8

11-12

17-18

19-20

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION 23

Requirements for the B.B.A. Degree in Business Management

(Distribution Option)

Six-year Program

Subjects Semester Hours

Business and Industrial Management 5

Marketing 5

Business English 5

Business Economics 5

Accounting Aids to Management 5

Principles of Advertising ( 1 ) 2 ^

Retail Store Advertising (2) . 23^

Financial Organization 5

Purchasing 2}^

Psychology for Business and Industry 1}/^

Retail Store Management 5

Legal Aspects of Business 5

Public Speaking 23^^

Business Reports and Conferences 2}/^

Principles of Selling 2 }/2

Sales Management 23^

Government Controls in Business 5

Business Planning and Research 5

Credits and Collections 5

Business Statistics and Forecasting 5

Business Administration Seminar 5

Business Readings or T3-4, Thesis 5

Occupational Experience 30

Elective (To be selected subject to approval) 5

Total Semester Hours Required for Degree 125

Requirements for the Title of Associate in Business Management

(Distribution Option)

Four-year Program

Subjects Semester Hours

Business and Industrial Management 5

Marketing 5

Business English 5

Business Economics 5

Accounting Aids to Management 5

Principles of Advertising (1) 23^

Retail Store Advertising (2) 23^

Financial Organization 5

Purchasing 23^

Psychology for Business and Industry 23^

Retail Store Management 5

Legal Aspects of Business 5

Public Speaking 23^

Business Reports and Conferences 23^

Principles of Selling 2 3^

Sales Management _23^

Total Semester Hours Required for Title 60

*Sec notes at bottom of page 27.

Course

Numbers*

1-2

5-6

3-4

1-2

11-12

17-18

7-8

19-20

7-8

Course Numbers*

1-2

5-6

3-4

1-2

24 PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION

Engineering and Business Program

The Engineering and Business curriculum offers basic training by combining
fundamental engineering and business courses in a six-year degree program.
It provides reliable training for those now engaged in or who plan to enter
positions of managerial responsibility in industrial or commercial enterprises
where a scientific or engineering background is required.

Many technically trained men find it impossible to assume greater mana-
gerial responsibility because they do not have a knowledge of fundamental
business principles so essential in many of the better positions in industry.
On the other hand, many business trained men are employed in industrial
plants where a scientific background is most desirable if not necessary for
advancement. This program has been developed to serve both groups.

In Boston, the Engineering courses in this program are given under the
auspices of an affiliated school of Northeastern University, the Lincoln
Technical Institute, which offers several four-year curricula in Engineering
leading to the title of Associate in Engineering. These curricula permit special-
ization in Chemistry, Civil and Structural Engineering, Electrical Engineering,
Electronic, Industrial, and Mechanical Engineering with an Aeronautical
option. The business courses are conducted by the School of Business which
awards the degree of Bachelor of Business Administration in Engineering
and Management.

The required business courses are largely in the field of industrial manage-
ment and are designed to supplement the engineering work of the student.
A careful study is made of the fundamental manufacturing processes, factory
organization, production design, methods of production and production
control, and time and motion study.

Students pursuing a program of engineering and business subjects ordinarily
complete the work required for the title of Associate in Engineering before
starting business study. The following minimum credits and courses are
required to meet degree requirements.

Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Business Administration

in Engineering and Management
XT.....L — * Subjects Semester Hours

Lincoln Technical Institute courses 60
Accounting Aids to Management 5

Business Reports and Conferences 2}^

Business Readings or T 3-4, Thesis 5

Business Economics 5

Business and Industrial Management 5

Principles of Production 2J^

Scientific Management 2^

Purchasing 2}/^

Industrial Management Problems and Policies 5

Occupational Experience 30

Total Semester Hours Required for Degree 125

Course Numbers*

5-6

7,8

1-2

9-10

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION 25

Labor Relations Institute

The management of labor relations presents the most vital and challenging
aspect of our industrial development of the immediate future. Continuance
of our American way of industrial democracy demands a harmonious under-
standing of the underlying principles of labor and industrial management
for the peaceful adjustment of their common problems.

The Labor Relations Institute of Northeastern University was organized
to serve this need. It is dedicated to the service of both labor and management.
It directly concerns the work of industrial and labor executives, plant man-
agers, personnel directors, union shop councillors and stewards. Teachers
in the fields of management and the social sciences will also find that the
program provides a valuable academic background for their instruction.

Courses Common to Management and Labor
First Semester Second Semester

Collective Bargaining — Industrial back- Industrial Psychology

ground and development in U. S. ^ 7 t ? > /

,„. A 7 • • ■ T 1 A 1 • Ljovernment and Labor- Management

Wage Administration - Job Analysis Relations - State and Federal

and Evaluation - Wage Payment j^^^^ ^^^ Agencies

Flans

Courses Particularly for Management
(From managemient's viewpoint)

Personnel Organization and Adminis- Contract Negotiation and Administra-
tration tion

Public Speaking and Conference Leader- Management Seminar
ship

Courses Particularly for Labor

(From labor's viewpoint)

Union Organization and Administration Contract Negotiation and Administra-

Public Speaking and Conference Leader-

ship Labor Seminar

Students may register for the complete program or may take any one or
more of the courses which serve their particular needs. A student may complete
the entire program by attending two evenings per week for two years. Each
individual course is one semester or sixteen weeks in length and carries two
and one-half semester hours of credit for students qualified for the degree
programs of Northeastern University Evening School of Business.

A diploma will be awarded to the student upon satisfactory completion of
the program and a certificate upon completion of each individual course.

Those students registering for the certificate in the complete program will
take the four courses common to management and labor and four additional
courses from the management or labor group according to their choices.

The tuition charge is twenty-five dollars for registration in the first course
and twenty-two dollars and fifty cents for each subsequent course in a con-
tinuous series or for students enrolled in a degree program of the Evening
School of Business.

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION

Bureau of Business and Industrial Service

Special Unit Courses

Northeastern University, through the Bureau of Business and Industrial
Service, offers a program of unit courses especially designed to meet the
individual needs of persons employed in business, industry or professional
practice.

The courses included in the 1945-1946 Program to start in September, 1945,
are as follows:

Management

Advanced Safety Engineering

Advanced Time Study

Advanced Methods Engineering

Alignment Charts

Conference Leadership — A Man-
agement Technique

Labor Relations — Collective Bar-
gaining

Industrial Psychology

Industrial Safety Engineering

Insurance Fundamentals

Materials Control
Methods Engineering
Personnel Administration
Production Planning and Control
Quality Control by Statistical

Methods
Sales Management
Sales Principles
Time Study

Traffic Rates and Routing
Wage Administration

Industrial Inspection

Mechanical Engineering

Practical Heat Treating
Metallurgy and Metallography

Analytical Geometry
Engineering Mathematics

Mathematics

Differential Equations
Differential and Integral Calculus

Electronics

Advanced Industrial Electronics

Electronic Test Equipment and Meas-
urement

Frequency Modulation and Tele-
vision

Fundamentals of Radio I

Fundamentals of Radio II

Fundamentals of Electronics

Industrial Electronics

Ultra-High Frequency Engineering I

Ultra-High Frequency Engineering II

Servo-Mechanisms

Chemistry

Compounding and Processing of Petroleum Technology

Natural and Synthetic Rubbers Plastics

Rubber Technology Synthetic Resins

Physical Chemistry

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION 27

Drafting

Engineering Drawing Industrial Production Illustrative

Designing for Quantity Production Drawing

Machine Drawing

Civil Engineering

Sanitary Bacteriology Photogrammetry

Many of these courses will have credit in the degree programs of the School
of Business and the Lincoln Technical Institute. AH students wishing to take
any of them for credit must secure prior approval from the Dean of the re-
spective school.

A bulletin describing these courses and information regarding registration
and tuition rates may be secured by writing to

The Bureau of Business and Industrial Service

Northeastern University

360 Huntington Avenue

Boston 15, Mass.

Tel. KENmore 5800

Special Programs and Single Courses

Special one-year, two-year, or longer programs may be arranged to meet the
needs of any student who does not find in the regular programs offered by the
School the type of training desired.

Such programs must be approved by the Dean and are made up only from
courses offered in the Evening Division of the University.

Any course may be taken singly or in combination by those who have the
necessary preliminary training to pursue with profit the course or courses
selected.

Students should consult the schedules of courses offered in Boston and in
Springfield for a list of available courses. Full credit may be allowed for any
of these courses, if the student taking a special program desires to become a
candidate for a degree or title, provided the courses he has pursued are a part
of the degree or title program chosen.

*A double number, as M 1-2 or A 7-8, indicates a full-year course covering both the first
and second semesters. A single course number, as A 11, indicates a half-year course covering
only one semester. The letters indicate the classification of the course as: A, Accounting;
D, Distribution; Ec, Economics; E, English; L, Law; M, Management.

**Students in the Management Program desiring more accounting than the single course
of Accounting Aids to Management may elect both Introductory and Intermediate Account-
ing in lieu of Accounting Aids to Management. If Accounting Aids to Management is taken,
Introductory and Intermediate Accounting cannot also be elected for credit, and vice versa.

School of Business

description of Qourses

THE UNIVERSITY reserves the right to withdraw, modify, or add to the
courses offered, or to change the order of courses in curricula as may
seem advisable.

The University further reserves the right to withdraw in any year any
elective or special course for which less than twelve enrollments have been
received. Regular students so affected by such withdrawal will be permitted
to choose some other course. In the case of special students a full refund of
all tuition and other fees will be made.

The University also reserves the right to change the requirements for gradu-
ation, tuition and fees charged, and other regulations. However, no change in
tuition and fees at any time shall become effective until the school year fol-
lowing that in which it is announced.

All full-year courses are numbered with a double consecutive number and
all half-year courses with a single number. The letter or letters immediately
preceding the numbers indicate the classification of the course. The number
of class sessions indicated for each course includes the final examination
session. During the war period all full-year courses will have mid-year exam-
inations and course credit will be granted on a semester basis.

ACCOUNTING (A)

Applicants for admission to the School who have had experience in accounting or book-
keeping or who have pursued systematic courses in institutions of less than college grade may
take an examination for placement purposes in Introductory Accounting. Those uiho pass
this examination will be admitted to Intermediate Accounting and may substitute an elective
course in lieu of Introductory Accounting.

INTRODUCTORY ACCOUNTING

A 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit. No previous knowledge of bookkeeping or
accounting necessary.

This course provides basic instruction for those who plan to specialize in accounting or
for those who wish to enroll later for more advanced courses. Emphasis is placed upon pro-
prietorship accounts, including books of entry, statements, business practices, adjustments,
and an introduction to partnership accounts. Drill and practice work are required for pro-
ficient handling of simple accounting transactions.

INTERMEDIATE ACCOUNTING

A 3—4 Prerequisite: A 1-2, or the passing of a placement examination. Thirty-three sessions;
5 hours' credit.

A study of partnership accounting, including organization, dissolution, and liquidation of
the partnership, emphasis being given to the corporate form of accounts with attention to
manufacturing and trading activities. In addition to the drill and practice work on accounting
technique, a mastery of basic principles of general accounting is required.

ACCOUNTING AIDS TO MANAGEMENT

A 5-6 TTiirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit. No previous knowledge of bookkeeping or
accounting necessary.

A study of the broad background of accounting and business transactions so as to enable
the student to analyze and interpret intelligently financial statements and other accounting
reports. The course demonstrates the use of accounting in management and financial control.
Emphasis is placed on the development of accounting fundamentals, preparation of financial

DESCRIPTION OF COURSES 29

statements, corporation and manufacturing accounts, evaluation of balance sheet items,
analysis and interpretation of financial statements and other trends, and the use of accounting
as an aid to management.

ACCOUNTING PROBLEMS

A 7-8 Prerequisite: A 3—4 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
Develops power of analysis in utilizing accounting data. Problems are used as the basis for
instruction and discussion to cover the more advanced phases of financial statements and
accounts found in the more complex business organizations.

COST ACCOUNTING

A 9-10 Prerequisite: A 7-8 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
Acquaints the student with the relationship of cost accounting to management and ad-
ministration control and shows how adequate cost systems may further the intelligent manage-
ment of business enterprises. Numerous problems serve as the basis for a study of the various
accounts, records, systems, and methods commonly used in modern cost accounting.

AUDITING

All Prerequisite: A 7-8 Seventeen sessions; 2 J^ hours' credit.
Accounting facts and practices are analyzed to determine whether or not they conform to
professional practice. The work of the auditor in relation to professional requirements, the
mechanics of auditing, and the preparation of reports and certificates are studied.

INCOME TAX PROCEDURE

A 13-14 Prerequisite: A 3-4 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
A detailed study is made of Federal and State tax laws, their administration and application
to the incomes of individuals, partnerships, corporations, and fiduciaries; treasury and tax
department regulations and rulings; and of the decisions of the Board of Tax Appeals, and
of various Federal and State courts. Practice in making out reports and returns, and a study of
the procedure of handling claims form the basis of applied instruction.

CONSTRUCTIVE ACCOUNTING

A 15 Prerequisite: A 7-8 Seventeen sessions; 2^ hours' credit.
To acquaint students with the principles underlying the construction of accounting systems
and the procedure of system installation. The course is developed by means of problem
projects beginning with an analysis of the accounting needs of a small business. By gradual
steps increasingly larger businesses are studied and accounting systems developed to meet
their needs. Special attention is given accounting records in relation to the expansion of the
accounting system.

ADVANCED ACCOUNTING PROBLEMS

A 17-18 Prerequisite: A 7-8 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
This course is designed primarily to meet the requirements of those students who intend to
enter the accounting profession or to assume responsibilities in commercial accounting.
Emphasis in this course is devoted to specialized problems in connection with consolidations,
mergers, holding companies, and other more advanced and complicated accounting situations.
The course thoroughly prepares the student for the C.P. A. Review in final preparation for the
State C.P.A. and American Institute examinations.

C.P.A. PROBLEMS

A 19-20 Prerequisites: A 9-10; A 11; A 17-18; L 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
This course provides a thoroughgoing and complete review of accounting theory and
practice, and is intended primarily for those who contemplate taking the C.P.A. examinations.
Practice in the classroom is provided under substantially the same conditions as exist in the
C.P.A. examination room. Carefully selected problems, taken from C.P.A. examinations, in
Accounting Theory and Practice are worked out in the classroom, and are supplemented
by lectures, demonstrations, and test questions.

30 DESCRIPTION OF COURSES

DISTRIBUTION (D)

Marketing enters into and influences every field of business and includes not only the direct
process of the sale of goods, but the whole organization by which goods find their may from
the original producer to the ultimate consumer. The change in the economic structure during
the past ten years, growing out of higher standards of living, the development of new occu-
pational interests, and the shift of population to large cities, has tended to increase the cost
of marketing of goods, just as the elimination of waste in production was the keynote of
business fifteen years ago, the reduction of expense and the introduction of more efficient
methods in distribution are the foremost thought of business leaders today. For this reason
courses in marketing form one of the basic elements in a business education.

MARKETING

D 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
An understanding of the various methods in common use for selling goods and of the
typical problems that arise in the course of distributing goods from the manufacturer through
the middlemen and dealers to the consumers is provided. The selling problems of the manu-
facturer, the wholesaler, the retailer, and the specialty agent are studied in relation to the
various types of industries and commodities.

PRINCIPLES OF SELLING

D 3 Seventeen sessions; 2^ hours' credit.
This course deals with the evolution of modern salesmanship, its history, development, and
opportunities. The psychology of selling, preparation for the interview, the proper approach,
arousing the buying urge, the meeting of sales resistance, the closing of the sale, and the
qualities of good salesmen are among the topics discussed.

SALES MANAGEMENT

D 4 Seventeen sessions; 23^ hours' credit.
This is a continuation of the course in the Principles of Selling. It includes study of the
types of sales organizations, the work of sales executives, sales planning and policies, sales
campaigns, management of the sales force, financing of sales, and the control of sales opera-
tions.

PRINCIPLES OF ADVERTISING
D 5 Seventeen sessions; 23^ hours' credit.
A comprehensive course designed to familiarize the student with the nature and scope of
advertising and its place in the commercial and economic structure. History, definition,
and functions of advertising. Organization and functions of advertising departments and
advertising agencies. Varieties of advertising and media. Problems, market investigation,
planning campaigns. Laws, ethics, and regulations. A study of the broader aspects of ad-
vertising with special emphasis on current trends and developments.

RETAIL STORE ADVERTISING

D 6 Seventeen sessions; 2J^ hours' credit.
Tliis course is devoted to the study of the elements of retail advertising. The various media
used by retailers are considered with drill in the preparation of copy therefor. A study is
made of institutional, straight merchandise, and sales copy as exemplified in current adver-
tising of important retail concerns. The principles of layout receive attention as well as the
mechanics of production including art work, plates, typography, and printing. The aim is ■
to furnish a practical foundation fitting students for a creative career in retail advertising.

ENGLISH (E)

The value that comes from, the effective use of good English in business reports and com-
munications is being increasingly emphasized by busir\ess leaders. All students who are
candidates for the degree or certificate are required to pursue systematic courses in English.
Those having outstanding deficiencies may be required to take additional courses in English.

BUSINESS ENGLISH

E 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours* credit.
Efficient training is provided in the use of correct and forceful English for business purposes.
Practice in the construction of sales, collection, credit and application letters, business articles.

DESCRIPTION OF COURSES 31

reports and riewspaper stories provides opportunities for written expression on business
topics. Study is devoted to the elements of logic as related to the organization and expression
of thought. The course includes study of the fundamentals of sales promotion practice with
special emphasis on buying motives. Oral work in class is intended to prepare students for
participation in business conferences and public meetines.

ADVANCED ENGLISH

E 3—4 Prerequisite: E 1-2 or equivalent. Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
Literature of value and interest to business men forms the basis of study and practice in
writing so as to develop an effective, easy style of expression. The student acquires a cultural
basis which will serve not only as a source of entertainment in leisure hours but also an aid
for business communications.

PUBLIC SPEAKING

E 5 Seventeen sessions; IY2 hours' credit.
Those who wish to speak convincingly, to overcome self-consciousness, and to develop
self-confidence will find this course meeting their needs. Students are trained in the selection
and organization of speech materials, the delivery of the speech, and in other important
essentials of effective speaking. The entire course is practical and not theoretical. Work is
centered around the interests and topics of business men and is specifically adapted to their
needs.

BUSINESS REPORTS AND CONFERENCES

E 6 Seventeen sessions; 23^ hours' credit.
This course is devoted to the preparation and presentation of business reports and to the
techniques of planning for, participating in, and conducting business conferences. These
reports and conferences are based upon business problems and situations. The nature of a
thesis, the selection of a subject, the preparation of an outline, the collection and organization
of data are considered in this course. Students are given the fullest possible opportunity to
participate actively at each session.

BUSINESS READINGS

E 7 and E 8; 2H hours' credit for each course.

The two courses in Business Readings are designed to broaden the student's acquaintance
with selected writings in the field of business and to introduce him to the real pleasure and
values that come from such reading. There are no required lectures for these courses, each of
which carries two and one-half semester hours' credit and for which a charge of ten dollars
is made.

At the beginning of the Upper Middler and the Junior years, each degree candidate registers
for a Readings course and is furnished a list of titles from which he makes selections for
readings in accordance with the course requirements. Written reports are submitted on these
readings, and are due on or before registering for classes the following year.

ECONOMICS (Ec)

^onorrdcs is the basic foundation upon which the general principles of business as a
science are founded. A mastery of the underlying economic laws enables tfie student to see
clearly the forces which business men must use in arriving at solutions to their problems.
An appreciation and understanding of economics is a necessary factor in the equipment of a
progressive business m,an.

BUSINESS ECONOMICS
Ec 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
The characteristics of modern business and industry are studied in terms of their operations
and relationship to the modern economic system. Economic laws and principles are con-
sidered in terms of business conditions peculiar to our own time and country and how these
laws govern prices, wages of labor, profits, credit, competition, work and working conditions,
and rewards for business enterprise.

32 DESCRIPTION OF COURSES

FINANCIAL ORGANIZATION

Ec 3—4 Prerequisite: Ec 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
The functions and services of money and credit as mediums of exchange are discussed. A
detailed study is made of the organization and functions of modem financial institutions such
as commercial banks, trust companies, investment security houses, savings institutions, stock
exchanges, the Federal Reserve System, and other credit and financial institutions.

INVESTMENT PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE

Ec 5-6 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
Consideration is given to the determination of investment policies and to the analysis of
various kinds of securities such as types of bonds, preferred and common stocks, and their
place and use in the investment field. Attention is also given to the economic factors and
changes as they affect investments.

BUSINESS STATISTICS AND FORECASTING

Ec 7-8 Prerequisite: Ec 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
The objective of this course is to train the student to use statistics in making better analyses
of the business problems than is possible without statistics. The point of view of the business
man and not the professional statistician is maintained throughout the study. In the early
part of the course the emphasis is placed upon the necessary technical methods, using business
problems as illustrations; in the second part of the course, the point of view is changed and
the emphasis is placed upon solving practical problems, using statistical methods as tools
when necessary. The practical application of statistics to business is directed toward business
forecasting, business budgeting, production and labor, market analysis, investment and
financial analyses, and executive and management statistics.

ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT OF THE UNITED STATES

Ec 9 Seventeen sessions; 23^ hours' credit.
A broad general survey is made of the economic and industrial development of the United
States from the colonial period to the present time. Emphasis is placed upon the origin and
development of American industries, changes in industrial and commercial policies, economic
forces at work in business and social institutions, and upon problems arising from the growth
and development of business and industry in the United States.

INTERNATIONAL ECONOMIC RELATIONS

Ec 11-12 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
A seminar course for advanced students in the field of economics. Current developments
in international relations as they affect business in the United States are considered from an
objective point of view. The student is taken behind the scenes of international relations
to analyze the basic problems of economics, finance, and diplomacy involved. The effect
of foreign policies upon business in the United States is studied.

LAW (L)

Underlying the ever-increasing complexity of modern business is a growing body of law
which defines and directs business operations.

LEGAL ASPECTS OF BUSINESS

L 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
A study of the application of legal machinery to the current needs and demands of modern
business for facilitating organization, credit, finance, security or protection from risks, market-
ing, and commercial and industrial peace. The course also provides excellent preparation for
the law phase of the C.P.A. examination.

MANAGEMENT (M)

With the complex and rapidly changing conditions of modem business, the functions of
administration and management must be clearly defined and maximum economies effected.
Through the problem approach, these courses train the student to supplant guesswork and
trial and error processes with organized knowledge and proven management methods.

BUSINESS AND INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT

M 1-2 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
An introductory survey of the whole field of business and industrial administration with
special emphasis upon training the student in the analysis of business and industrial problems.

DESCRIPTION OF COURSES 33

The functions of the business and industrial administrators are discussed with particular
reference to the control policies and devices of the manager. The course presents the prob-
lems of business and industry as an interrelated whole and helps the student to see the lines
of study which lead to solution of those problems.

PRINCIPLES OF PRODUCTION

M 3 Prerequisite: M 1-2 Seventeen sessions; 2J^ hours' credit.
A basic treatment of the fundamental manufacturing processes. Topics studied include
factory organization, manufacturing and assembly sequences, selection and co-ordination of
productive facilities, product design, inspection and salvage.

SCIENTIFIC MANAGEMENT

M 4 Prerequisite: M 3 Seventeen sessions; 2H hours' credit.
The practical application of the principles of scientific management to production problems.
The course embraces study in process research including time and motion study, standardiza-
tion of materials, analysis of operations, methods of production, and production control
including wage incentive systems.

PSYCHOLOGY FOR BUSINESS AND INDUSTRY

M 5 Seventeen sessions; 2J/2 hours' credit.
Business psychology is the study of predicting and influencing human behavior in business.
It provides an understanding of man's mental life, of how the individual and the group behave
and are influenced in their behavior, and of how the business man may predict and control
his own behavior and that of those with whom he works. The study and analysis of the
student's own personal problems and behavior constitute a valuable and interesting phase of
the course.

PURCHASING
M 6 Seventeen sessions; 23^ hours' credit.
A practical study of the functions and duties of the purchasing agent, the organization and
administration of his department, and his relations with other departments. The following
are representative of subjects discussed: the purchasing function, qualifications of the pur-
chasing agent, selection of supply sources, purchasing policies and budgets, cataloguing infor-
mation, testing and inspection of purchases, and stores control.

CREDITS AND COLLECTIONS

M 7-8 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
This course furnishes instruction in the theory of credit, the workings of a Credit Depart-
ment, whether in the wholesale or retail field, and in the analysis and use of credit statements
as aids to efficient management.

INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT PROBLEMS AND POLICIES

M 9-10 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
Co-ordination of the functional relationships which exist between the different depart-
ments of business with the problems affecting the determination of administrative and mana-
gerial policies is the purpose of this study. Special attention is given to scientific manage-
ment of industry and business and to the co-ordination of production with purchasing, sales,
finance, and transportation. Cases and problems dealing with organization and expansiori,
consolidation and combinations, reorganizations, internal administration, industrial and
human relations, and governmental control form the basis of discussion and study.

GOVERNMENT CONTROLS IN BUSINESS

M 11-12 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
A study of the economic and political relationships which exist between business and
governmejnt, with particular emphasis upon the work of the Interstate Commerce Commission
and the Federal Trade Commission; also other government agencies including the U. S.
Departments of Agriculture, Commerce, Labor, and particularly the Bureau of Labor Statistics.
Social as well as economic aspects of government control will be considered.

BUSINESS PLANNING AND RESEARCH

M 17-18 Prerequisite: Ec 7-8 Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
This course is devoted primarily to a study of economic and business planning and to the
technique of research and study in relation to planning. The fundamental principles

34 DESCRIPTION OF COURSES

underlying the solution of research problems will be analyzed and students will be required
to apply those principles to specific problems involving planning and research.

BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION SEMINAR

M 19-20 Prerequisites: A 5-6, D 1-2, Ec 3-4, Ec 7-8. Thirty-three sessions; 5 hours' credit.
This course provides the unique opportunity to use the information acquired from other
courses in an intelligent, intimate discussion of live current problems which arise daily in
marketing, production, and finance, with notes as to social significance. Emphasis is placed
on the translation of problems out of the academic book atmosphere into the personal terms
in which these problems must be met in business life and solved. Work is conducted upon a
prepared individual conference basis.

THESIS (T)

BACHELOR'S DEGREE THESIS

T 3-4, 5 hours' credit.
Each candidate for the B.B. A. degree may submit a thesis or the Business Readings reports.
The conditions to be fulfilled in connection with a thesis are:

1. The selection of the subject, preparation of the outlines, and the collection of data must
be worked out in accordance with the requirements of the Committee on Theses.

2. Two typewritten copies of the completed thesis must be presented to the Dean or the
Director in the Divisions, not later than March 15 of the year in which the candidate
expects to graduate.

3. The thesis is expected to meet the equivalent of the work required in a full-year course.
It is expected to give evidence that its writer has made a thorough study of the subject or
problem selected, that he has marshaled the data in a businesslike manner, and has given
evidence of his ability to reach sound and reasoned conclusions, and to present his findings
in clear and convincing terms.

OCCUPATIONS (O)

The School considers that the knowledges, skills, and experiences acquired in the full-time
employment of its students are the equivalent in many respects to the work carried on in a
laboratory. For this reason all members of the three upper classes who expect to qualify for
the Bachelor of Business Administration degree must meet the occupational experience
requirements listed below.

In order that this occupational experience may have the maximum educational value, the
School maintains a Department of Vocational Guidance and Placement under the supervision
of a competent Director. It is the responsibility of this Department to assist those students:

a. who need advice and guidance about employment in business;

b. who are unemployed and need placement service, and

c. who are already employed but need to change their present employment connections
in order to obtain the greatest possible benefit from their training and experience.

There is no tuition charge for the occupational courses listed below, even though they are
required for the degree. Furthermore, all services of the Department of Vocational Guidance
and Placement are without charge to the student.

ELEMENTARY OCCUPATIONS

O 1-2 10 hours' credit.
In this course students are required to meet with the Director of Vocational Guidance and
Placement in groups or individually as he may direct, and to submit in the Upper Middler
year a complete and detailed record of their employment for the college year. This report is
one factor in evaluating the occupational experience credit of the student.

INTERMEDIATE OCCUPATIONS

O 3-4 10 hours' credit.
A continuation of O 1-2. Continuing guidance under the supervision of the Director of
Vocational Guidance and Placement. Consideration of psychological and economic factors
affecting vocations; vocational objectives. A complete report of the employment of the Junior
year is required.

ADVANCED OCCUPATIONS
O 5-6 10 hours' credit.
A critical consideration of the student's present employment in the light of present-day
occupational trends. Individual conferences with a view to vocational adjustments, if deemed
desirable. A complete report of the employment of the Senior year is required.

School of Business

(Administrative^ 'T^olicies

Requirements for Admission

All applicants whose credentials are approved by the Committee on Educa-
tion, and who are admitted for degree or other programs, are classified as
regular or conditioned students.

Regular Students

Applicants for admission as regular students must present evidence of the
completion of an approved secondary school course, or the equivalent
15 units.*

Conditioned Students

Applicants who do not meet the requirements for admission as regular
students may be admitted as conditioned students provided they present
satisfactory evidence of ability to profit by the work of the School.
Conditioned students may remove their admission conditions and be
re-classified as regular students by using a, b, c, or a combination of a and
h.

a. By applying courses which they have completed in the School of Business
or in another approved college or university at the rate of one unit for
each two and one-half semester hours. A course cannot be credited
both for the removal of admission conditions and for the degree.

b. By applying units for work completed in an approved secondary school,
or for work certified by an accredited certifying agency.

c. By action of the Committee on Education based upon all factors
affecting the achievement and ability of the student in the School, when
the student shall have completed the first thirty semester hours of work
in his program; provided this work shall have been completed in not
less than three years of attendance and with an average grade of not less
than 70%. All conditioned students are required to take prescribed
aptitude tests during the first year of attendance. These tests, for which
no specific preparation can be made, are designed to test intellectual
capacity and general fitness for college work rather than preparation in
the specific subject matter of a secondary school program.

*A unit represents a year's work in any subject in any approved secondary school consti-
tuting approximately a quarter of a full year's work, or the equivalent. A four-year day
high school course is regarded as representing at least 15 units of work, or 3 units in junior
high school and 12 units in a three-year senior high school.

36 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES

Advanced Standing

Advanced standing credit in the School may be obtained in one or both
of two ways, as follows:

By Transfer of Credit. Subject to the approval of the Committee on Edu-
cation, credit may be given for work completed in other approved schools,
colleges, and universities. Applicants desiring credit by transfer should
indicate their desire at the time the application for admission is filed. A
copy of the catalog of the institution from which the transfer is sought
should accompany the application for admission.

By Examination. Applicants who desire to secure advanced standing credit
by examination are required to apply in writing for examination in those
subjects for which credit is sought. Proper forms should be obtained from
the School Office and filed at the time the application for admission is filed.
Applications for examinations are approved by the Committee on Educa-
tion which will take into account previous training, business experience, and
other factors showing the applicant's special preparation and ability in the
subject or subjects in which credit is sought by examination.

A grade of 75% must be obtained in an examination in order to secure
advanced standing credit for the subject. Upon successfully passing an ex-
amination, the applicant may be given full credit as though the subject had
been pursued in the School, or may be excused from the subject and per-
mitted to select an elective course in lieu thereof.

The same subject cannot be offered both for admission credit and as
a basis for advanced standing.

Registration

Before attending classes, students should report at the School Office for
registration. Students are requested to assist in lessening congestion during
the opening week by registering during the two weeks previous to the opening
of the School.

Late registration for those unable to enter at the opening of the School
year will be permitted at the discretion of the Dean, or the Director in the
case of the Divisions.

Class Sessions

Classes are held each evening of the week except Saturday. The normal
schedule for students pursuing a degree, title, or certificate program is three evenings
a week. Students may arrange their schedules so as to attend classes one, tiuo, three
or four evenings a week depending upon the number of subjects taken. Students
interested in the schedule of classes should apply to the office of the school
in the city in which they expect to attend.

Notify the Office Immediately

Of change of address.

Of withdrawal from any course — otherwise the fee for that course will be
charged.

Of withdrawal from the School, giving date of the last session attended.

ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES 37

Attendance

The limited amount of time devoted to each subject and the rapid rate of
progress in covering the essential content of a course make it highly desirable
that students be present at every session. Because of the importance of regular
attendance and its bearing upon the quality of scholarship, the policies
governing attendance are:

Students who attend 75% or more sessions in a course are entitled to pass
in that course if they attain a minimum final grade of D.

Students who attend between 50% and 74% of the sessions in a course are
entitled to pass in that course if they attain a minimum final grade of C.
Those who do not attain the minimum required grade of C may remove the
condition only by means of a make-up examination in which they must
receive a mark sufficient to raise the course grade to C.

Students who attend less than 50% of the sessions in a course will be
considered ineligible to take the final examination or to receive any credit
for the course.

Attendance credit is granted only when the student is in attendance at
least three-quarters of the class period. Three separate absences of less than
30 minutes each constitute one complete absence unless such partial absences
are canceled by satisfactory excuses.

Outside Preparation

It is expected that students will devote on the average two hours to prepara-
tion for each hour spent in the classroom. A student carrying a normal
program of three evenings a week will, therefore, be expected to devote to
outside preparation an average of eleven to twelve hours a week. Some
courses require more time for preparation than others.

Regular Examinations

The general policies governing regular examinations are:

A final examination will be held at the end of each course unless an an-
nouncement to the contrary is made.

The minimum passing grade in a regular final examination is D.

In case a student is excused from a final examination by the Dean or
Director, he may take the next regular or conditioned examination in the
subject. The student who fails to complete a course within one year from the
termination of that course must repeat the course, except that in special
cases for justifiable cause the Committee on Education may waive this rule.

The student who has received a passing mark in a final examination and
in a course may not take another examination for the purpose of raising his
grade unless he repeats the course in its entirety.

Condition Examinations

The following policies govern re-examinations:

Permission for taking a make-up examination is dependent upon the
quality of the work which the student has done throughout the course and is
a privilege which the Committee on Education may grant to students who
have received an E grade or an incomplete (Inc.).

38 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES

The condition or make-up examinations are given in September. Students
should consult the School Office for the specific dates of each examination.

Only one make-up examination in any given subject is allowed for the
purpose of removing a conditional failure.

A make-up examination for purposes of removing a condition or an
incomplete grade must be taken within the next School year. In such cases
students may take either the examination at the condition examination
period or the final examination when next given if within a period of one
year. A fee of $2 is charged for each School of Business examination taken
out of course.

A minimum grade of 65% is required on each make-up examination unless
a higher minimum is specified.

Whatever grade the student obtains on the make-up examination is credited
as the final examination grade, but in no case can the final grade in the course
be more than 70% except in the case of students who have been excused
from taking the regular final examination.

Tests

Four tests in full-year courses and two tests in half-year courses are regularly
scheduled. These tests are regarded as a part of the term or course work.
Since no make-up tests are given, students who miss a test should confer
with their instructors regarding their status.

Marks and Credits

The following system of grading is in use:

Superior Work, A; Above Average Work, B; Average Work, C; Lowest
Passing Grade, D; Unsatisfactory Work, E; Failure, F; Incomplete, Inc.

Students receiving an E, or unsatisfactory work grade, in an examination
or as a final grade in the course, may remove the unsatisfactory grade by
taking a make-up examination when it is next given, or at the time of the
conditional examinations in September. The minimum passing grade of
65% is required on the make-up examination, unless a higher minimum is
designated. In no case will a student taking a make-up examination be
allowed more than a C for a final grade even though a higher grade may be
obtained.

Students receiving an F grade in a course must repeat the course in its
entirety including term work, examinations, and attendance.

The policy is followed of mailing all grade and status reports to students
instead of issuing these reports at the School Office or over the telephone.

A passing grade in a final examination as well as a passing final grade in
the course is necessary in order to receive credit in the course.

Credit for one-half of a full-year course is not generally given, and in any
event only upon approval by the Dean in advance of beginning the course.

In order to qualify for a degree, title, or a certificate the student must
maintain a general average of C for the entire program. This is not interpreted
to mean that each course must be passed with a grade of C, but that the
average of all courses must be at least C. Grades of courses credited by
transfer or by examination are not included in computing averages.

ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES 39

Graduation with Honors

Honors are based upon the excellence of the work performed by the
students in the School. Three honorary distinctions are conferred upon
properly qualified candidates for the bachelor's degree upon graduation:

Highest honors to those who have completed all work with an average of
95% with no grade less than C.

High honors to those who have completed all work with an average of
90% with no grade less than C.

Honors to those who have completed all work with an average of 85%
with no grade less than C.

These honors are subject to further conditions as follows:

To be entitled to honors a student must have completed a minimum ot
two full years of study in the School.

Courses credited by advanced standing whether by transfer or by examina-
tion will be eliminated in determining honors.

Scholarships, Awards, and Loan Funds

The following scholarships and awards are available to students enrolled
for a normal schedule of fifteen or more semester hours of class work who
are pursuing a degree or title program in the School of Business in Boston.
One-fourth of the scholarship is applied to the tuition of the recipient at each
quarterly payment.

School of Business Honor Awards
A half tuition scholarship award is made each year to the highest ranking
student of that year in the Junior, Upper Middler, Lower Middler, Sopho-
more and Freshman classes who re-enrolls the following year for a normal
schedule of study.

A quarter tuition scholarship award is made each year to the second highest
ranking student of that year in the Junior, Upper Middler, Lower Middler,
Sophomore and Freshman classes who re-enrolls the following year for a
normal schedule of study.

To be eligible for either a half or a quarter tuition honor award, a student
entering the School with advanced standing credit, except by examination,
must have completed at least thirty semester hours of classroom work at the
time the award is made.

The Clarkson-Alumni Scholarship
This scholarship, made available through the generosity of the Alumni
Association of the School of Business in Boston, is in memory of George S.
Clarkson, a member of the Class of 1914 and an instructor in accounting for
many years. This scholarship, which is indeterminate in amount, is granted
to the student who obtains the highest final grade in the course in Auditing
unless he is eligible for an award of greater monetary value, in which event the
Clarkson-Alumni award will be made to the highest ranking student in
Auditing who is not eligible for such an award. To be eligible for this scholar-
ship the student must pursue a normal schedule the following year.

Dean Russell Whitney Memorial Scholarship
Alpha Chapter of the Pi Tau Kappa Fraternity sponsors an annual tuition
scholarship in memory of former Dean Russell Whitney. The award consists

40 ADMINISTRATIVE POLICIES

of a half tuition of sixty dollars awarded to the man in the Junior Class of the
School of Business whose qualities of leadership and influence among his
fellow students, whose strength of character, whose record of scholarship
and broad achievement, mark him as outstanding. The award is made avail-
able to the student in his senior year. To be eligible for this scholarship the
student must pursue a normal schedule during his senior year.

Kappa Tau Phi Scholarship
This scholarship award, amounting to thirty dollars, is made available by
the Kappa Tau Phi Sorority. It is granted annually to the woman student
who ranks highest in her class at the end of the Sophomore year unless she
is eligible for an award of greater monetary value, in which event the award
will be made to the highest ranking woman student who is not eligible for
such an award. To be eligible for this scholarship the student must pursue a
normal schedule the following year. In determining this award grades of all
courses completed in the Freshman and Sophomore years shall be considered.

Alumni Loan Fund
The Alumni Association of the School of Business in Boston has provided
a loan fund which is available to students in the Senior and Junior classes in
Boston who are in need of financial assistance in order to continue their
studies. Applications for loans should be addressed to the Dean of the School.
All applications must be approved by the Alumni Loan Fund Committee.

School of Business Loan Fund
By vote of the Student Council a part of the Student Activities fees for
1937-1938 was set aside to provide a loan fund which is available to students
temporarily in need of small loans for tuition or other School charges.
Students needing assistance from this fund should confer with the Dean who
administers it.

Probation and Discipline

The Committee on Education in dealing with students whose work in
the School may be unsatisfactory, or whose conduct is such as to make it
inadvisable for them to continue as members of the student body, considers
each case upon its individual merits. The following general principles are
kept in mind in handling such cases:

Students whose scholarship in any given year is unsatisfactory may be
dropped from the School or may be placed on probation with the privilege
of spending a year in review.

When a student is placed on probation, the probation is formally imposed
for a definite time and can only be extended by approval of the Committee
on Education.

This Committee has the authority to dismiss from the School or place on
probation at any time or to strike off from the list of candidates for the degree
any student whom it may deem unworthy either on account of unsatisfactory
scholarship or for any great defect of conduct or character. The Committee
may ask any student to withdraw from the School who is obviously out of
sympathy with the aims and ideals of the School.

School of Business

Qeneral ^nformatioru

Classrooms and Libraries

The classrooms are furnished with modern equipment and are thoroughly
adapted to evening school work. Improvements in classroom facilities are
constantly being made to meet the needs of the student body.

In connection with the General Library of the University in Boston a
special section is devoted to books on business subjects. In addition, the
leading trade and business magazines are available for student use. Additions
are constantly being made to the business section of the Library in recognition
of the new demands for business education and research. The reading rooms
of the Library are open Monday through Friday from 8:45 a.m. to 10 p.m.
They close at 5 p.m. on Saturdays and are not open Sundays and holidays.

All members of the School in Boston are entitled to the privilege of using
the Boston Public Library including the Business Branch at 20 City Hall
Avenue. The same privilege is accorded students in the Divisions for the use
of the libraries in their respective cities.

Textbooks and Supplies

The Northeastern University Bookstore is a department of the University
and is operated for the convenience of the student body. All books and
supplies which are required by the students for their work in the University
may be purchased at the Bookstore. In addition, the Bookstore also carries
a large number of general supplies. In Boston the main store is situated in the
basement of Richards Hall.

Student Council

The social and extracurricular life of the School is in charge of Student
Councils consisting of representatives from each class or school group. In
addition to arranging for occasional social affairs, special lectures, and meet-
ings, the council represents the interests of the student body. The faculty
and the officials advise with the council in regard to School policies.

Honor Fraternity

Sigma Epsilon Rho is the honor fraternity in the School of Business. Its
purposes are:

To promote acquaintance and good fellowship among those men who have
attained highest scholastic standing in the School.

To stimulate the student body to higher scholastic accomplishment through
the bearing, influence, and work of these selected men.

To develop methods of mutual improvement and advancement among
the members of this fraternity.

To support high moral, professional and scholastic ideals.

Only students with honor standing are admitted to the fraternity. Admis-
sion is by invitation, after nomination by the School faculty.

An outstanding business book is awarded each year by Sigma Epsilon Rho
Fraternity to the highest ranking student for that year in each of the Sopho-
more, Lower Middler, Upper Middler, and Junior classes. Students will
receive the award only in the event that they enroll for the subsequent year.

School of Business

tuition and Other ^ees

Matriculation Fee

The University matriculation fee of $5 must accompany the initial applica-
tion for admission to the University. This fee is not refundable.

University Fee

All students enrolled in the School of Business are charged a University fee
based on the number of semester hours for which the student is enrolled. The
charge is 70 cents a semester hour of classroom work, but not exceeding $10
in any one year. This fee covers in part library, general materials, general
university service charges, and similar items for which separate fees are fre-
quently charged by other colleges and universities. It is payable by all students
regardless of date of admission or the curriculum in which they are enrolled.
For students enrolled for the entire year, the University fee is payable one-half
when the student enrolls in September, and one-half with the January pay-
ment. If enrollment is for a single semester, the fee is payable with the first
payment of the semester.

Tuition Fees

Tuition fees for courses in the School of Business are based on a charge of
$8 a semester hour.

Complete Programs
A student carrying a normal program of three full-year courses throughout
the School year will complete fifteen semester hours of work for which the
charge is $120. This charge is payable in four payments of $30, the first being
due during the opening week of School and the other three during the weeks
of November 13, January 15, and March 5.

Single Courses
The charge for each half-year course carrying two and one-half semester
hours' credit is $20, payable in two payments of $10, and for each full-year
course carrying five semester hours' credit, $40, payable in four payments of
$10, except that payment for any course completed in one semester must be
made during the semester in which the course is completed.

Deferred Payment Privilege
Students who would be denied the advantages of a systematic education if
required to meet the tuition payments in the manner specified above, may
make other payment arrangements with the Dean. A nominal charge is made
for this service.

Courses in Other Departments of the University
School of Business students assigned to courses in other departments of
the University are charged the tuition rates and other fees effective in the
departments to which they are assigned.

TUITION AND OTHER FEES 43

Late Registration

No reduction in tuition is made for late registration. A student is neither
entitled to classroom privileges nor considered as registered and enrolled
until tuition due has been paid or satisfactory arrangements made in person
with the Dean,

Student Activities Fee

An activities fee is charged all students on the following basis:

$1 for students enrolled for courses not exceeding five semester hours.
$2 for students enrolled for courses exceeding five semester hours.
The fee is payable during the opening week in September. Students register-
ing in the second semester pay the fee at the time of registration. It is adminis-
tered by the University authorities in the interest of the students, and is used
primarily to promote extracurricular activities.

Other Fees

A fee of $2 is charged for each make-up examination or advanced standing
examination. This fee must be paid on or before the date of the examination.

A fee of $10 is charged for each of the Business Readings courses. One-
half is payable with the November tuition payment and one-half with the
March tuition payment. This fee applies only to those who elect to submit
Business Readings in lieu of a thesis, and is payable ordinarily during the
Upper Middler and Junior years.

A thesis fee of $20 is required of all degree candidates who elect to write
theses. This fee is payable upon presentation of the thesis which is due not
later than March 15 of the year in which the student expects to receive the
degree.

The University graduation fee, charged to those who are candidates for a
degree, is $10, payable on or before May 1st of the year in which the student
expects to graduate. A fee of $5 is charged to all candidates for a title or
certificate and is payable on or before May 1st of the year the program is to
be completed.

Expense for Books and Materials

Students purchase their own textbooks and working materials. The cost
varies according to the subjects for which the student is enrolled. The average
cost for a normal program of three subjects is about $13, with a maximum of
approximately $20. The textbooks for single courses range from $1.25 to $5.

General Financial Information

Checks should be drawn payable to Northeastern University.

Students who have withdrawn from a course for good cause and who are
permitted to repeat it are credited with the tuition previously paid on that
course, provided they re-enroll for the same course within the next two
college years. The credit cannot be applied, however, until the balance due
on the course has been paid.

Students are not permitted to attend class sessions or take any examinations
or tests until they have paid their tuition fees or have made satisfactory
arrangements for payments.

44 TUITION AND OTHER FEES

Students will not be advanced in class standing, or permitted to re-enroll
in the University, nor will degrees be conferred until all financial obligations
to the University have been met.

No certificate of honorable dismissal will be issued to any student who has
not fully met his financial obligations to the University.

Withdrawals and Refunds Policy

In the event a student is obliged to withdraw from the School in which he
is enrolled for causes deemed adequate by the Committee on Withdrawals,
the balance of the tuition paid after the following deductions have been
made will be refunded:

a. Four per cent of the total yearly tuition charge shall be deducted for
each week of attendance or fraction thereof, in the event of enrollment
for a full School year.

b. Ten per cent of the total tuition charged shall be deducted for each week
of attendance or fraction thereof, in the event of enrollment for a
semester.

The amount of tuition to be charged in the case of withdrawals shall be
computed as indicated under a and h above from the date of each quarterly
payment.

Matriculation, examination, thesis, and other fees are not refundable
except that graduation and certificate charges will be refunded in case of
non-qualification.

No refunds are granted unless the application for withdrawal is filed within
forty-five days after the student has ceased attendance.

u 2 -o c '

Tj a. o ;^ •

i3 O o M

K Ul

^ z

•I 3)

S o

2 z

- 2

-J3

)->

O
u
u

■J

f-l

_ .5) n n cj

4 oj 2 Ji

^-o

*-•

o
O

M
O

l-<

i^i

, '

t-i

nan

cqQ

W CO

-T3

U 00 t-

u u

Q .2

£3 W

2 :S

— CD

^ o ca rt
S I p- pc5

C -^

O C
XI 3

■S u

=:; o

o o

*^ >•

6 S

•a a

S 9

u .00

1- c

O V

Z >

^2 8
o "o y

2-^ 2i
j3 oo ti
u -3 2

»- t- -S?

« n K
O 5 -

00 ■" Pr

.2 c

OJ IJ <"

zs trt u
^ -1 C

QS5

z
S

H
<

>^
H

u.
O

C > li

t£ yz

>. ^ s

■ti ^ -o
U —I tu

3 TD

00^ f.^ ^
^3 *-» u 3

00 s
I- u

•o

"E-

3- J=

5" p

— -a

3 "O

3- o n'
n 2 »
:;• 3 3

S 5' ^

=" 5'

n ft

_ 2. O

fi' n O

< " "^

n 3^ C

!U o ">

a o 5"

3 O S

O (T>

.cr s

n P

^ K n

<■ o- E.

rt ^ 1

oi C f»

• g Ci.

3 S

3 :r

o* "
(t .-.

3 3
o c

3 O-

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

COEDUCATIONAL

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

Offers a broad program of college subjects serving as a foundation for the understanding of
modern culture, social relations, and technical achievement. Varied opportunities available
for vocational specialization. Degree: Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Arts.

COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING

Offers curricula in Civil, Mechanical (with Industrial and Aeronautical options). Electrical,
and Chemical Engineering. Classroom study is supplemented by experiment and research in
well-equipped laboratories. Degree: Bachelor of Science in the professional field of specialization.

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

SCHOOL OF LAW

SCHOOL OF BUSINESS

Offers curricula through evening classes leading to the degree of Bachelor of Business
Administration with appropriate specification in Accounting, Management, and Engineering
and Business. Preparation for C.P.A. examinations. Intensive programs arranged to meet
special needs.

EVENING COURSES OF THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

Certain courses of the College of Liberal Arts are offered during evening hours in the fields
of Biology, Chemistry, Economics, Engljsh, History, Government, Psychology and Sociology.
A special program preparing for admission to the School of Law is also available. The program
is equivalent in hours to one-half the requirement for the A.B. or S.B. degree. Special courses
also available. Degree of Associate in Arts conferred.

The Colleges of Liberal Arts, Engineering, and Business Administration offer day programs
and are conducted on the Co-operative Plan. After the freshman year students may alternate
their periods of study with periods of work in the employ of business or industrial concerns.
Under this plan they gain valuable experience and earn a large part of their college expenses.
Full-time curricula are available for students who do not desire the Co-operative Plan.

In addition to the above schools the University has affiliated with it and conducts the
Lincoln Technical Institute offering, through evening classes, courses of college grade in
various fields of engineering leading to the degree of Associate in Engineering; and the Lincoln
Preparatory School, an accredited evening school preparing for college entrance and offering
other standard high school programs.

For further information regarding any of the above schools, address

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY
BOSTON, MASS.
School of Law Other Schools

47 Mt. Vernon Street Telephone: KENmore 5800 360 Huntington Avenue

Springfield, Mass.
114 Chestnut St.
Tel.: Spr. 6-3681

NORTHEASTERN
UNIVERSITY

College ofClberalMts

BULLETIN OF EVENING COURSES

kr\noKiT\Qer[\Qr{\ for 1945-1946

BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSE

OFFICE HOURS

June 21, 1945-August 10, 1945

Monday and Tuesday 8:45 a.m.- 9:00 p.m.

Wednesday through Friday 8:45 a.m.- 5:00 p.m.

August 13, 1945-June 8, 1946

Monday through Friday 8:45 a.m.- 9:15 p.m.

Saturdays

Until Labor Day . .
During September
After October 1 . . .

45 A.M.-12:00 P.M.
45 A.M.- 4:00 P.M.
45 A.M.- 1 :00 P.M.

June 10, 1946-August 9, 1946

Monday and Tuesday 8:45 a.m.- 9:00 p.m.

Wednesday through Friday 8:45 a.m.- 5:00 p.m.

The office is closed on all legal holidays..

GIFTS AND BEQUESTS

Northeastern University will welcome gifts and bequests for the follow-
ing purposes:

(a) For its building program.

(b) For general endowment.

It is suggested that, when possible, those contemplating gifts or bequests
confer with the President of the University regarding the University's
needs before legal papers are drawn.

Gifts and bequests should be made only in the University's legal name,
which is "Northeastern University."

For further information or an interview

ADDRESS: D/Vecfor of Evening Courses

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

360 Huntington Avenue, Boston 15, Mass.

Telephone: KENmore 5800

NORTHEASTERN
UNIVERSITY

College ofObemlMts

BULLETIN OF EVENING COURSES

COEDUCATIONAL

The University is located at the entrance to the Huntington

Avenue subway within nine minutes of Park Street and

easily accessible from all points.

1945-1946

CONTENTS

Page
Calendar 4

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

The Northeastern University Corporation 6

General University Committees 7

Officers of Administration 8

Chairmen of Instructional Departments 8

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS
Evening Courses

General Statement 9-1 1

Location 11-12

Statement of Purpose 13

Programs 1 6-1 8

Chemistry 17

Labor- Relations Institute 18

Law-Liberal Arts 16

Pre-Medical, Pre-Dental and Pre-Veterinarian 16

Requirements for the Degree of Associate -in Arts 14

Requirements for A.B. or S.B. Degree 15

Admission Requirements 15

General Information 19

Advanced Standing 19

Application for Admission 19

Registration 19

Attendance and Examinations 19

Grades 20

Honor List 20

Scholarships 20

Tuition and Fees 21

Description of Courses 22-30

THE NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY CORPORATION

Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman

Frank Lincoln Richardson, Vice-Chairman

Carl Stephens Ell, President oj the University

Henry Nathaniel Andrews, Treasurer

Everett Avery Churchill, Secretary

Joseph Florence Abbott

Charles Francis Adams

WiLMAN Edward Adams

Roger Amory

Arthur Atwood Ballantine

George Louis Barnes

Thomas Prince Beal

Farwell Gregg Bemis

Samuel Bruce Black

Henry Goddard Bradlee

George Augustus Burnham

Godfrey Lowell Cabot

Paul Codman Cabot

Walter Channing

William Converse Chick

Paul Foster Clark

William H. Collins

Sears B. Condit

Albert Morton Creighton

Edward Dana

Edward Dane

Justin Whitlock Dart

William James Davidson

Bernard W. Doyle

Paul Augustus Draper

David Frank Edwards

William Partridge Ellison

Joseph Buell Ely

Robert Greenough Emerson

John Wells Farley

Allan Forbes

Ernest Bigelow Freeman

Franklin Wile Ganse

Harvey Dow Gibson

Merrill Griswold

George Hansen

Henry Ingraham Harriman

Carroll Sherlock Harvey

Harvey P. Hood

Chandler Hovey

Weston Howland

Howard Munson Hubbard

Maynard Hutchinson

Raymond Winfield James

Arthur Stoddard Johnson

Charles Berkley Johnson

Jacob Joseph Kaplan

Harry Hamilton Kerr

Frank Howard Lahey

Halfdan Lee

Galen David Light

James Franklin McElwain

Hugh Dean McLellan

Edward Abbott MacMaster

John Russell Macomber

Albert Edward Marshall

Harold Francis Mason

Irwin Likely Moore

Fred Lester Morgan

Irving Edwin Moultrop

Clarence Lucian Newton

Samuel Norwich

Olaf Olsen

AuGusTiN Hamilton Parker, Jr.

George Edwin Pierce

Roger Pierce

Matthew Porosky

Frederick Sanford Pratt

Roger Preston

Sidney Rabinovitz

Stuart Craig Rand

William McNear Rand

James Lorin Richards

Harold Bours Richmond

Charles Forest Rittenhouse

John James Robinson

Robert Billings Rugg

Leverett Saltonstall

Russell Maryland Sanders

Andrew Sebastian Seiler

Frank Palmer Speare

Russell Henry Stafford

Francis Robert Carnegie Steele

Charles Stetson

Earl Place Stevenson

Robert Treat Paine Storer

Frank Horace Stuart

Edward Watson Supple

Ralph Emerson Thompson

James Vincent Toner

Eliot Wadsworth

EusTis Walcott

Edwin Sibley Webster

Sinclair Weeks

GENERAL UNIVERSITY COMMITTEES

EXECUTIVE COUNCIL

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman
Everett Avery Churchill Milton John Schlagenhauf

Albert Ellsworth Everett William Crombie White

UNIVERSITY CABINET

Carl Stephens Ell, Chairman
Everett Avery Churchill Winthrop Eliot Nightingale

Albert Ellsworth Everett Rudolf Oscar Oberg

Roger Stanton Hamilton Edward Snow Parsons

Charles William Havice John Butler Puosley

Wilfred Stanley Lake Milton John Schlagenhauf

James Wallace Lees J. Kenneth Stevenson

Harold Wesley Melvin William Crombie White

Stuart Mead Wright

LIBRARY COMMITTEE

Everett Avery Churchill, Chairman
Albert Ellsworth Everett Wilfred Stanley Lake

Roger Stanton Hamilton Myra White

William Crombie White

COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

Evening Courses

OFFICERS OF ADMINISTRATION

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., Sc.D., President of the University

Frank Palmer Speare, M.H., LL.D., President Emeritus

Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D., Vice-President oj the University

Albert Ellsworth Everett, B.S., M.B.A., Director of Evening Division

Wilfred Stanley Lake, A,B., M.A., Ph.D., Dean

Milton John Schlagenhauf, A.B., B.D., M.A., Director of Admissions

CHAIRMEN OF INSTRUCTIONAL DEPARTMENTS

Charles Frederick Barnason, A.B., A.M., Ph.D., Professor of Modern Languages
Res. 122 Downer Ave., Hingham

Stanley Goddard Estes, A.B., M.A., Ph.D., Professor of Psychology
Res. 60 Pinckney St., Boston. On Leave of Absence.

Roger Stanton Hamilton, A.B., M.A., Ph.D., Professor of Economics
Res. 1367 Walnut St., Newton Highlands

Charles William Havice, A.B., M.A., S.T.B., Ph.D., Professor of Sociology
Res. 178 Goden St., Belmont

Frederick William Holmes, A.B., M.A,, Professor of English
Res. 43 Lincoln St., Dedham

Stanley Demetrius Miroyiannis, S.B., M.A., Ph.D., Professor of Biology
Res. 8 Cumberland St., Boston

Carl Frederick Muckenhoupt, A.B., S.B., Ph.D., Professor of Physics
Res. 332 Winchester St., Newton Highlands

Joseph Spear, A.B., M.A., Professor of Mathematics
Res. 31 Matchett St., Brighton

Arthur Andrew Vernon, S.B., M.S., Ph.D., Professor of Chemistry
Res. 14 Standish St., Newton Highlands

GENERAL STATEMENT

Northeastern University is incorporated as a philanthropic institu-
tion under the General Laws of Massachusetts. The State Legislature, by
special enactment, has given the University general degree granting powers.

The Corporation of Northeastern University consists of men who
occupy responsible positions in business and the professions. This Corpora-
tion elects from its membership a Board of Trustees in whom the control
of the institution is vested. The Board of Trustees has four standing com-
mittees: (a) an Executive Committee which serves as an Ad Interim Com-
mittee between the regular meetings of the Board of Trustees and has
general supervision of the financial and educational policies of the Uni-
versity; (b) a Committee on Buildings which has general supervision over
the building needs of the University; (c) a Committee on Funds and In-
vestments which has the responsibility of administering the funds of the
University; (d) a Development Committee which is concerned with
furthering the development plans of the University.

Founded in 1898, Northeastern University, from the outset, had as its
dominant purpose the discovery of human and social needs and the meet-
ing of these needs in distinctive and highly serviceable ways. While sub-
scribing to the most progressive educational thought and practice, the
University has not duplicated the programs of other institutions but has
sought "to bring education more directly into the service of human needs."

With respect to program, Northeastern has limited itself:

— To offering, in its several schools, basic curricula from which

non-essentials have been eliminated;

— To effective teaching;

— To advising and guiding students;

— To giving students the chance to build well-rounded personalities

through a balanced program of extracurricular activities.

The Northeastern Plan of Education is especially designed for the
student who must earn while he learns. In the main, it consists of two
definite types of education:

— Co-operative Education by Day,

— Adult Education by Night.

The plan has been developed in such a way that experience in jobs
with pay is utilized to help students of limited financial resources secure an
education and at the same time gain the maximum educational benefit
from their practical experience. So far as the New England States are
concerned. Northeastern University is the only institution whose day

10 Northeastern University

colleges, other than the School of Law, are conducted under the Co-
operative Plan.

The several schools and programs of the University are conducted either
under the name "Northeastern University" or by its affiliated schools,
The Lincoln Schools and The Huntington Day School for Boys. The
following is a brief outline of the principal types of educational oppor-
tunities offered:

1. In the field of Co-operative Education there are three day colleges
— the College of Liberal Arts, the College of Engineering, and the
College of Business Administration. The College of Liberal Arts offers
majors in the usual fields of the arts and the sciences leading to the
degrees of Bachelor of Arts and Bachelor of Science. The College of
Engineering, one of the largest engineering colleges in the United
States, has curricula in Civil, Mechanical (with Industrial and Aero-
nautical options). Electrical, and Chemical Engineering. The College
of Business Administration has curricula in Accounting, Marketing
and Advertising, and Industrial Administration. The College of En-
gineering and the College of Business Administration confer the degree
of Bachelor of Science with specification indicating the field of special-
ization. The Co-operative Plan under which all of these day colleges
operate enables the student to alternate regular periods of classroom
instruction with supervised employment in an industrial or commercial
position, thus combining theory and practice in an exceedingly effec-
tive manner. Apart from the educational advantages of the Co-
operative Plan is the opportunity for self-support while the student is
pursuing his studies at Northeastern University. During the co-opera-
tive periods, students not only gain experience but are also paid for
their services. Approximately three hundred business and industrial
concerns co-operate with Northeastern University in making this
program eff'ective.

2. The School of Law conducts both a day and an evening undergraduate
program which prepares for admission to the bar and for the practice
of the law and leads to the degree of Bachelor of Laws.

3. The Adult Education Program has been developed in the evening work
of the School of Law as indicated above, in the School of Business, and
in the evening courses of the College of Liberal Arts. The School of
Business has curricula in Managerrient, Accounting, and Engineering
and Business. This School awards the Bachelor of Business Adminis-
tration degree with specification. A division of the School of Business is
also conducted in Springfield with curricula in Accounting, Manage-
ment, and Engineering and Business, leading to the Bachelor of Busi-
ness Administration degree. The College of Liberal Arts offers certain
of its courses during evening hours constituting a program, three years
in length, equivalent in hours to one-half the requirements for the A.B.
or S.B. degree and providing a general education and preparation for
admission to the School of Law. The degree of Associate in Arts is
conferred upon those who complete this program.

Evening Courses 11

4. The Adult Education Program has also been developed through the
Lincoln Schools, which are affiliated with and conducted by North-
eastern University. The classes in these schools are held at convenient
evening hours. The Lincoln Technical Institute offers curricula upon
a college level in various phases of engineering leading to the degree
of Associate in Engineering; whereas the Lincoln Preparatory School,
accredited by the New England College Admissions Board, prepares
students for admission to college and offers other standard high school
programs.

5. The Huntington Day School for Boys, also affiliated with and con-
ducted by Northeastern University, is the outgrowth of a demand in
the city of Boston for an urban preparatory school with high educa-
tional standards which would furnish thorough preparation for ad-
mission to the leading colleges and universities. While easily accessible
to the various sections of Boston and to the suburbs, it has the facilities
of a country day school and offers a country day school program. This
School is one of the leading preparatory schools of the country.

LOCATION OF UNIVERSITY BUILDINGS

Northeastern University is located in Boston, a city which is rich in
educational and cultural opportunities. The University center is on
Huntington Avenue just beyond Massachusetts Avenue and opposite the
Boston Opera House. Here on an eight-acre campus are located the edu-
cational buildings of the University except that of the School of Law.
Evening classes for the College of Liberal Arts are held at the University
center on Huntington Avenue.

Richards Hall

Richards Hall at 360 Huntington Avenue contains over one hundred
thousand square feet of floor space devoted to administrative and instruc-
tional purposes. On the first floor are the general administrative offices of
the University. The University bookstore, the "Husky Hut" and the
student checkroom are located on the ground floor. There are three large
lecture halls and numerous classrooms and laboratories. The office of the
Director of the evening courses of the College of Liberal Arts is located on
the first floor of this building.

New Building

This building contains forty-two thousand square feet of floor space.
Here are located the Chemical Engineering and Biological laboratories, a
large Commons Room open to day and evening students, and eighteen class-
rooms and lecture halls.

East Building

This building contains the general University library, classrooms, and
certain laboratories.

12 Northeastern University

South Building

The South Building of the University contains certain laboratories, a
large lecture hall, and several classrooms.

Beacon Hill Building

The Beacon Hill Building, located at 47 Mt. Vernon Street, within a
few minutes' walk of the State House, and occupied exclusively by the
Law School, contains administrative offices, a library, classrooms, student
lounges, and other facilities.

TRANSPORTATION

The University center is easily reached from the various railroad sta-
tions and from all points on the Boston Elevated System. The new Hunt-
ington Avenue Subway comes to the surface at the University center.
Ample parking space is available for the use of students coming by auto-
mobile.

Evening Courses 13

THE COLLEGE OF LIBERAL ARTS

Evening Courses

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE

The College of Liberal Arts through its evening courses offers a program
in general education and a special pre-legal program preparing for admis-
sion to Northeastern University School of Law.

By conducting its classes at convenient evening hours, it gives high
school graduates who are obliged to seek work immediately upon gradua-
tion an opportunity to continue their education. In general those who
seek admission to the evening classes of the College of Liberal Arts are
divided into two groups.

The first group is composed of those who wish to continue their educa-
tion along cultural lines. The second group is composed of those who wish
to prepare for admission to the School of Law. Under the rules of the
Supreme Judicial Court in relation to the admission of attorneys in Massa-
chusetts, an applicant is required to complete one-half of the work accept-
able for a bachelor's degree in an approved college or university before he
begins the study of law. The evening pre-legal program of the College of
Liberal Arts is especially designed for those who wish to prepare for ad-
mission to either the day or evening division of the Northeastern Univer-
sity School of Law,

Increasingly the value of a broad cultural education is being realized.
This is recognized in the pre-legal study required before admission to law
school in nearly all states. It is also recognized in newly required courses
of a cultural nature for accounting and engineering training. This cultural
education is obtainable either before or after the completion of one's
specific vocational training. Not only is a cultural education valuable in
and of itself, but from a strictly vocational point of view it is highly im-
portant, the broadly educated man or woman in many instances having a
distinct advantage so far as vocational advancement is concerned.

14 Northeastern University

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE
OF ASSOCIATE IN ARTS

Each evening course meets the same academic standards and carries
the same semester hour credit as the corresponding course in the day
program of the College of Liberal Arts. The courses, however, have been
carefully selected to meet the needs of evening students.

The following requirements must be fulfilled by candidates for the degree
of Associate in Arts:

1. A candidate must complete a total of not less than sixty-eight semester hours
of academic work with a degree of proficiency acceptable to the faculty.

2. A candidate must meet through his program of studies the minimum course

requirements listed below:

Semester Hours
Required

Economics 4

English 14

Government 6

History 8

Psychology or Sociology 4

Science 8

Other Courses 24

Total 68

The above requirements may be met by class attendance three nights
a week, forty weeks each year for the three years. In some cases it may be
advisable for the best interest of the student to take more than three years
to complete this program.

Graduation with Honor

Candidates who have maintained an honor grade average will be
graduated with honor. To be eligible for honors a student must have
completed a minimum of two full years of study in the College of Liberal
Arts.

Evening Courses 15

REQUIREMENTS FOR A.B. OR S.B. DEGREE

Any student who completes the requirements for the Associate in Arts
degree and who also meets the requirements for admission to the Day
College may become a candidate for a bachelor's degree in the College of
Liberal Arts by completing an additional sixty-seven semester hours of
work and by meeting major, minor and language requirements in the Day
College.

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS

Applicants for admission to the evening courses as candidates for the
degree of Associate in Arts must qualify by one of the following methods:

1. Graduation from an approved course of study in an accredited secondary
school.

2. Completion of fifteen secondary school units with a degree of proficiency
satisfactory to the Department of Admissions.

Applicants who later desire to qualify for the A.B. or S.B. degree or to
enter law school must have included in their secondary school course the
prescribed subjects in either Group A or Group B.

Group A Group B

English 3 English 3

*Foreign Language 3 or 4 Mathematics 2 or 3

(Ancient or Modern) Natural Sciences 1

Social Sciences 2 **Electives 8 or 9

* *Electives 6 or 7

Total 15 Total 15

*One year of a foreign language is not accepted. Therefore, this requirement may
consist either of three years of one language or two years of each of two languages.

**Not less than four of the "electives" must be in one or more of the following
academic branches: Languages, Natural Sciences, Mathematics, Social Sciences,
History.

16 Northeastern University

LAW — LIBERAL ARTS

(Combined Program)

The combined curriculum in the College of Liberal Arts and the School
of Law enables students to reduce by one year the time ordinarily required
for obtaining the A.B. or S.B. and the LL.B. degree. Students who have
completed before entering the School of Law a total of 105 semester hours
of academic work, of which at least 70 must have been earned in the North-
eastern University College of Liberal Arts, and who have fulfilled all other
graduation requirements, will receive the A.B. or S.B. degree upon the
satisfactory completion of the full first year program in the Day Division
of the School of Law. Students who enter the Evening Division of the
School of Law will be eligible for the first degree upon satisfactory comple-
tion of the full equivalent of the first year of the day Law School program.

In both instances the first degree will be conferred at the next commence-
ment following determination of eligibility for the first degree.

BIOLOGY

The following courses are offered for those wishing further study in the
field of Biology. The four courses comprise the Biology requirements for
the Pre-Medical, Pre-Dental and Pre- Veterinarian Programs.

Ble General Zoology 3 semester hour credits

B2e General Botany 3 semester hour credits

B5e Vertebrate Zoology 2 semester hour credits

B6e Vertebrate Zoology 2 semester hour credits

Evening Courses 17

Associate in Science Program in
CHEMISTRY

This program is a sequence of courses covering more than one-half of
the course requirements in Chemistry for the Bachelor of Science Degree.
The entire program can be completed in three years. The three-year
period is based on prerequisite courses in college algebra, trigonometry
and physics.

Fir$t Semester Second Semester

Prerequisite: College Algebra, Trigonometry and Physics
First Year
Hours Hours

per Week per Week

M3 Analytical Geometry \ ^j. M4 Integral Calculus 2}^

M5 Differential Calculus/' ■ '^ Ch2e General Chemistry 2}^

Chle General Chemistry 23^ ChL2e General Chemistry

ChLle General Chemistry Laboratory 3

Laboratory 3

Second Year

Ch3e Qualitative Analysis. . . 2J^ Ch4e Quantitative Analysis. . 3
ChL3e Qualitative Analysis ChL4e Quantitative Analysis

Laboratory 6 * Laboratory 7**

Third Year

Ch5e Organic Chemistry 23^ Ch6e Organic Chemistry 23^

ChL5e Organic Chemistry ChL6e Organic Chemistry

Laboratory 3 Laboratory 3

Ch7e Physical Chemistry] Ch8e Physical Chemistry!

ChL7e Physical Chemistry i. . . 3 ChL8e Physical Chemistry i. . . 3

Laboratory J Laboratory J

•Meets two evenings per week — three hours per evening.
* *Meets two evenings per week — one evening of three hours and the second four
hours.

18 Northeastern University

LABOR RELATIONS INSTITUTE

The management of labor relations presents the most vital and challeng-
ing aspect of our industrial development of the immediate future. Con-
tinuance of our American way of industrial democracy demands a har-
monious understanding of the underlying principles of labor and industrial
management for the peaceful adjustment of their common problems.

The Labor Relations Institute of Northeastern University was organized
to serve this need. It is dedicated to the service of both labor and manage-
ment. It directly concerns the work of industrial and labor executives,
plant managers, personnel directors, union shop councillors and stewards.
Teachers in the fields of management and the social sciences will also find
that the program provides a valuable academic background for their
instruction.

PROGRAM OF COURSES

First Semester Second Semester

Courses Common to both Management and Labor

Collective Bargaining — Industrial Psychology

Industrial Background and De-
velopment in U. S. Government and Labor-Management
Wage Administration — Relations

Job Analysis and Evaluation Laws and Agencies of Collective

Wage Payment Plans Bargaining

Courses Particularly for Management

(Presented from Management's Viewpoint)

Personnel Organization Contract Negotiation

and Administration and Administration

Public Speaking Management Seminar
AND Conference Leadership

Courses Particularly for Labor

(Presented from Labor's Viewpoint)

Union Organization Contract Negotiation

AND Administration and Administration

Public Speaking Labor Seminar

and Conference Leadership

To complete the program for a certificate requires two evenings a week
for two years. It is designed to accommodate those students wishing to take
individual courses in preference to the full program. The courses have
college credits in either the College of Liberal Arts or the School of Busi-
ness upon prior approval of the dean of the respective school.

Students registering for the full program will take each semester one of
the courses common to both management and labor and one course from
among those designed particularly for management or for labor according
to his choice.

Evening Courses 19

GENERAL INFORMATION

Advanced Standing

Students transferring from approved colleges will be admitted to ad-
vanced standing provided their records warrant it. Whenever a student
enters with advanced standing and later proves to have inadequate
preparation in any of his prerequisite subjects, the faculty reserves the
right to require the student to make up such deficiencies.

Application for Admission

The college year begins in September. Students are also admitted at the
beginning of the second semester to courses for which they have the
required background.

Each applicant for admission is required to file an application blank
setting forth his previous education and the name of one person to whom
reference may be made concerning his character and previous training.

Inside the back cover of this catalogue is an application blank. It should
be filled out in ink and forwarded to the Director of the Evening Courses
of the College of Liberal Arts, Northeastern University, 360 Huntington
Avenue, Boston 15, Massachusetts. Upon receipt of the application, the
Director obtains the previous school records, the statement from the refer-
ence and, after considering these, informs the applicant as to his eligibility
for admission.

Applications should be filed preferably before the registration period,
thus allowing time to determine eligibility for admission and to adjust
any schedule problems before the opening night. Applicants are urged to
visit the school for a personal interview if it is possible for them to do so.

Applicants seeking advanced standing should arrange to have tran-
scripts of their previous college records forwarded with their application.

Registration

The filing of the application for admission does not constitute registra-
tion. All students are required to register at the college and arrange for
the payment of their tuition during the registration period. (See calendar,
page 4.)

Attendance and Examinations

Attendance is required of all students at recitations and lectures con-
tinuously throughout the academic year.

Regular final examinations are held at the close of each course.

No student will be permitted to take a final examination in a course
who has been present at less than seventy per cent of the lectures. To be

20 Northeastern University

entitled to attendance credit a student must be present at least one hour
in a one and one-half hour lecture.

Make-up examinations are scheduled in March and September of each
year. (See calendar, page 4.) Unsatisfactory and incomplete grades must
be removed not later than the next school year following that in which

they were received.

Grades

The work of each student shall be graded upon examinations according
to the following scale:

A Superior \ Honor Grades

B Above average j

C Average

D Lowest passing grade

E Unsatisfactory*

F Failure * *

I Incomplete — no examination***

Honor List

The Honor List, issued at the end of each semester, contains the names
of all students taking a full program who have an honor grade average in
all subjects with no grade below "C" in any subject.

Scholarships

Partial tuition scholarships are awarded annually to the two highest
ranking students of the freshman and middler classes. These awards are
made during the summer and are based on the record made during the
previous school year.

Freshman Class — One $80.00 scholarship is awarded to the highest ranking
student.

One $40.00 scholarship is awarded to the second highest rank-
ing student.

Middler Class — Similar awards are made to the two highest ranking students.

In order to be eligible for these awards, students must fulfill the follow-
ing conditions:

1 . They must be carrying a full program — not less than twenty semester hours.

2. They must register for a full program in the fall succeeding the award.

* An unsatisfactory grade may be made up by taking the make-up examination and
obtaining a satisfactory grade.

* * A failure may be made up only by repeating the course in its entirety and obtain-
ing a satisfactory grade.

* * * An incomplete grade may be made up by taking the next make-up or regular
examination.

Evening Courses 21

TUITION AND FEES

Application Fee

An application fee of S5.00 is required when the application for ad-
mission is filed. This fee is not refundable.

Tuition

A full-year program for 1945-1946 will consist of twenty-four semester
hours and all students carrying such a program are charged $160 which
is payable in four installments. The first installment is $35 and is due on
September 7. The remaining installments are due as follows: $45, Novem-
ber 26; $40, February 11 ; $40, April 29. Students carrying less than a full
program of twenty-four semester hours are charged at the rate of $8 per
semester hour.

University Fee

All students enrolled in any school of the University are charged a
University Fee which is based on the number of semester hours for which
the student is enrolled. The charge is fifty cents per semester hour of class
work, not to exceed $10 in any one year. This fee covers in part library
costs, general material costs, general university service charges and similar
items for which separate fees are frequently charged by other colleges and
universities. For students enrolled for programs extending over the full
year this fee is payable one-half with the September tuition payment and
one-half with the February tuition payment. In the case of students
enrolled for single courses the fee is payable at the beginning of the course.

Late Payment Fee

Students who do not pay their quarterly tuition bills during the week
when they are due must pay a late payment fee of $1.25. This is a fixed
fee and does not vary with the amount of the tuition bill.

Examination Fees
A fee of $2.00 is charged for each make-up examination taken by a
student.

Graduation Fee
A graduation fee of $5.00 is charged each student during the senior
year. This fee is payable with the fourth installment of tuition on April 29.

Payments

Checks or money orders should be drawn payable to Northeastern
University.

Withdrawals and Refunds

In the event a student is obliged to withdraw from the school for causes
deemed adequate by the Committee on Administration, the unused tuition
may be refunded in accordance with the regulations governing refunds.

22 Northeastern University

DESCRIPTION OF COURSES

Not all courses are offered every year. The University reserves the right to with-
draw any course in which there are less than eight enrollments.

ECONOMICS
Ec 3e Economic Principles

A thorough grounding in the fundamental principles and laws of economics is
the aim of this basic course. The main topics include the nature and organization
of production, the nature and importance of wants, the relation of money and
prices, the process of exchange, and the nature of international trade.

2 semester hour credits

Ec 4e Economic Principles

A continuation of Ec 3e. A careful analysis is made of the determination of price
under conditions of competition and monopoly, and of the distribution of wealth
and income in the form of wages, economic rent, interest, and profits. The elements
of insurance are discussed in connection with profits.

Preparation: Ec 3e 2 semester hour credits

Ec 12e Economic Systems

After developing various criteria for evaluating the different economic systems,
the course proceeds to a comparative analysis of capitalism, co-operation, socialism,
communism, and fascism. The problems of economic planning receive particular
attention.

Preparation: Ec 3e, Ec 4e 2 semester hour credits

ENGLISH
E 1-Ae English I

The aim of this course is to help the student attain competence in the under-
standing and evaluating of modern literature and in written expression. It includes
a review of the structural essentials of the English language, various written assign-
ments, and the study of essays and informational articles.

2 semester hour credits

E 2-Ae English I

Continuing the general purposes of E 1-Ae, this course proceeds to a study of the
special problems of description and narration, and to a critical reading of poems,
short stories, and plays. 2 semester hour credits

E 5e Advanced Composition

The technique of writing in the shorter literary form will be studied in detail and
applied systematically toward the building up of the student's individual style. A
part of the time each week will be devoted to personal conference between the
student and the instructor.

Preparation: E 1-Ae, E 2-Ae 2 semester hour credits

E 6e Advanced Composition

The continuation of the technique of writing and the building up of an individ-
ual style for the student.

Preparation: E 5e 2 semester hour credits

Evening Courses 23

E 13e Effective Speaking

This course offers practical training in the preparation and presentation of the
various types of speeches. The instruction is planned to eliminate defects of voice,
posture, and delivery, and to develop in the student an ability to speak easily,
naturally, and forcefully. 7 semester hour credit

E 14e Effective Speaking

Continued practice in impromptu and extempore speaking, organization of
material, consideration of the audience, and vocabulary building form the basis of
the course.

Preparation: E 73e 1 semester hour credit

E 15e Survey of English Literature

A survey of English literature to 1800. After a brief study of the social and politi-
cal background of each literary period, the writing of the period is considered, and
the more important writers are studied and read in detail. The purpose of the
course is to give the student an appreciation of English literature as a whole, and
an intimate knowledge of its major figures. 2 semester hour credits

E 16e Survey of English Literature

A survey of English literature from 1800 to the present century. The outstanding
writers are read, studied, and related to the general background of nineteenth-
century England. The purpose of the course is to give the student an understand-
ing of the writers who contributed most to the formation and development of
modern literature in England. 2 semester hour credits

E 25e American Literature to 1860

A survey of American literature from colonial times to the triumph of the trans-
cendental movement in New England. The work of Bryant, Irving, Cooper, Poe,
Emerson, Thoreau, Lowell, Holmes, Longfellow, and Melville will be emphasized.

2 semester hour credits

E 26e American Literature After 1860

Continuing E 25e, the course will consider the rise of realism after the Civil War,
the development of American humor, the appearance of local color writers, and
modern trends since 1900. 2 semester hour credits

GOVERNMENT

Gv 1e American Government and Politics

The study of our National Government with respect to its organization and
function; its powers and limitations under the Constitution; its legislative, adminis-
trative, and judicial machinery under the party system of government and bureauc-
racy. 2 semester hour credits

Gv 2e American Government and Politics

A more detailed study of the relationships of our federal, state, and municipal
governments, including an analysis and comparison of the various state govern-
ments and types of municipal government with respect to state and local agencies
for carrying out the executive, legislative, and judicial functions of government in
a democratic country. 2 semester hour credits

24 Northeastern University

Gv 3e Comparative Government

The older governments of Europe, those principally of Great Britain and France,
but also of Switzerland and the Scandinavian countries, are described and analyzed
in this course. Institutions are compared in these various states with reference to
America and the newer governments of Europe. 2 semester hour credits

Gv 4e Comparative Government

A study of the newer governments of Europe, as found in Germany, Italy, and
the Soviet Union. Democracy and dictatorship are analyzed as different modes of
life and rule. These states are compared to each other, to the older governments of
Europe, and to the United States. 2 semester hour credits

Gv 8e Modern Political Theory

A critical study is made of the major developments in political theory since
Bentham, with special reference to the influence of these developments upon
American politics and political institutions. Attention is paid to the modern con-
flict between the democratic and the totalitarian conceptions of the state.

2 semester hour credits

HISTORY

Hie History of Civilization

This is primarily a background course. Introductory lectures deal with primitive
society, the development of language and writing, and the early contributions of
Egypt and Asia. More detail is given to the structure of Greek and Roman society,
the rise of the Christian Church, the barbarian invasions of the Empire, the growth
of Islam, and the life of the early Middle Ages. 4 semester hour credits

H 2e History of Civilization

This course deals with the growth of the monarchies in Europe, the medieval
Church, the art and literature of the Renaissance and Reformation, the economic
revolution, the Age of Reason in France and England, the Old Regime and the
Revolution in France, and the growth of science and industrialism.

As in H le, the emphasis is upon the cultural rather than the political history of
Europe. 4 semester hour credits

H 9e The United States to 1865

This course is an interpretation of the events which shaped the American nation
to the Civil War. Social customs, economic influences, racial contributions, and
humanitarian movements are not neglected, though the political history is stressed.

2 semester hour credits

H lOe The United States Since 1865

Major attention is given to the social, economic, and political foundations of
recent history in this survey of the transition of America from an agricultural to an
urban industrialized society since the Civil War. Consideration is given to the
problems arising with the emergence of America as a world power.

2 semester hour credits

Evening Courses 25

H 13e English Constitutional History

This course is devoted to a consideration of the English constitution and of the
common law; local government vs. central government; the origin and grov^^th of
Parliament; the development of the British cabinet system; and a comprehensive
study of statutes and documents. 2 semester hour credits

H 14e American Constitutional History

In this course a study is made of the historical development of the United States
Constitution with particular emphasis on its progressive adaptation to a changing
social and economic order. 2 semester hour credits

PHILOSOPHY
Ph 1e Introduction to Philosophy

This introductory course combines the historical and systematic approaches to
the subject. The historical treatment includes a survey of the chief philosophers
and the development of basic philosophical ideas. The systematic treatment pre-
sents the several types of philosophy, such as realism, materialism, idealism, and
pluralism. The place of philosophy is considered in its relation to ethics, religion,
and natural sciences. The course both acquaints the student with facts about
philosophy and trains him to think philosophically. 2 semester hour credits

Ph 2e Problems of Philosophy

The chief systems of thought are applied to what may be termed the persistent
problems of philosophy. The problems are to be found in the fields of epistemology,
teleology, and metaphysics. The following topics suggest representative problems
which will be studied: the relation between mind and body, the nature and extent
of freedom of the will, the validity of knowledge, and the bearing which the more
recent views in physics and psychology have upon related philosophical problems.
Preparation: Ph 1e 2 semester hour credits

PHYSICS
P 1-Ae Survey of the Physical Sciences

The purpose of the course is to give a definite conception of the physical world
to those students who ordinarily would not elect a science course but who need to
know something about the contributions and the place of the physical sciences in
contemporary civilization. This course begins with a study of the universe and
solar system. Consideration is given to the principles of distance, mass and weight,
and the simple dynamics of bodies. The earth is studied from the viewpoint of its
geological, meteorological, and chemical aspects, these main fields introducing a
non-mathematical discussion of magnetism, heat, and electricity.

4 semester hour credits

P 2-Ae Survey of the Physical Sciences

In this course, which continues P 1-Ae, the phenomena of light are taken up.
Following this, consideration is given to spectroscopy and matter structure, the
periodic table, acids, bases, salts, and organic compounds. The course concludes
with a discussion of certain aspects of physics which are of practical importance in
the household, such as heating, lighting, refrigeration, and electrical appliances.

4 semester hour credits

26 Northeastern University

PSYCHOLOGY

Ps 1e Introduction to Differential Psychology

An elementary survey of the psychology of individual differences including per-
sonality differences, together with a presentation of some of the practical applica-
tions of the findings of differential psychology. 2 semester hour credits

Ps 2e General Psychology

An introduction to general experimental psychology. The topics considered in-
clude learning, memory, thought, imagination, motivation, emotion, sensation,
and perception.

Preparation: Ps le 2 semester hour credits

Ps 7e Social Psychology of Everyday Life

A course devoted to the psychological examination of some of the phenomena
observable in everyday social life. This includes an analysis of the socialization
process, the development and role of language in everyday life, and those problems
which are particularly important in wartime — propaganda, rumor, and morale.

2 semester hour credits

Ps 9e Psychology of Personality

Presents a survey of historical and contemporary theories of the nature of per-
sonality. The problems of the generality of traits, the consistency of expression, and
the relation of cultural factors to personality, growth, and integration will be
discussed.

Preparation: Ps 2e 2 semester hour credits

Ps lOe Abnormal Psychology

An introduction to the field of psychopathology. The psychology of the neuroses
and the minor disturbances of everyday life are emphasized. Interpretation of
clinical findings in the light of some contemporary schools of psychology is included.
Preparation: Ps 9e 2 semester hour credits

SOCIOLOGY

S le Introduction to Sociology

In presenting a survey of the origins and sources of human society, this study
provides orientation for the courses in principles and problems which follow. The
several theories of organic evolution are discussed. The antiquity of man and basic
anthropological data are considered. The racial and ethnic groupings of man are
then studied in the light of biological, geographical, and cultural factors.

2 semester hour credits

S 2e Principles of Sociology

Facts and principles basic to a general knowledge of the field of sociology are
presented. The origins, forms, and forces of human associations are discussed. Con-
sideration is given the several leading schools of sociological thought. The course is

Evening Courses 27

designed to meet the needs of the student who desires only an elementary survey of
the subject, as well as the student who plans to take advanced courses in social
science. 2 semester hour credits

S 3e Social Problems

Attention is given the nature, complex causation, and interrelatedness of social
problems in general. Cultural change, with its attendant lags, as well as other
social forces and conflicts are studied. While sociological theory is occasionally
introduced to clarify the problem at hand, the course is essentially practical in
character. Such problems as poverty and unemployment, race antagonisms,
population pressures, and the broken home are considered. Optional field trips to
various institutions give concreteness to the problems studied.

Preparation: S 1e, S 2e 2 semester hour credits

S 4e Social Pathology

Similar to the course in Social Problems in background and approach, this study
deals with the maladjustments and ills of human society. Emphasis is given those
pathological conditions which exist in relations between the individual and the
group. Typical subjects presented include mental defectiveness and disease, al-
coholism and drug addiction, suicide, delinquency and crime, and pathologies of
domestic relations. The field trips arranged for this course add to the practical
knowledge of the social ills which are studied.

Preparation: S Je, S 2e 2 semester hour credits

S 7e Principles of Social Ethics

To clarify the meaning of morality in social relations is the aim of this study.
Right and wrong conduct is analyzed in the light of the highest values for human
society. Moral laws are discussed, and the various systems of ethics are evaluated.
Scientific attitudes are encouraged in order that one's moral judgments may be
compatible with one's best reflective thought.

Preparation: S Je, S 2e 2 semester hour credits

CHEMISTRY

Ch 1e General Chemistry

The fundamental ideas of matter and energy; the properties of gases, liquids,
and solids; molecular weights; equations, atomic structure, classification of the
elements; ionic reactions; the chemistry of the non-metals; and radioactivity are
among the topics which are covered in the course. 3 semester hour credits

Ch 2e General Chemistry

A continuation of Ch le. Modern ideas covering the theory of solutions of elec-
trolytes are discussed together with experimental facts. The chemistry of the metals
is covered thoroughly, and time is devoted to an introduction to organic chemistry.
The latter part of the course is given to qualitative analysis with particular em-
phasis on the laboratory work.

Preparation: Ch le 3 semester hour credits

28 Northeastern University

Ch 3e Qualitative Analysis

The object of this course is to give the student knowledge of the various funda-
naental qualitative laws and principles. A portion of the time is devoted to the
formulation of numerical terms which are essential to the understanding of the
mass action law, ionic equilibria, solubility product, hydrolysis, and redox in-
stants. The use of the newer spot tests is stressed and, where possible, their reactions
explained. Whenever necessary, lectures demonstrating the various semi-micro
techniques are given, as well as those designed to illustrate more fundamental
properties of solutions.

Prerequisite: Ch 1e, Ch 2e 3 semester hour credits

Ch 4e Quantitative Analysis

It is the purpose of this course to give to the student a realization of the scientific
development of quantitative methods. Each of the major operations such as weigh-
ing, measurement of volumes, titration, filtration, ignition, and combustion, is
considered from the standpoint of the theoretical principles involved, and with due
consideration of the manipulative technique necessary.

This is followed by the combination of these operations and their application to
actual analysis, including a comprehensive study of volumetric methods.

After consideration of gravimetric analysis and of systematic mineral procedures,
the remainder of the course consists of a critical discussion of common technical
methods, including the standard ones for the analysis of steel, non-ferrous alloys,
fuels, oils, gas, water, fertilizers, foods, etc.

As the correct calculation of analytical results is of no less importance than the
actual procedures of analysis, a number of problems forms a very important part
of the course.

Preparation: Ch 3e

Must be taken concurrently: ChL 4e 4 semester hour credits

Ch 5e-6e Organic Chemistry

A study of the basic principles of the aliphatic organic compounds. The resem-
blance of classes is stressed, and emphasis is placed on genetic charts. The industrial
significance of the subject is discussed to show the practical nature of organic
chemistry.

The course then deals with the preparation and characteristic reactions of the
aromatic organic compounds. Special attention is given to polymerization, dia-
zotization, dyes, and the use of catalysts, nitration, and sulphonation.

The last part of this course includes a study of the preparation and reactions of
heterocyclic and alicyclic compounds.
Prerequisite: Ch 1e, Ch 2e
Must be taken concurrently: ChL 5e-6e 6 ^ semester hour credits

Ch 7e Physical Chemistry

This course begins with a short resume of the field of physical chemistry, and its
relationship to the other courses in chemistry and chemical engineering. Following
this, atomic and molecular weights, and the properties of gases, liquids, solids,
ionized, non-ionized, and colloidal solutions are taken up.

Prerequisite: Ch 4e

Preparation: ChL 4e 3 semester hour credits

Evening Courses 29

Ch 8e Physical Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 7e, this course includes a consideration of the following
topics: rates of reaction, homogeneous and heterogeneous equilibrium, and
thermochemistry.

Prerequisite: Ch 4e

Preparation: Ch 7e 2}/^ semester hour credits

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY
ChL 1e General Chemistry Laboratory

This course is coordinated with the lectures of Ch le. The student performs a
series of experiments that stress some of the fundamental principles discussed in
the lecture class. 7 semester hour credit

ChL 2e General Chemistry Laboratory
After a few preliminary experiments on electrolysis, complex ions, hydrolysis,
and solubility product the student learns to use a qualitative analysis scheme.
Several "unknown" substances are analyzed.

Prerequisite: ChL le 1 semester hour credit

ChL 3e Qualitative Analysis Laboratory

This course, which is carried out on a semi-micro scale, applies the material
covered in Ch 3e to actual problems. After some preliminary experiments, certain
procedures are combined and the separations and identifications made on both
known and unknown solutions. Finally, these are combined into a complete,
systematic scheme which is applied to artificially prepared mixtures and industrial
materials. Careful manipulations, thoroughness in observation, and accuracy in
arriving at conclusions are expected of each student.

Prerequisite: Ch le, Ch 2e

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 3e 2H semester hour credits

ChL 4e Quantitative Analysis Laboratory

This is a laboratory course intended to illustrate by actual use the various
analytical methods considered in Ch 4e. After certain preliminary experiments de-
signed to acquaint the student with the apparatus used, volumetric analysis, in-
cluding acidimetry and alkalimetry, oxidation, reduction, and precipitation
methods are taken up.

This is followed by gravimetric analysis not only the usual illustrative gravi-
metric determinations, but also electrolytic, electrometric, combustion, and optical
methods.

In the latter half of the course actual industrial methods are used so that at its
completion the students should be able to perform satisfactorily any ordinary
analysis.

Preparation: ChL 3e

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 4e S^i semester hour credits

ChL 5e Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions designed to teach the laboratory technique involved
in organic chemistry. The method of keeping notes on the work performed and
reactions involved is stressed.

Prerequisite: Ch le, Ch 2e

Must be taken concurrently: Ch 5e 1)4. semester hour credits

30 Northeastern University

ChL 6e Organic Chemistry Laboratory

This is a continuation of ChL 5e. The preparations in this course serve to acquaint
the student with such types of chemical reactions as sulphonation, the Grignard
reaction, the Perkins reaction, Skraup's synthesis, the Friedal-Crafts reaction, and
the preparation of dyes.

In addition to the manipulation techniques taught in ChL 5e, this course intro-
duces the use of vacuum distillations, fractional crystallization, and separations by
physical and chemical means.
Preparation: ChL 5e
Must be taken concurrently: Ch 6e 1}/^ semester hour credits

ChL 7e Physical Chemistry Laboratory

This course carries into actual practice the theory discussed in Ch 7e. Experi-
ments include Determination of Vapor Density, Densities of Gas by Effusion
Method, Surface Tension of Liquids and Viscosity of Liquids.

Preparation: ChL 4e Credit combined with Ch 7e

ChL 8e Physical Chemistry Laboratory

A continuation of ChL 7e, this course covers experiments in Vapor Pressure of
Liquids; Solubility Curve for a Pair of Liquids, Liquid- Vapor Equilibrium Curve,
Distillation with Steam and Index of Refraction.

Preparation: ChL 7e Credit combined with Ch 7e

BIOLOGY
B 1e General Zoology

An introductory course dealing with the basic principles of zoology. A survey of
the main types of animals; their classification, structure, life history, distribution,
and economic value. The laboratory work illustrates the lectures.

3 semester hour credits

B 2e General Botany

An introductory course dealing with the basic principles of botany. A general
survey of the more important plant types throughout the vegetable kingdom; their
classification, structure, life history, distribution, and economic value. The funda-
mentals of plant physiology are stressed. The laboratory work illustrates the
lectures. 3 semester hour credits

B 5e Vertebrate Zoology

This course deals with the comparative anatomy of the integument; the skeletal,
muscular, digestive and respiratory systems of the principal classes of vertebrates.
The laboratory work consists of detailed dissection of representative types.
Prerequisite: B 1e 2 semester hour credits

B 6e Vertebrate Zoology

Continues and presupposes course B 5e. In this part of the course, the lectures
deal with the comparative anatomy of the vascular, excretory, reproductive and
riervous systems together with the organs of special sense of the principal classes of
vertebrates. The laboratory work consists of detailed dissection of representative
types.

Preparation: B 5e 3 semester hour credits

*; 2 -T3 '5 «

S rt !« i! »

rt .y u !2 •*

^5 ;js -^ ra 4J

u: j= S

Cii

:z;

c
o

C/5

l-H

*:
«

4-1

3
C

Q
<

;?;

c
o

1— 1

■u

X
o

Oh
<

ss§

"2 -2

— ^ -13

£ -?

D
o

u -Q

a, rt

c/2 J

«■

c
.2

4-I

Cl( M

CL,

£ D D

.2
So 'S>

P-H J3 H-.

O -T3

S < K < a, <

hcj •-"

3 S

f» >o

O:
5'

!2:

0
11

33
0
0
r

o
z

n
5

n
rr

1
a.

■».

r
a.

n P

n 3

a. 5"

n aq

TO o

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

COEDUCATIONAL

College of Liberal Arts

College of Engineering

Offers curricula in Civil, Mechanical (with Industrial and Aeronautical options),
Electrical, and Chemical Engineering. Classroom study is supplemented by experi-
ment and research in well-equipped laboratories. Degree: Bachelor of Science in the
professional field of specialization.

College of Business Administration

Offers curricula in Accounting, Marketing and Advertising, and Industrial Adminis-
tration. Each curriculum represents in itself a broad survey of business technique,
differing from the others chiefly in emphasis. Degree: Bachelor of Science in Business
Administration.

School of Law

Offers day and evening undergraduate programs admitting those who present a
minimum of one-half of the work accepted for a bachelor's degree in an approved
college or its full equivalent, each program leading to the degree of Bachelor of Laws.
Coeducational.

School of Business

Offers curricula through evening classes leading to the degree of Bachelor of Business
Administration with appropriate specification in Accounting, Management, and
Engineering and Business. Preparation for C.P.A. examinations. Intensive programs
arranged to meet special needs.

Evening Courses of the College of Liberal Arts

Certain courses of the College of Liberal Arts are offered during evening hours in the
fields of Economics, English, History, Government, Psychology, and Sociology. A
special program preparing for admission to the School of I^aw is also available. The
program is equivalent in hours to one-half the requirements for the A.B. or S.B. degree.
Special courses also available. Associate in Arts degree conferred.

The Colleges of Liberal Arts, Engineering, and Business Administration offer day
programs and are conducted on the Co-operative Plan. After the freshman year
students may alternate their periods of study with periods of work in the employ of
business or industrial concerns. LTnder this plan they gain valuable experience and earn
a large part of their college expenses. Full-time curricula are available for students who
do not desire the Co-operative Plan.

In addition to the above schools the University has affiliated with it and conducts:
the Lincoln Technical Institute offering, through evening classes, courses of college
grade in various fields of engineering leading to the degree of Associate in Engineering;
and the Lincoln Preparatory School, an accredited evening school preparing for college
entrance and offering other standard high school programs.

For further information regarding any of the above schools, address

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY

Law School Of her Schools

47 Mt. Vernon Street 360 Huntington Avenue

Boston 75, Massachusetts

Telephone : KENmore 5800

LINCOLN
TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

Svenlng Sessions

1945-1946

FORTY-FOURTH YEAR

College Courses m Sngmeemg

INTERVIEWS

Prospective students, or those desiring advice or guidance regard-
ing any part of the school work or curricula, are encouraged to
arrange for personal interviews with the Dean or other officers of
instruction. Career planning through competent guidance provides
an understanding of professional requirements and develops that
definiteness of purpose so vital to success.

OFFICE HOURS

JUNE 11, 1945 — AUGUST 11, 1945

Monday, Wednesday, and Thursday 8:45 a.m. -5:00 p.m.

Monday and Tuesday 8

Saturdays 8

45 A.M.-8:00 P.M.
45 A.M.-12:00 NOON

AUGUST 13, 1945 — JUNE 8, 1946

Monday through Friday 8:45 a.m.-9:00 p.m.

Saturdays. . . .

45 A.M.-12:00 NOON through September 1
45 A.M.-4:00 P.M. September 8, 15, 22, 29
45 A.M.-l :00 P.M. October 6-June 8

JUNE 10, 1946 — AUGUST 10, 1946

Same as for corresponding period for summer of 1945

CALENDAR

1945

Registration Period — First Semester September 4-17

Advanced Standing and Condition Examinations September 7

Classes Begin September 1 7

Legal Holiday. No Classes October 12

Thanksgiving Recess. No Classes November 22-23

Final Class Session before Christmas Recess December 21

1946

First Class Session after Christmas Recess January 2

Division B Classes Begin January 7

Registration Period — Second Semester January 28

Legal Holiday. No Classes February 22

Legal Holiday. No Classes April 19

Summer Term Classes Begin June 3

Commencement June 2

LINCOLN

TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

Evening Engineering Courses
of College Grade

1945 S^^Md 1946

The Institute is situated at the entrance to the
Huntington Avenue subway within nine minutes
of Park Street and easily accessible from all points.

The Lincoln Technical Institute offers courses in Engineering leading to the De-
gree of Associate in Engineering which, through cooperation with Northeastern
University Evening School of Business, carry credit toward the Degree of Bachelor
of Business Administration in Engineering and Management
awarded by Northeastern University.

education

AN INVESTMENT IN ENDURING VALUES

Now that the end of the war is slowly coming into sight
and the post-war period is beginning to assume some
reality, all ambitious young men are asking themselves
the question, "Am I prepared to enter the competition of
the post-war period?" Never before has training been so
vitally necessary. Never before has education been a
better investment than now when such an investment
holds so much promise for the enduring values of a
successful career.

The war-devasted world must be rebuilt. The necessi-
ties of civilized living must be provided. The materials
destroyed must be replaced. All these needs will provide
an opportunity not only in other countries but in our
own for those who are prepared to provide the services
which will be in demand.

The curtain is about to rise on a world full of oppor-
tunities. The same forces necessitating the unimaginable
destruction have at the same time brought forth tre-
mendous advancements in engineering and science. The
world of tomorrow will present unlimited opportunities
for those trained in technology to participate in the
reconstruction and progress of a peace-time world.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

Lincoln Technical Institute, General Statement 6

Administrative Organization 5

Faculty 8

General Information 13

Student Body 13

The Campus 14

Transportation 15

Textbooks and Supplies 16

Scholarships 16

Scholarship Awards 16

Admission Requirements 18

Classification of Students 19

Administrative Regulations 20

Tuition and Fees 23

Programs of Instruction 25

Civil and Structural Engineering 26

Chemistry 27

Special Courses in Chemistry 28

Electrical Engineering 29

Electronic Engineering 30

Industrial Engineering 31

Mechanical Engineering 32

Bachelor of Business Administration Program 33

Engineering Laboratories 36

Description of Courses 43

Chemistry 43

Civil Engineering 45

Electrical Engineering 47

Electronic Engineering 48

Industrial Engineering 51

Mechanical Engineering 52

Drawing 55

Mathematics 56

Physics 58

LINCOLN TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Robert Gray Dodge

Chairman

Frank Lincoln Richardson

Vice-Chairman

Wilman Edward Adams
Henry Nathaniel Andrews
Arthur Atwood Ballantine
George Louis Barnes
Farwell Gregg Bemis
Henry Goddard Bradlee
Godfrey Lowell Cabot
Paul Codman Cabot
Walter Channing
William Converse Chick
Everett Avery Churchill
Paul Foster Clark
David Frank Edwards
Carl Stephens Ell
William Partridge Ellison
John Wells Farley
Ernest Bigelow Freeman
Franklin Wile Ganse
Harvey Dow Gibson

Henry Ingraham Harriman
Chandler Hovey
Maynard Hutchinson
Arthur Stoddard Johnson
Irving Edwin Moultrop
Augustin Hamilton Parker, Jr.
Frederick Sanford Pratt
Roger Preston
Stuart Craig Rand
James Lorin Richards
Harold Bours Richmond
Leverett Saltonstall
Frank Palmer Speare
Francis Robert Carnegie Steele
Charles Stetson
Earl Place Stevenson
Robert Treat Paine Storer
Edward Watson Supple
James Vincent Toner

OFFICERS OF ADMINISTRATION

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., ScD.

President

Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D,
Vice-President

Albert Ellsworth Everett, B.C.E., S.B., M.B.A.
Director of Evening Program

James Wallace Lees, A.M.
Dean

Donald Hershey MacKenzie, B.S., Ed.M.
Assistant to the Dean

Lincoln Technical Institute

THE LINCOLN TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

The Lincoln Technical Institute is affiliated with Northeastern
University. It offers evening engineering courses of college grade
leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering. These courses
are acceptable towards the degree of B.B.A. in Engineering and
Management offered by Northeastern University, Evening School
of Business.

All classes in the Lincoln Technical Institute are held in the
evening and are especially designed to meet the needs of those
who are employed during the day.

The Lincoln Technical Institute has its origin in the North-
eastern Evening Polytechnic School. The latter received its title
in 1901, when the work of various technical departments, such
as the Department of Steam Engineering, the Department of
Art, the Automotive School and the Department of Naval Archi-
tecture, were grouped together into curricula. By 1904 the School
offered definite curricula, generally of three years' duration, in
Architecture, Chemistry, Marine Engineering, Structural Engi-
neering, Steam Engineering, along with courses in Art, Naviga-
tion, Surveying, Seamanship, and other related fields. In 1925
the title Lincoln Technical Institute was given to the North-
eastern Evening Polytechnic School. At this time the Lincoln
Technical Institute remodelled, lengthened, and consequently
improved the former courses, offering a number of four-year
curricula, which are described on pages 26 to 32.

In addition, provision was made so that students need not
pursue a complete curriculum but could elect individual courses
related to their present occupations, the only prerequisite of
entry being ability to pursue the course with profit to themselves.
At the present time there are nearly four hundred students receiv-
ing instruction in the Lincoln Technical Institute in the various
branches of engineering.

Since 1936 the curricular courses of the Institute have been credited by
Northeastern University Evening School of Business towards the Degree oj
Bachelor oj Business Administration in Engineering and Management
offered by that school.

Effective 1939 the Lincoln Technical Institute was empowered
to award the Title of Associate in Engineering to those who satis-
factorily complete any one of the prescribed curricula. Effective

Lincoln Technical Institute

with the Commencement Exercises, June, 1944, the Degree of
Associate in Engineering has been awarded.

Because of war conditions and the part that women can play and
are playing in the essential war industries, the courses have been
made available to women students on the same basis as men.

The Officers of Administration are constantly alert to changing
conditions and from time to time will modify existing courses to
meet new needs and develop new courses so that real educational
opportunities will be available to employed men and women at
convenient evening hours. The School is sincerely interested in the
problems of each student and the Dean and the officers of instruc-
tion encourage interviews for vocational and educational guidance.

The Lincoln Technical Institute has made it possible for many
men to secure training which has enabled them to succeed in the
work for which they are adapted by ability and interest.

Lincoln Technical Institute

FACULTY

The Strength of any educational institution lies in the quality of
its faculty. This is especially true in a technical institute devoted
to the training of mature men and women most of whom are already
employed in their chosen professions.

The instructional staff of the Lincoln Technical Institute is com-
posed of men who have an active interest in the welfare of ambitious
evening school students. They are men of culture and high ideals
and are well qualified by training and experience to teach in their
respective fields.

HoLLis Baird Appointed 1945

Baird Receiver Company, 1925-28; Chief Engineer, Shortwave & Television Cor-
poration, 1928-35; Chief Engineer, General Television Corporation 1935-41; Chief
Engineer, World Wide Broadcasting Corporation, 1935-40; Consulting Engineer,
World Wide Broadcasting Corporation, 1941-42; Instructor, Samuel Curtis Radio
School, 1930-37; Instructor, University Extension, 1940-43; Instructor, ESMWT
Program, Northeastern University, 1942-45.

Industrial Electronics, Communication Engineering, Frequency Modulation, Television
Chairman oj the Department of Physics and Electronics Engineering

Walter Alfred Baldwin Appointed 1931

A.B. Ohio Wesleyan University, 1906; Graduate Study, University of Chicago and
Harvard University; Head, Department of Mathematics, Chillicothe High School,
Ohio, 1906-08; Head, Department of Mathematics, Mansfield High School, Ohio,
1908-10; Head, Science Department, Huntington School for Boys, Boston, 1912-14;
Instructor in Physics and Chemistry, Lincoln Preparatory School, 1910 — . Investi-
gator and Consultant.
Chemistry

Robert Oren Bates Appointed 1942

B.S. St. Lawrence University, 1937; Graduate Study, School of Education, Boston
University, 1937 — ; Teacher, Harrisburg Academy, 1938-40; Instructor, The
Huntington School, 1940 — .
Mathematics

Fletcher S. Boig Appointed 1945

B.S. Tufts College, 1932; M.S. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1933; Ed.M.
Tufts College, 1937; Statistician, Employers Liability, 1936-41; Paint Chemist,
Wadsworth-Howland Company, 1941-42; Instructor in Chemistry, Northeastern
University 1942 — .
Organic Chemistry
Chairman of the Department of Chemistry

Guy Albert D'Amato Appointed 1944

Architectural Engineering, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1924-27;
Structural Engineering, Lowell Institute, 1928-30; Architectural Draftsman, 1929-
42; Instructor, Boston Public Schools, 1942-43; Instructor, Tufts College, 1943 — .
Engineering Drawing

Raymond F. Dauer

A.B. Indiana University, 1934; Accounting and Auditing, General Electric Com-
pany, 1935-1939; Supervisor of Production Planning and Control, General Electric
Company, 1939-1942; Supervisor Inventory Control, General Electric Company,
West Lynn Works, 1 942—; Taught ESMWT at Northeastern University, 1 942-1 945.
Production Planning and Control

Faculty 9

John James Devine Appointed 1939

B.S. Rhode Island State College, 1927; Sc.M. Brown University, 1936; Engineer,
New York Telephone Company, 1927-32; Assistant Engineering Instructor, Rhode
Island State College, 1934-37; Instructor in Civil Engineering, Northeastern
University, 1937-38; Instructor in Drawing, Northeastern University, 1938-41;
Assistant Professor of Engineering Drawing, Northeastern University, 1941 — .
Engineering Drawing

GiLMORE Colby Dickey, Jr. Appointed 7944

Associate in Engineering, Lincoln Technical Institute, 1943; Draftsman, 1940-42;
Research Technician, 1942-43; Research Engineer, Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, 1943 — .
Electrical Laboratory

Royal Merrill Frye Appointed 1930

A.B. Boston University, 1911; A.M. Boston University, 1912; Ph.D. Boston Univer-
sity, 1934; Instructor in Boston University, 1913-16; Instructor in Department of
Physics, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1916-31; Instructor in Physics,
Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1926-27; Assistant Professor of Physics, Boston
University, 1931-42; Professor of Physics and Chairman of the Department of
Physics, Graduate School, Boston University, 1942 — .
Physics, Mathematics

Warren L. Ganong

B.S. Northeastern University, 1937; Time Study Department, Converse Rubber

Company, 1937-1938; Time Study Department, General Electric Company, 1938-

1940; Instructor, Northeastern University, 1940 — .

Time Study and Advanced Time Study

Chairman of the Department oj Industrial Engineering

George William Hankinson Appointed 1944

B.A. Mount Allison University, New Brunswick, 1937; B.S. Northeastern Univer-
sity, 1942; Inspector, New York, New Haven & Hartford Railroad, 1939-42;
Instructor, Civil Engineering, Northeastern University, 1942 — .
Physics — Surveying

Elmer E. Haskins Appointed 1939

B.M.E. Northeastern University, 1925; M.A. University of Pittsburgh, 1930; Ph.D.
Boston University, 1938; Instructor, Monongahela High School, Pennsylvania,
1925-30; Associate Professor of Mathematics, Northeastern University, 1930 — .
Advanced Mathematics
Chairman of the Department of Mathematics

Hugh Healey

S.B. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1934; Section Leader, Methods Depart-
ment, General Electric Company, 1940 — ; Physics Instructor, Rindge Evening
School, 1943-1944; Taught ESMWT at Northeastern University, 1944-1945.
Methods Engineering

Robert Edgar Hodgdon Appointed 1927

B.S. University of New Hampshire; M.S. Massachusetts Institute of Technology;
Teacher in Mechanical Arts Department, Dover High School, New Hampshire,
1919-20; Teacher of Physics and Mathematics, Concord High School, New Hamp-
shire, 1920-21; Training Assistant, United States Veterans Bureau, 1921-22; In-
structor in Physics Department of Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1922-33;
Rindge Technical School, 1933 — .
Engineering Drawing, Physics

Wilfred B. Johnston

A.B. Harvard University, 1922; Instructor, Gardner High School, 1922-1924;
Factory Planning Department, Heywood-Wakefield Company, 1924-1926; Per-
sonnel Director and Assistant Production Superintendent, Fisk Rubber Company,
1926-1930; Safety Engineer, Travelers Insurance Company, 1930—; Taught
ESMWT at Northeastern University, 1944-1945.
Industrial Safety Engineering

10 Lincoln Technical Institute

Raymond M. Knight Appointed 1945

B.S. University of New Hampshire, 1929; Instructor Wentworth Institute, 1929 — ;
Engineer, Submarine Signal Company, 1944 — .
Mathematics

Edward E. Kuypers

Graduate Columbia University, in Industrial Psychology and Personnel; Personnel
Manager, Forstmann Woolen Mills; Director of Personnel Relations, General Cable
Corporation; Director of Management-Labor Relations, First National Stores, Inc.;
Taught ESMWT at Northeastern University, 1944-1945.
Labor-Management Relations

Wilfred S. Lake

A.B. Hiram College, 1924; M.A. Harvard University, 1928; Ph.D. Harvard Univer-
sity, 1932; Instructor, Northeastern University, 1926-1929; Assistant Professor,
1929-1932; Associate Professor of Economics, 1932-1935; Professor of Economics,
1935-1939; Dean of the College of Liberal Arts at Northeastern University, 1939 — .
Quality Control by Statistical Methods

Horatio W. Lamson Appointed 1945

S.B. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1915; A.M. Harvard University, 1917;
Instructor in evening schools and at Harvard and M.I.T., 1915—45; Research En-
gineer, General Radio Company, 1921-45.
Introduction to Electron Tubes
Electronic Tests and Measurements

Herbert C. Lang Appointed 1936

B.S. Northeastern University, 1934; Draftsman, Mason-Neilan Regulator Company,
1934-40; Chief Draftsman, Mason-Neilan Regulator Company, 1941; Instructor,
ESMWT Program, Northeastern University, 1943-45.
Machine Design

John Robert Leighton Appointed 1915

B.C.E. Northeastern University, 1914; Instructor, Northeastern University, 1914-
17; Instructor, Northeastern Polytechnic School, 1915-27; Instructor, Lincoln
Technical Institute, 1927 — .
Applied Mechanics, Strength of Materials

Waldemar S. McGuire Appointed 1936

S.B. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1928; M.A. Boston University, 1930;
Instructor at Tufts College, 1920-21; Instructor Rhode Island State College, 1921-
24; Northeastern University, Associate Professor of Chemistry, 1924 — .
Qualitative and Quantitative Chemistry

Wendell Eugene Matchett Appointed 1944

B.S. University of Maine, 1936; M.S. University of Maine, 1937; Electrical En-
gineer, General Electric Company, 1937 — .
Electricity III, Advanced Electrical Laboratory

Leodore E. Maynard Appointed 1945

B.S. Worcester Polytechnic Institute, 1922; Instructor Wentworth Institute, evening
school, 1937-43; Electrical Engineer, Boston Edison Company, 1943-45; Instructor,
ESMWT Program, Northeastern University, 1944-45.
Direct and Alternating Current Theory

George Harris Meserve, Jr. Appointed 1929

B.C.E. Northeastern University, 1925; B.S. Northeastern University, 1931; Ed.M.
Boston University, 1940; Junior Engineer, City of Medford, 1924-25; Draftsman,
Boston Planning Board, 1925; Instructor in Drawing, Northeastern University,
1926-31; Assistant Professor of Drawing, Northeastern University, 1931—40; Associ-
ate Professor of Drawing, Northeastern University 1940 — .
Engineering Drawing
Chairman oj the Department oj Drawing

Faculty 1 1

Andrew Petersen

B.B.A. Boston University, 1926; M.B.A. Boston University, 1932; Head of Account-
ing Department, University of Porto Rico, 1927-1929; Director of Accounting and
Taxation, Babson Institute, 1929 — ; Accountant, Charles F. Rittenhouse and
Company.
Accounting Aids to Management

WiNFiELD C. Potter Appointed 1944

Ph.B. Brown University, 1910; Ed.M. Rhode Island College of Education, 1938;
Instructor, Amherst High School, 1911-12; Instructor, Webster High School, 1912-
1923; Principal, West Warwick High School, 1923-34; Principal, Foxboro High
School, 1934—.
Sub-Freshman Mathematics

Homer P. Ransom

B.S. Northeastern University, 1936; Methods Department, General Electric Com-
pany, 1936-1941; Methods Supervisor, Methods Planning Department, General
Electric Company, West Lynn Plant, 1941 — ; Taught ESMWT at Northeastern
University, 1943-1945.
Methods Engineering

Henry E. Richards Appointed 1921

B.S. 1918, M.S. 1937, Massachusetts Institute of Technology ; Member of American
Institute of Electrical Engineers; Member of Society for Promotion of Engineering
Education; Ensign U. S. Naval Reserve, 1918; General Electric Company, 1911-21;
Associate Professor of Electrical Engineering, Northeastern University, 1921 — .
Chairman oj the Department of Electrical Engineering

GusTAV Rook Appointed 1941

B.S. Northeastern University, 1939; Graduate Study, Northeastern University,
1939 — ; Instructor in Drawing, Northeastern University, 1939 — .
Machine Drawing

Barnet Rudman Appointed 1942

A.B. Harvard University, 1921; Ed.M. Boston Teachers' College, 1934; Instructor
in Mathematics, Rocky Grove High School, Franklin, Pennsylvania, 1921-23;
Instructor in Mathematics, Pittsfield High School, 1923-28, Head of the Department
of Mathematics, 1927-28; Instructor in Mathematics, South Boston High School,
1929-32; Instructor in Mathematics, English High School, 1932 — .
Mathematics

Albert E. Sanderson, Jr. Appointed 1936

B.C.E. Northeastern University, 1926; B.S. Northeastern University, 1940; Bethle-
hem Steel Company, 1927-30; Boston Bridge Works, 1930-35; Instructor in Civil
Engineering, Northeastern University, 1938 — .
Structural Drawing and Structural Design

Charles F. Seaverns Appointed 1941

Harvard University, 1915-17; Instructor, Mathematics and Drawing, Huntington
School for Boys, 1914-19; Instructor, Lincoln Preparatory School, 1914-40; A. E.
Lincoln Technical Institute, Northeastern University, 1944; Instructor, Everett
High School, 1925—.
Engineering Drawing

John David Shore Appointed 1926

S.B. Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1912; Ed.M. Boston Teachers' College,
1940; Architectural Draftsman, 1916-21; Instructor, FrankUn Union, Boston, 1921-
24; Head of Department of Mechanical Drawing, United States Vocational School,
Portland, Maine, 1924-25; Instructor in Mathematics and Mechanical Drawing,
EngUsh High School, 1925—.
Sub-Freshman Mathematics

12 Lincoln Technical Institute

Ernest L. Spencer Appointed 1941

B.S. Northeastern University, 1936; Graduate Study, Harvard University Graduate
School of Engineering, 1939 — ; Engineer, Everett M. Brooks, Jackson and Moreland,
Massachusetts State Department of Public Works, 1936-39; Instructor in the De-
partment of Civil Engineering, Northeastern University, 1939 — .
Concrete, Concrete Design, Hydraulics, Highway Engineering
Chairman of the Department of Civil Engineering

Frederick Arlington Stearns Appointed 1921

B.S. 1917, M.S. 1934, Massachusetts Institute of Technology; Member of American
Society of Mechanical Engineers; Member of Society for Promotion of Engineering
Education; Member of the Engineering Societies of New England; United States
Army, 1917-19; Instructor, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1920; Professor
in the Department of Mechanical Engineering, Northeastern University, 1 920 — .
Heat Engineering, Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

Emerson Wood Thomas Appointed 1945

B.S. in E.E. George Washington University, 1937; 2nd Inspector, American District
Telephone Company, 1937; Laboratory Instructor, Capitol Radio Engineering
Institute, 1938-40; Assistant Radio Inspector, U. S. Navy, 1940-41; Inspector En-
gineering Materials, U. S. Navy, 1941; Chief Instructor of Theory, Capitol Radio
Engineering Institute, 1941-43; Instructor in Charge, Capitol Radio Engineering
Institute, 1943-44; Radio Research Engineer, Tobe Deutschmann Corporation,
1944-45; Instructor in ESMWT Program, Northeastern University, 1945.
Electron Tubes and Circuits

Ralph E. Wellings Appointed 1944

A.B. Boston College, 1920; A.M. Boston College, 1925; Ed.M. Boston Teachers'
College, 1930; Teacher, Brighton High School, 1925-28; Teacher, Dorchester High
School for Boys, 1928-1944.
Mathematics, Physics

Albert E. Whittaker Appointed 1936

B.M.E. Northeastern University, 1924; Ed.M. Harvard University, 1932; B.S.
Northeastern University, 1933; Graduate Study, Boston University, 1934-37; Mem-
ber of American Society of Mechanical Engineers; Member of Society for Promotion
of Engineering Education; Member of the Engineering Societies of New England;
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering, Northeastern University, 1 924 — .
Mechanism

Lawton D. Wolf

B.B.A. Rider College, 1932; Statistician, Stokes Rubber Company, 1933-1936; Pro-
duction Control, Thermoid Company, 1936-1941; Materials Control, Wright Aero-
nautical Company, 1941-1943; Head Production Control Department, Holtzer-
Cabot Company, 1943—; Taught ESMWT at Northeastern University, 1943-1945.
Production Planning and Control

Chester Henry Wolow^icz Appointed 1938

B.S. Northeastern University, 1937; Western Electric Company, 1937-38; Jamison
Cold Storage Door Company, 1938; Assistant Professor, Mechanical Engineering,
Northeastern University, 1938 — .

Aerodynamics, Aeronautical Laboratory, Airplane Design, Airplane Engines
Chairman of the Department of Mechanical Engineering

Harry E. A. Wright Appointed 1943

B.S. Lafayette College, 1934; Application Engineer, Westinghouse Electric and
Manufacturing Company, 1934 — .
Electricity H

General Information

GENERAL INFORMATION

STUDENT BODY

The Students of the Lincoln Technical Institute are men and
women of earnest purpose and firm endeavor who bring to bear
on their work a thoroughness which promises future success. Their
ages last year ranged from seventeen to fifty-one, the average age
being twenty-four years. Almost all the students are engaged in
work during the day and many different occupations have their
representatives in the student body, a fact which demonstrates
that the School can be of service to men in many walks of life.
Some students are preparing to enter engineering work; many are
already engaged in engineering work and are studying to prepare
themselves for increased responsibility and rewards.

GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF STUDENTS

During the school year 1944-1945 the following cities and towns
were represented in the student body of the Lincoln Technical
Institute.

Allston

Arlington

Ashland

Auburndale

Belmont

Beverly

Billerica

Boston

Braintree

Brighton

Brockton

Brookline

Cambridge

Canton

Charlestown

Chartley

Chelmsford

Danvers

Dedham

Dorchester

East Boston

East Braintree

East VValpole

East Weymouth

Everett

Fall River

Fitchburg

Foxboro

Framingham

Gardner

Hanover Center

Haverhill

Hingham

Hudson

Hyde Park

Ipswich

Jamaica Plain

Lawrence

Lexington

Lowell

Lynn

Maiden

Manchester

Mansfield

Mattapan

Maynard

Medford

Medway

Melrose

Methuen

Middleton

Milford

Milton

Needham

Newton

North Quincy

Norwood

Orient Heights

Peabody

Quincy

Reading

Revere

Roslindale

Roxbury

Salem

Salem Depot, N. H.

Saugus

Sherborn

Somerville

South Easton

Squantum

Stoneham

Swampscott

Taunton

Wakefield

Walpole

Waltham

Watertown

Wellesley

Wellesley Hills

West Acton

West Bridgewater

West Newton

West Roxbury

West Somerville

Westfield

Whitman

Wilmington

Winchester

Winthrop

Woburn

Wollaston

Woonsocket, R. L

Lincoln Technical Institute

HIGH SCHOOLS REPRESENTED

During the year 1944-1945 the following high schools and pre-
paratory schools were represented in the student body:

Abbot Academy

Admiral Farragut Academy

Andover

Angel Guardian

Arlington

Attleboro

B.M.C. Durfee

Belmont

Belmont Hill

Beverly

Boston College

Boston English

Boston Public Latin

Boston Trade

Braintree

Brighton

Brockton

Brookline

Bulkeley, Connecticut

Cambridge High & Latin

Canton

Central, Penn.

Central, Tenn.

Central Evening

Chapman Technical, Conn.

Charlestown

Chelmsford

Chelsea

Clark, Maine

Commerce

Concord, N. H.

Cornish, Maine

D. S. Jordan, Cal.

Dewitt Clinton Hebberd

Dorchester

East Boston

Eastern, Michigan

Everett

Fall River

Fitchburg

Foxboro

Framingham

Franklin

Gardner

General Draper

Girls' Latin

Greenfield

Groveton, N. H.

Hallowell

Haverhill

Henrietta, N. Y.

Hollis

Holten

Howard

Hudson

Huntington

Hyde Park

Ipswich

Jamaica Plain

Jeremiah E. Burke

Lansingburgh

LaSalle Academy, R. I.

Lawrence

Leominster

Lincoln Preparatory

Lisbon, Portugal

Lowell

Lynn Classical

Lynn English

Maiden

Maiden Catholic

Manchester, N. H.

Mansfield

Maynard

Mechanic Arts

Medford

Medway

Melrose

Memphis Technical, Tenn.

Miami Edison, Fla.

Milford

Millburn, N. J.

Milton

Mission

Moncton, N. B.

Mytiley, Greece

Nashua, N. H.

Needham

New Bedford

Newton

Newton Trade

North Quincy

Norton

Norwalk, Conn.

Norwood

Pawtucket, R. L

Peabody

Poland Central, N. Y.
Portugal
Quincy
Quincy Trade
Reading
Revere

Rindge Technical
Roslindale
Roxbury Memorial
.Rutland, Vt.
St. Clement
St. John's
St. Mary's
Salem
Saugus
Scituate
Searles

Sewanhaka, N. Y.
Shelburne, Canada
Sherborn
Somerville
South Boston
Steele
Stetson
Story

Sunapee Central, N. H.
Swampscott
Taunton
Thornton
Tilton

Vienna, Austria
Walpole
Waltham

Warren Harding, Conn.
Washington Irving, N. Y.
Watertown
Wellesley
Westfield
Weymouth
White Plains, N. Y.
Whitesboro, N. Y.
Whitman
Winchester
Winthrop
Woburn
Woodbury
Woonsocket, R. I.
Yarmouth Academy, N.S.

THE CAMPUS

The Lincoln Technical Institute is affiHated with North-
eastern University and enjoys the use of all the excellent classrooms
and modern laboratory facilities. It is easily reached from the

General Information 15

North and South Stations, and from the various points of the
Boston Elevated System since it is situated at the entrance of the
Huntington Avenue Subway.

The work of the School is carried on in the following buildings:

Richards Hall contains the administrative headquarters of the
Institute. The major portion of the building is given over to labora-
tory and classroom areas. Laboratory space is provided for the
following: Mechanical Engineering, General and Advanced
Physics, Inorganic, Organic, Analytical, Radio and Physical
Chemistry, together with several research laboratories. It also
contains several well-equipped drawing rooms extensively used for
courses in drafting and designing which form so important a part
in technical work.

The New Building, completed in 1941, contains the Chemical
Engineering and Biological Laboratories, student activities rooms,
classrooms, conference rooms and lecture halls for meetings of pro-
fessional engineering societies.

The East Building houses the University Library, a chemistry
laboratory, several classrooms and the Business Administration
Laboratory.

The South Building is largely devoted to work in Electrical and
Civil Engineering. Here is located the Sanitary, Concrete, Photo-
grammetric, Electronics, and Electrical Measurements and Dynamo
Laboratories in addition to department offices, classrooms and
conference rooms.

TRANSPORTATION

The Railroad Systems entering Boston issue students' tickets to
students under twenty-one years of age. Applications for these may
be obtained at a railroad office and must be presented at the school
office for signature.

The Administrative Office will do everything possible to make
share-the-ride arrangements among members of the student body
to accommodate those who have transportation problems.

The local ration boards have co-operated in providing supple-
mentary gasoline for students taking technical training of value to
the war effort.

LIBRARY AND STUDY AREAS

The University Library, located in the East Building, is well
equipped in technical literature and is available for use of students

16 Lincoln Technical Institute

of the Institute. The reading rooms are open from 9:00 a.m. to
7:30 P.M. on weekdays, and from 9:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m: on Satur-
days. The privilege of obtaining books from the Boston Public
Library is extended to students of the Institute. Applications for
this privilege should be made at the Administrative Office of the
Institute where the necessary blanks may be obtained.

Adequate study areas are available in the Library and New
Building for student use.

TEXTBOOKS AND SUPPLIES

The University Bookstore is operated for the convenience of
the student body. All books and supplies which are required by
the students for their work in the Institute may be purchased at the
Bookstore. Students taking Engineering Drawing should be pre-
pared to expend a sum of approximately $5.00 for drawing supplies,
exclusive of the cost of a satisfactory set of drawing instruments.

VISITORS

Visitors are always welcome at one class session in any depart-
ment. Those who wish to visit any of the classes should call at
the school office and obtain a visitor's card signed by the Dean.

SCHOLARSHIPS

The Executive Council has made available a few scholarships to
assist needy students of good mental capacity who, because of finan-
cial limitations, might be deprived of educational opportunities.
The award when a scholarship is granted may range up to one-
half of the cost of tuition for the year depending upon the student's
need and scholastic achievement.

AWARDS FOR SCHOLASTIC ACHIEVEMENTS

For the school year 1945-46 the Executive Council has offered
the following scholarships. To the highest ranking Sub-Freshman,
Division A and B Freshman, Sophomore and Junior who returns
for the following school year a scholarship of S60. To the second
highest ranking Sub-Freshman, Division A and B Freshman,
Sophomore and Junior who returns for the following school year a
scholarship of $30. These scholarships will be awarded only to
students pursuing a full program for the Degree of Associate in
Engineering.

General Information

The winners of these scholarships for the past school year were:

Sub-Freshman

Freshman
Division A

Division B
Sophomore
Junior

First, Donald W. Kilbrith
Second, Edward A. Richardson

First, George Spigel
Second, John D. Prescott

First, Irving B. Ruggles
Secorid, Angela D. Pingle

First, Earle D. Hardy
Second, Henry K. Rixford

First, Roy W. Lindgren
Second, Alphonse Paulavich

18 Lincoln Technical Institltte

REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMISSION

REGULAR STUDENTS

Applicants for admission who present evidence of completion
of an approved secondary school course, or the equivalent of
fifteen units (including one unit in Algebra and one in Plane
Geometry) may be admitted as regular students, candidates for
the Degree of Associate in Engineering and also eligible to proceed
later, if they so desire, to the Degree of Bachelor of Business Ad-
ministration in Engineering and Management offered by North-
eastern University Evening School of Business.

CONDITIONED STUDENTS

Because of the war emergency and the great need for tech-
nically trained men, the Institute will admit as conditioned stu-
dents certain applicants who, although they are not high school
graduates, have completed such secondary school work as em-
braces one unit of Algebra and one of Plane Geometry, and who
in the opinion of the Committee on Admissions can profit by
the work offered.

These students, upon satisfactory achievement, may be re-
classified as regular students and become eligible to receive the
Degree of Associate in Engineering.

SPECIAL STUDENTS

Students who wish to register for a special program or for single
courses will be admitted as special students, not candidates for the
diploma or Degree, provided their previous education and training
permit them to pursue the courses with profit.

Programs are planned to meet individual needs and should
prove of benefit to those who wish rapid and immediate knowl-
edge of certain fields, whether to supplement former training or
to obtain preparation which will permit them to enter a new line
of endeavor.

LATE REGISTRATION

Students should avoid late registration. Those who find it
necessary to register late may be permitted to enter the School
provided that they have not lost so much work as to render it
unlikely that they will succeed in their courses. No deduction from
tuition fees is made because of late enrollment.

Classification of Students 19

CLASSIFICATION OF STUDENTS

DIVISION A

Students who enter school at the beginning of the normal school
year in September are termed Division A students. Programs for
these students can be arranged so that the work of the school year
is completed by May or in early June by attendance three evenings
a week. Students, however, may elect to carry a lighter scholastic
load than the regular program. Summer courses are not necessary
for Division A students.

DIVISION B

Students entering school in January are termed Division B
students. These students terminate the first part of their studies by
the end of May, attending three evenings a week. However, to
complete the work of the Freshman year, it is necessary that they
attend a summer course which meets for two evenings a week.
Students pursuing this program may continue with the Sophomore
program in September of the year in which they enter school, and
thereafter attend during the normal school year.

Summer attendance is not compulsory, but in the event that a
student does not pursue a summer course, attendance is neces-
sary over a period of five school years to complete graduation
requirements.

SUB-FRESHMEN

Students who have not completed Algebra and Geometry, or
those who wish to review these subjects because of the remoteness
of their former period of study are termed Sub-Freshmen. Their
course will consist of Algebra and Geometry and the Freshmen
courses in Engineering Mathematics and Engineering Drawing.
These courses begin in September and extend for thirty-two weeks.
During the Summer Term the program consists of the Freshman
course in Physics.

Students who complete these courses will be admitted to the
work of the Sophomore year. This program permits them to save
a year which would otherwise be lost, since it enables them to
graduate in the customary period of four years.

Students are admitted to this course only after a personal inter-
view with the Dean.

20 Lincoln Technical Institute

ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS

APPLICATIONS FOR ADMISSION

Applications for admission should be filed as early as possible
in order that the necessary investigations may be made and the
status of each student definitely determined before the opening day.

REGISTRATION

Each student is required to present himself at the school office,
and to have his course approved by the Dean or hi? assistants and
to complete his registration. A student is expected to pay the first
tuition installment and other fees required before beginning
attendance.

Late registration will be permitted only at the discretion of the
Dean.

THE SCHOOL YEAR

The school year is divided into two semesters of seventeen weeks
each. The first semester extends from September 17 to January 25,
and the second semester from January 28 to May 24, except that
make-up sessions for public holidays may extend either term. At-
tention is drawn to the fact that Division B students begin their
studies on January 7.

GRADUATION REQUIREMENTS

Students may register for single subjects or for complete courses
provided such registration meets with the approval of the Dean;
but to receive the Degree of Associate in Engineering the student
must fulfill the following conditions:

a. He must complete all the courses of his particular curriculum,
either by attendance at this Institute, or by receiving advanced
standing credit for those courses, or the equivalent of those
courses, as determined by the Dean.

h. He must pass such final examinations as are required in the
courses he has pursued. The various curricula have been ar-
ranged so that the courses can be completed in four years.
However, an extension of time will be granted to those who
wish to take longer to meet the requirements for graduation.

Administrative Regulations 21

c. Regardless of the advanced standing credit he receives, he
must have been in attendance for at least a year preceding the
date on which he expects to graduate; that is, he must complete
at least one full year's work in the Lincoln Technical Institute.

SESSIONS

Classes meet on weekday evenings. There are no classes on
Saturdays. A full schedule will include three evenings a week. As
a rule classes are scheduled from 7 p.m. till 9 p.m., although
occasionally classes continue until 9.30 p.m. Laboratory periods
in Chemistry are of three hours' duration.

ATTENDANCE REQUIREMENTS

A careful record of attendance upon class exercises is kept for
each student. Absence from regularly scheduled classes on any
subject will seriously affect the standing of the student. It may
cause the removal of certain subjects from his schedule and the
listing of these as "conditioned subjects." However, if reasonable
excuse for absence be presented, the student may be allowed to
make up the time lost, and be given credit for the work; but he
must complete the work at such time and in such manner as his
instructor in the course shall designate.

Students who are unavoidably absent from class may receive
the home work assignments by telephoning the school office.

A minimum attendance record of 75 per cent must be maintained in all
classes before a student will be admitted to examination.

EXAMINATIONS AND QUIZZES

Examinations and quizzes are held throughout the term at the
discretion of the instructors. Quizzes are to be made up at the
discretion of the instructor. The fee for each make-up quiz is $1.50.
Final examinations are required upon the completion of all courses.
The following system of grading is used :

A — 90 to 100 — Excellent
B — 80 to 89 — Good
C — 70 to 79 — Fair
D — 60 to 69 — Lowest Passing Grade
F — 50 to 59 — Conditioned Failure
FF — Below 50 — Complete Failure

22 Lincoln Technical Institute

A student marked "F" in a final examination may receive one
special examination. If he fails in that, he must repeat the course.
It is to be noted that a student whose grade is "F" must petition for
re-examination. Permission to take a make-up examination is a privi-
lege, not a right, and is dependent upon the quality of work the
student has done throughout the course. Conditioned or make-up
examinations are given in September before the opening of the
next school year.

A student marked "FF" must repeat the course. The fee for
each special examination is S3. Grades and reports are mailed to
the students and will not be given out at the school office. Under
no circumstances will grades be given over the telephone.

It is to be noted that no student will be permitted to graduate who does not
maintain a "C" average and that students who have not maintained such an
average by the end oj the Sophomore year will not be permitted to continue
in school.

TRANSFERS

Students are not permitted to change from one course to another
without first consulting the Dean and receiving a Transfer Order
signed by him.

REPORTS OF STANDING

An informal report of the student's standing is issued at the end
of the eleventh and the twenty-second week; and the formal report,
covering the year's record, is issued at the close of each year.

In the case of students who are under twenty-one years of age,
reports may be sent to parents in the event of unsatisfactory work
on the part of the student, non-compliance with administrative
regulations, continued absence, and withdrawal. Parents of minors
may obtain reports at any time on request.

STUDENTS ADMITTED WITH ADVANCED STANDING

Students who, upon admission, were granted provisional ad-
vanced standing credit, but did not present evidence of their
eligibility to such credit, may not continue in school unless their
credentials are presented to the Dean before the close of the first
semester. The School is glad to aid students in obtaining transcripts
of record.

Administrative Regulations 23

METHODS OF INSTRUCTION

Instruction is given by means of lectures, recitations, laboratory
work, and practical work in the drawing rooms. Great value is set
upon the educational effect of these exercises, which constitute the
foundation of each of the courses. Oral and written examinations
are held at the discretion of the instructors.

The attention of every student is drawn to the fact that home
assignments must be dutifully done and written work submitted
as assigned if the student's grade is not to be seriously affected.
Wilful disregard of this matter will result in disciplinary action by
the Administrative Officers.

SUBJECTS OF INSTRUCTION

On pages 43 to 58 will be found a detailed statement of the scope
of the subjects offered in the various courses. The subjects are num-
bered for convenience of reference in consulting the various curric-
ulum schedules.

Required courses, and those prerequisite thereto, must have been
successfully pursued before any advanced course may be taken.

TUITION AND OTHER FEES

MATRICULATION FEE

A matriculation fee of $5 must accompany the initial application
for admission to the Institute. This fee is returned when the student
is refused admission,

TUITION

Tuition fees are based on a charge of SIO a semester hour. The
student may determine his cost for tuition by consulting the Pro-
grams of Instruction shown on pages 26 to 32 where the semester
hour credit for each course is indicated. The schedule for payments
for the year is as follows:

Division A Students

The first payment is due during the first week of school and the
other three during the weeks of November 12, January 28, and
March 11.

Division B Students

The first payment is due during the week of registration and the
second during the week of March 18. The summer term payment is
due during the week of registration in June.

24 Lincoln Technical Institute

Sub-Freshmen Students

The tuition charges for sub-freshmen students will be at the rate
of SIO a semester hour with $30 additional for Review Algebra and
Plane Geometry. The first payment is due during the week of regis-
tration and the other four payments during weeks of November 12,
January 28, and March 1 1 and during the week of registration of
the summer program.

DEFERRED PAYMENT PRIVILEGE

Students who find considerable difficulty in meeting payments
according to the schedule specified above may make other payment
arrangements upon consultation with the Dean.

UNIVERSITY FEE

All students will pay, in addition to tuition and laboratory fees,
a University fee based on the program they are carrying.

For students enrolled in three full courses SIO

For students enrolled in two full courses 7

For students enrolled in one full course 3

LABORATORY FEES

All students taking courses which require laboratory work are
charged laboratory fees in accordance with the following rates:

Aeronautical Laboratory $ 5

Analytical Chemistry Laboratory 15

Electrical curriculum 2nd, 3rd, 4th years — per year 5

Electronic curriculum 2nd, 3rd, 4th years — per year. ... 5

Mechanical Engineering Laboratory 5

Inorganic Chemistry Laboratory 15

Organic Chemistry Laboratory 15

Laboratory fees for students taking individual courses, excepting
chemistry laboratory, are $2.50 per semester. The fee for chemical
laboratory for individual course students is $7.50 per semester.

Laboratory fees are not returnable.

For students taking Chemistry there is in addition a Chemistry laboratory
deposit of $5, the unused portion oj which will be refunded after deductions
for breakages and non-returnables.

Programs of Instruction 25

SPECIAL EXAMINATION FEES

The fee for each special examination for advanced standing, for
conditioned students, or for students who have for justifiable cause
omitted to take the regular scheduled examinations is S3. The fee
must be paid before the examination is taken.

GRADUATION FEE

On completing the curricular requirements for the Degree of
Associate in Engineering the student will pay a graduation fee of
SIO. This fee must be paid by May 15 in the year of the student's
graduation.

REFUND POLICY

Students who are forced to withdraw from a course or from the
Institute are expected to notify the Administrative Office by com-
pleting the withdrawal blank which will be furnished. Requests for
a refund must be filed within forty-five days after withdrawal. For
causes deemed adequate by the Committee on Withdrawals the
balance of the tuition paid after the following charges have been
made will be refunded:

Thirty-four-week courses — four per cent of the total charges for
each week of attendance in each semester.

Twenty-week courses — six per cent of the total charges for each
week of attendance each half term.

Seventeen-week courses - — eight per cent of the total charges for
each week of attendance.

The same charges are applicable in the event that a student
abandons a part of his program. In addition the full Laboratory
Fee is charged in those cases where a student is pursuing a labo-
ratory course.

PROGRAMS OF INSTRUCTION

LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF ASSOCIATE IN ENGINEERING

The Lincoln Technical Institute off"ers four-year courses in
Chemistry, Civil and Structural Engineering, Electrical Engineer-
ing, Electronic Engineering, Industrial Engineering and Me-
chanical Engineering, the last of which is also available with an
Aeronautical option. Schedules of the various curricula are given
on the following pages.

Lincoln Technical Institute

On the satisfactory completion of a prescribed four-year course
the Degree of Associate in Engineering is awarded to all regular
students.

All these courses are of strictly college grade. In those cases where
students are unable, because of circumstances, to carry all of the
work prescribed in any year, an extension of time will be granted by
the Dean, who will determine which subjects shall be excluded, and
also the order in which the omitted subjects shall later be studied.

When a student elects a curriculum he is expected to complete
all the subjects in that curriculum in order to receive the Degree
unless he has the permission of the Dean to drop or omit certain
subjects and substitute others for those omitted.

Graduation from these programs carries four years' credit to-
wards a six-year program leading to the Degree of B.A.A. in En-
gineering and Management offered by Northeastern University
Evening School of Business.

SPECIAL COURSE IN CHEMISTRY
Leading to a Diploma

FIRST YEAR
First Semester

Course Class

No. Course Hours

* Ghl General Chemistry 2^

ChLl General Chem. Lab 3

sy-

Secpnd Semester

Course

No. Course

Ch2 General Chemistry 23^

ChL2 General Chem. Lab 3

Class
Hours

sy2

SECOND YEAR

Ch3 Qualitative Chemistry .. . 2^
ChL3 QuaHtative Chem. Lab... 3

5J^

Ch4 Quantitative Chemistry .
ChL4 Quantitative Chem. Lab.

2^
3

THIRD YEAR

Ch5 Organic Chemistry 2J^

ChL5 Organic Chem. Lab 3

Ch6 Organic Chemistry 2J^

ChL6 Organic Chem. Lab 3

An additional course, Industrial Chemistry, Lectures and Laboratory, will be offered

in any year if sufficient students desire it.

These courses carry credit towards the Degree of Associate in Engineering and the

Degree of B.B.A. in Engineering and Management offered by Northeastern University

Evening School of Business.

Students wishing to pursue programs for the Degree should consult the Dean regarding

particulars.

* No credit allowed until completion of second semester.

Programs of Instruction

CHEMISTRY
Leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering

The Sciences of Chemistry and Chemical Engineering have undergone a marked
development in recent years. It has grown out of the discoveries of the chemical labora-
tories which have launched many new industries whose production processes involve
chemical as well as physical change. The chemist is in demand and his aid is sought in
the operation of plants producing drugs, oils, rayon and cellophane, plastics and vari-
ous synthetic products resulting from intensive research during the war. The chemist
may assist in the creation of more economical manufacturing processes, promote the
development of manufacturing by-products, and be instrumental in the discovery of
new products in the research laboratories.

In addition to the fundamental courses in chemistry, mathematics, and physics, a
considerable amount of time is devoted to more advanced work in chemistry. Since the
field is so varied, the curriculum has been designed to give the students a broad training
rather than a specialized training in one specific industry.

FIRST

YEAR

First Semester

Second Semester

Course
No.

Course

Class
Hours

Course
No.

Course

Class
Hours

Algebra

Physics I

Engineering Drawing. .

. 23^

Trigonometry

■ 2J4

PI
* Dl

Physics II

Engineering Drawing. .

. 2^
. 2H

7J^

iVi

M3
M5
Chi

Analytical Geometry
Differential Calculus
General Chemistry 2J-2

SECOND YEAR

ChLl General Chem. Lab 3

Integral Calculus 2J^

Ch2 General Chemistry 2J-^

ChL2 General Chem. Lab 3

THIRD YEAR

MEl Applied Mechanics I. . . .
Ch3 Qualitative Chemistry .
ChL3 Qualitative Analysis Lab.

2H
2H
3

ME2 Applied Mechanics II. . . 23^
Ch4 Quantitative Chemistry. . 2J^
ChL4 Quantitative Analysis Lab. 3

Ch5
ChL5

Engineering Elective . .

Organic Chemistry 2^

Organic Chem. Lab 3

FOURTH YEAR

" Engineering Elective .... 2

Ch6 Organic Chemistry 23^

GhL6 Organic Chem. Lab 3

73^

No credit allowed until completion of second semester.

Among the elective subjects deemed desirable are Heat Engineering, Electricity

and Machine Drawing, Physical Chemistry.

Lincoln Technical Institute

CIVIL AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING
Leading to the Degree of Associate In Engineering

The field of Civil Engineering has to do with the planning and building of all kinds
of structures and public works. Today its major branches include topographical, munic-
ipal, railroad, highway, structural, hydraulic, and sanitary engineering. It covers land
surveying, the building of railroads, soil mechanics, harbors, docks, the construction of
sewers, water works, streets and highways, the design and construction of flood control
projects, bridges, buildings, walls, foundations, and all fixed structures.

This curriculum is designed to oflfer the relatively compact body of principles upon
which all work in Civil Engineering depends. It is intended to prepare the young civil
engineer to take up the work of design and construction of structures, to solve the
problems of water supply, and to undertake intelligently the supervision of work in
allied fields of engineering and general contracting.

FIRST YEAR

First Semester

Course Class

No. Course Hours

Ml Algebra 2^

*D1 Engineering Drawing.. . . 2J^

PI Physics 1 23^

IV'

Course

No.
M2
D2
P2

Second Semester

Class
Course Hours

Trigonometry 2 J^

Engineering Drawing. .. . 2J^
Physics II 2]/2

l}i

Integral Calculus 2]^

Applied Mechanics II . . . 2J^
Surveying II 23^

M3
M5
MEl
"CEl

Analytical Geometry \
Differential Calculus J
Applied Mechanics I. . . . 2J^
Surveying 1 2)^

SECOND YEAR

ME2
CE2

THIRD YEAR

*ME3 Strength of Materials I
CE3 Highway Engineering .
*CD1 Structural Drawing I . .

23^

ME4 Strength of Materials II.

CE4 Hydraulics

CD2 Structural Drawing II . . .

2H
2H
23^2

FOURTH YEAR

*CE5 Engineering Structures I .

CE7 Concrete

*CE9 Structural Design I . . . .

CE6
CE8
CEIO

Engineering Structures II 234

Concrete Design 2

Structural Design II 234

* Credit not allowed until completion of second semester.

Programs of Instruction

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
Leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering

The profession of electrical engineering affords a wide diversification of employ-
ment opportunities. The electrical industry and the field of electrical engineering are
usually divided into two main branches, one having to do with electrical power and the
other, communications. The power group deals principally with large equipment and
apparatus employing heavy currents; the communications group handles small, more
delicate equipment employing small, even minute currents. Electrical engineering thus
embraces the generation, transmission, and distribution of electricity for light and power
purposes, the operation of electric railways, the design, construction, and operation of
all types of electrical equipment including telephone, telegraph, and radio apparatus
as well as lamps, motors, etc.

This course provides a good theoretical background with practical applications.
Instruction is carefully planned and the time divided among recitations, lectures,
laboratory tests, homework, and reports.

FIRST YEAR

First Semester

Course Class

No. Course Hours

Ml Algebra 23^

PI Physics I lYi

EEl Direct Current Theory . . 2

Course

No.
M2
P2
EE2

Second Semester

Class
Course Hours

Trigonometry 2J^

Physics II 2H

Alternating Current

Theory 2 J^

J}i

Integral Calculus 2\^

Direct Current Ma-
chinery II 23^

Applied Mechanics II . . . 2 J^

M3 Analytical Geometry \
M4 Differential Calculus /
EE3 Direct Current Ma-
chinery I

MEl Applied Mechanics I . .

SECOND YEAR

2Vo
2M

114

EE4

ME2

EE5 Alternating Current Ma-
chinery 1 23^

EDI Electrical Drafting 2^^

ME3 Strength of Materials. .. . 23/^

IV'.

THIRD YEAR

EE6

ED2
ME4

Alternating Current Ma-
chinery II

Electrical Drafting

Strength of Materials . . . .

2V2
23^

73^

FOURTH YEAR

ME5 Heat Engineering 2

EE7 Electricity III 2

ELI Advanced Elec. Lab. I . . . 23^

63i

ME6

EE8

EL2

Heat Engineering. . .

Electricity IV

Advanced Elec. Lab.

II,

23^

* No credit allowed until completion of second semester.

Lincoln Technical Institute

ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
Leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering

This course is designed to train students for the various branches of the field of
Electronics. The new advancements in the fields of radio, television, radar, and sonar
created by the urgencies of war have opened up greater opportunities for intellectual
pioneering in these fields of engineering than in other branches of the profession.

Since electron tubes and circuits function around the principles of Electricity, this
subject is adequately treated in the first two years of the course. After a thorough study
of the various types of electron tubes and their basic circuits in the second and third
years, the fourth year is devoted to the various important fields that the student may
wish to enter, such as Industrial Electronics, Communications, Broadcast Stations, and
the new fields of Frequency Modulation and Television.

The whole course is a good balance between theory and practice, and experiments
involving electron tubes and their applications are used through the entire last three
years of the course. Laboratory reports and home work problems are used to supple-
ment the experiments and lectures so that the student will absorb the material in a
thorough manner.

FfRST YEAR

First Semester

Course Class

No. Course Hours

Ml Algebra IM

PI Physics 1 2H

EEl Direct Current Theory . . 2

Course

No.
M2
P2
EE2

Second Semester

Class
Course Hours

Trigonometry 2 ^

Physics II 2J^

Alternating Current

Theory 23^

M3
M4
EE3

EE9

Analytical Geometry 1
Differential Calculus / ' '

D.C. Machinery I 2]^

Intro, to Electron Tubes. . 23^

SECOND YEAR

114

•■EEIO

Integral Calculus 2}/^

Electron Tubes and Cir-
cuits 1 5

ly.

THIRD YEAR

EE5 A. C. Machinery 1 2 3^

EDI Electrical Drafting 23^

EEll Electron Tubes and Cir-
cuits II 2J^

ED2 Electronic Drafting

**EE12 Communication Engineer-
ing I

2^
5

FOURTH YEAR

**EE13 Communication Engineer-
ing II

EEl 5 Industrial Electronics I . .

f EEl 7 Electronic Test Equip-
ment and Measurement
I

5
2H

iy9.

and

**EE14 Freq. Modulation

Television

Industrial Electronics II .

Electronic Test Equip-
ment and Measure-
ment II

EE16
t EE18

5
23^

73^

* No credit allowed until completion of second semester.
* * Tw© nights per week,
f This course may be substituted for EEl 5-1 6.

Programs of Instruction

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
Leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering

Meeting the tremendous production requirements of World War II has called for
every economy of time in man and machine hours to produce the maximum output.
The scientific approach to the problems of industrial management has created an in-
creasing demand for those trained in engineering and in the fundamentals of industrial
management to assume administrative responsibility.

The competition of the postwar period will require continued emphasis on this
phase of management and provide many opportunities for trained personnel in methods
engineering, time study, production planning and control and other phases of industrial
relations pertaining to men and machines.

FIRST YEAR

First Semester

Course Class

No. Course Hours

Ml Algebra IM

Dl Engineering Drawing. .. . 2^
PI Physics 2}4

IV.

Course

No.
M2
D2
P2

Second Semester

Class
Course Hours

Trigonometry 2]/^

Engineering Drawing. ... 2J^
Physics 2]/2

1V>.

SECOND YEAR

M3
M5
MEl
lEl

Analytical Geometry 1
Differential Calculus J

Applied Mechanics

Job Evaluation and Merit
Rating

2K
2H

ME2

IE2

Integral
Applied
Methods

Calculus

Mechanics. . . .
Engineering. . .

. 2H

. 23^

. 2^

THIRD YEAR

ME3

MDl
IE3

Strength of Material 2Y2

Machine Drawing 23^2

Production Planning and

Control 2H

ME4
MD2

IE4

Strength of Material.
Machine Drawing . .
Time Study

2^
23^
2

FOURTH YEAR

ME9
ME5
IE5

IE7

IE9

Machine Design 2

Heat Engineering 2

Accounting Aids to Man-
agement 2H

Labor-Management Re-
lations 2

Quality Control by Sta-
tistical Method 2J^

634

MEIO Machine Design

ME6 Heat Engineering

IE6 Accounting Aids to Man-
agement

IE8 Industrial Safety Engi-
neering

lElO Advanced Time Study .. .

2
2

23^

23^
23-^

63/

Fourth year students may select one of the starred courses in each semester.

Lincoln Technical Institute

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
Leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering

The field of mechanical engineering is concerned with the harnessing of our power
resources by means of machinery to form useful work. In contrast to the civil engineer
who deals primarily with static forces, the mechanical engineer is more concerned with
the mechanics of motion or kinetics. And because moving parts require constant care
and adjustment, the mechanical engineer has the task not only of designing and in-
stalling complicated machinery, but also of operating it efficiently after it has been
installed.

Among the major branches of mechanical engineering are included power pro-
duction engineering, machine and machine-tool design, railway mechanical engineer-
ing, automotive engineering, aeronautical engineering, refrigerating engineering, air
conditioning engineering, and the numerous mechanical problems related to modern
industrial operation.

This program of study is designed to give the student considerable training in the
principles of mechanical engineering and equip him for advancement in the many sub-
divisions of this branch of engineering. Students interested in Aeronautical work may
select appropriate courses in Aerodynamics, Airplane Engines, and Airplane Design in
the senior year.

FIRST YEAR

First Semester

Course Class

No. Course Hours

Ml Algebra 2^

* Dl Engineering Drawing. .. . 2J^

PI Physics 1 2}4

Course

No.
M2
D2
P2

Second Semester

Class
Course Hours

Trigonometry 2 J^

Engineering Drawing.. . . 2J^
Physics II 2J^

SECOND YEAR

M3
M5
* MDl
MEl

Analytical Geometry \
Differential Calculus /

Machine Drawing

Applied Mechanics . . . .

2H
• 21^
. 2H

73^

MD2

ME2

Integral Calculus

Machine Drawing. . . .
Applied Mechanics. . .

. . 2H
.. 21^

. . 2^

THIRD YEAR

ME3 Strength of Materials. ... 2\i

ME7 Mechanism 23^

ME5 Heat Engineering 2

ME4
CE4
ME6

Strength of Materials.

Hydraulics

Heat Engineering. . . .

2^
iVz
2

FOURTH YEAR

ME9

Machine Design 2

ME 11 Mechanical Engineering

Laboratory 2 J/o

* Engineering Elective . ... 23^2

MEIO Machine Design 2

MEl 2 Mechanical Engineering

Laboratory 23^

Engineering Elective. ... 2}^

FOURTH YEAR (Aeronautical Option)

MEl 3 Aerodynamics 2 34

MEl 5 Airplane Design I 2

MEl 7 Airplane Engines I 2

MEl 4 Aeronautical Laboratory 23^

MEl 6 Airplane Design II 2

MEl 8 Airplane Engines II 2

63^

* No credit allowed until completion of second semester.
** Among the elective subjects deemed desirable are Concrete (1), Electricity, and
Airplane Design.

Programs of Instruction 33

DEGREE

OF BACHELOR OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

PROGRAM

The Lincoln Technical Institute in conjunction with the
Evening School of Business, Northeastern University, offers a six-
year program leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Business Adminis-
tration in Engineering and Industrial Management. Graduates of
the Lincoln Technical Institute holding the Degree of Associate in
Engineering can complete the remainder of the program to qualify
for the B.B.A. degree in two years.

DEGREE PROGRAM

Semester
Lincoln Technical Institute: Hours

Twelve approved full courses in chosen engineering
program (any of the curricula listed on pages
26 to 32). 60

School of Business:

Accounting Aids to Management 5

Business Economics 5

Industrial Management Problems and Policies 5
Business and Industrial Management 5

Principles of Production and Scientific Manage-
ment 5
Principles of Purchasing 2H
Business Reports and Conferences 2/^ 30
*Business Readings 5
fOccupational Experience 30

Total Semester Hours Required for Degree 125

* There are no lectures in the Business Readings Course, which is designed to broaden
the student's acquaintance with selected readings in the field of business.

t Occupational Experience is awarded to a ma.ximum of ten semester hours for each
of the last three years of the course. The award is based on the nature and quality of
the student's occupation during this period.

Lincoln Technical Institute

Course

No.
IE5
IE6
ELI
EL2
lElO
ME13
ME14
ME15
ME16
ME17
ME18
Ml
EE5
EE6
EE2
M3
MEl
ME2
EE12

EE13

CE6

CE7

EE3

EE4

EEl

EDI

EE7
EE8
EEIO

EEll
ED2
EE17

EEl 8

Dl
D2
CE5
CE6

EE14

Chi

Gh2

ChLl

GhL2

ME5

ME6

CE3

CE4

EE15

EE16

ALPHABETICAL LIST OF SUBJECTS IN ALL CURRICULA

Semester

Subject Given Day Time

Accounting Aids to Management 1 1 Monday 7-9:30

Accounting Aids to Management II 2 Monday 7-9:30

Advanced Electrical Laboratory I 1 Friday 7-9:30

Advanced Electrical Laboratory II 2 Friday 7-9:30

Advanced Time Study 2 Monday 7-9:30

Aerodynamics 1 Monday 7-9:30

Aeronautical Laboratory 2 Monday 7-9:30

Airplane Design 1 1 Wednesday 7-9

Airplane Design II 2 Wednesday 7-9

Airplane Engines 1 1 Friday 7-9

Airplane Engines II 2 Friday 7-9

Algebra 1, 2, S Monday 7-9:30

Alternating Current Machinery 1 1 Wednesday 7-9:30

Alternating Current Machinery II 2 Wednesday 7-9:30

Alternating Current Theory 2, B Wednesday 7-9:30

Analytical Geometry 1 Monday (2) 7-9:30

Apphed Mechanics 1 1 Friday 7-9:30

Applied Mechanics II 2 Friday 7-9:30

Communication Engineering I 2 Monday and

Wednesday 7-9:30

Communication Engineering II 1 Monday and

Friday 7-9:30

Concrete 1 Monday 7-9

Concrete Design . 2 Monday 7-9

Differential Calculus 1 Monday (2) 7-9:30

Direct Current Machinery 1 1 Wednesday 7-9:30

Direct Current Machinery II 2 Wednesday 7-9:30

Direct Current Theory 1,2 Wednesday 7-9

Electrical Drafting 1 Friday 7-9:30

Electrical Laboratory Both Friday 7-9:30

Electricity I Both Wednesday 7-9

Electricity II Both Wednesday 7-9

Electricity III 1 Monday 7-9

Electricity IV 2 Monday 7-9:30

Electron Tubes and Circuits I 2 Wednesday and

Friday 7-9:30

Electron Tubes and Circuits II 1 Monday 7-9:30

Electronic Drafting 2 Friday 7-9:30

Electronic Test Equipment and

Measurement 1 1 Wednesday 7-9:30

Electronic Test Equipment and

Measurement II 2 Wednesday 7-9:30

Engineering Drawing 1 1, 2, S Wednesday 7-9:30

Engineering Drawing II 2, B, S Wednesday 7-9:30

Engineering Structures 1 1 Friday 7-9:30

Engineering Structures II 2 Friday 7-9:30

Frequency Modulation and Television. ... 2 Monday and

Friday 7-9:30

General Chemistry 1 1 Wednesday 7-9:30

General Chemistry II 2 Wednesday 7-9:30

General Chemistry Laboratory I 1 Friday 7-10

General Chemistry Laboratory II 2 - Friday 7-10

Heat Engineering 1 1 Wednesday 7-9

Heat Engineering II 2 Wednesday 7-9

Highway Engineering 1 Friday 7-9

Hydraulics 2 Friday 7-9:30

Industrial Electronics 1 1 Wednesday 7-9:30

Industrial Electronics II 2 Wednesday 7-9:30

Programs of Instruction

Course
No.
IE8
M6
EE9
lEl
IE7
ME9
MEIO
MDl
MD2
MEll
ME12
ME7
IE2
Ch5
Ch6
ChL5
ChL6
PI
P2
P4
IE3
Ch3
ChL3
IE9
Ch4
ChL4
ME3
ME4
CE9
CEIO
GDI
GD2

CEl
CE2
IE4
M2

Semester
Subject Given

Industrial Safety Engineering 2

Integral Calculus 2

Introduction to Electron Tubes 1

Job Analysis and Evaluation 1

Labor Management Relations 1

Machine Design I 1

Machine Design II 2

Machine Drawing I 1

Machine Drawing II 2

Mechanical Engineering Laboratory I . . . . 1

Mechanical Engineering Laboratory II . . . 2

Mechanism 1

Methods Engineering 2

Organic Chemistry I 1

Organic Chemistry II 2

Organic Chemistry Laboratory I 1

Organic Chemistry Laboratory II 2

Physics I 1, S

Physics II 2, S

Physics III 2, S

Production Planning and Control 1

Qualitative Chemistry 1

Qualitative Chemistry Laboratory 1

Quality Control by Statistical Methods ... 1

Quantitative Chemistry 2

Quantitative Chemistry Laboratory 2

Strength of Material I 1

Strength of Material II 2

Structural Design I 1

Structural Design II 2

Structural Drawing 1 1

Structural Drawing II 2

Sub-Freshman Mathematics Both

Surveying 1 1

Surveying II 2

Time Study 2

Trigonometry 2, B, S

Day

Time

Monday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Friday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9

Monday

7-9

Friday

7-9

Friday

7-9

Wednesday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Friday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Friday

7-10

Friday

7-10

Friday

7-9:30

Friday

7-9:30

Friday

7-9:30

Friday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-10

Monday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-10

Monday

7-9:30

Monday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Monday and

Friday

7-10

Wednesday

7-9:30

Wednesday

7-9:30

Friday

7-9

Monday

7-9:30

(1) 1 = First Semester; 2 = Second Semester; B = Repeated for Division B about

March 1 5 ; S = Summer Term.

(2) Analytical Geometry and Differential Calculus are given as one course.

36 Lincoln Technical Institute

ENGINEERING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

CIVIL ENGINEERING LABORATORIES

A considerable amount of demonstration equipment including
many models is available for use in the study of structures, hydrau-
lics, sanitary engineering, highways, concrete and soil mechanics.

Surveying

The Department of Civil Engineering is provided with a variety
of excellent and up-to-date equipment for field work. The instru-
ments have been chosen to make possible the working out of ad-
vanced as well as elementary field problems, and to acquaint the
students with the principal makes and types of instruments in
general use.

Hydraulics and Sanitary Engineering

This laboratory, located on the first floor of the South Building,
is equipped with demonstration measuring devices for use in con-
nection with the courses in hydraulics.

Complete equipment is also provided for studies of water soften-
ing, filtration, coagulation, analysis of water and sewage by the
photelometer, and analysis of bacterial condition of water and
sewage. Also specialized equipment for advanced courses in sani-
tary research.

Concrete and Highway Engineering

Located on the second floor of the South Building, this laboratory
is equipped for conducting all the routine tests on cement and
aggregate. The 300,000 lb. Riehle testing machine in the Me-
chanical Engineering Department is available for compression tests
on concrete cylinders.

Equipment is also available for conducting a major portion of the
accepted tests on bituminous materials as used in highway work.
Soil Mechanics equipment consists of a general soil sampler, con-
solidometer, wet-mechanical gram-size analysis and a quicksand
demonstration tank.

Aerial Photogrammetry

The apparatus in this laboratory may be used to instruct the
students in the basic principles of photogrammetry, or may be used

Engineering Laboratory Equipment 37

to instruct the students in the more technical phases of photogram-
metry such as horizontal control, vertical control, stereoscopic
plotting, mechanical triangulation, and the tri-metrogon method
of plotting.

CHEMICAL LABORATORIES

For experiments and investigations in Chemistry there are avail-
able two laboratories with the following equipment:

Analytical Chemistry

The laboratory for Analytical Chemistry is fully equipped for
giving instruction in the usual undergraduate courses. Each
student is supplied with the necessary Pyrex and Kimble laboratory
glassware, Stillimanite and Coors porcelain, and the standard pieces
of hardware. Special equipment of all needed types is available.

An adjoining balance room is equipped with Becker and Voland
balances suitable for quantitative analytical work.

Industrial Chemistry

This laboratory is equipped with high pressure steam, vacuum,
and the facilities usually found in a chemical laboratory. The
various instruments and other chemical equipment necessary for
the examination, testing, and analysis of the raw materials, inter-
mediate and final products of the various industries are at hand.

The electrical equipment includes a Kimley electro-analysis
machine for the determination of copper, lead, nickel, and zinc;
a Hevi-duty electric furnace for use in ignition and combustion
work; and a Freas drying oven capable of adjustment for various
temperatures. Power is available in a variety of D.C. and A.C.
voltages.

Inorganic Chemistry

In the locker assigned to each student for his individual use are
the articles needed more or less continually by him as he does his
experiments in the laboratory sessions. He has a liberal supply of
glass, porcelain, metal and other articles. Additional pieces of ap-
paratus are issued from the stockroom or otherwise made available
for use in particular experiments where they are needed.

The laboratories are equipped with general facilities appropriate
to this course, such as gas, electricity, cold and hot water, fume
hoods.

38 Lincoln Technical Institute

Organic Chemistry

The needed equipment is available. There are individual lockers
and apparatus, fume hoods for general use, and special equipment,
as required.

Drying operations are carried out with the aid of a steam-heated
drying chamber, and electrically heated drying oven. Steam lines
on the benches supply the steam for steam distillations, eliminating
the necessity of individual steam generators.

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORIES

The Electrical Engineering laboratories are located in the South
Building. Four laboratories are included in this unit: Dynamo,
Measurements, High Tension, and Electronics and Communi-
cations.

Dynamo

This laboratory is provided with both 60 cycle three-phase 230
volt alternating current and 1 1 5-230 volt three-wire direct current.
The equipment includes more than sixty motors and generators of
different types together with the necessary auxiliary equipment to
operate and test them. The motors and generators have been
selected so as to reduce as much as possible the risk from high volt-
age while making available to the students a representative range
of commercial apparatus.

Electrical Measurements

The equipment here is of two distinct types: first, that planned
primarily for teaching principles of measurement, and secondly that
which is used in teaching advanced standardizing methods as well
as for calibrating instruments in other laboratories of the Univer-
sity. Briefly, this laboratory is equipped for practically any work in
electrical measurements except for the absolute determinations
carried on in national standardizing laboratories.

High Tension

Engineering Laboratory Equipment 39

volts. A 4,000 ampere low voltage transformer is also available for
the study of the effects of heavy currents in conductors, switcHes,
and contacts.

ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING LABORATORIES

The Electronics laboratories are located in Richards Hall and the
South Building.

Electron Tubes and Circuits

Equipment is available to study the operating of all types of
electron tubes that are normally used, extending from diodes
through to beam tubes, gas triodes, photocells, cathode ray tubes,
and the various rectifier, amplifier and other basic circuits used with
them, including vacuum tube voltmeters, regulated power supplies,
resistance coupled amplifiers, inverse feedback amplifiers, etc.

Electronics and Communications

These laboratories are equipped with modern apparatus for work
in the fields of electronics, networks, radio engineering, ultra-high
frequency techniques and industrial electronics. The equipment
includes Westinghouse Ignitron Rectifier, Industrial X-Ray Equip-
ment, Motor Control Unit and equipment on Induction and Di-
electric Heating.

Industrial Electronics

Equipment available for this course includes: photocell and time
delay relays, motor controls, cathode ray oscilloscopes, grid con-
trolled rectifiers, oscillators, induction and dielectric heating equip-
ment, and welding control equipment.

Communication Engineering

Equipment available for this course includes crystal oscillators,
radio frequency amplifiers, frequency doublers, plate and grid
modulation units, complete transmitters, radio frequency trans-
mission lines. The frequency modulation apparatus includes
balanced modulators, reactance modulators, phase modulators,
discriminators, limiters, networks, antenna units, and complete
receivers.

Apparatus for television includes sweep oscillators and ampli-
fiers, synchronizing circuits, video amplifiers, multivibrators, count-
ers, clipping, shaping and D.C. insertion circuits, and television
receiving equipment.

40 Lincoln Technical Institute

In the newer fields such as Industrial Electronics and Tele-
vision equipment is added from time to time as practical experi-
ments are developed.

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

The Industrial Engineering Laboratory is located in Richards
Hall and is devoted exclusively to methods engineering and time
study analysis. This laboratory is completely equipped with the
latest facilities and tools used by industrial engineers. Besides the
general equipment consisting of benches, tables, lathes, jigs, fix-
tures, and racks, the laboratory has an ample supply of time study
boards, stop watches and timers for time study work. There is also
available complete motion picture equipment and microchronom-
eters for micromotion work.

Students in the Department of Industrial Engineering also share
in the use of the Mechanical Engineering Laboratories.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORIES

The Mechanical Engineering Department has a suite of well-
equipped laboratories, containing a large variety of modern ma-
chines and occupying over 10,000 square feet of floor space in the
basement of Richards Hall. Special areas have been set aside and
equipped for oil testing, mechanics research, and similar purposes.
Auxiliary equipment is, of course, available for making all the usual
tests and measurements.

Steam Power

This equipment includes a wide variety of steam engines, tur-
bines, pumps, heat exchangers, and measuring instruments.

Testing Materials and Heat Treatment

For tension, compression, bending, and shearing tests, the labora-
tory is equipped with a 300,000 lb. capacity Riehle and a 50,000
lb. capacity Olsen, as well as several smaller testing machines. For
other tests the laboratory has cement testers, torsional testing ma-
chines, impact testers, fatigue testers, hardness testers, extensom-
eters, oil testing equipment calorimeters, as well as instruments
for measuring speed vibration, temperatures, pressures and flow
of fluids.

Engineering Laboratory Equipment 41

For heat treatment studies, an electric furnace and a gas-fired
furnace are available. Equipment magnifying up to 2600 diameters
is available for photographing crystalline structures, and the labora-
tory has polaroid equipment for photoelastic stress analysis.

Machine Shop

Adjoining the laboratory is a machine shop fully equipped with
machine tools, welding equipment, and a small forge.

Internal Combustion and Aeronautics

The internal combustion equipment includes a number of gas
and oil, automobile, airplane, and Diesel engines. Most of these are
set up for running experimental tests, but several are available for
dismantling and demonstration purposes.

An open circuit Venturi type wind tunnel having a three-foot
throat and capable of 120 miles per hour wind velocity is available
for experimental and demonstration work in the measurement of
air forces on model planes and other structures. The tunnel is
equipped with three component hydraulic balances having variable
degrees of sensitivity.

DESIGN AND DRAFTING ROOMS

The School possesses large, light, and well-equipped drawing
rooms for the carrying on of the designing and drafting which form
so important a part of engineering work. These rooms are supplied
with lockers containing the drawing supplies, and files containing
blueprints, and photographs of machines and structures that
represent the best practice. Drafting room blackboards are equipped
with traveling straightedge devices which facilitate speed and
accuracy in blackboard demonstrations.

PHYSICS DEPARTMENT

The Physics equipment has been carefully selected and is ample
for demonstrating physical principles. The following apparatus is
available for this purpose:

Motor driven Hyvac pump, mechanical oscillator, elasticity
apparatus; Joly balance; barometers; pulleys; specific gravity
bottles; torsion balance; eight-foot slide rule; wave apparatus;
spherometers; organ pipes; tuning forks; Hartl optical disk; arc
illuminator; projection lantern; refraction apparatus; metronome;

42 Lincoln Technical Institute

lenses; calorimeters; hydrometers; thermometers; burners; appara-
tus for measuring latent heat, specific heat, expansion and mechani-
cal equivalent of heat; optical bench and supplies; diffraction
grating; spectroscopes; rheostats; galvanometers; magnets; electro-
static apparatus; electroscope; Wimshurst machine; induction coil;
ammeters; voltmeters; resistance boxes; condensers; wheatstone
bridges; thermocouples; demonstration table equipped with water,
compressed air, exhaust hood, 110 volts D.C., 110 volts A.C., and
220 volts A.C.

Description of Courses 43

DESCRIPTION OF COURSES

The Lincoln Technical Institute reserves the right to withdraw,
modify, or add to the courses offered or to change the order or
content of courses in any curriculum.

The Lincoln Technical Institute further reserves the right to
change the requirements for graduation, tuition and fees charged,
and other regulations. However, no change in tuition and fees at
any time shall become effective until the school year following that
in which it is announced.

Any changes which may be made from time to time pursuant to
the above policy shall be applicable to all students in the school,
college, or department concerned, including former students who
may re-enroll.

CHEMISTRY
Ch 1-2 General Chemistry

This course will instruct in the fundamental ideas of matter and energy;
properties of gases, liquids, and solids; molecular weights; equations and
valence; classification of the elements; ionic reactions; chemistry of metals
and non-metals; electrochemistry; introduction to organic chemistry
including industrial applications to petroleum, rubber, synthetic resins,
plastics; chemotherapy; laboratory experiments demonstrating the prin-
ciples discussed in class. 2Y2 semester hours credit

ChL 1-2 General Chemistry Laboratory

This course consists of a series of laboratory experiments operated in
conformance with the lecture course in General Chemistry (Ch 1-2).

3 semester hours credit

Ch 3 Qualitative Chemistry

The object of this course is to give the student knowledge of the various
fundamental laws and principles. A portion of the time is devoted to the
formulation of numerical terms which are essential to the understanding
of the mass action law, ionic equilibria, solubility product, hydrolysis,
and redox instants. The use of the newer spot tests is stressed and, where
possible, their reactions explained. . 2}/2 semester hours credit

ChL-3 Qualitative Analysis Laboratory

This course applies the material covered in Ch-3 to actual problems.
After some preliminary experiments, certain procedures are combined and
the separations and identifications made on both known and unknown
solutions. Finally, these are combined into a complete, systematic scheme

44 Lincoln Technical Institute

which is applied to artificially prepared mixtures and industrial materials.
Careful manipulations, thoroughness in observation, and accuracy in
arriving at conclusions are expected of each student.

3 semester hours credit
Ch 4 Quantitative Chemistry

It is the purpose of this course to give to the student a realization of the
scientific development of quantitative methods. Each of the major opera-
tions such as weighing, measurement of volumes, titration, filtration,
ignition, and combustion, is considered from the standpoint of the theo-
retical principles involved, and with due consideration of the manipulative
technique necessary.

This is followed by the combination of these operations and their appli-
cation to actual analysis, including a comprehensive study of volumetric
methods and of the more elementary parts of gravimetric analysis.

As the correct calculation of analytical results is of no less importance
than the actual procedures of analysis, a number of problems forms a very
important part of the course. 2}/2 semester hours credit

ChL-4 Quantitative Analysis Laboratory

This is a laboratory course intended to illustrate by actual use the
various analytical methods considered in Ch 4. After certain preliminary
experiments designed to acquaint the student with the apparatus used,
volumetric analysis, including acidimetry and alkalimetry, oxidation,
reduction, and precipitation methods are taken up. This is followed by
simple gravimetric analysis. 3 semester hours credit

Ch 5 Organic Chemistry

A study of the basic principles of the aliphatic organic compounds in-
cluding hydrocarbons and isomerism, petroleum, alcohols, carboxylic
acids, halogen compounds, and stereochemistry. The resemblances of
classes is stressed, and emphasis is placed on genetic charts. The industrial
significance of the subject is discussed to show the practical nature of
organic chemistry. 2}/2 semester hours credit

ChL-5 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions of the aliphatic compounds.

3 semester hours credit
Ch 6 Organic Chemistry

A continuation of Ch 5 dealing with the preparation and characteristic
reactions of the aromatic organic compounds. Special attention is given to
polymerization, diazotization, aromatic hydrocarbons, benzene, substi-
tution in the benzene ring, phenols, aromatic acids, dyes, rubber, synthetic
resins and plastics. A few of the more important heterocyclic compounds
may be covered. 2}/^ semester hours credit

ChL-6 Organic Chemistry Laboratory

Preparations and reactions of the aromatic compounds.

3 semester hours credit

Description of Courses 45

CIVIL ENGINEERING
CE1-2 Surveying

(a) A course of lectures which treats the basic principles, such as: taping,
compass, theory and use of the transit as applied to both random and
closed traverses, differential leveling, profile leveling, and double-rodded
leveling. The D.M.D. and rectangular co-ordinate methods (of computing,
plotting and running traverses) are stressed and especially as they may
apply to such work or procedure as outlined by the Massachusetts Land
Court.

(b) A continuation of Surveying (a), consisting of lectures and problems
on simple curves (railroad curves and circular arcs), vertical curves, com-
pound Stadia surveying, the theory and use of the plane table, plane tri-
angulation curves, and elementary earthwork problems.

(Prerequisite, M 1-2) 5 semester hours credit

CE3 Highway Engineering

An outline of the principles governing the finance of highway projects.
Thorough discussion of the survey for a highway project. Lectures on the
fundamental principles of highway design. Various present-day road
surfaces are discussed. A study of the fundamental principles of soil me-
chanics as it relates to Highway design. 2 semester hours credit

CE4 Hydraulics

This course is a study of the principles of both hydrostatics and hydro-
dynamics. The subjects considered are: the pressure on submerged areas
together with their points of application; the laws governing the flow of
fluids through orifices, short tubes, nozzles, weirs, pipe lines, and open
channels; Reynolds numbers; and viscosity.

{Prerequisite, ME 1-2) 2}/2 semester hours credit

CE5-6 Engineering Structures

First term in this theory course covers the equilibrium of forces and
structures by analytical and graphical methods. Shear and moment
diagrams are reviewed and expanded. Analytical and graphical analysis
of roof trusses and mill building frames are worked out. The use of
influence lines in analyzing stresses in beams, girders, and trusses is
discussed as well as absolute maximum moment in beams.

The work in the second term consists of analyzing the stresses in various
types of railroad and highway bridge trusses by means of move-up load
method and equivalent uniform loadings. Counters and lateral forces on
the trusses are discussed. Deflections of beams and trusses by method of
work (dummy load) and moment-area method are studied. The course
closes with an introduction to the slope and deflection method as well as
moment distribution method of analyzing statically indeterminate beam
and portal problems.

{Prerequisite, ME 3-4) 5 semester hours credit

46 Lincoln Technical Institute

CE 7 Concrete

A consideration of the theoretical and practical principles involved in
the design of concrete and reinforced concrete structures. The following
subjects are thoroughly discussed: the manufacture of Portland Cement;
the specification requirements for fine and coarse aggregates, followed by
the design of a concrete mix; the design and capacity of existing single
reinforced rectangular beams, double reinforced rectangular beams, and
"T" beams; the fundamental principles underlying diagonal tension and
bond stress; column design and methods of determining stresses in existing
columns; the origin of curves and tables and their uses. Problems involving
the above types of sections, first by the transformed area method and later
by curves and tables, are done by the students.

(Prerequisite, ME 1-2) 2 semester hours credit

CE 8 Concrete Design

This course will consist of the design of a cantilever retaining wall, re-
taining wall with counterforts, a typical bay of a reinforced concrete
building, footing design, and a reinforced concrete bridge. The course will
also include a detail discussion of the Hardy Cross method of moment
distribution, column analogy, and a comparative discussion of stress
analysis in rigid frames.

{Prerequisite, CE 7) 2 semester hours credit

CE 9-10 Structural Design

This course consists of a study of the design of such structural units as
steel beams, girders, columns, trusses, riveted connection and steel frames
as a whole. Particular attention is given to the practical phases of construc-
tion and their relation to design. The design of structural timber is also
studied. In the first half of the year the student is given many problems
which he works out at home and in class and the last half of the year is
usually devoted to the design and detailing of some larger, more compli-
cated structures or portions of structures.

Students with a previous record of study in Structural Design may be
admitted to this course for work of an advanced nature. Individual
problems may be assigned, such as the design of a highway or railroad, a
bridge, a roof truss or a portion of an office building.

{Prerequisite, CD 1-2 and ME 3-4) 5 semester hours credit

CD 1-2 Structural Drawing

The course in Structural Drawing consists of making shop drawings of
the various members of modern steel frames. After making drawings of
structural sections and standard connections, the student is given data
from which he makes framing plans and shop details. The problems usually
covered are: portions of a steel frame building, a bridge girder, and a roof
truss.

{Prerequisite, D 1-2) 5 semester hours credit

Description of Courses 47

ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

EE-1 Direct Current Theory

This course is designed to give the student the required understanding
of direct current fundamental circuits. The course deals with such con-
cepts as: emf., current, resistance, conductance, circular mil. Ohm's Law,
series and parallel D.C. circuits, D.C. power and energy, primary and
secondary cells, Kirchoff's Laws, instruments, magnetic circuits and elec-
trostatics. 2 semester hours credit

EE-2 Alternating Current Theory

This course consists of lectures and problems dealing with elementary
A.C. circuit theory involving sinusoidal currents and emfs, effective value,
power and energy, power factor, complex and polar notations, series and
parallel circuits, resonant conditions, elementary polyphase circuits.

2]/2 semester hours credit
EE-3-4 Direct Current Machinery I and II

(Lecture and laboratory.) This course consists of the D.C. shunt, series
and compound motor and generator. Emphasis is placed upon commuta-
tion, armature reaction, losses, efficiencies, stray power, ratings, methods
of test as well as on auxiliary equipment such as protective devices. The
application of D.C. machinery in industry is also involved.

{Prerequisite, EE- 7) 5 semester hours credit

EE-5-6 Alternating Current Machinery I and II

(Lecture and laboratory.) This course involves more advanced alter-
nating current theory as applied to transformers, induction motors, syn-
chronous motors and alternators. Methods of construction, characteristics,
operation and methods of testing are emphasized.

The accompanying laboratory includes some of the more difficult D.C.
machinery experiments, as well as those dealing with A.C. circuits and
transformers.

{Prerequisite, EE-2) 5 semester hours credit

EE-7 Electricity III

A course of lectures and problems dealing with the transmission and
distribution of electric power by means of direct and alternating current.
A complete study of the application of the various types of electrical
machinery to industry.

{Prerequisite, EE 5-6) 2 semester hours credit

EE-8 Electricity IV

A continuation of Electricity III consisting of lectures and problems
covering the principles, characteristics, and applications of electronic
tubes to industrial and commercial processes. This course is co-ordinated
with appropriate laboratory work. 2 semester hours credit

48 Lincoln Technical Institute

EL-1-2 Advanced Electricity Laboratory I and 11

This course includes tests on many different types of alternating current
motors, generators, transformers, and rectifiers. Reports are written on
the tests performed as in the previous course in Electrical Laboratory. The
apparatus available for testing is sufficiently diverse so that experiments
can be selected to fit the interests and need of individual students.

Typical experiments include the following: Load Test on Synchronous
Generator; Determination of the Voltage Regulation of an Alternator by
the American Standards Association Method; Tests on several different
types of Induction Motors; Determination of the V-curves and Efficiency
of a Synchronous Motor; Parallel operation of Alternators 3-phase trans-
former circuits.

{Prerequisite, EE 5-6) 5 semester hours credit

ELECTRONIC ENGINEERING
EE-9 Introduction to Electron Tubes

The object of this course is to acquaint the student with the various
types of electron tubes that will be used in the later courses on circuits and
applications. It begins with a review of electron theory, then the theory of
electron emission, by thermionic, photo-electric, secondary and field
means, including the study of the construction and processing of the
various types of cathodes. The construction and evacuation of tubes will
be discussed. Then the diode tube with the space charge phenomena will
be taken up leading into the control of electrons in vacuum tubes. The
static and dynamic characteristics of the various tube types will be covered.
Equivalent amplifier circuits will be discussed in preparation for a more
complete study of them in Electron Tube Circuits. Rectifier action will be
covered and the addition of gas in vacuum tubes and the control of dis-
charges in gas filled tubes.

The laboratory work comprises a group of experiments to parallel the
theory given in the lecture course. These experiments cover electron
emission, plate resistance of diodes, both gas and vacuum, static and
dynamic characteristics of triodes, tetrodes, pentodes and beam tubes.

{Prerequisite, EE 7-2) 23^2 semester hours credit

EE-10 Electron Tubes and Circuits I

This course is designed to follow Introduction to Electron Tubes. The
first part of the course deals with a study of thyratrons, photocells, cathode
ray tubes, ignitrons, multi-purpose and special tubes.

After completing the study of tubes, the basic circuits will be investi-
gated beginning with rectifier circuits, both single and three phase, in-
cluding filters that form a part of most complete rectifiers. Then the am-
plifier circuit will be covered for direct current, audio and radio frequency,
voltage and power amplifiers, with the various modes of operation with
respect to electrode voltages and signal voltages, known as Class A, AB,
B, and C operations. Push-pull and inverse feedback circuits will be
included.

Description of Courses 49

The experiments in the laboratory will cover almost every type of tube
and circuit that is studied in theory. These include thyratrons, photocell,
cathode ray tubes, rectifier, R-C amplifier, power and feedback amplifier,
and radio frequency amplifier circuits.

{Prerequisite, EE-9) 5 semester hours credit

EE-1 1 Electron Tubes and Circuits II

The material in this course begins where the Part I has stopped and the
first subject is the study of oscillators, including feedback, relaxation,
electro-mechanical, and several others.

This will be followed by modulators, demodulators, pulse generating,
shaping, clipping, differentiating, integrating and trigger circuits will also
be covered. Much of this last group will be used in the study of Television
later in the course.

The laboratory experiments include audio and radio frequency oscilla-
tors, crystal and relaxation oscillators, magnetostriction oscillators, plate
and grid modulators, balanced modulators, various types of demodulators,
pulse generating, shaping, square wave, clipping differentiating, integrat-
ing and trigger circuits. Laboratory reports are written on all of these
experiments.

{Prerequisite, EE-10) 2}/2 semester hours credit

EE-1 2 Communication Engineering I

This course is designed to give the student a thorough knowledge of
radio receiver operation and practice. After briefly covering the early
types of radio receivers such as the regenerative and radio frequency cir-
cuits the super-heterodyne will be covered, both for broadcast and com-
munications use. Particular attention will be paid to pre-selectors, mixers
and convertors, intermediate frequency amplifiers, automatic volume
control, and loud speakers. Audio amplifier and rectifier circuits will be
reviewed as to use in receivers, as they will have been covered in a previous
course. Attention will be given to problems of selectivity, sensitivity, sta-
bility and fidelity of receivers.

In the laboratory, experiments will be conducted on all of the above
subjects including the use of an RCA dynamic demonstrator which allows
the student to see a typical super-heterodyne circuit in large detail in
operating condition with test points to attach meters or an oscilloscope.

{Prerequisite, EE 10- 11) 5 semester hours credit

EE-1 3 Communication Engineering 11

In this course the requirements for broadcast transmitters and associated
equipment will be covered and then the types of circuits and adjustment
of these circuits to fulfill these requirements. This material will include
studios, microphones, transcription equipment, audio amplifying equip-
ment, telephone lines for broadcasting, including their equalization. Then
on to the transmitter, starting with the crystal oscillator, buff"er, amplifier
power amplifiers, modulators, transmission lines and the antenna, includ-
ing directional antennas.

{Prerequisite, EE-1 2) 5 semester hours credit

50 Lincoln Technical Institute

EE-14 Frequency Modulation end Television

Principles and advantages of frequency modulation will be covered
first, then the various methods of obtaining it in the transmitter and the
special circuits found in the receiver. Ultra-high-frequency transmission
characteristics will also be covered in this course. Experiments in fre-
quency modulation will parallel most of the lectures.

The basic principles of various methods of picture transmission such as
wire photo, radio photo, facsimile and then television. Review of the me-
chanical methods used in early television. Electronic television systems,
using the iconoscope and image dissector for transmission, and cathode ray
tube for reception. Synchronizing circuits and problems. Video amplifiers,
deflecting circuits, television transmitters, receivers and antennas. Prob-
lems and technique of transmission of motion pictures and outdoor and
studio scenes. 5 semester hours credit

EE-15 Industrial Electronics i

In this course the use of electron tubes in industrial applications will be
studied. Subjects include photocell relays, time delay relays, grid con-
trolled rectifiers, and motor control circuits.

The laboratory experiments cover almost every subject covered in the
theory part of the course: photocell and time delay relays, grid controlled
rectifiers and inverters, and motor control circuits. Laboratory reports are
required for each experiment.

{Prerequisite, EE 10-11) 2]/2 semester hours credit

EE-16 Industrial Electronics II

This course consists of studies of welding control circuits, induction,
dielectric heating circuits and applications, and cathode ray oscilloscope
in industrial applications.

The laboratory experiments cover welding controls, induction and di-
electric heating applications, and cathode ray oscilloscopes. Laboratory
reports are required for each experiment.

{Prerequisite, EE-15) 2}/^ semester hours credit

*EE-17-18 Electronic Test Equipment and Measurements I and II

This course is designed for those who may wish to specialize in the fourth
year, and instead of covering both the Industrial Electronic and Com-
munication, Frequency Modulation and Television field will want to con-
centrate on one group or the other.

The subject material will be useful in either the field of Industrial
Electronics or Communications. The course content includes review of
D.C. and A.C. meters; measurement of R, L,and C; vacuum tube measure-
ments; vacuum tube voltmeters; impedance at audio frequencies; imped-
ance at radio frequencies; measurements of audio frequencies; measure-
ment of radio frequencies; use of signal generators and audio oscillators
in alignment and curves; cathode ray oscilloscopes; wave analyzer; and
square wave testing.
*Fourth Year Elective. This course may be substituted for EE-15- 16.

Description of Courses 51

Laboratory experiments cover all of the above subjects and reports are
made up of each experiment. 5 semester hours credit

INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING

IE 1 Job Analysis and Evaluation

Basic principles underlying theory of wage calculation, job elements and
their definitions, rating scales, wanting job descriptions and specifications,
selection of appropriate rating plan, setting up job factors and maximum
point values, use of several methods of determining specific point values.
Discussion of special cases from individual companies.

IE 2 Methods Engineering

Process and operation analysis through the use of process charts, flow
diagrams, operation charts, man-and-machine charts, micromotion study,
principles of motion economy. Work place layout, labor-saving tools and
equipment, laboratory development work. Elementary time study.
Setting up synthetic standards using elemental time values. Wage incen-
tives, problems involved in the introduction of work simplification with
particular emphasis upon employee morale.

IE 3 Production Planning and Control

Factory organization, factory planning and layout, materials handling,
storage, maintenance, power. Forecasting and budgeting, planning,
scheduling, routing, dispatching, subcontracting. Quantity control,
quality control, waste control, priorities, allocations, inventory control,
records and reports.

IE 4 Time Study

Introduction to wage incentives and current wage plans. History and
development of time study, relation to motion and micromotion study,
preliminary observation, technique of making time studies. Rating pro-
cedure, development of proper concept of "normal" performance, apply-
ing the rating and relaxation factors. Setting job and element standards,
use of allowances, treatment of variables, introduction to standard data,
synthetic standards, problems in the application of standards. Laboratory
practice will supplement the classroom work.

IE 5-6 Accounting Aids to Management

A study of the broad background of accounting and business trans-
actions so as to enable the student to analyze and interpret intelligently
financial statements and other accounting reports. The course demon-
strates the use of accounting in management and financial control. Em-
phasis is placed on the development of accounting fundamentals, prepara-
tion of financial statements, corporation and manufacturing accounts,
evaluation of balance sheet items, analysis and interpretation of financial
statements and other trends, and the use of accounting as an aid to
management.

52 Lincoln Technical Institute

IE 7 Labor-Management Relations

The industrial relations policy and legislation affecting industrial rela-
tions, labor-management committees, collective bargaining in theory and
practice, grievance procedures, settling labor disputes, negotiating labor
contracts, problems of interpretation, renegotiating of contracts, responsi-
bilities of employers and employees in terms of employment, investment
and the public.

IE 8 Industrial Safety Engineering

Organization of safety department, economic advantages, plant lay-
out, job analysis, machine safeguarding, hand tools, materials handling,
prevention of falls, industrial health hazards, fire prevention and protec-
tion, plant housekeeping, investigations and reports, first aid, administer-
ing safety program, training the worker, ofT-job accidents.

IE 9 Quality Control by Statistical Methods

Fundamentals of quality control. Theory of control charts. Analysis of
control chart data. Sampling methods. Control chart applications. The
poisson distribution. Planning for statistical quality control. Reports on
quality control installations. Acceptance sampling. Control chart tech-
niques and industrial applications.

IE 10 Advanced Time Study

Review of stop-watch time study. Use of special timing devices and
their relative accuracy; use of motion pictures for rate-setting and training
purposes. Current trends in wage payment policy and in the use of time
study data. Problems involved in setting up standard data for a variety of
operations. Development of tables, families-of-curves, formulae, nomo-
graphs, and multi-variable charts for synthetic rate-setting purposes.

The laboratory part of the course will involve the complete analysis and
time study of a selected operation performed upon a series of products
within a definable variable range, and the building of standard data from
the time studies made by the students. Operations submitted by individual
students may be used for this purpose.

MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
ME 1 Applied Mechanics (Statics)

The subjects treated are collinear, parallel, concurrent, and non-
concurrent force systems in a plane and in space; the determination of the
resultant of such systems by both algebraic and graphical means, special
emphasis being placed on the string polygon method for coplanar force
systems; the forces required to produce equilibrium in such systems; first
moments; and problems involving static friction, such as the inclined
plane and the wedge.

{Prerequisite^ P 7) 2}/2 semester hours credits

Description of Courses 53

ME 2 Applied Mechanics (Kinetics)

The subjects treated are continuation of first moments as applied to
varying intensity of force and to the determination of center of gravities
of areas and soUds; second moments and the appKcation to the determina-
tion of moment of inertia of plane and solid figures, radius of gyration,
polar moment of inertia; product of inertia principal axes, uniform mo-
tion, uniformly accelerated motion, variable accelerated motion, har-
monic motion, simple pendulum, rotation, plane motion, work, energy,
momentum and impact.

{Prerequisite, ME 7) 2}/2 semester hours credit

ME 3-4 Strength of Materials

This course comprises the study of the stresses and strains in bodies
subjected to tension, compression, and shearing; common theory of beams
with thorough description of the distribution of stresses, shearing forces,
and bending moments; deflection of beams.

A study is made of the strength of shafting and springs; combined
stresses in beams subjected to tension, compression, and bending; also
strength of riveted joints, columns, and thin hollow cylinders, and brief
consideration of strains and the relation of the stresses on different planes
in a body.

{Prerequisite, ME 1-2) 5 semester hours credit

ME 5-6 Heat Engineering

The fundamentals of thermodynamics are discussed in this course and
include the general theory of heat and matter; first and second laws of
thermodynamics; equations of state; fundamental equations of thermo-
dynamics; laws of perfect gases; properties of vapors including use of
tables and charts; and the general equation for the flow of fluids. Particu-
lar emphasis is given to the properties of steam, the use of the steam tables,
and the Mollier diagram.

The course also embraces a study of fuels and combustion of fuels as
applied to steam boilers.

The purpose of the course is to familiarize the student with the theory
of heat as applied to prime movers.

Descriptions of many diff'erent kinds of apparatus used in the steam
power plant such as engines, turbines, and auxiliary equipment, including
pumps, condensers, heaters, fans, etc., comprise the major part of the
course. A large number of problems related to the apparatus discussed are
solved. In addition to the above, such items as draft, chimneys, coal and
ash handling equipment, piping and valves, and technical power plants
are studied. In addition to the study of steam apparatus, air compressors
and internal combustion engines are discussed.

{Prerequisite, P 1-2) 4 semester hours credit

ME 7 Mechanism (I)

The object of this course is to acquaint the student with the principles of
mechanism which are met in practice and in machine design. The topics

54 Lincoln Technical Institute

considered are belting, pulley, and gear train calculations, both simple and
epicyclic, cam design and theoretical design of gear-tooth shapes. The
instant center calculations and velocity diagram plots or common linkages
are studied.

{Prerequisite, MD 1-2) 2^2 semester hours credit

ME 9-10 Machine Design

This course applies to machines the principles of which were presented
in Course ME7. Typical problems presented for design are the triplex power
pump, power shearing machine, and a twenty-ton hydraulic press.

Minimum sizes of the various parts are calculated and an assembly of
the complete machine is drawn and traced. All calculations are carefully
presented in notebook form.

Also, numerous miscellaneous small problems are taken up.

{Prerequisite, ME 7) 4 semester hours credit

ME 11-12 Mechanical Engineering Laboratory

This course includes a series of experiments upon various kinds of equip-
ment used in modern power plants to demonstrate under actual conditions
the principles developed in the Heat Engineering course. Additional ex-
periments which include calibration of instruments, performance of hy-
draulic equipment, steam equipment as used in power plants, heating
units for the household, air conditioning apparatus, internal combustion
engines, and testing materials are performed. A complete report of each
experiment is made.

{Prerequisite, ME 5-6) 5 semester hours credit

ME 13 Aerodynamics

Among the topics covered in this course are: the flow of an ideal fluid,
development of the wing theory, properties of airfoils, engine and pro-
peller characteristics, performance calculations, and stability.

2}/2 semester hours credit

ME 14 Aeronautical Laboratory

Laboratory exercises, such as the determination of airfoil characteristics,
the effect of auxiliary lifting devices, lift, drag, and moment coefficients, and
wind-tunnel calibration are carried on. Use is made of the smoke-tunnel
to study air flow about various aircraft shapes. Allied tests are made on
such equipment as gauges, fluid flow meters of all types, air blowers and
pumps.

Experiments are carried on in the internal combustion laboratory where
various engines are tested and experiments dealing with fuels and lubricat-
ing oils are made.

Detailed reports are required of each experiment.

2}/2 semester hours credit

Description of Courses 55

ME 15-16 Airplane Design

The object of this course is to acquaint the student with the methods of
practical airplane design as prescribed by the Civil Aeronautics Authority.
The student will begin with the specifications of an airplane and complete
the following phases of the design: (1) balance diagram; (2) weight esti-
mate and balance table, (3) three view drawing, (4) estimate performance,
(5) calculate stability, (6) stress analysis of the structure.

Students must have completed a course in Aerodynamics or must be
taking it concurrently with this course. 2 semester hours credit

ME 17-18 Airplane Engines

Essentially a course in internal combustion engines, it deals with an
exhaustive study of engine thermodynamics, emphasis being placed on the
standard-air Otto and Diesel cycles. Many problems are solved to demon-
strate the importance of compression ratios, variable specific heats, volu-
metric efficiency, and engine performance.

Fuels and their combustion are studied and calculations of theoretical
and excess air are made based on fuel compositions, products of combus-
tion, and experimental Orsat data.

A study is made of the functions and design of the moving parts in an
aircraft engine. Problems in strength of materials are solved in the design
of crankshafts, connecting rods, and valve springs. The effect of high tem-
peratures and the heat treatment of metals are discussed in regard to the
proper design of cylinders and valves. Other problems dealing with
engine dynamics, inertia forces and balance are considered.

Detailed studies are made of carburetion, ignition, and lubrication; in
addition to auxiliary equipment. 4 semester hours credit

DRAWING
D 1-2 Engineering Drawing

This course is planned to meet the requirements of a class composed of
students who have had no previous instruction in drafting, and also for
those who may have had one or two years' work in preparatory schools.

Instruction is given in the testing, use and care of the instruments and
drawing supplies, and solutions are required for problems which are pre-
sented on about thirty drawing sheets. The topics studied in these sheets
include: technique practice, lettering, geometric construction, ortho-
graphic projections, auxiliary views, revolution of objects, isometric,
cavalier, cabinet and perspective projection, intersections, sections, helix
and application, screw threads, dimensions and inking. A number of
practical problems, pertaining to the professional courses to be taken, in
which drawing is the application, are also given.

These give the student a thorough training in the fundamental prin-
ciples of Engineering Drawing, so that he may easily do the drafting
required in his professional course. A short lecture is given at the opening
of each class based on the work at hand, and individual instruction is given
during the remainder of the class period.

56 Lincoln Technical Institute

For those who have had some experience in Mechanical Drawing, a
special course is devised which will take care of individual needs and offers
students more advanced work. 5 semester hours credit

ED 1 Electrical Drafting

This course will provide training in electrical drafting basic to electrical
design. The instruction will include fundamentals of mechanical drawing;
electrical drafting symbols; one-line circuit diagrams; two and three-line
D.C. and A.C. circuit diagrams including power transformers, motors and
generators and circuit breakers; current and potential transformers, volt-
meter, ammeter, wattmeter and watt-hour meter connection diagrams;
relay and control circuits; conduit layout, details, conduit and wire sched-
ules.

{Prerequisite, EE 7, EE 2) 2}/2 semester hours credit

ED 2 Electronic Drafting

This course is designed to provide training in the preparation of manu-
facturing drawings (including schematics, details and assemblies) for the
radio and electronics industries. Instruction includes schematic diagram
using the several systems of standards; electrical parts, their function,
characteristics and mountings; insulation; materials and methods; sheet
metal layout, tolerances and fabrication; fastenings; mechanics; layout
and design, complete details and assembly drawings.

{Prerequisite, ED 7) 2]/2 semester hours credit

MD 1-2 Machine Drawing

This course is taught on a problem basis with the student working out
problems under the supervision of the instructor. The lectures and reading
assignments correlate with the class problems. Short quizzes are given to
cover the reading assignments. The principles covered include preliminary
machine sketches, detailing from machines and from assembly drawings,
dimensions with reference to basic size system, sectioning and the making
of assembly drawings from details, and also problems in cam and gear
construction.

The lectures and assigned readings take up such topics as fastenings,
machine elements, methods of manufacture, jigs and fixtures, methods
of reproducing drawings and those drawing techniques that are to be
applied to the particular problem being done.

{Prerequisite, D 1-2) 5 semester hours credit

MATHEMATICS

Sub-Freshman Mathematics

The first part of this course is devoted to a thorough study of Algebra
and Plane Geometry. It then proceeds to more advanced work embraced
by the course in Engineering Mathematics as described in Course M 1
and M 2. 5 semester hours credit

Description of Courses 57

M 1 Algebra

Although the primary purpose of this course is to lay a thorough ground-
work for the subsequent courses in Analytical Geometry, Calculus, and
Applied Mechanics, it is nevertheless a complete unit in itself, and will
enable the student to handle a considerable number of the problems aris-
ing in engineering practice.

Proceeding from a rapid review of the fundamental operations of
Algebra, the work continues with a thorough study of fractions, linear and
quadratic equations, graphs, exponents, logarithms, binomial theorem
and related topics.

Early in the course complete instruction is given in the theory of the
slide rule, and considerable practice in its use.

{Prerequisite, first courses in Algebra and Plane Geometry)

2Y2 semester hours credit
M 2 Trigonometry

This course includes the solution of all triangles by both natural and
logarithmic functions, identities, radian measure, principal values and the
solution of trigonometric equations. Particular attention is given to the
applications of Trigonometry to engineering practice.

{Prerequisite, M 1) 2^2 semester hours credit

M 3 Analytical Geometry

In this course instruction is given by lectures and recitations in the
following subjects: plotting of functions, interpolation, the straight line,
the conic sections, curves represented by various equations of common
occurrence in engineering, graphic solution of equations, determination
of laws from the data of experiments, simplification of formulas, and align-
ment charts. The plotting and analysis of charts in order to determine
empirical formulas is an important part of the course.

{Prerequisite, M 1-2) with M 5, 2}/2 semester hours credit

M 5 Differential Calculus

The work in the course consists of differentiation of algebraic, trigono-
metric, exponential, and logarithmic functions, both explicit and implicit;
slopes of curves, maxima and minima with applied problems; partial
differentiation; derivatives of higher order; curvature; points of inflection;
related rates; velocities, acceleration; expansion of functions; series. Al-
though the subject matter deals with considerable theory, constant sight
is kept of the practical application.

{Prerequisite, M 3) with M 3, 2}/2 semester hours credit

M 6 Integral Calculus

This is a continuation of Calculus M 5, and deals with integration as the
inverse of differentiation as well as the limit of summation. The topics
covered are methods of integration; use of integral tables; definite inte-
grals; double and triple integrals; areas in rectangular and polar co-

58 Lincoln Technical Institute

ordinates; center of gravity; moment of inertia; length of curves; volumes
of solids; areas of surfaces of revolution; volumes by triple integration;
practical problems in work, pressure, etc.

{Prerequisite, M 5) 2}/^ semester hours credit

PHYSICS
P 1 Physics I

A course covering the fundamental principles of mechanics, wave
motion and sound. The lectures are illustrated by demonstration and
motion pictures. Each lecture period is supplemented with a problem
period in which the student learns the practical applications of the laws
of physics. Some of the topics covered are force, energy, work, machines,
concurrent forces, parallel forces, elasticity, linear and rotational motion,
harmonic motion, fluids, gases, wave motion and sound.

2}/2 semester hours credit
P 2 Physics II

The work of this course covers the subjects of heat and electricity. Under
heat is included thermometry, expansion, calorimetry, behavior of gases,
humidity, mechanical equivalent, thermodynamics. Under electricity are
included magnetism, electrostatics, resistance, cells, thermoelectricity,
capacitance, inductance, alternating currents, simple circuits in series
and parallel.

{Prerequisite, P 7) 2}/2 semester hours credit

P 4 Physics III

This course is open only to those taking Electrical and Electronic Engi-
neering curricula. The course includes the fundamental principles of heat
and light. The section in heat includes thermometry, expansion, calorim-
etry, behavior of gases, vaporization, mechanical equivalent, transfer of
heat, thermodynamics. Under the subject of light are included nature and
propagation, reflection, refraction, dispersion, spectra, optical instru-
ments, interference, diff"raction, and polarized light.

{Prerequisite, P 7) 2]/2 semester hours credit

«A

H-

■iHI

-J

'E,
a

O 4)

-» <

X -2

X
o

s .2

.2
.2

13
to

C
XI
o

C3
G
.2

o
o

■(->

t-i

1^ 5;^

a
o

I)
S

"E,
6

la,

;3
o

S
1^

O
O

(/)

to
c

w >

c ^

3
m

>
'2

o S
w .^

O "^
X! ^

X ^
o-g

.S CO

coja

lU ^
> V

CO T!
X c^
I— I bc

S 3

Q 2

<
H

u
o

o
o

C 5
C^ .tl

bo|

^^
§■0

2 (^

.S -S

o c;

eQ-5
'*^ o

bO
O

Q.5

lU 3

C4-1
o o

bc'o
T3 CJ

U o
D

b/D

"So

IZl

-i->

'0
0

'oj

be
C

2 P Q

bo
C

B fi

o
z

3
z

2
bc q

bO
O

H 3 w

S z -^

z ^

^ <
5 o

H
U

C/3

«!^

r, nnnn

2
a

o
z
W

<
u

H
<

o w
z S
2 o
w z

>
o

X)
o

-^
o
a>

3
o
u

bD
O

(« Ah

z "^

a,
o

o
c
o

D D Is nnnn n n

CvJ

c3 d

V U

O !-!

■^ fl^ S 3

- Cd ct
«*- T3 T3
(U

>-.

•SS

G ^

o s

VhH

'bc

'bb

.4^

<H-I

—I

1— H

C/2

THE
LINCOLN SCHOOLS

Evening Sessions
OPEN TO MEN AND WOMEN

LINCOLN TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

Degree of Associate in Engineering Programs

Courses leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering are
offered in the following major fields:

Aeronautical Mechanical Electronics

Civil Electrical Chemistry

Structural Industrial

Degree of Bachelor of Business Administration Program

A six-year program conducted in conjunction with Northeastern
University School of Business is available which leads to the Degree of
B.B.A. in Engineering and Management awarded by Northeastern
University.

Special Programs

For those who do not wish to take one of the regular programs,
special programs consisting of one or more courses can be arranged
to meet individual needs,

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Fully accredited by the New England College Admissions Board,
General, Classical, and Technical high school courses are available.
Students may enter in September, January, and June.

For further informafion write, indicating the School in which
you are interested

THE LINCOLN SCHOOLS

360 HUNTINGTON AVENUE, BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS
r*/«phone, Kenmore 3177

1945-1946

EVENING SESSIONS
FORTY-EIGHTH YEAR

LINCOLN

PREPARATORY

SCHOOL

THE LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Evening high school courses are conducted on day-school standards by
a competent faculty in a school accredited by the New England College
Admissions Board as preparation for:

Employment in War Industry

Courses that offer fundamental training in Algebra, Geometry, Trigo-
nometry, Physics, Drafting, Chemistry, and Biology — each of which
is valuable to men and women now employed or planning to enter
war industry.

The Military Services

Courses in mathematics and the basic sciences will prove extremely
valuable to men who are likely to enter the armed forces.

Postwar Employment in Business and Industry

Courses that offer sound general training, basic to success in business
and industry. The competition of the postwar period will require the
fullest development of one's abilities. A high school education is the foun-
dation upon which this is built and makes possible further study on the
college level.

Business

Courses that offer a sound general training for those who do not plan to
enter any higher institution, whereby students develop the ability, poise,
and self-confidence that make for success.

Nurses* Training in Hospitals

A high school course which prepares students to enter upon a training
program in accredited hospitals.

Courses which prepare graduate nurses who are not high school gradu-
ates to fit themselves for graduate study, and for teaching and adminis-
trative positions in hospitals.

Colleges

Courses preparing students for admission to colleges —
By High School Diploma
By College Entrance Board Examinations
By Certification (without examination)

Professional Schools

High school courses designed to prepare students for entrance to colleges
of Engineering, Business, and the pre-legal college programs preparing
for entrance into Schools of Law, both day and evening.

LINCOLN

PREPARATORY

SCHOOL

ACCREDITED BY THE NEW ENGLAND COLLEGE ADMISSIONS BOARD

The School is situated ai the entrance to the Huntington Avenue subway within nine minutes
of Park Street and easily accessible from all points

EVENING SESSIONS

AdmHs Men and Women

EFFECTIVE METHODS OF INSTRUCTION
., Adapted for Evening Sf udeafs

CALENDAR, 1945-1946

Summer Term, June, 7945-Sepfefnbeo 7945

June 4-5 Classes begin.

July 4 Legal holiday. No classes.

September 3 Legal holiday. No classes.

September 10-14 Final examinations.

September 10-24
September 24, 25
October 12
November 22
December 21

School Year, September, 1945-May, 1946

Registration period.

Classes begin.

Legal holiday. No classes.

Thanksgiving Day. No classes.

Last session before Christmas recess.

1946

January 2 Classes resume.

February 22 Legal holiday. No classes.

April 19 Legal holiday. No classes.

May 13-17 Final examinations.

Winter Term, January, 1946-May, 1946

January 2-7 Registration period.

January 7, 8 Classes begin.

February 22 Legal holiday. No classes.

April 19 Legal holiday. No classes.

May 20-24 Final examinations.

OFFICE HOURS

June 11, 1945-August 11, 1945

Wednesday, Thursday and Friday

Monday and Tuesday

Saturdays

August 13, 1945-June 8, 1946

Monday through Friday 8:45 a.m.-9:00 p.m

Saturdays 8:45 a.m.-12:00 noon through September 1

8:45 a.m.- 4:00 p.m. September 8, 15, 22, 29
8:45 a.m.- 1:00 p.m. October 6-June 8

June 10, 1946-August 10, 1946

45 A.M.-5:00 p.m.
45 A.M.-8:00 P.M.
45 A.M.-12:00 noon

Wednesday, Thursday and Friday .

Monday and Tuesday

Saturdays

45 A.M.-5:00 P.M.
45 A.M.-8:00 P.M.
45 A.M.-12:00 noon

INTERVIEWS

Prospective students, or those desiring advice or guidance with regard to any
part of the school work or curricula, are offered without obligation personal inter-
views with the Headmaster or his assistants. No inquirer should hesitate to ask for
an appointment as, in the long run, time is saved during the school year by having
the whole educational problem discussed before the opening of the School.

THE NEED
FOR EDUCATIONAL PLANNING

In times of war and during periods of increased industrial activity many
things have a tendency to affect one's educational program. Young men
and women become attracted by high wages, which they forget are only
temporary. Many young men are enlisted into the military services dis-
rupting their educational plans.

But wars cease and we enter the postwar period where competition
becomes keen. Applicants for employment who have not finished high
school will be handicapped in applying for positions offering promising
futures. The trained person is the best investment for the employer who
must get the most for his money.

A realization of the stern facts brings one to the conclusion that educa-
tion is not a "hit or miss" job but one that requires careful planning. The
first step, of course, is to complete one's high school work. That should not
be left undone. Such an omission half a century ago might not, probably
would not, have been serious. But today it can be a calamity. On this
foundation of high school work there can then be built a variety of struc-
tures: engineering training, nurses' training, business training, profes-
sional work of many kinds to which the individual may be adapted.

It is interesting to note that such work may now be done at convenient
evening hours while the student pursues his regular daytime employment.
Nothing stands between a prospective student and the completion of his
high school work except the extent of his ambition.

Metropolitan Boston is rich in evening educational opportunities. The
Lincoln Preparatory School is an accredited evening school maintaining
day-school standards of performance, and enjoying for many years the
confidence of the New England College Admissions Board, on whose
approved list it stands. Counsellors are always available for interviews, and
careful thought is given to the problem of each individual.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

BOARD OF TRUSTEES

Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman
Frank Lincoln Richardson, Vice-Chairman

WiLMAN Edward Adams
Henry Nathaniel Andrews
Arthur Atwood Ballantine
George Louis Barnes
Farwell Gregg Bemis
Henry Goddard Bradlee
Paul Codman Cabot
Godfrey Lowell Cabot
Walter Channing
William Converse Chick
Everett Avery Churchill
Paul Foster Clark
David Frank Edwards
Carl Stephens Ell
William Partridge Ellison
John Wells Farley
Ernest Bigelow Freeman
Franklin Wile Ganse
Harvey Dow Gibson

Henry Ingraham Harriman

Chandler Hovey

Maynard Hutchinson

Arthur Stoddard Johnson

Irving Edwin Moultrop

AuGUSTiN Hamilton Parker, Jr.

Frederick Sanford Pratt

Roger Preston

Stuart Craig Rand

James Lorin Richards

Harold Bours Richmond

Leverett Saltonstall

Frank Palmer Speare

Francis Robert Carnegie Steele

Charles Stetson

Earl Place Stevenson

Robert Treat Paine Storer

Edward Watson Supple

James Vincent Toner

OFFICERS OF ADMINISTRATION

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., Sc.D., President
Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D., Vice-President

Albert Ellsworth Everett, B.C.E., M.B.A., S.B.

Director of Evening Program

James Wallace Lees, A.M., Headmaster
Donald Hershey MacKenzie, B.S., Ed.M., Assistant Headmaster

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

FACULTY

The faculty of the Lincoln Preparatory School has been carefully
chosen from the leading high and preparatory school teachers in Boston
and its vicinity. They are college trained men who have proved their
ability in their various fields of specialization. They are selected on the
basis of their ability to convey knowledge to others in an interesting, in-
spiring and effective manner. Most of these men have served with the
School for many years. They have an understanding of and a sincere
respect for evening school students and take a personal interest in their
ambitions and success.

Walter E, Antunes Appointed 1941

B.S. Boston University, 1930; M.A. Boston University, 1932; Instructor in Biology,
Long Island University, New York, 1931-33; Instructor in Science, Wakefield High
School, 1936-.
Chemistrji

Walter Alfred Baldwin Appointed 1910

A.B. Ohio Wesleyan University, 1906; graduate study University of Chicago and
Harvard University; Head, Department of Mathematics, Chillicothe High School,
Ohio, 1906-08; Head, Department of Mathematics, Mansfield High School, Ohio,
1908-10; Head, Science Department, Huntington School for Boys, Boston, 1912-14;
Instructor in Physics and Chemistry, Lincoln Preparatory School, 1910-.
Chemistry

William Tilden Bentley Appointed 1916

A.B. Harvard University, 1907; Submaster, Maiden High School, 1914-24; Prin-
cipal, Belmont School, 1924-29; Principal, Charles A. Daniels School, 1929-41;
Principal, Glenwood School, 1942-.
Historj/

Charles Lee Cheetham Appointed 1928

A.B. Bates College, 1911; A.M. Columbia University, 1927; Instructor in Mathe-
matics, Portsmouth High School, New Hampshire, 1912-14; Submaster, Westerly
High School, Rhode Island, 1915-17; Instructor in Mathematics and Science, Tower
Hill School, Wilmington, Delaware, 1919-23; Instructor in Mathematics and
Physics, Roger Ascham School, White Plains, New York, 1923-27; Instructor in
Science, Mathematics and Physics, Public Latin School, Boston, 1928-.
Physics

Carl F. Christianson Appointed 1933

A.B. Wesleyan University, 1923; Tilton School, New Hampshire, 1923-24; Abington

High School, 1924-27; Huntington School for Boys, 1927-.

History

Blanche B. Daly Appointed 1944

A.B. Hunter College, 1913; M.Sc. New York University, 1915; M.A. Radcliffe
College, 1928; Ph.D. Boston University, 1933; Assistant Instructor, Hunter College,
1913-19; Instructor in Physiology, 1919-21; Literateur at Carnegie Institute of
Washington Nutritional Laboratory, 1934-38; Instructor, Northeastern University,
1943-.
Biology

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Michael D'Amelio Appointed 1942

A.B. Harvard College, 1922; Instructor, Brookline High School, 1922-26; Instructor,
Boston Latin School, 1926-27; Instructor in Mathenniatics, English High School,

1927-.
Mathematics

Edmund Winthrop Fenn Appointed 1945

A.B. Williams College, 1928; A.M. Harvard Graduate School, 1930; Instructor,
University of New Hampshire, 1935-36; Dartmouth College, 1937-38; Syracuse
University, 1938-40; Northeastern University, 1945-.
History

Percy Edward Jones Appointed 1923

Sloyd Training School, 1920; B.S. Boston University, 1930; Instructor in Mathe-
matics and Drawing, Huntington School for Boys, 1919-.

Mathematics

A. Robert Kelman Appointed 1930

B.B.A. Boston University, 1925; School of Education, Harvard University; Instruc-
tor, Quincy Senior High School, 1921-25; Instructor, Weaver High School, Hart-
ford, Connecticut, 1925-26; Instructor, Bulkeley High School, Hartford, Connecti-
cut, 1926-29; Head of the Department of Social Studies, The Senior High School,
Watertown, 1930-.
History

Alfred Blanchard Kershaw Appointed 1928

A.B. Amherst, 1904; A.M. Amherst, 1907; Instructor, The Allen School, West
Newton, 1908-09; Instructor in English, Brockton High School, 1909-11; Master,
English High School, Boston, 1911-.
English

John W. McGuckian Appointed 1944

B.Sc. Massachusetts State College, 1931; M.Ed, Boston Teachers College, 1937;
Instructor, Jamaica Plain High School, 1931-42; Junior Master, Roslindale High
School, 1942-
Biology

Richard Lawrence McGuffin Appointed 1928

B.A. Boston University, 1920; M.A. Boston University, 1925; Ed.M. Harvard
Graduate School of Education, 1926; Instructor in English, Lebanon Boys' School,
Suk-el-Gharb, Syria, 1921-24; Directeur, Foyer De Garcons, Tunis, North Africa,
1927-28; French Master, Boston Latin School, 1929-.

French

Marshall Newton Appointed 1940

A.B. Dartmouth College, 1925; M.A. Harvard University, 1929; Instructor, Bow-
doin College, 1928-30; Instructor, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 1931-32;
Instructor, Tufts College, 1933-.
Spanish

Theodore Woods Noon Appointed 1922

A.B. Yale College, 1896; M.A. Yale University, 1898; Exhibitioner, Emmanuel
College, University of Cambridge, England, 1 906-07 ; Master, Lawrenceville School,
Lawrenceville, New Jersey, 1908-18; B.D. University of Chicago, 1913; S.T.M.
Boston University, 1922; Ed.M. Harvard University, 1924; Instructor in Lincoln
Preparatory School and Huntington School for Boys, Boston, 1922-.
Latin and Ancient History

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Deane Stanfeeld Peacock Appointed 1931

A.B. Bowdoin College, 1917; A.M. Bates College, 1927; Ed.M. Harvard University,
1932; Principal, Oakland High School, Maine, 1919-24; Principal, Freeport High
School, Maine, 1924-31; Junior Master, English High School, Boston, 1932-.
History

Olan a. Rand Appointed 1943

B.A. Washington and Lee, 1926; Graduate Study, University of Vermont; Teacher,
Franklin High School, New Hampshire, 1926-28; Teacher, Barre High School, Ver-
mont, 1929-43; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1943-.
English

Barnet Rudman Appointed 1942

A.B. Harvard University, 1921; Ed.M. Boston Teachers' College, 1934; Instructor
in Mathematics, Rocky Grove High School, Franklin, Pennsylvania, 1921-23;
Instructor in Mathematics, Pittsfield High School, 1923-28; Head of the Department
of Mathematics, 1927-28; Instructor in Mathematics, South Boston High School,
1929-32; Instructor in Mathematics, English High School, 1932-.
Mathematics

Alfred Loring Skinner Appointed 1927

A.B. Harvard University, 1919; Instructor in Mathematics, North Andover, Massa-
chusetts, 1919-22; Instructor in Mathematics, Huntington School for Boys, Boston,
1922-.
Mathematics

Ralph E. Wellings Appointed 1944

A.B. Boston College, 1920; A.M. Boston College, 1925; Ed.M. Boston Teachers'
College, 1930; Teacher, Brighton High School, 1925-28; Teacher, Dorchester High
School for Boys, 1928-44.
Mathematics

Edna M. Edison Executive Secretary

Mildred L. Spraker Bookkeeper

Charlotte O. Anderson Stenographer

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

HISTORICAL STATEMENT

The Lincoln Preparatory School, affiliated with Northeastern Univer-
sity and known for many years as the Northeastern Preparatory School,
had its real beginning in 1897 in the separate evening courses off"ered in
History, Science, and other subjects of a cultural nature, and in certain
trade courses intended to benefit men engaged in various occupations.

Gradually the trade courses were discontinued and the remaining
subjects were welded into a regular high school program, upon the com-
pletion of which a standard high school diploma was awarded.

All classes in the Lincoln Preparatory School are held in the evening
and are especially designed to meet the needs of those who are employed
during the day.

The primary purpose of the School has been eff"ective preparation of
students for college entrance. For this reason constant attention has been
paid through the years to the maintenance and improvement of standards.

In 1 925 women were admitted to classes on the same basis as men. Since
1924 the School has been accredited by the New England College Entrance
Certificate Board, now called the New England College Admissions
Board. This is a marked distinction in the case of an evening school, and
an expression of confidence that day-school standards are maintained. The
School today offers curricula in the general, scientific, and classical fields.
The enrollment has increased from fewer than fifty students to almost five
hundred, of whom two-fifths are women. The faculty has been increased
until it now numbers from twenty to twenty-five men of wide experience
and training, drawn from the leading day preparatory and high schools
of Metropolitan Boston.

Through the Lincoln Preparatory School many men and women have
been able to solve their problems and to secure that education which has
enabled them to succeed in the work for which they are adapted by ability
and interest. Without these facilities many of these alumni would still be
occupying minor positions with little opportunity for advancement on
account of lack of training.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

THE LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Characteristics of the School

Before a prospective student makes a final decision regarding the even-
ing school he wishes to enter, he should ascertain some of the characteris-
tics of a good preparatory school. Following are the outstanding charac-
teristics of the Lincoln Preparatory School :

1 . It is non-proprietary, and organized exclusively for service to students,
the income being devoted to that end rather than being organized
for profit.

2. Adequate fees are charged to insure the employment of the best
teachers attainable and to provide constant improvement in the
educational processes.

3- Scholarship funds are available to assist deserving and needy students
who cannot meet the fees that must be charged if high standards are
to be maintained.

4. It has a trained and experienced faculty; that is, the men who form
its staff are teachers of experience with long practice in dealing with
the individual problems of students.

5. All work is conducted on a regular classroom basis to meet the ap-
proval of higher institutions and the New England College Admis-
sions Board requirements.

6. The size of the classes is such as to permit reasonably individualized
attention.

7. The courses are conducted so that the content of each course is
thoroughly covered in order that it may be of the maximum value to
the student, not only in the interests of his personal growth, but as
preparation for further study.

8. The student body is adequately prepared for the type of instruction
which is to be imparted in the classroom. The level of achievement is
not lowered by the admission of unfit students.

9. High quality of performance is maintained in the classroom, and
students bring to bear on their studies an interest and enthusiasm
which permit all work to be conducted on a high, qualitative plane.
Classes are not conducted to be a vehicle by which students may
obtain credit by easy and slipshod methods. Credit is awarded only
when the quality of the student's work meets the definition of Re-
quirements of the College Entrance Examination Board and the New
England College Admissions Board.

10. Its graduates have proved successful in college, in the professions, and
in business life.

1 1 . There are adequate laboratories, classrooms, and other facilities.

12. The employment of a full-time administrative organization aflFords
opportunities for skilled educational and vocational guidance.

10 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Aims of the School

The aims of the Lincoln Preparatory School may be classified as follows:

1. The offering of educational opportunities to men and women by
methods of instruction carefully adapted to the needs of adult students.

2. The providing of this instruction at convenient evening hours, so that
the student need not leave his or her present employment while ob-
taining an education.

3. The conducting of the school work on such a high qualitative plane
that those students who wish to prepare for college may be ade-
quately prepared for entrance examinations, or for entrance by cer-
tificate if their ability and performance warrant.

4. The offering of a general program to those who do not plan to enter
college, that they may develop a taste for the better things in life and
that they may advance to a larger personal growth.

5. The off"ering of special courses for those who have particular needs
related to specialized occupations.

6. The selection of the most competent and experienced faculty available.

7. The maintenance of the excellent work which has earned for the
School the approval of the New England College Admissions Board.

8. The personal interest of every school officer in the problem of the
individual student.

Location of the School

The work of the School is conducted in the following four buildings of
Northeastern University situated on Huntington Avenue just beyond
Massachusetts Avenue at the entrance to the Huntington Avenue subway.

Richards Hall is situated at 360 Huntington Avenue. This building is
adequately equipped with classroom, drawing room, and laboratory
facilities. In the basement are the checkroom, the bookstore, and the
Husky Hut. The School office is located on the first floor.

New Building. In this building are located the Chemical Engineering
and Biological laboratories, a large Commons room open to day and
evening students, and eighteen classrooms and lecture halls.

The East Building, in which are situated the University library, several
classrooms, and the Chemical laboratories.

The South Building is situated in the rear of the East Building and
contains several classrooms and the Electrical laboratories.

Student Body

The students of the Lincoln Preparatory School are men and women of
earnest purpose, who have come to recognize the value of education but
who through force of circumstances have been unable to complete a high

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 11

school course. The ages of the students range from fifteen to sixty-nine, with
the average age twenty-two.

Some students are attempting to increase their vocational opportuni-
ties; some are completing a high school education begun elsew^here but
interrupted; some are beginning here their high school work; some are
adding to their training cultural or practical subjects which were formerly-
omitted; some are undertaking special courses to prepare them for in-
creased usefulness in war work. In fact, the School is ready to serve stu-
dents of all ages at a point where they need real service. The student body
represents also men and women from all walks of life.

Alumni

The Alumni of the Lincoln Preparatory School are excellent witnesses
of the work the School has done and is doing.

Many of our graduates are engaged in the various professions, such as
Engineering, Law, Medicine, Teaching, and Dentistry, or are engaged in
successful business activities and in public life. Furthermore, the School
has been of benefit to many who did not complete our graduation require-
ments but obtained here the credits necessary for college entrance or for
some other specific purpose, having completed elsewhere part of their high
school training.

Women graduates of this School are in the hospital training schools of
the State or have graduated therefrom. Some occupy teaching and ad-
ministrative positions in our hospitals. Many others have proceeded to
colleges and professional schools to prepare for positions in teaching,
library science, and business.

Our former students are in colleges and professional schools scattered
across the country. The following are some of the colleges that have been
attended by Alumni of the Lincoln Preparatory School :

Harvard University Simmons College

Tufts College University of Maine

Massachusetts Institute Clark University

OF Technology Massachusetts State College

Boston University University of Chicago

University of Michigan Syracuse University

Jackson College Yale University

Purdue University Dartmouth College

University of Alabama Bowdoin College

Columbia University Bates College

Colby College Northeastern University

12 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

INFORMATION REGARDING ADMISSION

Admission Requirements

Any man or woman of good moral character, regardless of occupation,
race or creed, who has completed at least eight grades of a grammar school,
or the equivalent, may enroll in the School.

The courses offered are designed to prepare students to enter institu-
tions of higher learning. Those students, however, who do not intend to
proceed to higher institutions may select from the offering of courses a
special combination of subjects which will benefit them in the work in
which they are engaged during the day. Before enrolling for such subjects,
students are urged to see the Headmaster, explaining the particular nature
of the employment in which they are engaged, so that he can arrange the
program best suited for their needs. Special combinations of subjects may
be selected to embrace business, science, or special technical work.

Applications for Admission

Students who plan to enter the School must file the official application
blank which must be accompanied by the registration fee of five dollars.
All applications for admission should be filed as early as possible in order
that the status of each student may be definitely determined and a satis-
factory program arranged before the actual opening of the term.

Credit from Other Schools

Students who have completed high school work in other approved
institutions may obtain credit for that work towards the diploma of this
School by presenting a certified transcript of record from the school pre-
viously attended. The officers of the School are glad at all times to obtain
for prospective students transcripts of their records of work at other schools,
evaluate such records in terms of diploma credits and suggest a program,
indicating the cost of the program and the time necessary to meet gradu-
ation requirements.

The responsibility devolves upon the student for making sure that his program does
not contain a subject for which prior credit has already been awarded in some other
school. Such courses, however, may be taken without credit as review
courses preparatory to later advanced work.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 13

ADMINISTRATIVE REGULATIONS

Examinations and Quizzes

Examinations are held throughout the term at the discretion of the
instructors. Final examinations are required upon the completion of all
courses. The following system of grading is used:

A — 90 to 100 — Excellent

B — 80 to 89 — Good

G — 70 to 79 — Fair

D — 60 to 69 — Lowest Passing Grade

E — 50 to 59 — Conditioned

F — Below 50 — Failure

A student marked E (Conditioned) may enroll in the advanced course
in the same subject immediately following, but upon condition that he
remove his deficiency by special examination early in the next term. A fee
of $3 is required for each such examination regularly scheduled.

A student receiving the grade of B is exempt from examination when
applying for admission to the colleges composing the New England College
Admissions Board. A list of these colleges is given on page 20. It is to be
noted, however, that colleges retain the right to accept or reject applicants
for admission.

Transfers

Students are not permitted to change from one course to another with-
out first consulting the Headmaster or other duly authorized officer of
the School and receiving a Transfer Order.

Reports of Standing

An informal report of the student's standing is issued at mid-term; and
the formal report, covering the full record of the term, is issued at the close
of each year.

In the case of students who are under twenty-one years of age, reports
may be sent to parents in the event of unsatisfactory work on the part of
the student, non-compliance with administrative regulations, continued
absence, and withdrawal. Parents of minors may obtain reports at any
time on request.

Attendance Requirements

14 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

subjects." However, if reasonable excuse for absence be presented, the
student may be allowed to make up the time lost, and be given credit for
the work; but he must complete the work at such time and in such manner
as his instructor in the course shall designate.

A minimum attendance record of 75 per cent must be maintained in all classes
before a student will be admitted to examination.

Scholarships

The Executive Council has made available a few scholarships to assist
needy students of good mental capacity who, because of financial limita-
tions, might be deprived of educational opportunities. The award when a
scholarship is granted is never in excess of one-half of the student's tuition
fees for the year.

Late Registration

Those who find it necessary to register late may at the discretion of the
Headmaster be permitted to enter the School provided they have not lost
so much work as to render it impossible for them to proceed with the
courses.

No reduction in fees is made because of late enrollment.

Examination Fees

The fee for a condition or make-up examination regularly scheduled
is $3.

The fee for a make-up quiz regularly scheduled is $1 .50.

Charges for Damages

Students who damage apparatus in the laboratories or who willfully
destroy School property will be responsible for the replacement of such
damaged articles or for the cost of replacing where this is undertaken by
the School.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 15

GENERAL INFORMATION

Libraries

In the East Building a large and well-equipped library is available for
the use of students. The reading rooms are open from 9 a.m. to 10 p.m. on
weekdays, and from 9 a.m. to 1 p.m. on Saturdays. Students have also the
privilege of securing books from the Boston Public Library and its branches.
To obtain this privilege application should be made at the School office,
where the necessary blanks will be furnished.

Textbooks and Supplies

The Bookstore, which is situated in Richards Hall, is operated for the
convenience of the student body. All books and supplies which are re-
quired by the students for their work in the School may be purchased at
the Bookstore.

Railroad Tickets

Vouchers for half-fare tickets on the Boston Elevated Railroad are
issued by the School office on the first, sixth, and eleventh Fridays of each
term. The railroad systems entering Boston issue students' tickets to stu-
dents under twenty-one years of age. Applications for these may be ob-
tained at a railroad office and presented at the School office for signature .

Visitors

Visitors are always welcome at one class session in any department.
Those who wish to visit any of the classes should call at the School office
and obtain a visitor's card signed by the Headmaster.

Educational Guidance

Prospective students or those desiring advice or guidance with regard
to any part of the school work or curricula, or who wish assistance in the
solution of their educational problems, should note the fact that interviews
are available without obligation, and that the officers of the School will do
their utmost to see that a program is designed which is the most satisfac-
tory for the individual student. In certain cases, other institutions may be
recommended which suit the student's needs better. Furthermore, it is
important that those with educational problems to solve should realize the
necessity for care in approaching educational work so that the program
selected will be on the best educational basis.

16 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

TUITION FEES

Registration Fee. $5 is payable by all students on their initial entrance
to the School. This fee is not returnable except where a student is refused
admission.

Payment Plans

For each term indicated below is listed the appropriate payment plan.
When these plans are adopted, they must be rigidly adhered to. In certain
cases, however, even the special plan of payment will not meet the needs of many
deserving students. Such students are requested to confer with an officer of the School,
who will arrange a satisfactory plan for the payment of fees.

Regular Term and Winter Term

The Regular Term begins in September and continues for 32 weeks.
During this term students may carry three full-unit courses.

The Winter Term begins in January and extends for 20 weeks. The
work is carried on more intensively than in the Regular Term, but the
same ground is covered, primarily by means of a longer classroom period.
During this term students are permitted to carry two full-unit courses.

The cost of each course is $40. Fees are payable in monthly installments.
The first installment is due on registration; thereafter payments are due
on the first Tuesday of each month.

Summer Term

The Summer term begins in June and extends for 1 5 weeks. During this
term students may carry two full-unit courses. A full year's work is covered
in each course.

The cost of each full-unit summer course is $30. Fees are payable in
three successive monthly installments.

The first installment is due on registration. Subsequent payments are
due on the third Tuesday of July and August.

Special Rates for Sciences

Biology

Tuition fee $40.00

Laboratory fee 5.00

Physics

Tuition fee $40.00

Laboratory fee 5.00

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 17

Chemistry

Tuition fee $40.00

Laboratory fee 5.00

Laboratory deposit 5.00

The unused portion of the chemistry deposit is refunded after deduction
for breakages and for non-returnables.

Charges for Partial Attendance

In the event of a student's withdrawal from school, he is charged on a

pro rata basis for the weeks he has attended. These charges are as follows:

32-week courses — 4 per cent of the total charges for each week of attendance

in each semester.
20-week courses — 6 per cent of the total charges for each week of attendance

in each half term.
15-week courses — 8 per cent of the total charges for each week of attendance.

The same charges are applicable in the event that a student abandons
a part of his program. In addition, the full Laboratory Fee is charged in
those cases where a student is pursuing a laboratory course.

Refund Policy

Students who are forced to withdraw from a course or from the School
are required to notify the School office by completing the withdrawal
blanks which will be furnished.

Since the School assumes the obligation of carrying the student through-
out the year for which he registers, and since the instruction and accommo-
dations are provided on a yearly basis, the Officers of Administration have
ruled as follows:

A. The registration fee is not refundable.

B. Applications for refunds must be presented within forty-five days after with-
drawal from School.

C. Refunds in the case of complete withdrawal from School will be
granted by the Committee on Withdrawals for reasons which they
deem adequate.

D. Refunds are computed from the date of application for refund, not
from the date of last attendance; hence students who are compelled to
discontinue attendance should immediately report the fact to the School
office.

18 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

INFORMATION REGARDING PROGRAMS

The Unit System Explained

Frequent reference is made in this catalog to "units," and that there
may be no misunderstanding in the minds of students, this explanation is
offered. A unit of high school credit is given upon the satisfactory comple-
tion of the work of one school year in a single standard subject, the equiv-
alent of which is covered by this School in thirty-two weeks or in the in-
tensive courses of twenty and fifteen weeks offered in the winter and sum-
mer terms respectively. The following exception is to be noted: Four full
courses in English total three units towards graduation or towards college

entrance.

Terms and Hours of Attendance

When arranging a program for a student the School officers usually
assign work which requires attendance for only two evenings a week.

All classes are scheduled to meet between the hours of 7 p.m. and 10 p.m.

Each term a schedule is prepared listing the courses to be offered and
the hours at which they meet. A copy may be obtained on request.

Following is the general arrangement for the completion of a course in
each term of the school year.
Fall Term (32 Weeks)

One full-unit course requires attendance for one hour twice a week.
Students may carry one, two, or three courses during this term.
Winter Term (20 Weeks)

One full-unit course requires attendance for one and a half hours twice
a week. Students may carry one or two full-unit courses during this term.
Summer Term (15 Weeks)

One full-unit course requires attendance for one and a half hours twice
a week. Students may carry one or two full-unit courses during this term.

Courses of Study

Algebra 1 French 1 History (English)

Algebra 2 French 2 History (United States)

*Biology French 3 Latin 1

*Chemistry Geometry (Plane) Latin 2

Economics Geometry (Solid) Latin 3

English 1 German 1 Latin 4

English 2 German 2 *Physics

English 3 Government Spanish

English 4 History (Ancient) Trigonometry

History (European)

*These courses meet only once a week in the fall term and twice a week in the
winter and summer terms. All other courses meet twice a week, usually on Tuesdays
and Fridays.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 19

How to Plan Your Program of Classes

In choosing subjects each term, students should bear in mind:

(a) The requirements for graduation from the Lincoln Preparatory
School. These are given on page 20.

(b) The admission requirements of the higher institution they wish to
enter. Catalogs of most colleges are on file at the School office. In case
of doubt, consult these and talk with the Headmaster or his assistants.

(d) Their special interests, in the event that courses are chosen from the
cultural point of view.

It is especially important to meet the requirements for graduation so
that a diploma may be obtained. Most colleges and hospitals and many
lines of business and industry not only require fifteen units of high school
work, but also insist that the student be a graduate of a recognized high
school. Moreover, in business and in everyday life it means infinitely more
to say one is a high school graduate than merely to say one has completed
fifteen units of high school work.

How Long Will It Take to Obtain a Diploma?

The flexible schedule and the twelve months' operation of the Lincoln
Preparatory School enable a student to save considerable time. The exact
time that it will take to obtain a diploma is dependent upon credit from
former institutions attended, hours available for study, and the number of
courses pursued. A student who enters school without any credit for former
high school attendance can complete his course in from three to five years,
according to the number of summer terms he attends. However, it is
urged upon students that a high school education is a matter of accomplishment
and not a matter of time, and the School insists on a high standard of accom-
plishment.

Admission to College

Since the Lincoln Preparatory School offers regular college preparatory
courses for those who wish to enter college, a student, according to his
record and his plan of procedure, may enter college in one of the following
ways:

By Diploma. Certain colleges will admit students on the diploma from
this School. Among these colleges are all those that accept a standard
high school diploma.

20 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

By Examination. A few colleges, notably Harvard, Yale, and the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, require certain examinations
from all candidates. This School prepares students for all college en-
trance examinations and for the examinations of the College Entrance
Examination Board.

By Certificate. The School is accredited by the New England College
Admissions Board. Some of the colleges which accept the certificate of
this School are Amherst, Bates, Bowdoin, Colby, Massachusetts State
College, Clark, Middlebury, Tufts, Wesleyan, Williams, and Worcester
Polytechnic Institute. Generally speaking, institutions that accept students
by the certificate method will accept the certificate of this School. The certificate
grade is 80 per cent.

Admission to Hospital Training Schools

Since the School is fully accredited, most hospitals will admit students
who hold the diploma of the School even though all grades are not of
certificate rank. A few hospitals, however, require certificate grades of
candidates for training. Certificate grades from this School are acceptable.
Each student should ascertain, however, the definite entrance require-
ments of the hospital she plans to enter.

Requirements for Graduation

The diploma of the Lincoln Preparatory School is granted without
charge to the student on the completion of a total of fifteen units of work,
of which at least four must have been earned in the Lincoln Preparatory School. In
addition, each student must have completed in this School or elsewhere
the required subjects for the diploma for which he is a candidate.

Curricula

COLLEGE COURSE DIPLOMA
A. For admission to Liberal Arts Colleges

This course prepares for most colleges that oflFer the degree of Bachelor of Arts.

Required: Units

College Preparatory English 3

Algebra 2

Plane Geometry 1

French or German or Spanish 2

Physics or Chemistry or Biology 1

United States History , 1

Latin or Greek 2

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 21

Elective:

The remaining three units may be selected from the following:

Units

Spanish ; 2 to 3

Latin 1 to 2

French 1 to 2

European History 1

Ancient History 1

Solid Geometry 3^

Trigonometry )^

Chemistry or Physics or Biology 1

One unit of a foreign language is not acceptable for credit.

Language and Mathematics requirements vary somewhat for entrance to the
different colleges. This is especially true of the Latin requirements. Some colleges
require three entrance units in either French or German. It is the student's respon-
sibility to meet the requirements of the college he elects to enter.

In addition, other electives may be permitted by special consent provided they
are acceptable by the college to which the student seeks entrance.

B. For admission to Engineering Schools and Colleges of Liberal Arts offering the degree of
Bachelor of Science

Required: Units

English 3

French or German or Spanish 3

Algebra 2

Plane Geometry 1

Physics or Chemistry 1

United States History 1

Trigonometry and Solid Geometry 1

Two units of two modern languages will be accepted for three units of one
language.

Language and Mathematics requirements vary somewhat for entrance to the
different colleges. It is the student's responsibility to meet the requirements of the college
he elects to enter.

Elective:

Subjects may be selected from either the Required or Elective List of the
College Course to make up the necessary fifteen units.

One unit of a foreign language is not acceptable for credit.

GENERAL COURSE DIPLOMA

The General Course offers a general education and also, if the right selection of
subjects is made, enables students to enter certain colleges. A wide selection of sub-
jects is available but choice of as many college preparatory subjects as possible
should be made.

22 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Required: Five Units Units

English 3

United States History 1

Physics or Chemistry or Biology 1

5
Limited Electives: Three Units {choose one option)

Mathematics Option

Algebra 1, Algebra 2 or Physics, and Plane Geometry ........ 3

Language Option

Three units of any one of the following or two units of any two:

French, Latin, German, and Spanish 3 or 4

Social Science Option

Economics, Government, English History, Ancient History,

European History, etc 3

Free Electives: Seven Units

Any standard high school subjects to complete total of 15 units

One unit of a foreign language is not acceptable for credit.

Special Program for Admission to Training Schools for Nurses

The work conducted by the Lincoln Preparatory School is accredited
by the Massachusetts hospitals and by the State Board of Registration in
Medicine. The State Board of Registration in Medicine and the Board of
Registration of Nurses have ruled that a high school education or its
equivalent is a prerequisite for admission to hospital training schools. The
high school certificate must show the completion of fifteen units accepted
by the high school in meeting graduation requirements. These fifteen units
are to be as follows:

Required (7 units) Units

1 . English (4 years) 3

2. History 1

3. Mathematics 1

4. Science 2

Free Electives (8 units) *

1. Greek or Latin 5. Social Studies

2. Foreign modern language 6. Commercial Studies

3. Mathematics 7. Fine and Practical Arts

4. Science 8. Miscellaneous

An officer of the School will be glad to arrange a program so that these
electives will be judiciously chosen, not only to aid the student in the sub-

*Not more than 4 units will be accepted in one group.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 23

sequent subjects, but to meet the requirernents of other states with which
a reciprocal arrangement exists with the State of Massachusetts.

For those already engaged in the profession of nursing, attention is
directed to facilities which are available to those who have not completed
a high school education in accordance with the above demands. New
regulations have been formed regarding institutional promotion and re-
garding teaching and administrative positions in hospitals, and while such
legislation is not retroactive, it will certainly prove helpful to those who
already occupy such positions to be adequately equipped for advancement
and promotion in the event of transfer.

Because of the war emergency and the great need for nurses, some
hospitals have modified their entrance requirements. Students should
inquire at their hospitals for a definite statement regarding entrance
requirements.

24 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

OUTLINES OF COURSES

The Lincoln Preparatory School reserves the right to change the ar-
rangement of courses, the requirements for graduation, tuition fees, and
other regulations affecting the students. Such regulations will affect both
old and new students.

Note: The courses of the School are arranged in "units."

A unit is ordinarily the amount of work covered in a single subject taken four
or five times a week for a year in a standard day high school.

In this School a unit may be covered in each subject in thirty-two weeks.
See page 18 for explanation of unit system.

Students carry one, two or sometimes three subjects at a time. Fifteen units,
properly selected (see pages 20 and 21), are required for graduation.

The high school courses described below are the equivalent of similar courses
offered in a standard day high school.

English

The fundamental purposes of the department are to give the student efficient
training in grammar in order to aff"ord a sound basis for correct speech and writing;
to instill correct principles of constructing sentences and paragraphs; to help him
enlarge his vocabulary and to acquire an interest in words; to train him in the
elements of logic as related to the organization and expression of thought; to teach
him how to study; to impart an elementary knowledge of the types and the history
of English literature; and to aid him in forming a taste for good literature and a
genuine appreciation thereof.

English 1. This course is designed to bridge the gap between grade and high
school English. Fundamentals of English grammar, the correct sentence, the more
important rules of spelling and punctuation, simple compositions — especially
the letter — and an introduction to literary selections as models for voluntary
reading are presented.

English 2. This course marks the beginning of a more intensive study of English,
both as a tool and as literature. Functional grammar, development of the para-
graph, careful planning of themes, and a beginning of the critical study of literary
forms, both poetry and prose, form the basis of the course.

English 3. This is an advanced course in composition including precis-writing
and the structure of paragraphs and sentences. There is a rapid review of grammar
and punctuation. The essay, the drama, the novel, and types of poetry are studied.

English 4. This course completes the two-year sequence begun in English 3.
It prepares students for college entrance and College Board examinations and also
stresses the needs of the student who does not intend to pursue formal study in a
higher institution. By means of thought-provoking reading material, both classic
and modern, it stimulates written expression on subjects of interest to the individ-
ual student. Compositions are submitted at regular intervals throughout the term.
The essay, the drama, the lyric poem, and prose fiction are studied, and the
principles underlying these forms of art are presented.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 25

Latin

Exercises in translation at sight begin with the first lessons in which Latin
sentences of any length occur, and continue throughout the course to insure cor-
rect methods of work on the part of the student. In the translations of passages
from the Latin, the use of clear and natural English is insisted upon. Reading
aloud is encouraged. The work in Latin Composition aims to give the student a
thorough knowledge of the fundamental principles of Latin syntax. It has been
found advantageous to use a double system of notebooks, calling for special written
work from the student. This work deals with Latin forms, principles of Latin
syntax, writing of English-Latin sentences, and finished translations of selected
passages from the Latin. These courses in Latin fulfill the requirements of college
entrance examinations.

Latin 1. Exercises in translations, English-Latin, Latin-English. Drill in Latin
forms, drill in Latin syntax. The course aims to give the student a thorough
knowledge of the fundamental principles of Latin syntax.

Latin 2. The Latin reading is not less in amount than Caesar, Gallic War,
I-IV. This amount of reading is taken from Caesar (Gallic War and Civil War),
Nepos (Lives), Aulus Gellius, Eu tropins, Phaedrus, Quintus Curtius Rufus, and
Valerius Maximus, or books of selections containing some of these with other
authors of prose works. Special attention is given to sight translation, to vocabu-
lary study, to the Latin Word List, which contains those words the student is
expected to know at the end of two years of the study of Latin. There is continued
drill in Latin syntax and in Latin forms. This course in second year Latin aims to
meet the needs of those students who plan to enter colleges that require only two
years of Latin.

Latin 3. The Latin reading is not less in amount than Cicero, the oration
against Catiline, for the Manilian Law, and for Archias. This amount of reading
is selected from Cicero (orations, letters, and De Senectute), Sallust (Catiline and
Jugurthine War). The reading for the year includes selections from such authors
as Pliny, Livy, or books of selections containing these and other authors of prose
works. Special attention is given to the study of passages of Latin prose set for
comprehension. The course aims to cultivate in the student the ability to render
unseen passages of Latin prose into clear and natural English, as well as the ability
to write simple Latin prose. Due attention is given, therefore, to vocabulary study,
to the Latin Word List, which contains those words the student is expected to
know at the end of three years of the study of Latin. The political and social life
in Rome in the time of Cicero is studied.

Latin 4. The reading is not less in amount than Virgil, Aeneid I-IV. This
amount of reading is taken from Virgil (Bucolics, Georgics, Aeneid), Ovid (Meta-
morphoses, Fasti, and Tristia), or from books of selections containing poems or
extracts from other poets. Special attention is given to the study of passages of
Latin verse set for comprehension. The course aims to cultivate in the student
the ability to render unseen passages of Latin verse into clear and natural English,
as well as the ability to write simple Latin prose. Due attention is given, there-
fore, to Latin forms, Latin syntax, to vocabulary study, to the Latin Word List,
which contains those words the student is expected to know at the end of four

26 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

years of the study of Latin. Literary and historical allusions, prosody, and ques-
tions on subject matter are studied.

French

The courses in French are planned with the purpose of giving the students (1)
an appreciative comprehension of French, both as literature and as a spoken
language; and (2) a sufficient knowledge to fit them for advanced work. The essen-
tials of the grammar are mastered by continued drill and constant application.
The attainment of good pronunciation receives careful attention, and from the
beginning the student is trained to understand spoken French.

French 1. This course begins with instruction in pronunciation. Phonetic
symbols are not used. The acquisition of a basic vocabulary is stressed and the
memorizing of word groups and short sentences.

The instruction in grammar consists of the elementary forms and uses of articles,
nouns, adjectives, pronouns, adverbs, regular verbs, and a few common irregular
verbs. Much emphasis is placed upon written translation of English into French.

The reading text provides for the translation of at least fifty pages of simple
French. This is largely oral translation.

French 2. This course completes the elements of grammar and syntax, with
special emphasis upon forms and practice in their use in written composition.
Frequent review lessons help to make the student familiar with the essentials.

French 3. Bovee and Carnahan's "New French Review Grammar" is used
and provides a general review and further advance in grammar and in written
translation or connected prose. All the common irregular verbs and many idioms
should be learned.

Bordeaux' "La Peur de vivre" provides for the reading of modern standard
French.

German

At the end of the elementary course in German, the student should be able to
read at sight and to translate a passage of easy German prose. He should be able
to put into German, short English sentences taken from the language of everyday
life, and to answer questions upon principles of German grammar. The course
aims to meet the needs not only of those students who are seeking a general knowl-
edge of German, but also of those students who are planning to take the college
entrance examinations.

German 1. Chiles-Wiehr "First German Book" is used as a grammar and com-
position book. This is supplemented by reading Gueber Marchen und Erzah
lungen I, II, Immensee by Storm. Drill in pronunciation; practice in reading the
German text aloud; memorizing of simple verse and prose selections.

German 2. "Chiles German Composition and Conversation" is used as a
textbook. This is supplemented by reading "Emil und die Detektive" by Kastner,
followed by translating such works as "Germelshausen" by Gerstacker, "Die
Braune Erica," by Jensen. Exercises in comprehension; memorizing of simple
German verse and prose selections. "German Frequency Word Book" by Morgan,
"German Idiom Word List" by Hauch are used.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 27

Spanish

Spanish 1 . The work of the first year is so planned that it serves as a complete
unit in fundamentals for the student who wishes to continue the language inde-
pendently by travel or reading. Correct pronunciation, a knowledge of the gram-
matical structure of the language, and an ability to read and write within the
limits of a practical vocabulary are the goals of the course. Standard elementary
readers are used in connection with a grammar text such as Hills and Ford, "First
Spanish Course."

Spanish 2. After a rapid review of the work covered by Spanish 1, the second
year is devoted to the enlargement of vocabulary, including common idioms, the
increase of skill and speed in translation, with special emphasis upon sight trans-
lation and free composition. The course prepares for the elementary examination
in Spanish given by the College Entrance Examination Board. The use of a stand-
ard composition book is supplemented by much reading of current as well as
classical Spanish.

History, Government, Economics

The aim of the department is to give a broad knowledge of vital conditions in
the growth of the leading countries of the world. This includes the study, not only
of important historical facts, but more especially of the progress of development
in government, society, business, religion, and education. The past is studied that
the present may be better understood.

History (English). This course is a study of English History from the time of
the Roman Conquest to the present. Special emphasis is given to the study of the
structure of government and the legal system because of their bearing upon
American development. Study of English foreign policy is essential to a better
understanding of international problems of the present. Study of church problems,
the Industrial Revolution, democratic growth are stressed because of present-day
tolerant attitude in regard to religion, views as to wisdom of dictatorial or demo-
cratic government, and ever-changing economic conditions.

History (United States). A careful and comprehensive study is made of
United States History, including not only the story of earlier times, but also an
analysis of events from the Civil War down to and including our own times. Special
reference is made to the social and industrial development of the country, economic
progress, sources and effects of immigration, and of American government. The
course is designed to cover the requirements of the College Entrance Examination
Board.

History (European). In this course a study is made of the European powers
from the beginning of the seventeenth century to the present. Autocracy rampant
in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries begins to decline in the latter eigh-
teenth century with the French Revolution. The decline continued in the nine-
teenth century, giving way to democracy, which reached its peak following the
World War, only to yield in many countries to dictatorships of the present day.
International relations are traced, noting especially the influence of commerce and
the subsequent imperial rivalries and wars. The Industrial Revolution, with its
profound effect upon humanity, forms another important part of the course. Con-
siderable stress is given to great leaders of the different European powers.

28 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

History (Ancient). This course devotes one term to the study of the Ancient
Orient and Greece as far as the death of Alexander and the break-up of his empire,
with the expansion of Greek culture in the Mediterranean world. The second term
is devoted to the study of the history of Rome to the year 476 a.d. The course
emphasizes the characteristic elements of these civilizations. The work calls for
the study of an accurate historical textbook, in which not less than five hundred
pages of text are devoted to the particular subject. Special attention is given to
map study. The work is supplemented by a topical study of outstanding phases of
the history of the period, including growth of institutions, historic characters,
outstanding events and periods. The work calls for consultation of standard writers
on Ancient History, especially books of Readings in Ancient History. The aim of
the course is to meet the needs of those students who are seeking a general knowl-
edge of the subject as given in a high school, to prepare students for the examina-
tions that are given by the College Entrance Examination Board as defined in the
Definition of Requirements, published by the Board.

Government. The forms of our local and state governments are taken up first.
These are followed by a careful analysis of the Constitution of the United States,
showing the relationship of the executive, legislative, and judicial branches of our
National Government.

During the second semester a study is made of South America and the principal
nations of Europe, and in addition the smaller nations where innovations may
make investigation of governmental methods worth while.

Economics. A careful study is made of the origin and development of our
industrial system, and an analysis into its component parts, together with the
economic phenomena accompanying them. It is intended to make economics of
practical value in everyday life.

During the second semester the course embraces the reform and improvement
of our industrial system; taxation, the tariff, international trade, transportation,
labor and capital, public ownership, wages and profits, and other current economic
problems are treated.

Mathematics

The courses in mathematics are planned to meet the needs of all secondary
students. They afford an opportunity for preparation in the mathematical processes
which are necessary for success in industrial, commercial, or professional careers.
They are intended (1) to acquaint the student with such mathematical processes
and methods as he is most likely to need in the successful pursuit of other studies
and in the various trades and occupations; (2) to prepare the student for the suc-
cessful pursuit of the more advanced branches of mathematics in technical schools
and colleges.

Algebra 1. This course introduces the student to: (1) the positive and the
negative number; to its application in the four fundamental operations leading up
to the solving of formulas and equations, both linear and fractional, in one and two
unknowns; (2) the function of the graph for both pictorial representation and the
solving of equations; (3) the literal number and the study of problems.

Algebra 2. Review of Elementary Algebra with more difficult problems.
Quadratics and simultaneous quadratic equations, with applications, ratio, pro-

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL 29

portion, and variation, progressions, binomial theorem, logarithms, and that part
of Trigonometry required by the College Entrance Examination Board.

Geometry, Plane. The five books of Plane Geometry are studied. The
numerous original exercises stimulate the power to reason clearly and to derive
logical proofs. Special attention is given to those who expect to take college
entrance examinations. This course meets College Entrance Board requirements.

Geometry, Solid. This course deals with appreciation of three dimensional
relations, formal proofs of the standard theorems and originals, locus problems,
properties and measurement of prisms, pyramids, cylinders, cones and the sphere.

Trigonometry. The major topics covered by this course are the theory and use
of logarithms, solution of right and oblique triangles, trigonometric equations,
proofs of fundamental formulas and identities based upon them, radian measure.

Drawing

Mechanical Drawing. The fundamentals of Mechanical Drawing are stressed
in this course. A credit towards college entrance will be granted upon the com-
pletion of sixty-five problems or the equivalent. All work is individual and admits
of progress according to the student's ability.

Instruction is given in the testing, use and care of the instruments and draw-
ing supplies, and about thirty drawing plates are made. The topics studied in
these plates include: technique practice, lettering, geometric constructions, ortho-
graphic projection, auxiliary views, revolution of objects, isometric, cavalier, cabinet
and perspective projection, intersections, sections, helix and application, screw
threads, dimensioning and inking.

Science

Biology. This is a comprehensive course in Biology designed to meet the re-
quirements of the following persons: (1) prospective college students who are
preparing for college entrance and College Board Examinations; (2) students who
plan to enter institutions requiring credits in some science; (3) prospective nursing
students; (4) those who desire an elementary knowledge of the structure and
function of plant and animal life.

The multiple objectives of the course are: to gain the best approach to an under-
standing of facts, principles, and theories and to apply them in various ways; to
help the student to develop a special interest in some part of the course; to give a
fundamental understanding of living things, of their structure and function; to
give a survey of the plant and animal kingdoms with the primary objective of
creating interest in and appreciation of nature; to present the economic aspects of
Biology; to present an adequate understanding of hygienic principles underlying
all healthful living organisms; to meet the requirements of an elementary course
in any life science which aims to contribute to both avocational and vocational
training.

The course consists of lectures, demonstrations, discussions, and laboratory
work.

Physics. This course is intended for two groups of students. First, it will meet
the requirements of those expecting to enter a college or technical school. Secondly,

30 LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

it is intended to help those who wish a general knowledge of the important laws
and principles of Physics as applied to modern everyday experiences. The applica-
tions of Physics in such fields as household appliances, the weather, the automobile,
the airplane, radio, etc., are particularly stressed with the idea of giving a back-
ground of culture and enjoyment.

Many students interested in mechanical lines will find it giving them a clearer
understanding of the operations of devices of which they make constant use.

Laboratory experiments and lecture table demonstrations will illustrate the
subject matter studied in the text.

Although the course is not intended to be highly theoretical, an elementary
knowledge of Algebra and Geometry will be of assistance in the solution of problems.

Chemistry. This course has the twofold aim of preparing the student in
Chemistry for entrance to any college or technical school and providing a general
introduction to the subject for other purposes.

There are class discussions of chemical principles and of chemical materials,
solution of numerical problems, practice in such exercises as writing of equations,
demonstration experiments carried through by the instructor. The student does
assigned experiments in the laboratory and writes reports of his work.

The more important elements, both non-metallic and metallic, as well as
numerous compounds, are studied. Important laws and hypotheses of Chemistry
are constantly stressed.

Unless there is urgent reason for following a different order, the student is
advised to arrange his succession of courses in such a way that Chemistry will be
preceded by a study of Physics.

THE LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL
360 Huntington Avenue, Boston 15, Mass.

Application for Admission

Application Received by Date 19.

A fee of five dollars must accompany this application. Make checks, money orders, or drafts
payable to The Lincoln Preparatory School

This fee is not refundable except when a student is refused admission

(date)

To the Headmaster:

(First Name) (Middle Name) (Last Name)

hereby apply for admission to the Lincoln Preparatory School, and submit the following
information:

(Street Address)

Age Date of Birth .

(Town)

Place of Birth Nationality .

Home Telephone

Business Address

(Concern) (Street) (City)

Business Telephone Occupation

List other high schools attended (State whether day or evening)

Name of School

Approximate Date
of Attendance

Day or Evening

Do you wish to receive the diploma of this school?

Do you merely wish to earn credits here without qualifying for the diploma? .

Do you plan to enter college?

If so, which college?

If under 21, give name of parent or guardian

THE
LINCOLN SCHOOLS

Evening Sessions
CLASSES OPEN TO MEN AND WOMEN

LINCOLN TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

Associate in Engineering Programs

Courses leading to the Degree of Associate in Engineering are offered
in the following major fields:

Aeronautical Electrical

Chemistry Electronics

Civil and Structural Industrial

Mechanical

8.B.A. Degree Program

A six-year program conducted in conjunction with Northeastern Uni-
versity School of Business is available which leads to the degree of B.B.A.
in Engineering and Management awarded by Northeastern University.

Special Programs

For those who do not wish to take one of the regular programs, special
programs consisting of one or more courses can be arranged to meet
individual needs.

LINCOLN PREPARATORY SCHOOL

Fully accredited by the New England College Admissions Board.
General, Classical, and Technical high school courses are available.
Students may enter in September, January, and June.

For further informafion write, indicating the school in which you are interested

THE LINCOLN SCHOOLS

360 HUNTINGTON AVENUE, BOSTON 15, MASSACHUSETTS
Telephone: KENmore 3177

THE HUNTINGTON SCHOOL

FOR BOYS

An Urhan Indcj^cndmt QDay School

WITH THE ADVANTAGES AND PHYSICAL FACILITIES
OF A COUNTRY DAY SCHOOL

320 HUNTINGTON AVENUE
BOSTON, MASSACHUSETTS

Foreword

In the following pages you will read in some detail a descrip-
tion of The Huntington School for Boys. For thirty-five years the
School has enjoyed a steady growth. The growth has not been
numerical alone, as we limit our enrollment to two hundred, but in
reputation as a school for thorough college preparation. We are
convinced that to succeed in college a boy needs scholastic compe-
tence, emotional stability, and a confidence in himself. The
rapport and mutual confidence between teacher and student,
w^hich has become a part of our school life, does much to attain
these goals. We have found that, in the main, boys will accept
responsibility when they learn that a teacher's confidence in them
is sincere.

Huntington has full scholastic accreditation. In addition
to the curricular v^^ork, there is a complete program of sports and
activities in order that the boys may become w^ell oriented to
college life.

There is much satisfaction to be derived from vs^orking with
boys in their formative years. We are looking forw^ard with
pleasure to the coming school year.

CALENDAR

September 19 .

October 12 .

J^ovcmhcr 29, 30 .

December 17 — January 2

January 21—25

January 2S .

Fehruary 22 .

March 18-22

April 19

May 27 -June 4

June 1 .

Juiy 8— August 30

1945-1946

School Year Begins

Legal Holiday — - No Classes

Thanksgiving Recess

Christmas Vacation

First Semester Examinations

Second. Semester Begins

Legal Holiday — No Classes

Spring Vacation

Legal Holiday — No Classes

Final Examinations

Commencement

Summer Session (1946)

The Huntington School

Board ofTrustus

Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman
Frank Lincoln Richardson, ViccCUairman

WiLMAN Edward Adams
Henry Nathaniel Andrews'
Arthur Atwood Ballantine
George Louis Barnes
Farwell Gregg Bemis
Henry Goddard Bradlee
Godfrey Lowell Cabot
Paul Codman Cabct
Walter Channing
William Converse Chick
Paul Foster Clark
David Frank Edwards
William Partridge Ellison
John Wells Farley
Ernest Bigelow Freeman
Franklin Wile Ganse
Harvey Dow Gibson
Henry Ingraham Harriman

Chandler Hovey
Maynard Hutchinson
Arthur Stoddard Johnson
Irving Edwin Moultrop
Augustin Hamilton Parker, Jr.
Frederick Sanford Pratt
Roger Preston
Stuart Craig Rand
James Lorin Richards
Harold Bours Richmond
Leverett Saltonstall
Frank Palmer Speare
Francis Robert Carnegie Steele
Charles Stetson
Earl Place Stevenson
Robert Treat Paine Storer
Edward Watson Supple
James Vincent Toner

Administrative Ojficcrs of the School

Carl Stephens Ell, A.B., M.S., Ed.M., Sc.D.
President

Everett Avery Churchill, A.B., Ed.D.
Vice-President

WiLLUM Greene Wilkinson, A.B., Ed.M.
Acting Headmaster

Faculty

Robert Oren Bates, B.S. Appointed 1940

B.S. St. Lawrence University, 1937; Graduate Study, School of Education, Boston
University, 1937-; Teacher, Harrisburg Academy, 1938—40; Instructor, The Huntington
School, 1940-.

Mathematics, Physics

Carl Ferdinand Christianson, A.B. Appointed 1927

A.B. Wesleyan University, 1923; Instructor, Tilton School, New Hampshire, 1923-24;
Teacher, Abington High School, 1924—27; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1927-.

History, Economics

Norman Greene, B.S. Appointed 1939

B.S. Boston University, 1938; Graduate Study, School of Education; Teacher, Rogers
High School, Newport, Rhode Island, 1938; Instructor, Nichols Junior College, 1938-39;
Instructor, The Huntington School, 1939-.

History, Economics
Advisa of Forum

Preston Harvey, A.B., Ed.M. Appointed 1931

A.B. Bowdoin College, 1928; Ed.M. Boston University, 1942; Teacher, Portland
Country Day School, 1928-31; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1931—.

Latin, Mathematics
Aiviser, The Huntington Recori

Percy Edward Jones, B.S. Appointed 1919

B.S. Boston University, 1930; Sloyd Training School, 1919; Instructor, Mechanical
Drawing, The Huntington School, 1919-30; Instructor, Mathematics, The Huntington
School, 1930-.

Mathematics, Drawing

Roland Leach, A.B., Ed.M. Appointed 1927

A.B. Tufts College, 1925; Ed.M. Harvard University, 1930; Instructor of French,
Providence Country Day School, 1926; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1927—.

Modem Languages, English
Coach of Dramatics

Olan a. Rand, B.A. Appointed 1943

B.A. Washington and Lee, 1926; Graduate Study, University of Vermont; Teacher,
Franklin High School, New Hampshire, 1926-28; Teacher, Barre High School, Vermont,
1929-43; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1943-.

English

Ernest D. Saunders, M.A. Appointed 1944

A.B. Western Reserve, 1940; M.A. Harvard, 1941; Graduate Study: (1) Universite de
Poitiers (Institute de Touraine) 1939; (2) Berlin-Schuleraustaush, 1938; (3) Diploma of
Oriental Languages (Japanese), University of Colorado, 1943; Instructor, Colonic Francaise,
Montreal, 1941; Teaching Fellov^r, Harvard, 1942; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1944-.

Alfred L. Skinner, A.B. Appointed 1923

A.B. Harvard College, 1919; Teacher, Milford High School, Rhode Island, 1919-20;
Teacher, North Andover High School, 1920-23; Instructor, The Huntington School, 1923—.

Mathematics

Harold C. Wilcox, S.B., M.S. Appointed 1924

S.B. Rhode Island State College, 1915; M.S. Brown University, 1917; Instructor,
Columbus Academy, Columbus, Ohio, 1917-18; Head of Science Department, Monson
Academy, 1918-20; Principal, South Academy, 1920-24; Instructor, The Huntington School,
I924-.

Physics, Chemistry
Director, Science Cluh

Coaching Staff

Director of Athletics, Track Robert Oren Bates

Baseball Percy Edward Jones

Basketball Lawrence Rosebush

Skiing Olan Alexander Rand

Swimming Raymond English Millard

Tennis Alfred Loring Skinner

School Physician, Dr. George Lane
School Librarian, Miss Myra White

Secretarial Stajf

Marquita MacHugh
Frances C. Brown
Phyllis L. Welch

Qcncral Information

The Huntington School w^as founded in 1909. It had its
origin in the apparent need in Greater Boston for a first-class inde-
pendent day school possessing the follow^ing outstanding features:

(a) it would permit its students to remain under the direct influence of
the home;

(b) it would offer a strong college preparatory program in an environment
where character is emphasized;

(d) It would not be too large to permit ample attention to the individual
student.

Huntington has been eminently successful in its aims. Its
students come from all parts of Boston and the neighboring cities
and towns, and are furnished the opportunity not only of securing
a sound formal education for entrance to, and success in, college,
but of attaining a strong body, strong character, and independence
of thought through daily contact with \vell-rounded Christian
men. Graduates are to be found in almost all of the New England
colleges and m many colleges and universities throughout the
country. More recently many of them have distinguished them-
selves in the armed forces of their country.

Huntington limits its enrollment to not more than two hun-
dred boys. There is no desire to increase this number, which is
sufficiently large to promote school activities of interest and value
to growing boys. The size of the School thus makes it possible for
the Headmaster and his associates to keep in close touch with the
individual student.

While Huntington is essentially a day school, a tew boarding
students are accepted. The School accepts no responsibility with
respect to the activities of such students after school hours. How-
ever, It will co-operate wholeheartedly in arranging for satis'
factory living quarters for those who come from a distance.

Buildings

The School is housed in a building especially equipped for
educational work, with every facility for carrying out the com-
plete program which it sponsors.

The recitation rooms are airy and well-lighted, designed for
small classes, which permit a friendly yet diligent atmosphere to
exist at all times. The number of students assigned to any class
is rarely in excess of fifteen.

The Physics and Chemistry laboratories are well equipped
for the thorough study of these Sciences. Through their facilities
they afford opportunity for ample experimentation. A standard
drafting room is available for those students assigned to Mechanical
Draw^ing.

The swimming pool, seventy-five feet long by twenty-five feet
wide, is supplied with filtered water heated to a proper tempera-
ture by an elaborate system of pipes. It is one of the finest in New
England. The School has special hours reserved for the use of the
pool.

In addition, there is a large lounge, the gift of Huntington
Alumni, v^here students gather after school hours to play various
games, to chat together, or read the various magazines and periodi-
cals provided by the School. Additional rooms are available for
special meetings, debates, chess matches, etc. , that are held through-
out the school year.

According to a pre-arranged schedule. The Huntington
School has the exclusive use of the Samuel Johnson Memorial
Gymnasium, which is the largest in Boston and is situated in the
rear of the School and connected with it. On the main floor is the
gymnasium proper, equipped with the best of apparatus. It is
encircled by an elevated running track, twelve laps to the mile.
The gymnasium also contains a visitors' gallery, a special locker
room, shower baths, and various exercise rooms.

Grounds
The Huntington School enjoys the use of a large athletic field
of approximately five acres in the Longv^^ood section of Brookline

A STUDENT'S TEACHERS IN CONFERENCE

AN EXPERIMENT IN PHYSICS

on Kent Street, one and one-half miles from the school building.
Transportation is furnished free of charge to and from the field.
Here are ample and excellent facilities for all out-of-door sports.
A completely equipped field house furnishes adequate facilities for
both home and visiting teams. Altogether the School has one of
the best athletic fields in Greater Boston. In addition to these
grounds there are available at the school building tennis courts and
other facilities for games and sports.

Location

The Huntington School is located in the Boston Young Men's
Christian Association building at 320 Huntington Avenue, in the
educational and cultural center of Boston. It is within easy reach
from all parts of Metropolitan Boston. The School is situated at
the entrance of the Huntington Avenue subway and can be reached
from Park Street in approximately nine minutes.

It is also within easy walking distance of the railroad stations
at Back Bay, Trinity Place and Huntington Avenue, and of the
Massachusetts subway station. Ample parking space is available
to those who come to the School by automobile.

Morning Assemblies

On Monday and Wednesday mornings, all students assem-
ble in Bates Hall to take part in a brief devotional program. The
School is non-sectarian but thoroughly Christian in the conduct
of Its religious activities. After these exercises matters of general
school interest are briefly presented to the students.

On Friday the assembly is devoted to some special pro-
gram. These generally consist of talks by distinguished visiting
speakers, concerts, short plays, "movies," and programs in observ-
ance of days of national importance.

The Complete Development Program at Huntington
The School believes in the complete development of the
individual boy and furnishes many opportunities for a boy to dis-
cover and develop his latent powers. For this reason, there has
been developed, under competent leadership, an extra-curricular

program offering opportunities for supervised play, athletics,
musical and other club activities.

Naturally, in a college preparatory school, scholarship must
occupy the first place in the efforts of the teachmg staff; but it is
unquestionable that a boy v^^ho graduates w^ith an appreciation of
values as they should exist in a normal, healthy, and active life is
more likely to succeed than one deprived of such opportunities for
development.

Parent-Teacher Co-operation

Successful preparation for college demands the co-operation
of the boy, his parents, his teachers, and the college Director of
Admission. The Headmaster and teachers are available by appoint-
ment to discuss problems that may arise. Parent-teacher meetings
are held at regular intervals; these meetings enable parents to meet
all their son's teachers at one time.

The School, on its part, requests the co-operation of the
parents. They should make sure that the student spends sufficient
time on home study, they should make sure that he reports to
school according to his program and avoids being tardy, they
should keep his absences to a minimum by making dental and other
appointments outside of school hours.

In cases where parents are obviously out of sympathy with
the aims and purposes of the School, it is necessary that they with-
draw their boys from school.

Accreditation

Huntington is recognized by all the leading colleges. It is a
member of the New England Association of Colleges and Second-
ary Schools and of the Private School Association.

It has full certification privileges as granted by the New
England College Admissions Board. It also has a Cum Laude
Charter.

Geographical Distribution of Students
Huntington is primarily a day school and because of this most
of the boys in the School come from towns and cities within com-

muting distance. Because of the ease ^vith which the School is
reached by automobile, train, and trolley, each year finds boys
enrolled from not less than fifty towns within a forty mile radius
of Boston. It is true, of course, that a large number of our student
group live within the confines of Greater Boston. Such towns as
Arlington, Brookline, Cambridge, Dedham, Lynn, Maiden,
Medford, Medway, Melrose, Milton, Natick, Needham, Newton,
Somerville, Stoughton, Taunton, Waltham, Wellesley, Win-
chester, and Woburn are, however, the homes of many of our boys.
Several boys come to the School from a distance. For such,
satisfactory living conditions are arranged, usually in private
families.

Faculty

It is essential in a good preparatory school that the faculty
be very carefully chosen. This is the case in The Huntington
School, where the members of the faculty contribute to the success
of the students because of the following characteristics:

(a) they are graduates of the leading colleges and universities;
(t) all have had long experience in college preparatory work;

(d) they understand the problems boys must face and have
demonstrated their ability to work with boys;

(e) all have served w^ith the School for many years, take a
pride in the School, and interest themselves personally
in its aims for the success of the students.

(J) they are all professional teachers making education their
life work.

f^' ^iiiirrtf

AWAY TO A GOOD START

THE ALUMNI ROOM

Admission Rci^uinmcnts

Parents or guardians who wish to enter their boys in
Huntington should complete the application blank which w^ill be
forwarded on request. A registration fee of five dollars must
accompany this application. This fee is in addition to the regular
tuition charge and is not refundable.

Early registration results in advantage to the student since
it enables the officers of the School to discuss every phase of a
student's educational problem before he begins attendance, thereby
saving time throughout the school year. Where possible, parents
should obtain the boy's transcript of record from his former school
and forward it with the application for admission, or request his
high school to mail it to Huntington.

When the School has received the applicant's school record
and character credentials, the student and his parent or guardian
are requested to call for a personal interview in order that the
boy's whole educational problem may be discussed in detail. It
is expected that no boy will apply for admission whose conduct
in other schools has been discreditable.

Boys are accepted for admission to all grades from the ninth
through the twelfth. Special programs can be arranged for high
school graduates which will meet their individual needs.

References

Applicants for admission to The Huntington School must
furnish the names of tw^o persons, not relatives, who are able to
vouch for the character and ability of the student and the financial
responsibility of the parent.

The School IS always pleased to refer those who inquire to
parents, alumni, or educators, w^ho are thoroughly familiar with
the work of the School. Names and addresses will be furnished
upon request.

Most of our students come to us through the recommendations
of former students, their parents, and college deans.

Entrance Examinations

Since Huntington pays particular attention to each individ-
ual boy, formal entrance examinations are not generally prescribed.
On rare occasions examinations may be necessary as a guide in
arranging a student's program. However, aptitude or achievement
tests are generally required of all students at certain intervals.
Most Huntington students are admitted without examination
because of previous satisfactory records.

METEOROLOGY CLUB

Graduation Requirements

Students m The Huntington School must meet definite
requirements with regard to duration of attendance, scholastic
record, and program of studies before a diploma will be awarded.

The Huntington Diploma
To receive the Huntington diploma, students must have earned
fifteen units in subjects that are acceptable for college entrance.
The pattern of these subjects may vary in content according to the
type of college chosen and the professional goal of the student. A
unit is ordinarily the amount of work covered in a single subject
taken four or five times a week throughout the school year, or the
equivalent thereof, except that four years of English are counted
as three units. The student must complete in The Huntington
School one full and continuous year of work embracing four to five
units. Huntington Summer School credits are acceptable units
towards the diploma.

Advanced Credit

Students from accredited high schools and other preparatory
schools may receive credit towards the diploma for w^ork that has
been satisfactorily completed. How^ever, such credit is not awarded
automatically but is based on the general quality of past perform-
ance and the needs of the student w^ith respect to his educational
goal. For instance, a student v^ho has earned a low passing grade
in French I and who is apparently eligible for French II may be
requested to repeat the course before proceeding with the advanced
course.

Promotion at Huntington is entirely by subjects; hence the
School IS in an admirable position to help students who cannot
meet or do not wish, to meet graduation requirements, but merely
require certain additional units, along v^ith those earned else-
where, to meet the entrance conditions of their chosen college.

Courses of Instruction

The following subjects are customarily offered by The Hunt-
ington School:

Languages Physical Sciences

English, I, II, III, IV Biology

French I, II, III Chemistry

German I, II, III Physics

Latin I, II, III, IV Social Sciences

Spanish I, II United States History

Mathematics English History

Algebra I, II European History

Plane Geometry Economics

Solid Geometry Civics

Trigonometry Mechanical Drawing I, II

Descriptions of these courses are to be found on pages 32-35.

Course for High School Graduates

Huntington offers a one-year course which has proved of great
advantage to many boys, particularly to certain high school gradu-
ates who fall into one or more of the following groups:

(a) boys who need an additional year of preparation before proceeding
to college because the pattern of their credits does not meet the
demands of their chosen college;

(h) boys who need to strengthen their foundation before entering college;

(i) boys who are eligible for college entrance, but rather young or imma-
ture to enter immediately, and who would distinctly benefit by addi-
tional study devoted to review or new subjects.

Admission to College

There are four principal methods by which a student may
enter college. These are:

(1) By Diploma. Many colleges will admit students who
hold the diploma of The Huntington School.

(2) By Ccrti^caU. In this instance students whose average
grade is B may be admitted to certain colleges without
examination.

(3) By Certificate and Examination. Under this plan students
who do not have a B average are required to take certain
examinations to prove their efficiency. All colleges
admitting students by certificate accept certification of
The Huntington School.

(4) By Examination. A few colleges, notably Harvard, Yale,
and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology, require
examinations of all candidates. This School provides
excellent preparation for the entrance examinations of
all colleges and for the examinations of the College
Entrance Examination Board.

At the present time, the regular College Board examinations
are suspended, and only the Aptitude and certain Achievement
tests are being given. Future procedure is uncertain. One thing,
however, remains: With respect to college entrance, much impor-
tance w^ill be attached to the student's school record and his head-
master's recommendation.

While Huntington does all it can to prepare a boy to enter a
particular college, it does not guarantee entrance to that college.
Every student should bear in mind that his chances of entering the
college that he and his parents choose is in direct proportion to
the scholastic record he makes.

School Policies

■i

Textbooks and Course Content

All textbooks and ott r material used as teaching aids are
carefully selected and arranged to furnish the best possible prepara-
tion for college entrance and to be of maximum value to the individual
students. Boys who understand this material should be v^ell
prepared to attain a very creditable record and will profit educa'
tionally.

Hours of Attendance

The School is in session five days each week. Attendance
on Saturday mornings may be required of students who need
supplementary instruction, who are behind in their work, or
who are called back for disciplinary reasons.

The daily hours of attendance for boys in the School are from
9 A.M. until 2.15 p.m. Recreational and extra-curricular activities
are held after 2.15. The schedule is as follows:

9.00— 9.15 Assembly

9.15 — 12.15 Recitations

12.15—12.45 Lunch

12.45 — 2.15 Recitations

At Huntington it is the belief that habits of promptness and
regularity formed in the secondary school years will tend toward
dependability m college and later life. Close check is kept on
tardiness and absences. A note from the parents is required to
explain all absences.

Examinations
Examinations and tests are given at intervals throughout the
school year at the discretion of the instructors. Major examinations
are held at the close of each semester. Boys who fail in examina-
tions must make up the deficiency v^ithin a prescribed time or
revert to a low^er Form in the subjects in w^hich they failed.

Marking System

The following is the marking system used by the School:

A 90% to 100%

B 80% to 90%

C 70% to 80%

D 60% to 70% (unsatisfactory)

F Failure

Inc. Incomplete

A is a mark of high distinction and is given to a student whose
work approaches perfection, or it may be considered as a grade
representing approximately the best that may be expected of a
student.

B is given for w^ork plainly above the average. Students who
are to succeed in the best colleges should be able to attain this
grade consistently.

C is given for average work. The standards of the School are
such that students obtaining some C grades with a majority of B
grades or better may expect to succeed m many colleges and will
be recommended for entrance to many institutions not requiring
B grades for certification.

D is given throughout the year for work between passing and
absolute failure. It is usually given to inform the student that by
increased effort he may enter the C group. It is not given as a
final grade, nor does it count towards the diploma credits.

F indicates failure and requires repeating the subject.

Inc., meaning Incomplete, is given for work which may be
graded later as a result of make-up work or examination.

Reports
Reports of the boys' work are sent home frequently. Work
missed for any logical reason is marked "incomplete" until made
up, when the grade obtained in making up the work is substituted.
Parents are invited to visit the School to discuss report cards with
the Headmaster and teachers. At certain intervals throughout the
school year parent-teacher meetings are held. Parents are urged to
attend these meetings even in those cases where report cards
appear satisfactory.

Parental Responsibility

The co-operation of all parents in the enforcement of policies
is requested. Each boy is expected to be punctual in his attendance
at every school exercise. The dismissal of a student before the
close of the school day interferes seriously with the school routine
and with the student's advancement. Only in case of unusual
urgency should such requests be made. Outside appointments
should be made at a time when they do not interfere with the
school w^ork.

Absence from school should be reduced to a minimum.

The School does not seek to enroll students who require
severe restrictions. The right is reserved by the School to dismiss
any boy whose conduct, influence, industry, or progress is unsatis-
factory in the judgment of the Headmaster.

Special Study Periods
The School reserves the right to detain students after regular
school hours, or on Saturdays, for disciplinary reasons, for tardi-
ness, or to make up arrears of w^ork.

Lunch Room
A large lunch room is available in the building, where a satis-
factory lunch may be obtained at moderate cost. There are also
many restaurants in close proximity to the School.

Honors and Awards

Scholarship medals are awarded at the Commencement
Exercises to the student in each Form who maintains the highest
rank during the school year.

The Albert Walter Swenson Memorial Medal

Established in 1929 by Mrs. Swenson in memory of her husband. Mr.
Swenson for nine years served the School faithfully as Head of the Modern
Language Department and for two and a half years as Associate Headmaster.
Awarded for excellence in French III.

The Class of 1928 Medal
Established in 1928 by the graduating class of that year. Awarded at
Commencement to the member of the Senior Class who excels in English.

The Richard John Carroll Memorial Medal

Established in 1928 by the parents of Richard John Carroll, a graduate of
the School in 1927 and president of his class. Awarded at Commencement to
the student in the Junior Class who excels in English Composition.

The Arthur Stanton Carleton Memorial Medal

Established by the parents of Arthur Stanton Carleton in 1930, the year in
which Arthur would have graduated from The Huntington School had he lived.
Aw^arded each year to the member of the Intermediate School w^hose play,
spirit, and character have best maintained the traditions of the School.

The Albert Walter Swenson Public Speaking Medal

Established in 1929 by friends of Mr. Swenson from the student body and
alumni of the School. Awarded to the winner of the Public Speaking Contest.

Rensselaer Medal

Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute awards a medal to that Huntington boy
who obtains the highest record in the fields of Science and Mathematics.

Faculty Awards

In addition to the above prizes, the Faculty offers prizes to
the high ranking student in most Junior and Senior subjects.

Cum Laude Society

The Huntington Chapter of the Cum Laude Society was established in
1928. This is a national honorary society which in preparatory schools corre-
sponds to the Phi Beta Kappa Society in colleges. Each chapter may elect to
membership teachers of the school who are members of the Phi Beta Kappa
Society, or any similar honorary society approved by the Board of Regents.

Extra-Curricular Activities

Clubs
The School sponsors several extra-curricular activities. These
vary somevs^hat from year to year, depending upon the desires of the
student body. Generally, v^e have a Public Speaking Group, a
Literary Club, a Chess Club, a Current Events Club, a French
Club, a Science Club, a Glee Club and Orchestra. A group of
boys form the Record Staff and publish a school paper called Tk
Huntinzton Record.

Physical Education

While seeking the bodily development of the student through
exercises suitable to his physique and interests, w^e at Huntington
are not concerned exclusively w^ith bodily development but also
with general development. We believe that the byproducts of
games and sports are of great importance. For this reason the
various squads are under the direction of men who because of their
character and leadership provide valuable character training.

Play IS just as much an essential part of any school program
as study, provided it is properly supervised. A w^ell'balanced
program of physical education invariably does much to increase
efficiency in the classroom. All boys are urged to take advantage
of the opportunities available for athletic activity. The School
has exceptionally well-equipped facilities for athletics.

Sports

Many diflFerent sports are offered during the school year.
These are generally as follows:

Fall Sports — Football, Tennis, Swimming
Winter Sports — Track, Swimming, Skiing, Basketball
Spring Sports — ■ Baseball, Tennis

While the School hopes to carry out a complete sports pro-
gram. It IS possible that, because of difficulties caused by the war,
the program may be somew^hat curtailed.

Financial Information

Tuition
Fees

Registration
Fee

Single
Cours

Laboratory
Fees

Graduation
Fee

Books anJl
Su|7plies

Meiical
Attention

Stidcnts'
Tickets

Charges for
Damages

The tuition rate for a student enrolled in a regular schedule (four
or five subjects) is $450, payable as follows:

Two'fifths upon entrance;
Two-fifths on December 1 ;
One-fifth on February 1 .

Parents may occasionally arrange to make tuition payments on some
other basis. Those who w^ish to depart from the customary plan
should consult the Headmaster. HoAvever, it is to be pointed out
that a student cannot be enrolled until a tuition payment has been
made.

A registration fee of $5 is due from all new students when a place
IS reserved. This fee is not refundable, even when the application
IS rejected.

The flexible schedule at Huntington permits certain students to
pursue individual subjects to a maximum of three subjects. The
rate is $125 per subject.

Students taking Physics or Chemistry are required to pay a labor'
atory fee of $10.

The graduation fee is $10. All financial obligations to the School
must be met before a student can be awarded a diploma or receive
credit for work completed.

All students purchase their ow^n books and supplies. These may
be purchased from the Northeastern University Bookstore, which
IS situated in a near-by building. Parents who wish their boys to
open a charge account at the bookstore should make the request in
a letter addressed to the Headmaster.

The School will not assume responsibility for injuries received or
for expense incurred because of medical attention in connection
with participation in athletics.

Parents are advised that for a small fee their boys may be insured
against such injuries and also any injuries arising from travel to and
from School.

Students who live in a suburban town can secure railroad tickets
at greatly reduced rates by applying at the office of the railroad.
Students of the School are permitted to ride on the Boston Elevated
on payment of one-half fare.

Students who damage apparatus in the laboratories or who will-
fully destroy school property will be responsible for the replace-
ment of such damaged articles or for the cost of replacing where
this is imdertaken by the School.

^ff^*l>M^HHH

WARMING UP

THE WINNER

Refunds The School assumes the obligation of carrying the student through'

out the year. Instruction and accommodations are provided on a
yearly basis. Therefore, no refunds are granted except in cases
where students are compelled to withdraw because of personal
illness. In such cases a medical certificate must accompany the
application for refund.

Boys who withdraw from school to enter military service will be
charged on a pro-nita basis. Here, too, appropriate documentary
evidence is necessary.

Sclwlarshi-p Huntington has a small Scholarship Fund designed to furnish
Fund financial assistance to those who, v^^ithout such assistance, would

be denied the advantages of the School. At present scholarships
are available only to a limited degree. In all cases awards are based
on (1) character, (2) ability, (3) need. All three items must be
present before an application for scholarship will be considered.

SWIMMING INSTRUCTION

Huntington Summer School

Coeducational

Each year, the School conducts a Summer Session beginning
about the first of July and ending about the first of September.

The Huntington Summer School was established in 1912
and since that time has prepared a large number of students for
entrance to the New England colleges and other colleges outside
this area.

The aim of the School is to provide classroom instruction for
those who are conditioned in grammar school, high school or
college entrance subjects; for those who wish to complete a four-
year high school course in two years and three summer sessions;
and for those who wish to make special preparation for college
entrance examinations given in the fall.

The teaching force is made up of the men of the regular school
faculty.

All classes are small. The program of work is so arranged
that a year's work in each subject is completed during the Summer
Session. Because day school standards are maintained, students
who elect work which they have not before attempted usually
pursue only one or two courses. Those who are reviewing are
limited to the amount of work that they can do well.

Charges

The rate of tuition in the Summer School is $50 per subject.

Tuition is not refunded because of withdrawal or change of
schedule. A laboratory fee of ten dollars is charged all students
taking either Chemistry or Physics. These fees are payable on
August 1.

Each student pays a registration fee of five dollars in addition
to the tuition. Fees are not refunded in case of withdraw^al. All
fees are in addition to the regular tuition charge.

Three-fifths of the tuition is due upon entrance, plus the reg-
istration fee. The balance, including laboratory fees, is due on
August 1 .

A special circular of this School will be sent upon request.

Svccial Events Calendar

1944-1945

1 . President Carl S. Ell Shows Colored Movies .... October 27

2. Miss Virginia Drew Interprets Students' Writing November 3

3. Mr. Pitt Parker, Cartoonist, Entertains November 10

4. Foreign Foods Club Visits Chinese Restaurant . November 17

5. Dr. Barber, Lecturer on Labrador December 1

6. Mr. Hinds, Dramatic Sketches December 8

7. The Foreign Foods Club Visits The l^iU,

Egyptian Restaurant December 19

8. Mr. Visocchi and Miss Spaulding Present

Musical Entertainment January 12

9. Mr. Edward Payne, Creator of "Billy, the Boy Artist,"

Demonstrates the Art of Cartooning January 19

10. Huntington is Represented at the

"New England Junior Town Meeting of the Air' 'January 20

11. Mr. William Wallace Mystifies February 16

12. Huntington Participates in Winter Carnival

at Cushing Academy February 17

1 3 . Civics Group Attends Hearing at State House . . . February 2 1

14. Huntington Dramatic Club Production March 9

15. Huntington Orchestra Presentation March 9

16. Mr. Elliott James, Liquid Air Demonstrator April 17

17. Prize Speaking Contest April 27

18. Huntington Senior Class Dance May 4

19. Annual Spellmg Bee May 1 1

20. Commencement June 8

TWO POINTS

Dcscripion oj Courses

ENGLISH

English I: Fundamentals of grammar -with drill in punctuation, spelling, and
sentence structure. Special emphasis upon the development of reading of
modern and classical literature at levels that may be appreciated by first year
pupils. Oral and written compositions, including letter w^riting.

English II: Functional grammar, paragraph development, planning and outlining
of oral and written compositions. Vocabulary building and testing. Repre-
sentative works of several types of literature are read, w^ith emphasis upon the
development of good taste in reading. The theory and practice of debating and
group discussion.

English III: Study of rhetoric and composition with attention to paragraph develop-
ment and sentence structure. Precis writing and paraphrasing. Vocabulary
building. Study of style and literary types from a wide selection of modern and
classical literature, including study of one play by Shakespeare. Some attention
given to poetry. Creative writing.

English IV: Training and preparation for college entrance examinations in English
composition. Planning and outlining for creative writing. A detailed study of
all the main types of literature. Practice in critical reading of modern and
classical literature. The drama is emphasized with plays of Shakespeare, Ibsen,
Galsworthy, and contemporary dramatists being read. Special attention is
given to the novel as a literary form.

LATIN

Latin I: The aim of the Latin I course is to develop the ability to comprehend
and translate Latin sentences of simple grammatical construction. Emphasis is
placed on accumulation of vocabulary and recognition of roots common to Latin
and English.

Latin II: The course in Latin II is designed to speed up the rate of comprehension
and translation, especially of sentences involving infinitive, participial, or sub-
junctive constructions. The materials selected for reading content are graded
for the entire year in respect to their degree of difficulty. Caesar's Gallic Wars
are read in the second semester.

Latin III: Selections from the orations, letters, and philosophical works of Cicero,
as well as selections from Livy, Pliny the Younger, and Sallust provide the
reading content of Latin III. The objective is the accomplishment of reading
facility and power of comprehension, with increasing emphasis on appreciation
of the prose style.

Latin IV: An appreciation of the literary merits of the Latin poets is developed
through reading selections from the poems of Vergil, Ovid, Horace, Catullus,
Tibullus, and Propertius. One semester is given to the study of Vergil's Aeneid.

FRENCH

French I: Study of the elementary principles of grammar. Practice in pronuncia-
tion and in easy conversation, including some dictation. Short written themes

and reading of French stories ranging from the simple to those of moderate
difficulty. Introduction to the study of irregular verbs and common idioms.

French II: Complete review and continuation of the study of basic grammar and
of the most common irregular verbs. Drill on vocabulary and the most fre-
quently used idioms. Written composition and reading of selections of increas-
ing difficulty. Simple conversational French and dictation exercises. Attention
given to preparation for examinations required for entrance to college.

French III: Rapid survey of the fundamentals of grammar and stress on the writing
of connected compositions involving the speech and idiomatic usage of everyday
life. Review^ of irregular verbs and common idioms. Development of an ade-
quate vocabulary based on word frequency. Drill to attain facility in oral com-
prehension and expression. Readings from French classics and modern works
of moderate difficulty. Comprehension exercises on selections of greater diffi-
culty. Dictation and the writing of original themes. Special instruction directed
towards preparation for entrance requirements to colleges.

GERMAN

German I: An elementary course designed to acquaint the beginner with the
rudiments of grammar as well as to give him training in pronunciation and easy
German conversation. Drill exercises for the learning of vocabulary and word
inflection. Reading of easy German stories and poems.

German II: Continual drill in grammar and syntax. Exercises in writing German
from texts and from dictation. Composition work involving common everyday
idioms. Reading of classical and modern poetry and prose. Some preparation
given for entrance examinations to college.

SPANISH

Spanish I: The work of the first year is so planned that it serves as a complete unit
in fundamentals for the student v\^ho wishes to continue the language independ-
ently by travel or reading. Correct pronunciation, a know^ledge of the gram-
matical structure of the language, and an ability to read and write within the
limits of a practical vocabulary are the goals of the course. Standard elementary
readers are used m connection w^ith a grammar text such as Hills and Ford,
"First Spanish Course."

S-panish II; After a rapid review of the work covered in Spanish I, the second year
IS devoted to the enlargement of vocabulary, including common idioms, the
increase of skill and speed in translation, w^ith special emphasis upon sight
translation and free composition. The course prepares for the successful further
study of Spanish in college.

SOCIAL STUDIES

United States History: A comprehensive course, intended to give boys as complete
an understanding as possible of our history. Problems of government, foreign
policies, finances and currency, tariff, business, labor, and social reform are
stressed. Map study is included.

EngUsh History: This course is designed especially for first and second year
students. An effort is made to teach boys how to study history. Development
of national unity, origin of indictment and trial jury, supremacy of Parliament,,
foreign policies, social and political reform are particularly emphasized.

Euro-pcan History: Development of the leading powers since the begirming of the
seventeenth century is studied closely. The course forms a basis to an under-
standing of present'day problems. Map study is included.

Civics: The course aims at making the pupil aware of the privileges, duties and
responsibilities embodied in citizenship. The functions of government are dis-
cussed in light of the present-day problems. The pupil is encouraged to read
and discuss current new^s and comments as a means of formulating an intelligent
opinion of his own.

Economics: A careful study is made of the origin and development of our industrial
system, and an analysis into its component parts, together with the economic
phenomena accompanying them. It is intended to make economics of practical
value in everyday life.

During the second semester the course embraces the reform and improve-
ment of our industrial system; taxation, the tariff, international trade, trans-
portation, labor and capital, public ownership, wages and profits, and other
current economic problems are treated.

MATHEMATICS

Algebra I: Fundamental laws and operations, linear equations, special products,
factoring, fractions and fractional equations, simultaneous equations, radicals
and exponents, graphs, formulas, functional relations, verbal problems.

Algchra II: Review of topics in Algebra I; quadratic equations, simultaneous
equations involving quadratics, arithmetic and geometric series, binomial
theorems, logarithms, trigonometric solution of right triangles, graphs, special
emphasis on verbal problems.

Plane Geometry: The standard theorems of the five books of Plane Geometry with
special emphasis on original theorems and numerical problems.

Solid Geometry: The standard theorems of the four books of Solid Geometry, with
special emphasis on numerical problems, locus, and original theorems.

Trigonometry: Logarithms, solution of right and oblique triangles, the general
angle and relations between its functions, identities, trigonometric equations,
radian measure, navigation problems.

SCIENCE

Physics: The war has made this subject one of the most necessary of all the pre-
requisites for the armed services. The School endeavors to give its students a
thorough grounding in the fundamentals of this science and to prepare them for
further training in this field, if the opportunity arises. Scientific reasoning is
stressed throughout the course, as it is believed that this is the heart and core,
not only of success in school, but of success in life itself. The course includes
lectures, discussions, laboratory experiments and problems, designed to meet
the requirements of our best colleges.

Chemistry: This is one of our most rapidly expanding sciences. We find here a
subject -which challenges the interest of young people in general, as they stand
upon life's threshold. A spirit of exploration and discovery is fostered here,
which has led many m the past to continue chemistry as a life work. A funda-
mental aim is the development of a scientific logical organization of thinking
processes, in the belief that here we have the key to a successful life. A well-
rounded course of lectures, discussions and laboratory experiments fill the
requirements for admission to any college.

DRAWING

Mcchamcal Drawing, First Year: Correct use of instruments, geometrical construc-
tions, orthographic projection, cross sections and isometric drawings. Lettering
is stressed. Neatness and accuracy are held as ideals.

Second Year: Continuation of above. Intersections, developments, working
drawings and inking. Threads and assembly drawings.

SKI COAe.H SUPERVISES WAXING

'iVAuHAM,

OCT. \m

NORTHEASTERN UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES DUPL

3 9358 01114035 4

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Texts

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "[Course catalog]"

See other formats